Wireless Access Gateway Card Faults

Trap Enables Group

Packet Bus Traps Group


Trap Enables Group

NAC Reset


NAC Reset

MIB Object:	wgwTrapEnaUiRest

Description:	Enables or disables reporting of NAC Reset by user interface command traps.

Settings:	Disable, enableTrap, disableAll, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	Disable


Packet Bus Traps Group

Packet Bus Lost Trap

Packet Bus Restored Trap


Packet Bus Lost Trap

MIB Object:	wgwTrapEnaPbLost

Description:	Reports an event when the packet bus clock has been lost.

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Packet Bus Restored Trap

MIB Object:	wgwTrapEnaPbRest

Description:	Reports an event when the packet bus clock has been restored.

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Chassis Inventory

In order to provide a mechanism for collecting data about the chassis, Total Control Manager/SNMP provides an Inventory feature with the following options.

Multiple Chassis Inventory

View Report

Save to disk

Print Report

Copy Report(export to other application via Clipboard)

Related Topics

Launching the Inventory Feature

Type of Information in Inventory


Type of Information in Inventory

The following MIBII objects may be retrieved from any SNMP device.

Object	Example
System Description	U.S. Robotics 17-Slot Chassis
Vendor's Identification Object ID	1.3.6.1.4.1.429.2.2
IP Address	192.77.203.94
In addition to the information above, the following objects may be obtained from every NAC/NIC present in the chassis.

Object	Example
Description	USR Dual V.32 Bis Modem NAC
Hardware Version	1.0
Serial Number	30073609
Product Code	00021000
Software Version	2.2.0


Launching the Inventory Feature

To launch the feature, select Inventory from the Configuration menu.  The Device List window appears, based on the list of IP addresses for the chassis configurations that have been saved for this installation of Total Control Manager/SNMP.

NOTE:  Only the IP address of the currently-viewed chassis will have a checkmark after it.  If you want your inventory report to include information related to other chassis, click to place a checkmark by those chassis IP addresses as well.


Customizing the Device List

By default, all of the chassis IP addresses will be included in the inventory.  Customize the number of devices to be queried by clicking on the checkmarked box corresponding to any chassis whose inventory information you do not want to retrieve.  The checkmark will disappear.  Then click on OK to start the inventory process.  The Inventory window appears.


Report View

When you click on the Report button in the Device Inventory window, a query is conducted of the selected device(s) to produce the inventory report.  For chassis devices, the report has information for every slot containing a NAC/NIC.   The slot number, description, hardware revision, serial number, product code, and software revision are reported for every slot.


Save to Disk

The Save button saves the currently displayed report to a text file.  The standard File "Save As" dialog box prompts you for the file name.


Print Report

The Print button prints the currently displayed report.  Printing may be performed using any printer that is supported in Windows.   The report is printed to the default printer set up in the Windows Print Manager.


Export to Other Application Report via Clipboard

The Copy button transfers the currently displayed report to the Windows Clipboard.  The Windows Clipboard allows data to be transferred from one program to another.  Many programs that deal with documents or other data include an Edit menu with a Paste option.  When you select Paste from the Edit menu, the program transfers the report from the Clipboard to the currently active program.


Exit Inventory Window

Exit the Inventory window.


Inventory Help

Display a Help window with information on the Inventory feature.


Open File

Opens an existing chassis configuration (*.whb) file from the directory you select and places it in a new window.


Save File

Saves the current chassis configuration as a chassis configuration file with a *.whb filename extension.


Toolbar Options

The Total Control Manager/SNMP Toolbar contains icons for

•	New Device

•	Open Device

•	Save Device

•	View Other Side

•	Configuration

•	Commands

•	Faults

•	Software Download

•	Performance

•	Cascade Windows

•	Title Windows.


File Management Commands

File management commands refer to options that control the chassis definition, or how the Total Control Manager software communicates with the chassis.  These options can be selected from the File Menu or from the Toolbar.

Related Topics:

Close

Delete Device

Exit

New Device

Modify Device

Open Device

Save Device

Save/Restore Configuration


Non-Native Card Support

Non-U.S. Robotics devices, such as the Cisco AS51, may reside in the chassis.  However, the NMC will not recognize the card because it does not communicate over the management bus.  This being the case, Total Control Manager/SNMP is unable to manage or to associate external management applications with such devices.

With release 4.1 of the Total Control Manager/SNMP software, users who have chassis containing such devices may identify these devices and associate management applications within the TCM interface.  By making the identity of the device known and associating a management application, TCM will be able to invoke the external management application when the card is selected from the Device Display on the TCM Console window and Programmed Settings is selected from the Configure menu on the TCM Menu bar.

To Identify a Non-Native Device for TCM

1	Select the device from the Device Display on the TCM Console window.

NOTE:  Select only one device at a time from the Device Display on the TCM Console window, even if you wish to identify several similar devices.  Card identities can only be modified one at a time.

2	Select Modify from the File menu on the TCM Menu bar.  If a known device was selected, an audible beep will sound, indicating no further action need be taken.  The Device Identification dialog box appears.

3	Enter the appropriate information to identify the non-native device.

4	Click OK.  If you made any changes, you will be prompted to save the chassis view.  When you do so, the Device Identification window will close and any changes made will take effect.

When you select one of the Configuration, Faults, Performance, or Actions buttons on the Card Type window, another window, Command Line, appears.


Device Identification Window

This window is used to identify non-U.S. Robotics devices in the chassis and associate management applications within the TCM interface.  By making the identity of the device known and associating a management application, TCM will be able to invoke the external management application when the card is selected from the Device Display on the TCM Console window and Programmed Settings is selected from the Configure menu on the TCM Menu bar.

Slot#

Card Name (drop-down box)

Configuration (button)

Faults (button)

Performance (button)

Actions (button)

OK (button)

Cancel (button)

Help (button)


Slot#

Identifies the slot number in the chassis where the card being identified resides.


Card Name (drop-down box)

Contains the names of all non-native devices that can be managed through the Total Control Manager/SNMP.  Select one of the device names from this drop-down box.

NOTES:

The names provided in the Card Name drop-down box invoke templates for the Configuration, Faults, Actions, and Performance buttons on this window.  When a name is selected, the corresponding known application launch command will be used as default.

The default card type is “Unknown.”  By selecting the Unknown card type, any modification made to the identification of the card will be deleted.


Configuration (button)

If this function is enabled for the card type that was selected in the Card Type drop-down box, you can change the external management application’s command line when you click on this button.  When the card is selected from the Device Display on the TCM Console window and the configuration function is selected from the TCM menus or Toolbar, the external management application is invoked, per this command line.


Faults (button)

If this function is enabled for the card type that was selected in the Card Type drop-down box, you can change the external management application’s command line when you click on this button.  When the card is selected from the Device Display on the TCM Console window and the fault function is selected from the TCM menus or Toolbar, the external management application is invoked, per this command line.


Performance (button)

If this function is enabled for the card type that was selected in the Card Type drop-down box, you can change the external management application’s command line when you click on this button.  When the card is selected from the Device Display on the TCM Console window and the performance function is selected from the TCM menus or Toolbar, the external management application is invoked, per this command line.


Actions (button)

If this function is enabled for the card type that was selected in the Card Type drop-down box, you can change the external management application’s command line when you click on this button.  When the card is selected from the Device Display on the TCM Console window and the action function is selected from the TCM menus or Toolbar, the external management application is invoked, per this command line.


OK (button)

When you click on this button, you will be prompted to save the chassis view.  When you do so, the Device Identification window will close and any changes made will take effect.


Cancel (button)

When you click on this button, the Device Identification window will close with out saving any of the changes you made.


Help (button)

When you click on this button, a Help topic associated with the Device Identification window appears.


Altering the External Program's Invocation Command Line
Altering the External Program’s Invocation Command Line

1	Select the device from the Device Display on the TCM Console window.

Note:  Select only one device at a time from the Device Display on the TCM Console window, even if you wish to identify several similar devices.  Card identities can only be modified one at a time.

2	Select Modify from the File menu on the TCM Menu bar.  If a known device was selected, an audible beep will sound, indicating no further action need be taken.  The Device Identification dialog box appears.

3	Click on the Configuration, Faults, Performance, or Actions button.  The Command Line window appears.

4	Make whatever edits to the command line parameters are warranted, click  OK.  Any changes made will take effect.  Click Cancel to close this window and disregard any changes made.


Command Line Window

This window is the interface into the external management application used for the non-USR device in the chassis.  The two-column grid allows you to enter values for each parameter in the external application’s invocation command line.  Help is available from the vendor of the application to be launched.


Open Device

The first time you establish a session with a chassis, you must define how the software will communicate with the chassis in the New Device window.  Subsequent sessions can be started by selecting Open from the File Menu, or by clicking on the Open Device icon in the Toolbar.  See New Device for more details on defining communication parameters.


Save Device

The first time you establish a session with a chassis, you define the path the software takes to communicate with the chassis.  To save these parameters, select Save from the File Menu or click on the Save Device icon in the Toolbar.

To save the settings with some alterations or to make multiple copies of the settings, select Save As from the File Menu and rename the chassis configuration.

See New Device  for more details on defining communication parameters.


Delete Device

To delete the definition of the currently viewed chassis from the database, select Delete from the File Menu.  See New Device for more details on defining communication parameters.


Save/Restore Configuration

To save the configuration for all objects in a chassis

1	From the File Menu, select Save Configuration.  The File Save As window appears.

2	Select a DOS path and filename for the configuration file.  The default file extension is .whb.

3	Click OK.  The configuration is saved.

To restore the configuration for all objects in a chassis

1	From the File Menu, select Restore Configuration.  The File Open window appears.

2	Select the DOS path and filename for a previously saved configuration file.

3	Click OK.  The Save Chassis Configuration window appears, showing the status of all slots and the progress of the operation.


Close

To close the Total Control Manager application without a prompt for saving the chassis configuration

From the File Menu, select Close.


Exit

To close the Total Control Manager application, select Exit from the File Menu.


Windows Control Commands

Windows Control commands refer to options that allow an operator to make typical Windows screen arrangement changes when multiple screen elements are present.  The print option ties into the default Windows print parameters.  The Help options display context-sensitive definitions of chassis parameters.  These options can be selected from the File, Windows and Help Menus, as well as from the Toolbar .

Related Topics:

Arrange Icons

Cascade

Help Menu Options

Print Options

Tile


Cascade

To arrange the open windows in a cascaded pattern, select Cascade from the Windows Menu or click on the Cascade icon in the Toolbar.


Tile

To arrange the open windows in a tiled pattern, select Tile from the Windows Menu or click on the Tile icon in the Toolbar.


Arrange Icons

To arrange closed icons along the bottom of the active window, select Arrange from the Windows Menu.


Print Options

Print.  Selected from the File Menu.  Sends the currently viewed screen to the printer. The print option ties into the default Windows print parameters.

Print Setup.  Selected from the File Menu.  Allows you to define your print parameters before sending the currently viewed screen to the printer.  If no parameters are changed, Total Control Manager uses the default Windows printer setup.

Print Preview.  Selected from the File Menu.  Allows you to view the current screen as it will be output from the printer.


Help Menu Options

To display Help for Total Control Manager/SNMP version 5.0, select an option from the Help Menu, or click on the question mark with an arrow icon in the Toolbar, and then on a screen element.  Help for that element is displayed.

Help may also be displayed for Configuration and Performance Statistics parameters by selecting them with the left mouse button and then clicking the right mouse button.


Display Options

The View Menu offers the following options related to the display of the chassis information:

NMS.  Display the NetWare Management System window.

Other Side.  Show the other side of the displayed chassis.  You may also click on the Show Other Side button in the Toolbar.

Select All.  Select all of the objects within the displayed chassis of the same type as the currently selected object.

LED Polling Information.  View the following statistics:  Time of last valid LED poll, First error encountered, and Number of polling errors.

Toolbar.  Toggle the display of the Toolbar off and on.

Status Bar.  Toggle the display of the Status Bar off and on.


Management Options

These options allow an operator to initiate a management action on the chassis as a whole or on the currently selected card(s).  The Show Other Side button toggles between the front/rear view of the Device Display .  The other options display a management window.  These options can be selected from the Configuration, Fault and Performance Menus, as well as from the Toolbar.

Related Topics:

Actions/Commands

Fault Management

Performance

Programmed Settings

Security Options

Software Download


Navigating the Interface - Management Options - Programmed Settings
Programmed Settings

To display the Configuration screen and select from a list of configurable parameters for the currently selected object, select Programmed Settings from the Configuration Menu or click on the Programmed Settings icon in the Toolbar.


Actions/Commands

To display the Total Control Manager Commands window and specify a command to be carried out on the selected card(s), select Actions/Commands from the Configuration Menu or click on the Action icon in the Toolbar.

Modems

Analog NIC

NMC

T1 Actions/Commands

X.25 Actions/Commands

NETServer Actions/Commands


Modem Actions/Commands

Supported Actions/Commands are as follows:

Command Type	Command

Modem Hardware	No Command

Commands 	Remove from Service

(Card Level)	Restore to Service

Hardware Reset

Software Download

Modem Software 	No Command

Commands	Software Reset

(Channel Level)	Store to NVRAM

Restore from Default

Restore from NVRAM

Off Hook

On Hook

Load HW Flow Control Defaults

Load SW Flow Control Defaults

Load MNP10 Cellular Defaults

Load V42 Cellular Mobile Defaults

Load V42 Cellular Fixed Defaults


Analog NIC Actions/Commands

Supported Actions/Commands are as follows:

Command Type	Command

Modem Analog NIC	No Command

Hardware Commands 	Remove from Service

(Card Level)	Restore to Service

Hardware Reset

Software Download

Modem Analog NIC	No Command

Software Commands 	Non-disruptive self-test

(Channel Level)	Busy Out phone line

Non-Busy Out phone line

NOTE:  The Quad Analog/Digital NIC has only one channel, so test results from channels 2-4 are invalid.


NMC Action/Commands
NMC Actions/Commands

Supported Actions/Commands are as follows:

Command Type	Command

NMC Software	No Command

Commands	Save chassis to NVRAM

Restore chassis from Default

Restore chassis from NVRAM

Non-Disruptive Self-Test

Software Reset

Save UI to EEPROM

Restore NMC from Default

Restore NMC from NVRAM


T1 Actions/Commands

Supported Actions/Commands are as follows:

Command Type	Command

T1 Card Hardware 	Hardware No Command

Commands 	Remove from Service

(Card Level)	Restore to Service

Hardware Reset

Software Download

T1 Card Software 	No Command

Commands 	Save to NVRAM

(Card Level)	Restore from NVRAM

Restore from Default

Non-disruptive Self Test

Disruptive Self Test

Software Reset

Reset -> Hi Pri. Timing Src

Force TDM Bus Mastership

T1 Card Software 	No Command

Commands (DS1)	Force Receiver Reframe

T1 Card Software 	No Command

Commands (DS0)	Hard Busyout

Soft Busyout

Restore

Disconnect

Transparent Test


X.25 Actions/Commands

Supported Actions/Commands are as follows:

Command Type	Command

X.25 Hardware 	Hardware No Command

Commands 	Remove from Service

(Card Level)	Restore to Service

Hardware Reset

Software Download

X.25 Software	No Command

Commands	Save to NVRAM

Restore from Defaults

Non-Disruptive Self Test

Disruptive Test

Software Reset

Download Configuration

Upload Configuration


NETServer Actions/Commands

Supported Actions/Commands are as follows:

Command Type	Command

NETServer 	Hardware No Command

Hardware 	Remove from Service

Commands	Restore to Service

(Card Level)	Hardware Reset

Software Download


Fault Management

The Fault Menu offers options to control the software response to system events:

Trap Settings.  Display the Fault section of the Configuration screen to specify a list of exception events and thresholds to determine when SNMP traps for the currently selected card(s) should be sent to the Management Station(s).

Trap Destinations.  Display the Trap Destination Table to specify how SNMP traps generated by objects in the chassis are to be routed.

NOTE:  When determining your trap destination, keep in mind that we recommend against sending traps and accounting information to the same IP address.

Modem Tests.  Initiate a loopback or self test on a modem, or conduct an idle phone line test.

Responder Testing.  Specify that a modem should send or receive a tone to test a T1 DS0 channel, or initiate a 105 or 102 responder test on the specified DS0 channel.


Configuration Window

NOTE:  If you want help related to a specific parameter in the window, place your cursor in the parameter field and press your right mouse button.

This window is used throughout the TCM interface whenever configuration (be it setting Programmed Settings or configuring Faults) is taking place.

Screen Description:

Window Title

Selected Objects

Parameter Group

Spreadsheet

Load From

Get

Set

Print

Copy

View by Row/View by Column

Default

OK

Cancel

Help


Window Title

The title bar at the top of the Configuration window describes the function being performed (Programmed Settings or Fault Management) and the card selected from the Device Display .  For instance, if you select a Modem card from the Device Display , then select Programmed Settings from the Configuration menu, “Modem Programmed Settings” will be the title of the Configuration window.


Selected Objects

Displays the IP address of the selected chassis (NMC), and the slot numbers and channel numbers of the selected devices.  For instance, “192.77.203.65:<S2C2>“ means that channel 2 of the device in slot 2 of a chassis with the address 192.77.203.65 has been selected.  This field is read only.


Parameter Group

This box provides a list of all configurable parameter groups that relate to the selected device and allows you to select a parameter group.  The parameters for the group are displayed in the spreadsheet section described next.


Spreadsheet

Displays configurable parameters in the parameter group selected.  Allows you to view and revise settings for the device(s)/channel(s) selected from the Device Display .

Column heading titles indicate which device/channel is configured with the values displayed in that column.  For instance, if the column header reads ”S2C2,” the configuration values for channel 2 of the device in slot 2 are displayed in the column.

Any spreadsheet cell may be edited.  If a value is read-only (RO), the value is grayed out and editing is not permitted.  If a value is restricted to a particular range or set of options, a drop-down box lists the options available for selection.  Once a value has been revised, it displays in red.

The first column of the spreadsheet box is composed of the parameter names.


Load From Button

Allows you to copy parameter configurations from another device and load them on the currently selected device.  Press this button to display the Load From dialog box.  Enter the IP address, slot number, and channel number of the device with the desired settings.  That device’s settings will be copied to the currently selected device.


Get or Set

Triggers the SNMP Get or Set operation.  The Get operation retrieves the  last-saved values of the current parameter group from the MIB (Management Information Base) and updates the display.  The Set operation writes the displayed values to the device MIB.


Print Button
Print

Allows you to print the displayed parameter group’s configuration values to your default Windows printer.


Copy Button
Copy

Allows you to copy any selected data to the Windows Clipboard so you can import the information into another program.


View by Row and View by Column

Allows you to alter the display of the parameters in the selected parameter group.


Default Button
Default

Allows you to set the value in the selected parameter to the default defined in the MIB for that parameter.


OK Button
OK

When OK is selected, the Configuration window closes.  If any alterations have been made, but no Set command was issued, a dialog box will display asking you if the Set command should be issued before the window is closed.


Cancel Button
Cancel

When Cancel is selected, the Configuration window closes without regard to any alterations made to the parameter values.  Any changes you have made will be lost.


Help Button
Help

When the Help button is selected, help related to the function of the Configuration window is displayed.

If you want help related to a specific parameter on the window, place your cursor in the parameter field and press your right mouse button.


Software Download

Performing a Software Download (SDL) allows you to change or upgrade card specific software on a card-by-card or chassis-wide basis.

The Software Download requires two types of files:  a .NAC file, which is the operational code file for the card(s) you are downloading to, and an .SDL file, which is the software download utility information file.

Related Topics

Installing Software Upgrade Files

Performing a Software Download

Hardware Setup


Installing Software Upgrade Files

When you receive software upgrades for U.S. Robotics Total Control components, follow these instructions to load them on your PC:

1	Insert the installation disk in your disk drive.

2	Make back-up copies of the disk(s) use the DOS DISKCOPY command or the Copy Disk option in Windows File Manager’s Disk Menu to copy the disks.

3	From the Windows Program Manager File Menu, select Run and type the following (substituting the correct disk drive name for drive):

drive:\SETUP

4	Click OK. The Setup utility installs the firmware for the card to the directory C:\NMS\BIN\SDL.

Related Topics

Performing a Software Download

Software Download


Hardware Setup

Regardless of which card you intend to download software to, the PC must be connected to Channel 2 on the NMC NIC.  This may be through a LAN, WAN, or SLIP connection.  U.S. Robotics supplies a DB-25 (male) to RJ45 EIA-232 cable and a 25 pin female to female null modem adpater with every Network Interface Card (NIC) which can be used for this purpose.  Simply connect the cable to the null modem adapter, and attach the adapter to your PC’s COM port.  Attach the RJ45 connector to Channel 2 on the NMC NIC and your connection is complete.  Refer to the  NMC Hardware  Install Guide for more information.

Related Topics

Performing a Software Download


Performing a Software Download

1	To perform software download from within the Total Control Manager software, first launch the application and establish a connection with a chassis.

2	From the Device Display on the TCM console window, select the card(s) to which you want to perform the download.

NOTE:  Once you have entered the Software Download window, you will have the option of selecting or deselecting cards according to their slot number.

3	Select the Software Download option from the Configure Menu or click on the Software Download icon in TCM’s Toolbar.  The Software Download window then appears. This window contains five columns:

The Selection column:  Allows you to select multiple cards of various types to perform downloads on.  A check mark will appear for every selected card.  If you selected a card on the Device Display, the card will have a have check mark in this column when the window is opened.

The Slot # column:  Lists the slots of the chassis by number as well as the NACs (Network Application Cards) that occupy them.

The NAC File column:  Lists the most current .NAC  file version in the C:\NMS\BIN\SDL directory.  If this version is a more recent version of software than is on the NAC itself, it will be shown in red.

The SDL File column:  Lists the most current .SDL utility file version in the C:\NMS\BIN\SDL directory.  If this version is a more recent version of software than was previously used, it will be shown in red.

The Status column:  Lists the status of each software download task on a card by card basis.  Such messages as “In Progress” or “Complete” will appear in this column as the download progresses.

Click here if you have loaded or moved the .NAC and/or .SDL files to a directory other than C:\NMS\BIN\SDL.

4	Click START to begin the download.

NOTE:  If you receive a Device Not Responding error message while trying to perform a software download, the cause may be too much other management traffic to the chassis.  Reduce other operations (including multiple Management Station access) and try the operation again.

During the download, progress messages are displayed in the upper left corner of the Software Download window.  A Success message indicates that the operation is complete.

NOTE:  If you selected more than one card to download to and wish to cancel the operation after it is in progress, you can click on the STOP button in the bottom left of the window.  The SDL operation already in progress cannot be stopped, but the remaining operations will be cancelled and the corresponding check marks will be removed.

Related Topics

Software Download

Installing Software Upgrade Files

Hardware Setup


Navigating the Interface - Management Options - Performance
Performance

To display the Functional Group Monitor Setup window, to choose parameters that can be queried for the currently selected card(s), select Session Monitor from the Performance Menu or click on the Performance icon in the Toolbar.


Security Options

The Security Menu offers the following Security options:

•	Security Server.  Launch the RADIUS Security Server, which can be programmed through the Security Manager to intercept incoming and outgoing calls to conduct a customizable security session.

•	Security Manager.  Launch the Total Control Security Manager application, used to edit the security database.

•	Community Names.  Change the Read-Only and Read-Write SNMP Community Names for the Network Management Card NIC port.  Current values for these parameters may only be viewed from the local NMC user interface or a MIB Browser, as they are write-only SNMP objects.  Changes made here take effect immediately.

•	Authorized Stations.  Add, delete or modify IP addresses, network masks and optional text annotation for management stations that you want to permit to access the chassis.  The list may hold as many as 10 entries.  The default condition for this group is empty, which permits access to any station on the same subnet as the NMC.  All entries must contain non-zero network masks.  Any change made here must be saved to nonvolatile memory by executing the Save to NVRAM command on the NMC in order for the change to remain valid after an NMC reset.


Community Names

Change the Read-Only and Read-Write SNMP Community Names for the Network Management Card NIC port.  Current values for these parameters may only be viewed from the local NMC user interface or a MIB Browser, as they are write-only SNMP objects.  Changes made here take effect immediately.


Authorized Stations

Add, delete, or modify IP addresses, network masks and optional text annotation for management stations that you want to permit to access a hub.

The list may hold up to ten entries.

The default condition for this group is empty. This condition permits access to any station with network connectivity to the NMC.

All entries must contain non-zero network masks.  The network mask (or address mask) masks the corresponding IP address to allow access to the range of stations with IP addresses that fall within the host identification range after the mask is applied.

All changes here are immediate.  However, any change must be saved to nonvolatile memory by executing the Save to NVRAM command on the NMC in order for the change to remain valid after NMC is reset.


Testing

The following kinds of tests can be run with compatible modems:

•	Tone Tests

•	105/102 Responder Tests

•	Loop Back Tests

•	Self Tests

•	Idle Phone Line Tests

Related Topics:

Loop Back/Self Test/Idle Phone Test

Responder Tests

Tone Tests


Tone Tests

The tone test feature allows an operator to use the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) of a modem to test the quality of a T1 DS0 channel.  When the test is initiated, the DS0 is automatically placed in transparent test mode to carry out the test.  The T1 NAC connects individual DS0s to the modem and ignores any signaling on these DS0s.  After the test is complete, the NMC sends a Restore DS0 command to the T1 NAC to take the DS0 out of the transparent state.

Related Topics:

To Receive a Tone Test

To Send a Tone Test

Tone Test Rules


Tone Test Rules

•	Except for a loopback test state, a request for transparent test mode overrides any other DS0 state, including an alarm or any state entered into by command, such as call ignore.

•	A request for tone test disconnects any calls in progress on the DS0.

•	If the span line is configured to respond to a loopback request, and one occurs while there is a tone test in progress, the span line will enter the loopback state.  After the loopback, all DS0s will return to idle.

•	When the DS0 is restored after the tone test is over, an alarm state will be restored and updated, but any DS0 that had been in a connected state or in a state that was entered into by command will be returned to the idle state.


To Send a Tone Test

Note: If you want to cancel the test (before you have clicked Start), click Exit.

1	Select a modem from the Device Display .

2	From the Fault Menu, select Remote Testing, and then select Send a Tone.  The Send Tone window appears.

3	In the Frequency box, select 404, 1004, or 2804 Hz.

4	In the Level (dBm) field, set the amplitude of the test (0 to -20 dBm).

5	Click Start to begin testing, and click Stop to end the test at any time. Test results appear in the Status field.

NOTE:  Do not exit the window without clicking Stop.


To Receive a Tone Test

The following steps detail how to receive a tone over a DS0.

1	Select a modem from the Device Display .

2	From the Fault Menu, select Remote Testing, and then select Receive a Tone.  The Receive Tone window appears.

3	The top of the Receive Tone window shows the slot and channel of the selected modem.

4	The next two boxes show the DS1 and DS0 currently sharing the modem's time slot.

5	The Frequency field shows whether the test is being generated at 404, 1004, or 2804 Hz.

6	The Level (dBm) field shows the amplitude at which the test is being generated, from 0 to -20 dBm.

7	The Polling interval field allows you to set how often the results of the test should be monitored, in seconds.

8	If you want to cancel setting up the test (before you have clicked on the Start button), click on the Exit button .  Click on the Start button to begin testing, and use the Stop button to end the test at any time.

NOTE:  Do not exit the window without clicking on the Stop button.

Test results appear in the Status field.


Responder Tests

102 Responder Test

105 Responder Test

Starting the Responder Test


105 Responder Test

Responder tests are used to evaluate the performance of point-to-point circuits.  Traditionally, 105 Responder testing is associated with T1 trunks.  In the Total Control chassis, the test is performed by the modem.

The 105 Responder test is performed in two directions:  Near to Far and Far to Near.  In accordance with AT&T Compatibility Bulletin No. 106, the test measures the following:

•	Any 2-way loss of signal, measured at 404, 1004 and 2804 Hz in decibels

•	C-Message Noise (in dBrnC, or decibels relative to reference noise with C-message weighting)

•	C-Notched Noise (in dBrnC, or decibels relative to reference noise with C-message weighting)

The 105 Responder test also computes the Signal to Noise ratio, reported in decibels.


105Resp1
105 Responder Test

Responder tests are used to evaluate the performance of point-to-point circuits.  Traditionally, 105 Responder testing is associated with T1 trunks.  In the Total Control chassis, the test is performed by the modem.

The 105 Responder test is performed in two directions:  Near to Far and Far to Near.  In accordance with AT&T Compatibility Bulletin No. 106, the test measures the following:

•	Any 2-way loss of signal, measured at 404, 1004 and 2804 Hz in decibels

•	C-Message Noise (in dBrnC, or decibels relative to reference noise with C-message weighting)

•	C-Notched Noise (in dBrnC, or decibels relative to reference noise with C-message weighting)

The 105 Responder test also computes the Signal to Noise ratio, reported in decibels.


102 Responder Test

The 102 Responder test is a subset of the 105 Responder test.  Of the available tests, it only uses the 1004 Hz tests.


Starting the Responder Test

To launch a 102 or 105 Responder test, select a modem from the Device Display , select Remote Testing from the Fault Menu, then choose Responder Test.  The 102/105 Responder Test window is displayed.

•	Testing with Device in Slot—displays the modem selected.

•	T1 Slot/DS1/DS0—displays the selected T1 channel.

•	Select Test—permits selection of either 102 or 105 Responder test.

•	Test Results—displays test results for both directions.

•	Dial String—permits entry of the responder phone number (for instance, 105 is the number used by the TELCO Central Office to start the 105 responder test).

•	Status—displays the status of the modem.

After specifying parameters, click on the Start button to launch the test.  Click on the Stop button to end the test, and click on Exit to both cancel the test and close the window.


Loop Back/Self Test/Idle Phone Test

Idle Phone Line Test

Loop Back

Self Tests

Starting a Loop Back/Self Test/Idle Phone Line Test


Loop Back

Loop back tests check the operation of the modem's transmitter and receiver.  A test pattern is looped locally or through a remote modem to verify proper operation.  Any errors detected in the data stream are counted and reported.  Once a loop back test is started, it will continue until you explicitly stop it.  Available loop back tests are Local Analog Loop Back, Local Digital Loop Back, Remote Digital Loop Back, V.54 Local Analog Loop Back, and V.54 Remote Digital Loop Back.

NOTE:  The Analog Loop Back tests cannot be performed on the Quad Digital modems, or on the Quad Analog/Digital modems when in digital mode.


Self Tests

The modem has the ability to perform self tests on various parts of its hardware.  These tests are performed on a pass-fail basis.  Once started, these tests run to completion.  Available self tests are Test RAM, Test ROM, Test NVRAM, and a comprehensive self test.


Idle Phone Line Test

When the modem is not connected, it can test to see if the phone line is functioning properly.  If a modem is idle when this test is requested, it goes off hook and tests the phone line for loop current presence and dial tone presence.  The modem returns information as to the condition of the phone line.  If the modem is connected when this test is requested, it returns a result of unable.

NOTE:  This test can only be performed on an analog line.


Starting a Loop Back/Self Test/Idle Phone Line Test

Select a modem from the Device Display , and then select the Modem Tests option from the Fault Menu.  The Modem Loop Back/Self Tests window appears.

The Slot and Channel of the selected modem(s) appear at the top of the window.  Under Tests to Execute, select the test you wish to perform, adjusting the Polling Interval as appropriate for the type of test.  Click on Start to begin the test, and keep in mind that you must click on the Stop button to end a loop back test.  Results and Errors are reported in the fields at the bottom of the window.


DS0 Configuration

DS0 Configuration Options

Fractional T1 Support

Time Slot Assignment


Time Slot Assignment

Allocation of DS0 channels is supported by TCM and the T1 card, making it possible to define the virtual connection from each DS0 to a modem.

The relationship between the TDM Bus and a modem is fixed, based on the modem slot and channel.  The modem does not vary from its predefined time slot assignment.  A specific DS0 may be assigned to a modem and share that time slot, enabling communication.

Configuration is performed by selecting the T1 Card from the Device Display , choosing the Programmed Settings option from the Configuration menu or clicking on the icon, and then selecting the DS0 <-> Modem Configuration Group.  The DS0 <-> Modem Configuration window appears.

As shown in the Legend at the bottom of the DS0 <-> Modem Configuration window, the status of time slots in this interface is represented by color, as follows:

Color	Status
Green	Connected
Orange	Available
Gray	Unavailable
Yellow	Selected
In order to connect a modem to a DS0:

1	Select an available or connected DS0 from either span line (represented in the two boxes at the left of the window) by clicking with the left mouse.

2	Select the modem slot and channel in the box at the right of the window.

3	Click on the Connect button at the bottom of the window. Your connection choice appears in the box in the middle of the window.

CAUTION:  Connecting a modem and DS0 through this screen will disrupt any other previously established connection involving these devices.

4	Click on the Set button at the right of the window to send your configurations to the chassis.

An established connection can be broken by selecting the two devices and clicking on the Disconnect button.  The channel does not return to its original state, but instead is placed in the Unused state.

To delete a change that you have made (if you have not yet clicked on Set to send the change), click on the Undo All button.


DS0 Configuration Options

To set T1 Card parameters, select either a DS1 or the entire card from the Device Display , and then select the Programmed Settings icon or menu option.

Related Topics:

Select DS1

Select DS0


Select DS1

DS1 Trunk Settings—specify that a stuffed byte should be sent to the TELCO for an inactive DS0.  This is done to maintain a sufficient density of 1's in a fractional T1 application.  Possible settings are 0−255; default is 254, or FE (Hex).


Select DS0

DS0 Time Slots—specify the TDM slot number used by the DS0.  Possible settings are 0−64.  A setting of 0 and a configuration state of Unused (see below) indicates a fractional T1 application.  Any other configuration state with a time slot of 0 indicates a disconnected state.

DS0 Configuration Types—specify DS0 connection type.  The only current option is the default, Connect to the TDM Bus.

DS0 Configuration States—specify the state of the DS0:

•	Normal—the typical DS0-TDM Bus connection, and the only one that can be overridden by a Command.

•	Busy Out—equivalent to the Hard Busy Out command.  Implemented as a configuration state so that it may be saved to and restored from NVRAM.

•	Transparent—sets a DS0 channel up so that no robbed bit signaling is performed for call set up and tear down, and data and signaling are kept separate.  Requires modem compatibility.  Implemented as a configuration state so that it may be saved to and restored from NVRAM.

•	Fractional/Unused—disconnects a DS0 from the TDM Bus and sends a stuffed byte pattern to the TELCO.  If a user has purchased a fractional T1 line, all DS0s that are not subscribed to should be placed in this state (see Fractional T1 Support).


Fractional T1 Support

Fractional T1 is a mode of T1 operation that uses only a portion of the 24 DS0s available in a DS1 span line.  At the time a T1 line is ordered, the user subscribes from the TELCO for a specific number of DS0s; this is the number of channels that will be available for use by the Total Control chassis.

To set a DS1 for fractional support from within Total Control Manager, the DS0s that are not needed must be selected from the Device Display  and disabled using the Programmed Settings option.  Changing the state of DS0s to and from fractional mode overrides previously made connections involving the DS0.

1	Select the T1 span line from the Device Display  and choose Programmed Settings.

2	Select the DS0 Configuration States group.  A list of all 24 DS0 channels appears.

3	For each DS0 that is not to be used, select the status Unused State.


Fractional PRI Support

Fractional T1 is a mode of T1 operation that uses only a portion of the timeslots available in a span line.  At the time a PRI line is ordered, the user subscribes from the TELCO for a specific number of timeslots; this is the number of channels that will be available for use by the Total Control chassis.

To set a timeslot for fractional support from within Total Control Manager, the DS0s that are not needed must be selected from the Device Display  and disabled using the Programmed Settings option.  Changing the state of timeslots to and from fractional mode overrides previously made connections involving the timeslot.

1	Select the span line from the Device Display  and choose Programmed Settings.

2	Select the DS0 Configuration States group.  A list of all channels appears.

3	For each DS0 that is not to be used, select the status Unused State.


Total Control Hub Security

Total Control Manager/SNMP uses the RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service)-based authentication client-server protocol to regulate access to Total Control modems.  Security feature supports up to 50,000 users.

No hardware changes are required, but this option does require compatible versions of the NMC, Total Control Manager/SNMP, and modem software.

Security allows you to prevent unauthorized users from making outbound (Dial Out) calls using rack modems, and making inbound (Dial In) connections with these modems.  Both Dial In and Dial Out calls generate events to which the system responds according to preconfigured actions.

Security implements a User Database to store security configurations on a per-user or group basis, and a Security Log to record security-related events.

•	Use the authentication server for USR modems and NETServer

•	Use the authentication server for non-USR products

•	Use a single authentication server for multiple Total Control chassis, as well as multiple non-USR products

•	Use previously created RADIUS database files

Customers who want this feature must pay an extra fee to have this feature enabled.  For more information about obtaining this feature, refer to the Feature Enable topic.

Help is available for this form of security (involving a RADIUS security server) when the Security Manager is open.


Cellular Feature

Modems with cellular support can negotiate for either of two cellular protocols: ETC and MNP10.  These protocols are designed to combat a variety of link establishment and data transfer problems specific to cellular calls.

Customers who want this feature must pay an extra fee to have this feature enabled.  In order to provide flexibility for our systems customers who may have a large installed base of product, the feature can be enabled in one of two ways:

•	The modem may be shipped from the factory with Cellular support permanently enabled (Quad Modem versions 2.0 and higher).

•	The NMC and the Quad Modem Card (versions 2.0 and higher) provide the ability to enable Cellular support on a chassis-wide basis through the NMC.  This eliminates the need to obtain and perform individual feature enables for all of the modems in a network and ensures that if a modem is swapped, the replacement will also support cellular protocols.  When this feature has been enabled, the NMC will inform the modems that they need to support the Cellular protocols any time a modem is installed, reset, restored to service, or has a watchdog timeout.

For more information about obtaining this feature, refer to the Feature Enable topic.


MNP10

MNP10 modifies data transfer techniques for increased reliability over cellular links.  It uses three major strategies to do so:

Aggressive Adaptive Packet Assembly (AAPA) adjusts the data packet size during data transfer in response to line conditions, ensuring the maximum allowable packet size at all times.

Link Management Idle (LMI) is used to monitor line conditions when no data is being sent, and helps guard against lost connections.

Dynamic Transmit Level Adjustment (DTLA) changes the transmit level “on the fly” to adapt to changing line conditions.

MNP10 can also be negotiated for non-cellular calls, but offers no advantage over other protocols for non-cellular calls.

NOTE:  MNP10 must be disabled to originate calls under V.34, V.FC, HST, or V.32 Terbo.


ETC

ETC represents U.S. Robotics’ implementation of the Enhanced Throughput Cellular (ETC) protocol.  ETC allows a modem to recognize calls from other modems using ETC and alter its settings for increased performance when transmitting data across cellular links.

ETC requires that the modems establish V.42 error control.  ETC also requires a V.32 bis, V.32, or V.22-type connection.  ETC does not function under V.34 modulation.

The modem implements ETC whenever it answers a call and receives the ETC calling tone from an originate modem.  The modem must receive the ETC calling tone from the originate modem.  It is the only way for the modem to know that it will be transmitting over a cellular link.  If the modem does not receive the ETC calling tone, the call progresses normally without ETC.

The modem also implements ETC settings for all outgoing calls.  This means that the modem forces a V.32- or V.22-type modulation and V.42 with a reduced packet size, and will not connect using V.34.  It also transmits using de-emphasis and reduced transmit level, even if it is not connecting across a cellular link, which results in reduced throughput or even dropped calls.


If your .NAC or .SDL files are not stored in the default directory:

You can access .NAC or .SDL files not stored in the default directory as follows:

1	Place the cursor in the NAC File or SDL File columns in the same row as the card you wish to perform a download to.

2	Double click the left mouse button.  The Open window appears.

3	Select the directory containing your files and the files you wish to download.

4	Click OK.

Click here to return to the Software Download procedure.


New or Modify Device Window

How to . . .

Define A New Device

Modify A Device

Device Identification

Device Name

Target Host

Device Type

AutoDiscover

SNMP Community Strings

Read Only

Read and Write

Note Pad

Options


Device Name

The first field in the New Device window is Device Name.  For your first entry, the Device Name field defaults to USRDevice1; replace this with any alphanumeric character combination that suits your network naming scheme.  This name will be used to refer to the chassis when you save the device definition.


Target Host

In the Target Host box, type either the specific Internet Protocol (IP) address or the Host Name that will route SNMP management data to and from the hub. This is the address that you have previously assigned to the NMC NIC port you intend to use: either the WAN port (cabled to the management station or connected by remote modem link) or the LAN port (cabled to your LAN).  This IP address is assigned using the NMC Terminal User Interface (see the NMC documentation). It may also be changed with the Community Names option on the Security menu.


Device Type

The Device Type box defaults to WAN Hub.


AutoDiscover

Click the AutoDicovery button to prompt Total Control Manager/SNMP to poll the device identified as the target host and enter a value in the Device Type box.


Read Only

The Read Only field is the password string in the database to grant an operator the ability to view the status of the hub. The default string in the Read Only field is "public".

Note: When changing the SNMP Community String, you must change it in two places:  in the NMC, using the Terminal User Interface, and in the Total Control Manager software. Instructions for the Terminal User interface are contained in the NMC documentation. In Total Control Manager/SNMP, select Modify from the File Menu.


Read and Write

The Read-Write field allows you to set a password string in the database to grant an operator the ability both to view the status of the hub and to set configuration changes. The default string in the Read-Write field is "private". Change this string to match the string you have set previously with the Terminal User Interface at the NMC NIC user interface port.

Note: When changing the SNMP Community String, you must change it in two places:  in the NMC, using the Terminal User Interface, and in the Total Control Manager software. Instructions for the Terminal User interface are contained in the NMC documentation. In Total Control Manager/SNMP, select Modify from the File Menu.


Note Pad

Use the Notepad box for device-specific information that may be useful to an operator.  This information can be viewed and edited with Modify from the File Menu.


Defining A New Device

To open a new device in Total Control Manager/SNMP:

1.	Click on the File menu.

2.	On the File menu, click on New.

3.	In the New dialog box type a host name or an Internet protocol (IP) address in the appropriate field.

4.	Click the AutoDiscover button to request Total Control Manager/SNMP to determine the correct value for the Device Type field.

5.	Click OK.

Total Control Manager/SNMP attempts to open the device. If the device has already been opened and saved, you can open it more quickly using Open on this menu.

You can also use the New Device button to display the New dialog box.


Modifying A Device

To modify a device in Total Control Manager/SNMP:

1.	Click the File menu.

2.	On the File menu, click on Modify.

3.	In the Modify dialog box, highlight the device to modify. If Modify is grayed out, there are no saved devices to modify.

4.	The Modify dialog box allows you to change the:

• Change the Device Name

• Change the Host Name

• Change the Address

• Change the Device Type

• Assign SNMP Community Strings Read Only Authority

• Assign SNMP Community Strings Read and Write Authority

5.	Click OK.

Total Control Manager/SNMP makes the changes you specified.


New / Modify Device Options

About . . .

Remote Access Services

Remote Serial Communications

Phone Number

Connect String

Modem Time Out

Dial-Up Networking Connection

LED Monitoring

Polling Rate

General Monitoring Parameters

Polling Time Out

Polling Retries


Remote Access Services

Total Control Manager/SNMP uses the Remote Access Service (RAS) that is native to Windows 95 and Windows NT. RAS provides remote access to U.S. Robotics devices. Total Control Manager/SNMP will only attempt to establish a remote connection using RAS via remote modem connections to the NMC WAN port. You will need to configure RAS before managing remote devices.

A Note About NETServer

To configure RAS in Windows 95 or NT for use with Total Control Manager/SNMP:

1.	Install Dial-up Networking.

2.	Install SLIP for Dial-up Networking.

3.	Make sure the TCP/IP protocol is bound to the Dial-up Adapter.

4.	Click on " Make a new connection " in the Dial-up Networking group.

5.	Configure the correct telephone number to dial.

6.	Click Configure.

7.	Make sure the maximum speed is set to the same speed that is set on the NMC.

8.	Click on Server type.

9.	Select " SLIP " as the type of Dial-up server.

10.	Make sure advanced options is set to “Log onto Network” only.

11.	TCP/IP should be allowed network protocol - Click on TCP/IP settings.

12.	Specify an IP address, that is the WAN TCP/IP address of the Windows 95 computer.

In Windows 3.x Total Control Manager/SNMP uses the Novell IP stack and the DOS dialer to establish remote connections. In Windows 95 or Windows NT, TCM uses Remote Access Services via remote modem connections to the NAC WAN port to establish remote connections. Direct SLIP connection is not supported.


A Note About NETServer

When a Net Server card is inserted into a chassis or rebooted it put all the modems it discovers on the packet bus. This action causes the existing Remote Access Services (RAS) connection form the chassis modem to the NMC to drop.

Use the following procedure to manually keep the Net Server from grabbing the chassis modem and putting it on the packet bus. Complete this procedure using the console connection to the Net Server Card before managing the card with the management station.

TCP/IP Modem Sharing

Configuring a port to work as a “host device” allows users on a local TCP/IP network to use the modem for dialing out in this manner:

1.	Activate the packet bus connection.

Before a NETServer card can use a port, the packet bus connection between the modem and the NETServer must be active. Use the following command:

set modem s<port #> active

Note:  S <port #> = [4*(chassis slot-1)] + modem number

2.	Configure the port as a host device.

The following command tells the NETServer that the port may be accessed directly by other devices on the network.

set s<port #> device /dev/<device name>

Unless you are using one of the pseudo TTY drivers, type the word network in the Device Name field.

3.	Assign the port a TCP port number.

Choose the log in service to connect to the modem’s command line using the following command:

set s<port #> service_device <telnet | rlogin | netdata> <TCP port #>

TCP port# can be any number not already used by the NETServer.  We suggest 6000 plus the modem number.  Assigning the same TCP port number to multiple ports will create a pool of modems.  The user will be connected to the first available modem in the pool. Selecting NetData as the login service allows an application program to form a “Clear TCP” connection with a modem.  In other words, data exchanged with the modem will not be filtered in any way.

4.	Turn modem control (carrier detect) off.

If the port is set to host device only (is not also a user log in or a network port) , you must turn Off modem control. This prevents the modem from refusing your telnet connection.

If the port is also configured for any other function, modem control must be turned On, which allows the NETServer to detect when the port is being used for other purposes.

Use the following command:

set s<port #> modem<on  | off>

5.	Save your work and reset the port.

Use the following commands:

save all

reset s<port #>

Example

set modem s18 active

set s18 device /dev/network

set s18 service_device telnet 6018

set s18 modem off

save all

reset s18

To use the modem,  telnet to port 6018 at the NETServer’s IP address.

For example:

telnet 192.77.203.2 6018


Phone Number

Use the Phone Number box if you are running Windows 3.x and DOS dialer. This box is grayed out if you are running Windows 95 or NT and Remote Access Services (RAS).

In the Phone Number field, type the phone number the modem connected to the management station must dial to access the remote modem. The following initialization string is automatically inserted and executed before sending the dial string:

AT&C1&D2E0

Include any dial modifiers (such as 9 to escape from an in-house PBX).  There is a limit of 256 characters.


Connect String

Use the Connect String box if you are running Windows 3.x and DOS dialer. This box is grayed out if you are running Windows 95 or NT and Remote Access Services (RAS).

Use the Connect String box to used to customize the dial string.

The X.25 card uses this field when initiating management over an X.25 (MOX) session.


Modem Time Out

The Modem Time Out parameter defines how long the management station will wait to hear from a remote modem.

Default = 60


Dial-Up Networking Connection

Select a connection from the Dial-Up Networking Connection box.


Polling Rate

The Polling Rate parameter defines how often the management station verifies the status of the device being managed.

Default = 60 seconds


Polling Time Out

The Polling Time Out parameter defines how long the management station will wait to receive Health Monitoring and LED Monitoring information from the device being managed.

Default = 15


Polling Retries

The Polling Retries parameter defines how many times the management station try to retrieve  Health Monitoring and LED Monitoring data.

Default = 3


Wireless Access Gateway Card Performance Monitoring

Circuit Status Group

Trunk Status Group


Circuit Status Group

Circuit Status

Primary Circuit Link Trunk Identification

Primary Link Modem Slot Number

Primary Link Modem Channel Number

Secondary Circuit Link Trunk Identification

Secondary Link Modem Slot Number

Secondary Link Modem Channel Number

Established Circuit Link Duration

Primary to Secondary Byte Transfer Amount

Secondary to Primary Link Byte Transfer Amount

Circuit Establishment Time


Circuit Status

MIB Object:	wgwCktStatCircuitState

Description:	The current status of the circuit

Settings:	notSupported

Free - Circuit resources is available.

Dormant - The circuit resource is inactive.

DialOut - The circuit is waiting for a dial-out call.

waitDialOutAnswer - The circuit is waiting for a dial-out call to be answered.

waitDialInAnswer - The circuit is waiting for a dial-in call to be answered.

Training - Call negotiation is in progress.

Connected - A two-way data circuit has been established.

Disconnected - The circuit is waiting to complete a disconnect.

BusyDisc -	The circuit is waiting to complete the busy tone process on the primary link and to disconnect

Busy - The circuit is sending a busy tone.

Default:


Primary Circuit Link Trunk Identification

MIB Object:	wgwCktStatPriTrunk

Description:	The trunk identification that applies to the primary, or incoming, link of this circuit.


Primary Link Modem Slot Number

MIB Object:	wgwCktStatPriSlot

Description:	The slot number associated with the modem assigned to the primary trunk link of this circuit.


Primary Link Modem Channel Number

MIB Object:	wgwCktStatPriChannel

Description:	The modem channel assigned to the primary trunk link of this circuit.


Secondary Circuit Link Trunk Identification

MIB Object:	wgwCktStatSecTrunk

Description:	The trunk identification that applies to the secondary (outgoing) link of this circuit.


Secondary Link Modem Slot Number

MIB Object:	wgwCktStatSecSlot

Description:	The slot number associated with the modem assigned to the secondary trunk link on the circuit.


Secondary Link Modem Channel Number

MIB Object:	wgwCktStatSecChan

Description:	The modem channel assigned to the secondary trunk link of this circuit


Established Circuit Link Duration

MIB Object:	wgwCktStatConnectTime

Description:	The duration, in seconds, that this circuit or connection has been established.


Primary to Secondary Byte Transfer Amount

MIB Object:	wgwCktStatBytesPriToSec

Description:	The number of bytes transferred from the primary link to the  secondary link on this circuit while the connection is maintained.


Secondary to Primary Link Byte Transfer Amount

MIB Object:	wgwCktStatBytesSecToPri

Description:	The number of byes transferred from the secondary link to the primary link on this circuit while the connection is maintained.


Circuit Establishment Time

MIB Object:	wgwCktStatTimeToConnect

Description:	The number of seconds required to establish this circuit.


Trunk Status Group

Trunk Modem Slot Number

Trunk Modem Channel Number

Trunk Assignment Status

Trunk Status

Peer Trunk Identification

Trunk Identification

Trunk Out of Service Reasons


Trunk Modem Slot Number

MIB Object:	wgwTrunkSlot

Description:	The modem slot number assigned to a trunk.


Trunk Modem Channel Number

MIB Object:	wgwTrunkChannel

Description:	The modem channel assigned to a trunk.


Trunk Assignment Status

MIB Object:	wgwTrunkState

Description:	Sets or determines the status of the assignment for this trunk and determines its ability to provide connectivity.

Settings:	notSupported, assigned, or unassigned


Trunk Status

MIB Object:	wgwTrunkState

Description:	The current status of a trunk.

Settings:	notSupported

notApplicable

Closed - No modem, no packet bus, available. The closing modem is not assigned.

Opening - Modem returned to service

Setting - Modem is being setup for dialin/dialout call processing.

Waiting - The trunk is idle.

Primary - Call in progress, the trunk is part of the circuit carrying the primary link.

Secondary - The trunk is part of a circuit carrying a secondary link for a current call.

outOfService - The trunk has been declared out of service.

Removed - A modem has been removed.

Disconnecting - Modem dropped call disconnect in progress

Busy - Gateway card is sending a busy tone


Peer Trunk Identification

MIB Object:	wgwTrunkPeerTrunk

Description:	The trunk identification that applies to the other half of this circuit. If a trunk is primary, then its peer trunk is secondary. If a trunk is secondary its peer circuit is primary.


Trunk Identification

MIB Object:	wgwTrunkCircuitId

Description:	The circuit identification that applies to the trunk.


Trunk Out of Service Reasons

MIB Object:	wgwTrunkOOSReasons

Description:	The cause of the trunk being out of service.

Settings:	trunkInService, bBopenRLreached, closeRireached, closeWTO, ENPBModefail, openWTO, or openRLreached


Wireless Access Gateway Card Programmed Settings

NAC Identification Group

Configuration Group

Packet Bus Configuration Group

Trunk Assignments Group


NAC Identification Group

Serial Number

Hardware Revision

Software Version

Operational Status

Dip Switch Settings

DRAM Installed

ROM Installed


Serial Number

MIB Object:	uchasSlotModuleSerialNumber

Description:	The card’s hardware serial number as stored in the EEPROM.

Settings:	Display String


Hardware Revision

MIB Object:	uchasSlotModuleVersion

Description:	The card’s hardware revision level as stored in the EEPROM.

Settings:	Display String


Software Version

MIB Object:	uchasEntityVersion

Description:	The version of the software being executed by the card’s processor.

Settings:	Display String


Operational Status

MIB Object:	uchasEntityOperStatus

Description:	The current operational status.

Settings:	Other, Out of Service, Testing, Operational, Failed, or Loading


Dip Switch Settings

MIB Object:	uchasSlotSwitchSettings

Description:	The current NAC DIP switch settings.

Settings:	0 or 1

Default:	0


DRAM Installed

MIB Object:	uchasSlotRamInstalled

Description:	The number of KB of DRAM on the card.


ROM Installed

MIB Object:	uchasSlotFlashinstalled

Description:	The number of KB of Flash ROM on the card.


Configuration Group

System Date

System Time

Busy Tone Duration

Ring Tone Enable

Self-Test Result


System Date

MIB Object:  wgwCfgSysDate

Description: This object configures the Date on the Wireless Gateway NAC.


System Time

MIB Object:  wgwCfgSysTime

Description:  This object is to configure the Time on the Wireless Gateway NAC.


Busy Tone Duration

MIB Object:  wgwCfgBusyTone

Description:  This object is used to configure the busy tone duration for the Wireless Gateway NAC.  When the WAS attempts to connect with a land-based modem or network and receives a busy signal, it must abort this connection and generate a busy signal trough one of the chassis modems for the cellular modem user.

Default:	0


Ring Tone Enable

MIB Object:  wgwCfgRingToneEna

Description:  This object is to enable/disable the ring tone feature on the chassis modem.

Settings:	Enable or Disable

Default:	Enable


Self-Test Result

MIB Object:  wgwCfgSelfTestResult

Description:  This object returns the results of the most recent self
test performed by the WAS Gateway NAC. If all tests have
passed a 0 is returned.


Packet Bus Configuration Group

Packet Bus Clock

Packet Bus Clock Status


Packet Bus Clock

MIB Object:	wgwCfgPbMasterClk

Description:	Disables the ability of a NAC to act as a packet bus clock master.

Settings:	Enable, Disable, or NotSupported

Default:	Enable


Packet Bus Clock Status

MIB Object:	wgwCfgPbClkStatus

Description:	Defines the current status of the packet bus clock.

Settings:	ClockMaster, ClockSlave, NoClockPresent, NotSupported


Trunk Assignments Group

Trunk Assignment


Trunk Assignment

MIB Object:	wgwTrunkAssignment

Description:	Sets or determines the status of the assignment for this trunk and determines its ability to provide connectivity.

Settings:	Unassigned, Assigned, or NotSupported

Default:	Unassigned


About Restoring NVRAM

The Total Control Manager/SNMP Restore NVRAM feature provides substantial performance improvement over the Restore Configuration feature. The Restore NVRAM feature typically completes operation in less than five minutes. The Restore Configuration feature can take 30 minutes or more to complete operation.

The Restore NVRAM feature copies the contents of a configuration file to the Nonvolatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM) of a specified Network Management Card (NMC) for hub. The NMC NVRAM contains the configuration information for the hub.

Configuration files restored with this feature end with “.whb”.


Restoring NVRAM

1.	Display the File menu by clicking File on the main menu bar.

2.	Display the Save and Restore NVRAM window by clicking Restore NVRAM on the file menu.

3.	Total Control Manager/SNMP lists the IP address of the NMC you are currently managing in the Target Host box. To restore a file to the NVRAM from a device other than the current NMC, in the Target Host box, type either the IP address or the host name of the NCM to which you want restore the NVRAM.

4.	Use the Browse button to select the drive, directory, and file name for the configuration file.

5.	In the Type of Operation box, confirm that a dot appears in the Restore Configuration circle. If this circle is empty, click on the circle.

6.	If you want to make changes to the hub configuration after restoring to NVRAM and before applying the restored NVRAM, click the Configure Devices After Restore box to place a check mark in the box.

7.	To check the Time Out, Retry, and Community String settings; click Settings. Total Control Manager/SNMP displays the current values for these parameters. Modify the settings. Click OK.

8.	Click Start to restore the configuration file to NVRAM.


About Saving NVRAM

The Total Control Manager/SNMP Save NVRAM feature provides substantial performance improvement over the Save Configuration feature. The Save NVRAM feature typically completes operation in less than five minutes. The Save Configuration feature can take 30 minutes or more to complete operation.

The Save NVRAM feature copies the contents of the Nonvolatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM) of a specified Network Management Card (NMC) for hub to a configuration file. The NMC NVRAM contains the configuration information for the hub.

Configuration files created with this feature end with “.whb”.

After saving the NVRAM of an NMC to a configuration file, the file can be restored to NVRAM of the same or another NMC.


Saving NVRAM

1.	Display the File menu by clicking on File on the main menu bar.

2.	Display the Save and Restore NVRAM window by clicking on Save NVRAM on the file menu.

3.	Total Control Manager/SNMP lists the IP address of the NMC you are currently managing in the Target Host box. To copy the NVRAM from a device other than the current NMC, in the Target Host box, type either the IP address or the host name of the NCM from which you want to copy the NVRAM.

4.	Use the Browse button to select the drive and directory for the save file. If the save file already exists, use the Browse button select the file. If the save file does not exist, type the file name in the Configuration File box.

5.	In the Type of Operation box, confirm that a dot appears in the Save Configuration circle. If this circle is empty, click on the circle.

6.	If you have made changes to the hub configuration since saving to NVRAM and you want those change included in the save file, click on the Update NVRAM Before Saving Configuration box to place a check mark in the box.

7.	To check the Time Out, Retry, and Community String settings; click on Settings. Total Control Manager/SNMP displays the current values for these parameters. Modify the settings. Click OK.

8.	Click Start to save the file.


Accounting/Event Logging

The U.S. Robotics Accounting and Event Logging application captures and logs a wide variety of call accounting and event logging information to simple ASCII log files.  Like the Security option, this feature relies on the RADIUS client-server protocol.

Related Topics

Overview

Feature Description

Launching the Accounting Server

Using the Prototype Database


RADIUS

RADIUS is defined in the Network Working Group Internet draft (DRAFT-IETF-NASREQ-RADIUS-02.TXT), and may be obtained from ftp.livingston.com:/pub/livingston/radius.  Based on a model of distributed security previously defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF), RADIUS provides an open and scalable client-server security system.

Internet Drafts are draft documents valid for a maximum of six months and may be updated, replaced, or rendered obsolete by other documents at any time.  It is inappropriate to use Internet Drafts as reference material or to cite them other than as “work in progress.”

To learn the current status of any Internet Draft, please check the “1id-abstracts.txt” listing contained in the Internet Drafts Shadow Directories on ds.internic.net (U.S. East Coast), nic.nordu.net (Europe), ftp.isi.edu (U.S. West Coast), or munnari.oz.au (Pacific Rim).

Related Topics

USR Extensions


Overview
Accounting Server Overview

By setting up Traps in the Total Control Manager/SNMP software to the enableLog setting, you ensure that certain information will be forwarded by the NMC to the Accounting Server.  The enableAll setting will send out data both as a trap and as a log entry (see the note below).  Depending on how you set up the server, it will format some or all the of data received from the NMC into logs you can view and analyze at a later time.

The NMC client communicates with the PC-based server via Ethernet or Token Ring IP LAN.  Information such as call statistics and specific chassis events may be sent by NMC clients across a LAN connection to be logged.  You may then use a post-processing application or database script to format the logged data.

NOTES:

♦	We recommend against sending log data to a server via a SLIP connection.

♦	We recommend the Accounting Server be on a dedicated PC and discourage locating it on the same PC to which traps are being sent.

♦	Use discretion when configuring Traps with the enableAll setting.  If too much information is sent, the server PC may be overloaded.  When you enable a trap and a log, information is sent twice from the NMC.


Feature Description

The Accounting/Event Logging feature first requires that you create a TCP/IP SERVICES file on the server PC (used to store logs), if one doesn’t already exist.  If you do have such a file, you may need to add a line to assure that UDP services are active.  Your NET.CFG file must also point to the location of the SERVICES file.  Follow the Installation Adjustments recommendations in the Installation Summary that accompanied the software, or see Chapter 3 of the Total Control Manager/SNMP Software Guide.

NOTE:  We recommend that the accounting server always be run on a dedicated PC due to MS/Window's lack of true multitasking.

We have occasionally seen duplicated accounting records when:

More than 40 events (like call termination) occur simultaneously,

Both Traps and Logging are enabled, and

The NMS Alarm Manager and Accounting are servicing the chassis from the same PC.

Once you have installed and loaded TCM, there are two aspects of this feature that must be configured.  The best way to think of this is to first configure the NMC client, which sends the data; then configure the server, which creates logs.

Related Topics

Client

Server


Client

The NMC client is configured through the Total Control Manager/SNMP interface by selecting the NMC in the Virtual Front Panel Display display and setting specific Programmed Settings and Faults.

Related Topics

Logging Group

Trap Enables Group

Other Device Faults/Groups


Trap Enables Group

Log Server Loss

Related Topics

Server Loss Trap

Accounting Server Loss


Server Loss Trap

A trap indicating failure to communicate with the server indicates primary or secondary server loss.  The MIB object nmcTeLogSrvrLoss in the NMC Trap Enables group controls generation of this trap.  The MIB object acctSrvrLoss in the chs_trap MIB provides data on the occurrence of a server loss.


Accounting Server Loss

Description:  Indicates contact lost with RADIUS accounting server.  This trap reports a trap sequence number, an event ID, the time the loss occurred (GMT), and whether the primary or secondary accounting server was lost.


Other Devices Faults/Groups

Event log record generation for other chassis events is controlled by extending the trap enable/disable mechanism.  Instead of only providing the option to enable/disable a trap, most traps now include options to specify either, neither, or both trap and log record generation.  The default trap setting is Disable All; you may also select Enable Trap, Enable Log, or Enable All.

NOTE:	All traps have not yet been modified with these options.  View the available options for a specific trap object to determine which traps may be set in this fashion.


Server
Server Configuration

Once the NMC has been programmed to send data to the server, additional configuration is required to format this data into logs.  The RADIUS protocol allows the NMC to communicate its log data to generic RADIUS servers, making the NMC compatible with an open systems log facility .  Wherever possible, the NMC log records use the standard RADIUS attributes in order to maximize the amount of data that can be interpreted by a generic RADIUS report generator.  RADIUS provides a robust delivery mechanism for the log records by using an acknowledged UDP/IP protocol.

Two types of RADIUS accounting packets are used:

♦	Accounting-Request.  To log an event, the NMC client sends an Accounting-Request packet containing the event log information to the IP address of the selected server.

♦	Accounting-Response.  The server processes the packet and responds to the NMC with an Accounting-Response packet.

If no response is received within a preset amount of time, the original packet is re-transmitted.  If the re-transmission count is exhausted without receiving a response and the primary server is currently selected, the NMC client automatically switches to the secondary server and attempts to send the packet to it.  If the secondary server fails to respond, the NMC ceases transmission of event log information until the NMC MIB object controlling server selection is reset.

The Accounting/Event Logging application operates on one set of files for a 24-hour period.  At midnight, the server closes the files and opens a new set of log files.  The files are named using the format yymmdd.ext, where yy = year,  mm = month, dd = date, and ext is the three character extension defined for the file type (typically .con, .rad, or .nmc).

NOTE:  We recommend that the accounting server always be run on a dedicated PC due to MS/Window's lack of true multitasking.

We have occasionally seen duplicated accounting records when:

More than 40 events (like call termination) occur simultaneously,

Both Traps and Logging are enabled, and

The NMS Alarm Manager and Accounting are servicing the chassis from the same PC.

Related Topics

Input Files

Output Files


Editing the OUTDEF.DAT File

The OUTDEF.DAT file is the mechanism that permits you to control the content of the three logs.  By editing the OUTDEF.DAT file, you can exert a high level of control over the content of the logs as well as automate actions to be taken at different stages of log creation.  You may use your preferred text editor to edit the OUTDEF.DAT file to generate and customize desired logs.

Related Topics

File Syntax

Keywords

Attributes


File Syntax

In order to generate logs, the OUTDEF.DAT file must be edited using the correct syntax.  Most of the file in its original form is devoted to instructions (remarked out with a pound sign starting the line) that describe this syntax.  There are three components to this syntax that need to be understood:  Keywords, Attributes, and Format Specifiers.

♦	The following are recognized keywords:

Keyword	Description
FILE	Which log file is to be created
TIME	Whether local or GMT time is to be used
PATH	Where the log file is to be stored
DISK_LOW	What action to take on low disk space
DISK_FULL	What action to take on full disk space
NEW_LOG_FILE	What action to take when log is closed
♦	IIf the first field of a line does not contain one of these keywords, it is parsed as an attribute.  Attributes are contained in the dictionary file (ACCTDICT.DAT).  The attributes that follow a line containing the keyword FILE indicate that the values for those attributes are to be stored in a log file (.con, .rad, or .nmc)

♦	The format specifier is an optional element of the attribute line that allows you to specify what format is used to store the attribute value in the log.


Keyword Descriptions

FILE

TIME

PATH

DISK_LOW

DISK_FULL

NEW_LOG_FILE


FILE

This indicates a log file to be defined, and has three fields:

♦	keyword FILE

♦	reference name of the log file (e.g., NMC_CONNECTIVITY)

♦	suffix of the log file (3 character limit), used to indicate the type of information stored (e.g., con, rad, or nmc)

The name of the log file is the date in the format yymmdd followed by “.” and the suffix (con, nmc, or rad).

Example

FILE	NMC_CONNECTIVITY	con


TIME

This indicates what time zone to use for any time that appears in the log file.  It has two fields:

♦	keyword TIME

♦	time zone (must be GMT or LOCAL)

If TIME does not appear, the default is LOCAL.

Example

TIME	GMT


PATH

This indicates the directory that the log files are written to.  It has two fields:

♦	keyword PATH

♦	the directory path

If PATH does not appear, the default is the directory in which the accounting server executes, represented as a period.

Example

PATH	.\files

NOTE:  The directory must exist in order for the log file to be created.  In the example, a subdirectory is specified named “.\files” that is under the directory from which the accounting server is launched.  If the server were to be launched from a different directory (e.g., using Program Manager), the path indicated may be invalid and the file is not created.


DISK_LOW

This keyword indicates what to do when the free disk space is at a minimum.  It has three fields:

♦	keyword DISK_LOW

♦	.exe/.bat file to be executed (optional)

♦	free disk space threshold in MBytes (optional)

Disk space is checked periodically, and if the free disk space threshold is reached, the defined .exe/.bat file is executed using the PATH of the log files as a parameter.  This should be used to free up disk space, typically by purging the accounting log files.  If the DISK_LOW keyword does not appear, a default of 10 Mbytes is assigned for the free disk space threshold.

Example

DISK_LOW	disklow.bat	12


DISK_FULL

This keyword indicates what to do when the free disk space is at a fatal level.  It has three fields:

♦	keyword DISK_FULL

♦	.exe/.bat file to be executed (optional)

♦	fatal free disk space threshold in MBytes (optional)

When the disk full threshold is reached, the defined .exe/.bat file is executed.  This .exe/.bat may be used in the event that DISK_LOW fails to increase the free disk space; typically, this might be used to initiate an alarm of some kind, page an administrator, etc.  If DISK_FULL does not appear in the file, a default of 5 MBytes is assigned for the fatal free disk space limit.  If the .exe/.bat is omitted, the file USRBEEP.EXE is run to provide alarm indication.  After the file is executed the server application will terminate.

Example

DISK_FULL	diskfull.bat	6


NEW_LOG_FILE

This keyword indicates what to do when log files are closed at midnight.  It has two fields:

♦	keyword NEW_LOG_FILE

♦	.exe/.bat file to be executed

At midnight, each log file is closed and new log files reflecting the new date are created.  After the new log files are created, the .exe/.bat is executed using the PATH of the log files as a parameter.  This .exe/.bat typically purges and/or imports the old log file into a database.

Example

NEW_LOG_FILE	newlog.bat


Programming Attributes into OUTDEF.DAT

After the keyword FILE, which begins defining an output file, you must list attributes whose values you want to be included in the file.  Each attribute is represented by a column in the file.  Beside each entry, an optional format string can be provided that will override the format string provided by the dictionary.

Example—Connection Log

These records provide call information from the NMC client, using two types of events:  Event-Id = Incoming-Connection-Terminated or Event-Id = Outgoing-Connection-Terminated.  The example below contains only selected attributes (many more are available).

FILE	NMC_CONNECTIVITY	.con

Client-Id	IPdot

Chassis-Slot	%

Channel	%

Event-Date-Time	Date1

Event-Id	%

Acct-Session-Id

User-Name	string	User:VALUE

Call-Start-Date-Time	Date1

Call-End-Date-Time	Date1

Connect-Term-Reason	%

Acct-Session-Time	integer

Acct-Input-Octets	integer

Acct-Output-Octets	integer

Default-DTE-Data-Rate	%

Last-Number-Dialed-In-DNIS	string

Last-Number-Dialed-Out	string

Last-Callers-Number-ANI	string

Example—Event Log

The event log table stores event information generated by an NMC client, but not recorded in the Call Termination Log.  This includes such things as Module-Inserted, Connection-Attempt-Failed, etc.

FILE	NMC_EVENTLOG	.nmc

Client-Id	IPdot

Chassis-Slot	%

Channel	%

Event-Date-Time	Date1

Event-Id	%

Acct-Session-Id

Failure-to-Connect-Reason	%

Server-Time	Date1

Client-Port-Id	%

Example—Native RADIUS Log

The generic RADIUS table stores events that do not have the USR specific Event-Id attribute (i.e., non-NMC events).  Any attributes of interest must be entered into this file definition or they will be discarded.

FILE	GENERIC_RADIUS	.rad

Client-Id	IPdot

Server-Time	Date1

Acct-Status-Type	%

Acct-Session-Id

Acct-Session-Time	%

Related Topics

USR Attribute Extensions

Format Specifier

RADIUS Attributes and Data Types

Vendor Specific Attributes and Data Types


U.S. Robotics Extensions to RADIUS

Within an Accounting-Request packet, there can be a number of attributes containing the information to be stored.  Each attribute Type corresponds to a specific item defined by the RADIUS draft.  The NMC client has over 40 pieces of information that do not fall under defined attribute Types and must use the Vendor-Specific attribute.  The USR data is encapsulated within this attribute.

Related Topics

Vendor Specific Attributes and Data Types


Format Specifier

Each attribute definition has two fields:

♦	attribute name

♦	format specifier (optional)

The format specifier overrides the default specifier provided by the dictionary file.  Each attribute has a type that has a number of format options.

All transactions are composed of Attribute/Value Pairs.  The value of each attribute is specified as one of 4 data types.  Valid data types are:

string	0−254 octets
ipaddr	4 octets in network byte order
integer	32 bit value in big endian order (high byte first)
date	32 bit value in big endian order—seconds since 00:00:00 GMT, Jan. 1, 1970
Enumerated values are stored in the user file with dictionary VALUE translations for easy administration.

♦	string

no additional formatting available

♦	ipaddr

Three different format options are available:

IPdot	e.g., 192.203.77.91

IPhex	e.g., C0CB4D5B

Ipdec	e.g., 3234549083

♦	integer

Two different format options are available:

[Text]%	% replaced by the integer value

value	print out corresponding VALUE dictionary text

♦	date

Five different format options are available:

date1	mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss

date2	dd-mm-yy hh:mm:ss

date3	yymmddhhmmss

date4	Wed Jan 02 02:03:55 1980

date5	seconds since 00:00:00 Jan. 1, 1970


Log Generation

The Accounting/Event Logging server sorts input requests and writes them to three separate tab-delimited logs.  RADIUS event information is written to the Native RADIUS Call Log.  NMC event records are separated according to event type.  For instance, call-related event records are written to the Call Termination Log and all other NMC/Chassis event records are written to the Event Log.

The log files generated by the server can be imported into any Windows-compatible database application, such as MS Access or Excel, to be used for specific reporting purposes.

NOTE:  We recommend that the accounting server always be run on a dedicated PC due to MS/Window's lack of true multitasking.

We have occasionally seen duplicated accounting records when:

More than 40 events (like call termination) occur simultaneously,

Both Traps and Logging are enabled, and

The NMS Alarm Manager and Accounting are servicing the chassis from the same PC.

Related Topics

Call Termination Log

Event Log

Native RADIUS Call Log


Call Termination Log

The Call Termination Log stores all call termination records generated by the chassis modems.  The table format may have a column assigned for each possible attribute (both RADIUS and USR) that can be sent for these events.  An NMC can be configured to send additional information, depending on user requirements, based on four different groups of statistics.  The current default configuration sends messages from the first group, Usage Statistics.  These statistics are combined with the Generic Slot record and the Entity Index to yield the following fields:

Client-Id

Client-Port-Id

Acct-Session-Id

Event-Id

Event-Date-Time

Acct-Status-Type

Chassis-Slot

Channel

User-Name

Acct-Session-Time

Call-Start-Date-Time

Call-End-Date-Time

Connect-Term-Reason

Last-Number-Dialed-In-DNIS

Last-Caller’s-Number-ANI

Dialback-No

Server-Time

The mechanism for storing these records is to place each attribute from the input packet into a column defined in the output definition file.  If an attribute is located that does not have an associated column, it is silently discarded.  Any “empty” columns are filled with the delimiting character (tab).


Event Log

The Event Log stores all NMC event records sent to the server, except call termination records.  The mechanism for storing Event Log records is basically the same as for the Call Log, except that if an attribute is sent that does not have an associated column, it is formatted using the dictionary and appended to the table’s final column (not listed in the output definition file).  It is, therefore, important to have dedicated columns for all regularly sent attributes, otherwise they are placed in this default column.

This method allows all chassis event records to exist in a single table.  If set up correctly, the last column will represent a textual description of the event and relevant values.  For example, a Module-Inserted event might give the card description V.34_Dual_Modem.


Native RADIUS Call Log

The Native RADIUS Call Log stores all native RADIUS standard attributes.


Input Files

Database Definition File

Dictionary File


Database Definition File

An external database definition file is used to define the format for each of the output tables.  The file maps attributes (defined in the dictionary file—see the next section) to specific column (field) positions in the output file.  If an attribute is not available in a specific request, it defaults to the delimiting character (tab).  If a request packet generates an attribute that has no column available, it is silently discarded.

TCM installation places the file OUTDEF.DAT in the C:\NMS\BIN\ACCTING directory.

Related Topics

Editing the OUTDEF.DAT File


Dictionary File

The public domain implementation of RADIUS uses a dictionary file to match attribute numbers to their type and a textual representation.  TCM installation places the file ACCTDICT.DAT in the C:\NMS\BIN\ACCTING directory.  The ACCTDICT.DAT file should not be edited, but may be referred to for the names of attributes to be programmed into the OUTDEF.DAT file.

A dictionary file matches attribute numbers to their type and a text representation.  The following line defines attribute 6 to represent User-Service-Type using an integer value.

ATTRIBUTE	User-Service-Type	6	integer

The integer value held by this attribute can be further described by the dictionary using a VALUE entry later in the file:

VALUE	User-Service-Type	Login-User	1

VALUE	User-Service-Type	Framed-User	2

VALUE	User-Service-Type	Dialback-Login-User	3

The USR implementation extends the dictionary specification to define USR-specific attributes and provide output formatting capability.  An additional keyword, ATTRIB_NMC, is used to define USR attributes, for example:

ATTRIB_NMC	Attrib-Name	Attrib-Number	Datatype	Format

Native RADIUS attributes and USR-specific attributes belong to the same name-space (i.e., there cannot be a USR attribute User-Name).  The server application treats all attributes equally after they are extracted from the request packet.  The Attrib-Number for USR attributes is a 16-bit value rather than the RADIUS 8-bit value.  The datatype is limited to the original RADIUS specification (i.e., integer,  string,  IP address,  date).  Format specifies additional output formatting, for example:

ATTRIB_NMC	Slot-Index	0xBF39	integer	Slot-%

If a value of 10 is returned in the USR Slot-Index attribute, it is written to the database as:  “Slot-10”.

Related Topics

Format Specifier

USR Extensions to RADIUS Attributes


Output Files

The Accounting/Event Logging application operates on one set of files for a 24-hour period.  At midnight, the server closes and re-initializes the files.  This means that log files are not available for import on the same day they are generated.  The files are named using the format yymmdd.ext, where yy = year,  mm = month,  dd = date, and ext is the three character extension defined for the file type (typically .con, .rad, or .nmc).

If the server runs out of available disk space, the application is closed and the clients are forced to switch to an alternate server.  To prevent this from happening, an administrator should set up scripts for NEW_LOG_FILE and DISK_LOW to delete log files when they are no longer required.

The application sorts input requests and writes them to three separate output files.  Generic RADIUS and NMC-generated requests are separated by the presence of a USR-specific attribute:  Event-Id.  NMC requests are then further separated into event log records and call termination records.

NOTE:	Every request has an additional attribute added by the server itself - Server-Time (the time that the request was received).

Related Topics

Log Generation


Launching the Application

When you install TCM, icons for the Accounting Server and the Accounting Report are placed in the Windows NMS group.  Double click on the Accounting Server icon to launch the accounting server; double click on the Accounting Report icon to launch the prototype database application we have provided to serve as an example of how to manipulate log data.

Both the Accounting Server and the Accounting Report sample database application can also be launched from either the TCM Main Menu or from the Novell NMS Main Menu.


Using the Prototype Database

We expect that each customer has unique requirements for call accounting history and reporting.  A prototype MS Access v.2.0 database reporting application is supplied along with Total Control Manager/SNMP.  This application uses sample data that is stored in a file named ACCTSAMP.MDB, which is placed in the C:\NMS\BIN\ACCTING directory.

This application is intended to serve as a starting point in assisting customers to generate their unique reports.  We encourage the user to customize the type of information to capture and maintain in the log files.

This prototype application provides samples of the following:

♦	Automated Log File Importing

♦	Total Control Call Accounting Charts

♦	Total Control Event Filtering and Reporting

♦	Native RADIUS Call Filtering and Reporting

Related Topics

Log Records

Event Log

Connection Log


Automated Log File Importing

Log files are generated daily with the data you have configured.  The prototype application provides a simple means to import the log files that have been generated by the system.  From the Main Menu of the Accounting application, click on Import Check to see if new files have been generated. Then start the import to incorporate all the new data into the application, and then view the new log files.

NOTE:	Log files are not available for import on the same day they are generated.  They become available after midnight when the files are closed.


Total Control Call Accounting Charts

Click on Accounting Charts on the Main Menu to customize and display charts built from the log data.  Statistics are pulled from the call termination events for chassis modems.


Total Control Event Filtering and Reporting

Click on Event Log so system events can be programmed to generate log entries, and that data can then be filtered to meet your own reporting needs.  This is an especially powerful feature when combined with the Auto Response and Security options.


Native RADIUS Call Filtering and Reporting

All native RADIUS data may also be captured and logged.  Click on RADIUS Log.


Log Records

The NMC client can receive event records from 65 possible sources—one NMC and a possible 64 modems (16 Quad Modem cards).  The NMC client also has an input queue capable of handling 65 event records.  This allows for the maximum possible requesters to be issuing event records simultaneously.  If the input queue of the NMC client becomes overloaded, the requester’s attempt to issue an event record will be rejected.  It is up to the requester to handle these rejections.  Until the rejections are dealt with, the events are discarded.

The NMC client removes an event record from its input queue, formats it properly for the Accounting server, sends it, and waits for the reply before starting on the next event record.  If communication is lost between the NMC and the primary server, data will be sent to the secondary server.  If communication is lost with the secondary server before it is re-established with the primary server, the NMC client discards the event records.

Related Topics

RADIUS Attributes and Data Types

Event Log Details

Connection Log Details

Vendor Specific Attributes and Data Types


Event Log Details

The event record format may be extended to include the necessary event information.  The following information is included with all event records.

♦	IP Address of Chassis

♦	UDP Port Number

♦	Event Sequence Number

♦	Event Identifier

♦	Event Date/Time Stamp

The following table identifies the information sent in the log record for each event, in addition to the standard fields listed above.  The Generic Slot Record consists of the Slot Number and Module Type.  The Entity Index indicates a description beyond slot, e.g., modem channel.

Events	Additional Information In Event Record
Module Inserted (6)	Generic Slot Record
Module Removed (7)	Generic Slot Record
PSU Voltage out of Range (8)	Expected voltage Actual voltage
PSU Failed (9)	PSU Index
HUB Temperature out of Range (10)	Chassis temperature  Temperature threshold
Fan Failed (11)	No additional information
Module Watchdog Time-out (12)	Generic Slot Record
Management Bus Failure (13)	Generic Slot Record  Entity Index
Incoming Connection Established (14)	Generic Slot Record Call status Entity Index
Outgoing Connection Established (15)	Generic Slot Record Call status Entity Index
Incoming Connection Terminated (16)	See following description
Outgoing Connection Terminated (17)	See following description
Connection Attempt Failed (18)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index Failure to connect reason
Connection Time Limit Expired (19)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index Connect time limit
DTE Transmit Idle (20)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index DTE Data Idle Timeout
DTR True (21)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index DTR True Timeout
DTR False (22)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index DTR False Timeout
Block Error Count at Threshold (23)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index Block Error Count Limit
Fallback Count at Threshold (24)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index Fallback Count Limit
No Dial Tone Detected (25)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index
No Loop Current Detected (26)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index
Modem Reset by DTE (32)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index
Modem Ring No Answer (33)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index Ring No Answer Limit
DTE Ring No Answer (33)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index Ring No Answer Limit
Dial Out Login Failure (42)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index User Name
Dial In Login Failure (43)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index User Name
Dial Out Restricted Number (44)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index User Name
Dial Back Restricted Number (45)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index User Name
User Blacklisted (46)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index User Name
Attempted Login by Blacklisted User (47)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index User Name
Response Attempt Limit Exceeded (48)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index User Name Security Response Limit
Modem Login Attempt Limit Exceeded (49)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index User Name Security Login Limit


Connection Log

Incoming Connection Terminated (16) Outgoing Connection Terminated (17)	Generic Slot Record Entity Index Usage Statistics (Group 1 - always sent): User Name Call Start Date/Time  Call End Date/Time  Call Termination Reason Number Dialed--OUTGOING ONLY ANI--INCOMING ONLY DNIS--INCOMING ONLY Call Duration Data Transfer Statistics (Group 2): Characters Sent Characters Received Octets Sent Octets Received Blocks Sent Blocks Received Blocks Resent Characters Lost Line Reversals Performance Statistics (Group 3): Block CRC Errors Link NAKs Link Fallbacks Link Upshifts Link Timeouts Initial Link TX Rate Final Link TX Rate Initial Link RX Rate Final Link RX Rate Retrains Requested Retrains Granted Operating Mode Statistics (Group 4): Sync/Async Mode Modulation Type Originate/Answer Mode  Error Control Type Data Compression Type HST Back Channel Rate Default DTE Data Rate  High Freq Equalization On-Line Fallback


RADIUS Attributes and Data Types

		RADIUS Attributes (Value) and Data Types
USR Event	Event ID	User Name (1)	Client ID (4)	Client Port  ID (5)	Dial Back No. (19)	Vendor Spec. (26)	Acct. Status Type (40)	Acct. Input Octets (42)	Acct. Output Octets (43)	Acct. Sess. ID (44)	Acct. Sess. Time (46)
Card Inserted	06		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Card Removed	07		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Power Supply Warning	08		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Power supply failed	09		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Temperature Warning	10		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Fan Failed	11		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Watchdog Timeout	12		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Management Bus Failure	13		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Incoming Connection Est.	14		S,A	S,I		S,V	S,I			S,I
Outgoing Connection Est.	15		S,A	S,I		S,V	S,I			S,I
Incoming Connection Term.	16	S,C	S,A	S,I	S,C	S,V	S,I	O2,I	O2,I	S,I	S,I
Outgoing Connection Term.	17	S,C	S,A	S,I		S,V	S,I	O2,I	O2,I	S,I	S,I
Connection Attempt Failure	18		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Connection Timer Expired	19		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
DTE Transmit Data Idle	20		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
DTR True	21		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
DTR False	22		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
BLER Count at Threshold	23		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Fallback Count at Threshold	24		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
No Dial Tone	25		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
No Loop Current	26		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Modem Reset By DTE	32		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Modem Ring No Answer	33		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
DTE Ring No Answer	34		S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Dial Out Login Failure	42	S,C	S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Dial In Login Failure	43	S,C	S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Dial Out Restricted No.	44	S,C	S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Dial Back Restricted  No.	45	S,C	S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
User Blacklisted	46	S,C	S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Blacklisted User Login Att.	47	S,C	S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Resp. Att. Limit Exceeded	48	S,C	S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
Login Att. Limit Exceeded	49	S,C	S,A	S,I		S,V				S,I
S = Standard

O = Optional.  Part of Call Termination statistics group n.

Data Types:	A = IP Address,   I = Integer,   C = Character String,   T = GMT date/time,

V =  Variable  (see Vendor Specific attribute table).


Vendor Specific Attributes and Data Types

			USR Event IDs
USR Attribute	Attr. Value	Data Type	06	07	08	09	10	11	12	13	14	15	16	17	18	19	20	21
DTE-Data-Idle-Timout	0x0048	I															S
Default-DTE-Data-Rate	0x005E	I											O4	O4
Last-Number-Dialed-Out	0x0066	C												S
Sync-Async-Mode	0x0067	I											O4	O4
Originate-Answer-Mode	0x0068	I											O4	O4
Failure-to-Connect-Reason	0x0069	I													S
Initial-Tx-Link-Data-Rate	0x006A	I											O3	O3
Final-Tx-Link-Data-Rate	0x006B	I											O3	O3
Modulation-Type	0x006C	I											O4	O4
Equalization-Type	0x006F	I											O4	O4
Fallback-Enabled	0x0070	I											O4	O4
Characters-Sent	0x0071	I											O2	O2
Characters-Received	0x0072	I											O2	O2
Blocks-Sent	0x0075	I											O2	O2
Blocks-Received	0x0076	I											O2	O2
Blocks-Resent	0x0077	I											O2	O2
Retrains-Requested	0x0078	I											O3	O3
Retrains-Granted	0x0079	I											O3	O3
Line-Reversals	0x007A	I											O2	O2
Number-Of-Characters-Lost	0x007B	I											O2	O2
Back-Channel-Data-Rate	0x007C	I											O4	O4
Number-of-Blers	0x007D	I											O3	O3
Number-of-Link-Timeouts	0x007E	I											O3	O3
Number-of-Fallbacks	0x007F	I											O3	O3
Number-of-Upshifts	0x0080	I											O3	O3
Number-of-Link-NAKs	0x0081	I											O3	O3
Simplified-MNP-Levels	0x0099	I											O4	O4
Connect-Term-Reason	0x009B	I											S	S
DTR-False-Timeout	0x00BE	I
Fallback-Limit	0x00BF	I
Block-Error-Count-Limit	0x00C0	I
Simplified-V42bis-Usage	0x00C7	I											O4	O4
DTR-True-Timeout	0x00DA	I																S
Last-Number-Dialed-In-DNIS	0x00E8	C											S
Last-Callers-Number-ANI	0x00E9	C											S
Chassis-Temp-Threshold	0xBE84	I					S
Card-Type	0xBE85	I	S	S
Security-Login-Limit	0xBEDE	I
Security-Resp-Limit	0xBEFA	I
DTE-Ring-No-Answer-Limit	0xBF17	I
Final-Rx-Link-Data-Rate	0xBF2C	I											O3	O3
Initial-Rx-Link-Data-Rate	0xBF2D	I											O3	O3
Event-Date-Time	0xBF2F	T	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S
Chassis-Temperature	0xBF31	I					S
Actual-Voltage	0xBF32	I			S
Expected-Voltage	0xBF33	I			S
Power-Supply-Number	0xBF34	I				S
Channel	0xBF38	I							S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S
Chassis-Slot	0xBF39	I	S	S					S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S
Event-Id	0xBFBE	I	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S	S
Number-of-Rings-Limit	0xBFE6	I
Connect-Time-Limit	0xBFE7	I														S
Call-End-Date-Time	0xBFF6	T											S	S
Call-Start-Date-Time	0xBFF7	T											S	S
On = Optional.  Part of Call Termination statistics group n.

S = Standard

Data Types:   C = Character String,   I = Integer,   T = GMT date/time


Auto Response

The following Help Topics are available:

Basic Auto Response Operation

Auto Response Configuration

Chassis-Level

Module-Level

Channel-Level

Events and Responses

Configurable Events

Configurable Responses

For Help on Help, Press F1


Feature Enable

The Feature Enable mechanism is used to “turn on” these extra options in the NMC, and also for upgrading certain products.  This mechanism consists of a unique “secret key” that must be generated by 3Com Customer Service for each individual NMC.

Once the feature has been enabled for a particular NMC, the feature is enabled for all components in the chassis that support it.  Depending on the feature, an additional software upgrade may be necessary in Total Control Manager/SNMP.

Related Topics:

NMC Feature Enable

TCM Feature Enable

Added Cost Features:

Auto Response

Hub Security


Cellular Operations

Cellular Operations are not currently available.


Hub Security

Total Control Manager/SNMP uses the RADIUS-based authentication server, client, and protocol to regulate access to Total Control modems.  Security feature supports up to 50,000 users.

No hardware changes are required, but this option does require compatible versions of the NMC, Total Control Manager/SNMP, and modem software.

Security allows you to prevent unauthorized users from making outbound (Dial Out) calls using rack modems, and making inbound (Dial In) connections with these modems.  Both Dial In and Dial Out calls generate events to which the system responds according to preconfigured actions.

Security implements a User Database to store security configurations on a per-user or group basis, and a Security Log to record security-related events.


NMC Feature Enable

Features such as Auto Response must be enabled once for each NMC.  When the TCM portion of the feature is active, it queries the feature’s enabled management object in the NMC.

The enable process can be handled either through the NMC User Interface or through the Feature Enable window in TCM.  Both methods require that you contact U.S. Robotics Customer Service and provide them with the serial number of the NMC(s) to be activated.  You will be provided with a unique “secret key” that will activate the feature for that NMC.

♦	From the NMC User Interface, first display the Main Menu.  Select option 3, Feature Enable, enter the string provided by 3Com Customer Service at the prompt, and press Enter.

♦	From the TCM interface, select the Feature Enable option from the Configure Menu.  Enter the Feature Key provided by U.S. Robotics Customer Service, and then click on the Set button.


TCM Feature Enable

Features such as Auto Response must be enabled in each NMC and once for each installation of the TCM software.  The TCM feature enable is performed with a diskette that you can obtain from your U.S. Robotics Sales Representative.  Simply insert the diskette on the PC where TCM is installed, and run the Setup program.  Once the feature is enabled, you will be able to configure the related parameters in the Configuration Window.


Basic Auto Response Operation

Auto Response allows Network Managers to define a set of actions (auto response script) they wish to be taken automatically when a specified event occurs in the chassis.  The event may be specific to a particular module (NAC or NMC) in a given slot of the chassis, or specific to a particular entity (such as a single modem channel).

TCM provides a convenient graphical user interface (GUI) through which the Network Manager can configure these auto responses.  It is accessed when you select Auto Response from the Configure menu.

NOTES:

♦	In order to correctly receive Auto Response specific traps, you must perform SNMP Alarm Integration through the Novell NMS.

1.	From the Novell NMS Fault Menu, select Alarm Disposition.  The Configure Alarm Disposition window appears.

2.	For the Family of alarms, select SNMP.

3.	From the drop-down list box, select Auto Response Trap.

♦	TCM does not need to be running when an event occurs in order for the NMC to invoke the appropriate response, since these responses are pre-programmed into the NMC and saved to NVRAM.

♦	When there are descriptors (thresholds) for an event, they must be programmed through the Configuration Window.  For instance, the Connection Time Limit Expired event requires that you specify the Connection Time Limit threshold.  See a list of all events and descriptors later in these notes.

♦	When there are descriptors for a response, a window appears to prompt you to set the descriptor when you select the response.

Related Topics:

Auto Response Configuration

Auto Response Editing

Events and Responses


Auto Response Configuration

Highlight one or a group of slot(s)/channel(s) on the chassis display (VFPD) and then select Auto Response from the Configure menu.  The Auto Response Window is displayed.

Selected Devices

This box shows the slot(s) or channel(s) selected in the chassis display.

Events

This box displays all the events that can be programmed for the device(s) selected.  If you select an event that requires a descriptor, be sure that you have programmed the descriptor.

Response Script Usage

This box shows the percentage of available script space you have programmed.  Each response may take up a different amount of script space.  Keep an eye on this gauge to avoid programming too many responses to a single event.

Responses/Responses Configured

The responses available for the event are displayed on the left, and the responses configured for the event are displayed on the right.  See Auto Response Editing for a description of how to configure the list.

NOTE:  When you select a response that has descriptors, a window appears presenting you with descriptor options.


Auto Response Editing

Add Response

Get

Load From

Remove All Responses

Remove Response

Set

Undo All


Load From

This button brings up the Load From Device window.  Enter the IP address, slot and/or channel of the device whose Auto Response settings you want to copy, and the response scripts are loaded from the device specified to the currently selected device(s).


Add Response

To assign a response to an event, select the response from the Responses List and then click on the Add button.  The response is added to the Responses Configured list box.  Responses can only be added one at a time.  Some responses may require additional information (e.g., Delay N. Seconds).  For responses that require additional input (a descriptor), the Auto Response Parameters window is displayed.

Fill in your desired value and click OK to set the descriptor.

Also, through drag and drop, the responses in the Responses Configured list can be resequenced.  To resequence a response, click on the response and hold down the left mouse button.   Move the mouse until the cursor is over the desired position in the list and release the left mouse button.


Remove Response

To remove a response, select the response or a group of responses from the Responses Configured list and then click the Remove button.


Remove All Responses

Click the Remove All button to remove all the responses from the Responses Configured list.


Undo All

Click the Undo All button to restore the event with the response script that was last retrieved from the NMC.


Get Response
Get

The Get button queries the NMC for the response script associated with the event.


Set Response
Set

The Set button assigns the response script to the event.


Events and Responses

Events are grouped into three categories:  chassis/NMC events, module/slot events, and modem/channel events.

NOTE:  If there is a configurable descriptor for an event, the Network Manager must be sure to configure it in the TCM Configuration Window.  Otherwise, the event will not trigger the response script.

Related Topics:

Chassis-Level

Module-Level

Channel-Level


Chassis/NMC Events and Responses
Chassis Events and Responses

The chassis events/responses are brought up by selecting the NMC in the chassis display.  They concern global conditions in the chassis and actions that might be taken from the NMC.

Related Topics:

Chassis-Level


Chassis-level Events and Responses

Events

PSU Voltage out of Range

PSU Failed

Fan Failed

Hub Temperature out of Range

Global Timer #1 Expired

Global Timer #2 Expired

Global Timer #3 Expired

Global Timer #4 Expired

Responses

Generate Auto Response SNMP Trap

Delay Script Execution N Seconds

Terminate Script Execution

Continue if Test Passes

Configure Module from NMC NVRAM

Configure Module from Factory Defaults

Test Module

Reset Module


Slot-Level Events and Responses
Module-Level Events and Responses

Module events occur only on a per-slot basis.  Consequently, the responses for these events always affect all devices in that slot.  For example, assume that a Quad Modem Card has just been inserted into Slot 1.  This triggers a Module Inserted event; consequently, a Configure Module from the NMC response list configures all four modems on that card with parameters stored in the NMC’s NVRAM.

Related Topics:

Module-Level


Slot-level Events and Responses
Module-Level Events and Responses

Events

Entity Watchdog Time-out

Module Inserted

Module Non-operational

Module Re-initialized

Module Removed

Responses

Busy Out Module’s Analog Phone Line

Configure Module from Factory Defaults

Configure Module from NMC NVRAM

Continue if Test Passes

Delay Script Execution N Seconds

Generate Auto Response SNMP Trap

Remove Module from Service

Reset Module

Restore Module’s Analog Phone Lines

Restore Module to Service

Terminate Script Execution

Test Module


Modem Channel Events and Responses
Channel Events and Responses

The channel events occur only on a per-entity basis, so the responses for these events affect only those entities.  Currently, up to four entities can reside on a given card, so up to four different response scripts can be constructed for a given slot.  The events and responses below are listed in the order in which they appear in the Auto Response window.  Definitions are provided later in this appendix.

Example:  The NMC detects a blacklisted user attempting to log in to one of the modems on a Dual Analog Modem Card in Slot 1.  Because the network administrator programmed a Busy Out Phone Line response on a per-channel basis for this event, this triggers a User Blacklisted event.  The Busy Out Analog Phone Line response affects only that modem (channel) on the Dual Analog Modem Card where the event occurred.  The other modem is not affected.

Related Topics:

Channel-Level


Modem Channel-level Events and Responses
Channel-Level Events and Responses

Events

Attempted Login by Blacklisted User

Block Error Count at Threshold

Connection Attempt Failed

Connection Time Limit Expired

Dial Back Restricted Number

Dial Back Using Restricted Modem

Dial In Login Failure

Dial Out Login Failure

Dial Out Restricted Number

DTE Ring-No-Answer

DTE Transmit Idle

DTR False

DTR True

Fallback Count at Threshold

Global Timer #n Expired

Incoming Connection Established

Incoming Connection Terminated

Login Attempt Limit Exceeded

Management Bus Failure

Modem Ring-no-Answer

Modem Watchdog Reset

No Dial Tone

No Loop Current Detected

Outgoing Connection Established

Outgoing Connection Terminated

Packet Bus Active

Packet Bus Lost

Reset By DTE

Response Attempt Limit Exceeded

User Blacklisted

Responses

Busy out Analog Phone Line

Busy Out DS0--T1 Slot (N) Span (N) Channel (N)

Continue if Test Passes

Delay Script Execution N Seconds

Generate Auto Response SNMP Trap

Modem Software Reset

Reconfigure from Modem Factory Defaults

Reconfigure from NVRAM

Restore Analog Phone Line

Restore DS0--T1 Slot (N) Span (N) Channel (N)

Terminate Connection

Terminate Script Execution

Test Analog NIC

Test Analog Phone Line

Test Modem


Configurable Events

Attempted Login by Blacklisted User

Block Error Count at Threshold

Connection Attempt Failed

Connection Time Limit Expired

Dial Back Modem Restriction Error

Dial Back Restricted Number

Dial In Login Failure

Dial Out Login Failure

Dial Out Restricted Number

DTE Ring-no-Answer

DTE Transmit Idle

DTR False

DTR True

Entity Watchdog Timeout

Fallback Count at Threshold

Fan Failed

Global Timer #n Expired

Hub Temperature out of Range

Incoming Connection Established

Incoming Connection Terminated

Management Bus Failure

Modem Login Attempt Limit Exceeded

Modem Reset By DTE

Modem Ring-no-Answer

Modem Watchdog Reset

Module Inserted

Module Non-operational

Module Re-initialized

Module Removed

Module Watchdog Time-out

No Dial Tone Detected

No Loop Current Detected

Outgoing Connection Established

Outgoing Connection Terminated

Packet Bus Active

Packet Bus Lost

PSU Failed

PSU Voltage out of Range

Response Attempt Limit Exceeded

User Blacklisted


Attempted Login by Blacklisted User

Triggered—when a user who has been blacklisted by the Hub Security feature attempts to use a chassis modem.


Block Error Count at Threshold

Triggered—when a connected chassis modem receives the number of block errors specified by the event descriptor.  Modems typically send data over the phone line using error-corrected packets or blocks.  A block error (BLER) occurs when a modem receives a block that contains data errors.

Descriptor (user configured)

Card:	Modem

Select:	Faults

Modem Event Thresholds

Block Errors Limit

Definition:	Number of block errors during a connection that will be used to qualify the event

Setting:	0−255 errors

Default:	0 (disables the event)


Connection Attempt Failed

Triggered—when a chassis modem fails to connect with a remote modem for an incoming or outgoing call.


Connection Time Limit Expired

Triggered—when a connection duration exceeds the user-defined connection time limit.  (If connection termination is desired, the response list for this event should include that response.)

Descriptor (user configured)

Card:	Modem

Select:	Faults

Modem Event Thresholds

Connection Timeout Limit

Definition:	Number of minutes a call may be connected before the event is triggered

Setting:	0−255 minutes

Default:	0 (no time limit observed)


Dial Back Modem Restriction Error

Triggered—when a dial-in user requests that the Total Control Security Manager dial back using a modem disallowed on a Dial Back Group list.


Dial Back Restricted Number

Triggered—when a dial-in user requests that the Total Control Security Manager dial back to a number that has been disallowed for them on a Call Restriction list.


Dial In Login Failure

Triggered—when a user dialing into a chassis modem enters an invalid response to a Total Control Security Manager prompt and exceeds the number of specified login attempts.

Triggered—if a user enters an invalid user name and/or password combination.

Triggered—if a user fails to respond to a login prompt within the set time limit.

Descriptors (user configured)

Card:	NMC

Select:	Programmed Settings

Hub Security

Response Attempt Limit

Definition:	Number of tries a user is allowed per prompt during any one Security session

Setting:	1−16

Default:	1

Card:	NMC

Select:	Programmed Settings

Hub Security

Response Timeout

Definition:	Number of seconds a users has in which to respond to system prompts

Setting:	10−255 seconds

Default:	30


Dial Out Login Failure

Triggered—when a user dialing out of a chassis modem enters an invalid response to a Total Control Security Manager prompt and exceeds the number of specified login attempts.

Triggered—if a user enters an invalid user name and/or password combination.

Triggered—if a user fails to respond to a login prompt within the set time limit.

Descriptors (user configured)

Card:	NMC

Select:	Programmed Settings

Hub Security

Response Attempt Limit

Definition:	Number of tries a user is allowed per prompt during any one Security session

Setting:	1−16

Default:	1

Card:	NMC

Select:	Programmed Settings

Hub Security

Response Timeout

Definition:	Number of seconds a users has in which to respond to system prompts

Setting:	10−255 seconds

Default:	30


Dial Out Restricted Number

Triggered—when a user dialing out of a chassis modem calls a number that has been disallowed on the Total Control Security Manager Call Restriction list.


DTE Ring-No-Answer

Triggered—when the DTE fails to raise DTR in response to an incoming call.  The event descriptor specifies the maximum number of phone line rings by which the DTE should raise DTR to answer the incoming call.

This event is used to detect a "dead-air" or "ring-no-answer" situation.  It is sent if one of the following conditions occur:

♦	The Quad modem receives a digital call, sends an incoming call message to the NETServer, but does not receive an answer call message within 60 seconds.

♦	The Quad modem receives a digital call, sends an incoming call message to the NETServer, but does not receive an answer call message before another call arrives.

♦	The Quad modem receives an analog call, sends an incoming call message to the NETServer, but does not receive an answer call message before it detects a specified number of rings.  The number of rings can be selected by setting S-Register 0.

Descriptor (user configured)

Card:	Modem Analog NIC

Select:	Faults

NIC Event Thresholds

Ring No Answer Events

Definition:	Number of rings allowed before this event is triggered

Setting:	0−255 rings

Default:	0 (disables the event)


DTE Transmit Idle

Triggered—when the connected modem's DTE remains idle (does not transmit data) for a number of minutes defined by the user.

Descriptor (user configured)

Card:	Modem

Select:	Faults

Modem Event Thresholds

DTE Idle Timeout Limit

Definition:	Length of time the modem waits before reporting this event

Setting:	0 - 255 minutes

Default:	0 (disables the event)


DTR False

Triggered—when a modem's DTE changes its DTR line from high (true) to low (false) and holds it low for the number of seconds specified by the event descriptor.

Descriptor (user configured)

Card:	Modem

Select:	Faults

Modem Event Thresholds

DTR False Event Timeout

Definition:	How long DTR must be low before triggering event

Setting:	0−255 seconds

Default:	0 (disables the event)


DTR True

Triggered—when a modem's DTE changes its DTR line from low (false) to high (true) and holds it high for the number of seconds specified by the event descriptor.

Descriptor (user configured)

Card:	Modem

Select:	Faults

Modem Event Thresholds

DTR True Time Limit

Definition:	How long DTR must be high before triggering this event

Setting:	0−255 seconds

Default:	0 (disables the event)


Module Watchdog Time-out
Entity Watchdog Time-out

Triggered—when one or more module entities (NACs) experience a watchdog time-out.


Fallback Count at Threshold

Triggered—when a chassis modem reaches the number of fallbacks specified in the event descriptor within a single call.  If configured to do so, a chassis modem will automatically reduce its rate (fall back) to the next lower link rate if there are excessive data errors due to degraded signal quality.  It will also automatically shift up to the next higher link rate when signal quality improves.

Descriptor(s)

Card:	Modem

Select:	Faults

Modem Event Thresholds

Fall Back Limit

Definition:	Number of line fallbacks that will be used to qualify this event

Setting:	0−255 line fallbacks

Default:	0 (disables the event)


Fan Failed

Triggered—when the fan speed, monitored every three seconds for three successive samples by the NMC, becomes so slow as to risk damage due to inadequate cooling of the chassis.  The fan used in the chassis supplies a square wave output signal with a frequency proportional to the rotational speed of the fan in RPM.

Measurements and multiple samples are used to ensure that this event does not occur too frequently, so Auto Response performance is not affected.

Descriptor (system configured)

♦	17 slot chassis Fan Speed Thresholds (4500 RPM, 2000 RPM)

♦	7 slot chassis Fan Speed Thresholds (1900 RPM, 1200 RPM)


Global Timer #n Expired

Triggered—when one of the four provided general purpose global timers expires.  Each timer can be configured to expire periodically or only once.

Descriptor (user configured)

Card:	NMC

Select:	Programmed Settings

Auto Response Timer Groups

Global Timer #n Expired

Definition:	See parameter options in the following chart.

Setting:	See setting options in the following chart.

Each of the four timers can be configured to expire with the following parameters:

Descriptor	Definition
Start Date	Date (MM/DD/YY) the timer becomes active
Stop Date	Date (MM/DD/YY) the timer becomes passive (stops firing)
Start Time	Time (GMT) the timer becomes active
Stop Time	Time (GMT) the timer becomes passive (stops firing)
Timer Interval	Rate (in seconds) the timer fires between start/stop time/date


Global Timer #n Expired

Triggered—when one of the four provided general purpose global timers expires.  Each timer can be configured to expire periodically or only once.

Descriptor (user configured)

Card:	NMC

Select:	Programmed Settings

Auto Response Timer Groups

Global Timer #n Expired

Definition:	See parameter options in the following chart.

Setting:	See setting options in the following chart.

Each of the four timers can be configured to expire with the following parameters:

Descriptor	Definition
Start Date	Date (MM/DD/YY) the timer becomes active
Stop Date	Date (MM/DD/YY) the timer becomes passive (stops firing)
Start Time	Time (GMT) the timer becomes active
Stop Time	Time (GMT) the timer becomes passive (stops firing)
Timer Interval	Rate (in seconds) the timer fires between start/stop time/date


Global Timer #n Expired

Triggered—when one of the four provided general purpose global timers expires.  Each timer can be configured to expire periodically or only once.

Descriptor (user configured)

Card:	NMC

Select:	Programmed Settings

Auto Response Timer Groups

Global Timer #n Expired

Definition:	See parameter options in the following chart.

Setting:	See setting options in the following chart.

Each of the four timers can be configured to expire with the following parameters:

Descriptor	Definition
Start Date	Date (MM/DD/YY) the timer becomes active
Stop Date	Date (MM/DD/YY) the timer becomes passive (stops firing)
Start Time	Time (GMT) the timer becomes active
Stop Time	Time (GMT) the timer becomes passive (stops firing)
Timer Interval	Rate (in seconds) the timer fires between start/stop time/date


Global Timer #n Expired

Triggered—when one of the four provided general purpose global timers expires.  Each timer can be configured to expire periodically or only once.

Descriptor (user configured)

Card:	NMC

Select:	Programmed Settings

Auto Response Timer Groups

Global Timer #n Expired

Definition:	See parameter options in the following chart.

Setting:	See setting options in the following chart.

Each of the four timers can be configured to expire with the following parameters:

Descriptor	Definition
Start Date	Date (MM/DD/YY) the timer becomes active
Stop Date	Date (MM/DD/YY) the timer becomes passive (stops firing)
Start Time	Time (GMT) the timer becomes active
Stop Time	Time (GMT) the timer becomes passive (stops firing)
Timer Interval	Rate (in seconds) the timer fires between start/stop time/date


Hub Temperature out of Range

Triggered—when chassis temperatures exceed the specified operating range (0C-50C), as measured at 20 second intervals by the NMC built-in temperature sensor.

Measurements and multiple samples are used to ensure that this event does not occur too frequently, so Auto Response  performance is not affected.

Descriptor (system configured)

Temperature Thresholds (50C, 45C, 0C, 0C)


Incoming Connection Established

Triggered—when a remote modem successfully establishes a connection with a chassis modem.


Incoming Connection Terminated

Triggered—when a connection between a remote modem and a chassis modem is terminated for any reason.


Management Bus Failure

Triggered—when the NMC loses contact with a modem.  Each chassis modem communicates with the NMC via a dedicated management bus located on the midplane.  When this event occurs, it is considered a symptom of a modem failure.

NOTE:  If all modems on a multi-modem card are simultaneously in a Management Bus Protocol (MBP) fail state, a Module Non-Operational event is also triggered.


Modem Login Attempt Exceeded
Login Attempt Limit Exceeded

Triggered—when a user dialing into or out of a chassis modem fails to complete a successful Total Control Security Manager login session within the number of specified tries.

Descriptor (user configurable, but only on a chassis-wide basis)

Card:	NMC

Select:	Programmed Settings

Hub Security Group

Modem Attempt Limit

Definition:	Number of successive failed login attempts on a single modem

Setting:	1−16 attempts

Default:	3


Modem Reset By DTE

Triggered—when a modem is reset by the DTE, either by an ATZ command or by dropping DTR to the modem.  One powerful use for this event is to have Total Control Manager automatically reconfigure a modem to the settings in the NMC's NVRAM after it has been reset by the DTE.


Modem Ring-no-Answer

Triggered—when an analog modem that has been configured for auto answer fails to answer an incoming call.  The event descriptor is an integer specifying the number of phone line rings by which the modem should have answered the incoming call.

Descriptor (user configured)

Card:	Modem Analog NIC

Select:	Faults

NIC Event Thresholds

Ring No Answer Events

Definition:	Number of rings allowed before triggering this event

Setting:	0−255 rings

Default:	0 (disables the event)


Modem Watchdog Reset

Triggered—when a modem failure occurs.  The watchdog is an independent hardware circuit on each modem entity that can detect software failures.


Module Inserted

(A module is defined as a NAC in the chassis.)

Triggered—when a module is inserted into the chassis.  (The NMC never generates Inserted Events).

Not Triggered—when the chassis power transitions from off to on for modules already installed in the chassis.

 chassis.


Module Non-operational

 (A module is defined as a NAC in the chassis.)

Triggered—at the start of software download to a module.

Triggered—as a module is removed from service.

Triggered—if a module has failed (i.e., all entities on a module have failed).


Module Re-initialized

(A module is defined as a NAC in the chassis.)

Triggered—when the chassis power transitions from off to on.

Triggered—when a module is inserted into the chassis.

Triggered—when software download is completed to a module.

Triggered—when a module is restored to service.

Triggered—when a module is hardware reset.


Module Removed

(A module is defined as a NAC in the chassis.)

Triggered—when a module is physically removed from the chassis.


No Dial Tone Detected

Triggered—when the modem goes off hook and detects an inadequate dial tone level on the analog phone line.


No Loop Current Detected

Triggered—when the modem goes off hook and does not detect the presence of loop current on the analog phone line.


Outgoing Connection Established

Triggered—when a chassis modem successfully establishes a connection with a remote modem.


Outgoing Connection Terminated

Triggered—when a connection between a chassis modem and a remote modem is terminated for any reason.


Packet Bus Active

Triggered—when a when a packet bus active event is detected by the modem.


Packet Bus Lost

Triggered—when a packet bus lost event is detected by the modem.


PSU Failed

Triggered—when the NMC detects a single fail signal of any PSU in the failed state upon the detection of an over-voltage or over-current condition.  Signal samplings are taken by the NMC every five seconds.


PSU Voltage out of Range

Triggered—when the NMC detects that voltage levels, for one or more of the power supplies on the midplane, are outside the normal operating range for three successive samples, taken at 20 second intervals.

After the event has triggered, a single sample within the innermost range specified by the event descriptors is needed before the event can be triggered again.

Measurements and multiple samples are used to ensure that this event does not occur too frequently, so Auto Response performance is not affected.

Thresholds are chosen to be compatible with all PSUs used in the 17-slot or the 7-slot chassis.

Descriptors (system configured)

♦	+5V Thresholds (+5.51V ,+5.35V ,+4.95V ,+4.75V)

♦	-5V Thresholds (-5.50V, -5.30V, -4.70V, -4.50V)

♦	+12V Thresholds (+13.1V, +12.8V, +11.4V, +11.0V)

♦	-12V Thresholds (-13.0V, -12.6V, -11.4V, -11.0V)


Response Attempt Limit Exceeded

Triggered—when a user dialing into or out exceeds the specified number of Total Control Security Manager prompt retries during a single Security session.

Descriptor (configured only on a chassis-wide basis)

Card:	NMC

Select:	Programmed Settings

Hub Security Group

Response Attempts

Definition:	The number of tries a user is allowed per prompt during any one Total Control Security session

Setting:	1−16 tries

Default:	1

NOTE:  This event usually occurs at the same time that the Dial Out Login Failure or Dial In Login Failure events occur.


User Blacklisted

Triggered—when a user dialing into or out of a chassis modem fails to enter the correct Total Control Security Manager password within the specified number of login attempts.  To support this feature, the RADIUS security server provides a mechanism that informs the NMC when a user is blacklisted.


Configurable Responses

Busy out Analog Phone Line

Busy Out Module’s Analog Phone Lines

Busy out T1 DS0 Channel

Configure Module from Factory Defaults

Configure Module from NMC NVRAM

Continue if Test Passes

Delay Script Execution

Generate Auto Response SNMP Trap

Modem Software Reset

Reconfigure from Modem Factory Defaults

Reconfigure from NMC NVRAM

Remove Module from Service

Reset Module

Restore Analog Phone Line

Restore Module’s Analog Phone Lines

Restore Module to Service

Restore T1 DS0 Channel

Terminate Connection

Terminate Script Execution

Test Analog NIC

Test Analog Phone Line

Test Modem

Test Module


Busy out Analog Phone Line

Instructs the analog NIC to busy out the analog line for the modem generating the event.


Busy Out Module's Analog Phone Lines
Busy Out Module’s Analog Phone Lines

Busies out all analog phone lines associated with the selected modem NAC.


Busy out T1 DS0 Channel

Instructs the T1 Card to busy out the DS0 channel(s) for the modem generating the event.

Descriptor(s)

♦	Slot number where T1 Card is located (1-16)

♦	Number of DS1 entity on T1 Card (1-2)

♦	Number of the DS0 on this span (1-24)

NOTE:  If you reallocate DS0s at any time, you must re configure this response.


Configure Module from Factory Defaults

(A module is defined as a NAC or NMC in the chassis.)

Configures all parameters for every entity on a module, including card- and channel-level entities.  The values used are those established at the factory.


Configure Module from NMC NVRAM

(A module is defined as a NAC or NMC in the chassis.)

Configures all parameters for every entity on a module, including card- and channel-level entities.  The values used are those last saved to the NMC's NVRAM through the Save To NVRAM command.  This response performs the same level of configuration as is supported by the Auto-Configure feature of the NMC.


Continue if Test Passes

Used in conjunction with the Test response, this response affects the further execution of the script.

♦	If the test fails, the script execution continues with the response immediately following the test.

♦	If the test passes, the script parser searches in a linear fashion through the script until it finds the next Continue if Test Passes response.  Once this response is found, the script execution continues at the response immediately following the Continue if Test Passes response.  This provides the expert system (Auto Response engine) with some primitive decision-making capabilities without need for a full blown script language.


Delay Script Execution

Causes execution of a given script to suspend for the number of seconds specified in the response descriptor.

Descriptor(s)

Time Delay in seconds (0-127)


Generate Auto Response SNMP Trap

A single user-defined value (0-127) can be configured to be sent in this Trap.  The management station or some other higher level Auto Response engine could use this feature to convey information when it detects a specific logic state (e.g., a specific point in the response script has been reached) for the purposes of performing additional responses to better handle the specific event that occurred.

Descriptor(s)

User Defined Auto Response Trap ID (0-127)


Modem Software Reset

Attempts to reset the processors associated with the modem entity through message exchange on the management bus.  This relies on the given modem being at least partly functional, to the extent that it can communicate over the management bus.  In an extreme situation, a modem may not be able to complete the request.


Reconfigure from Modem Factory Defaults

Resets all parameters for the modem entity to the factory defaults.


Reconfigure from NMC NVRAM

Configures all parameters for every entity on a module, including card- and channel-level entities.  The values used are those last saved to the NMC's NVRAM through the Save To NVRAM command.  This response performs the same level of configuration as is supported by the Auto-Configure feature of the NMC.  If this request is denied, it is periodically retried until a modem accepts the request at some future time.


Remove Module from Service

(A module is defined as a NAC in the chassis.)

Holds all processors and circuits on the module in a reset state via the hardware reset circuit on the management bus interface.

NOTE:  All modems on a multi-modem card are held in reset state via this response.


Reset Module

Resets all processors and circuits on the module to a known state via the hardware reset circuit on the management bus interface.

NOTE:  All modems on a multi-modem card are reset via this response.


Restore Analog Phone Line

Restores an analog line that has been busied out.  This is the complement of the Busy Out Analog Phone Line response.


Restore Module to Service

(A module is defined as a NAC in the chassis.)

Removes all processors and circuits on the module from a reset state, via the hardware reset circuit on the management bus interface.  This is the complement to the Remove Module from Service response.

NOTE:  All modems on a multi-modem card are removed from the reset state via this response.


Restore Module's Analog Phone Lines
Restore Module’s Analog Phone Lines

Restores all busied out analog phone lines associated with the selected modem NAC.


Restore T1 DS0 Channel

Restores a DS0 channel that has been busied out.  This is the complement of the Busy Out T1 DS0 Channel response.

Descriptor(s)

♦	Slot number where T1 Card is located (1-16)

♦	Number of DS1 entity on T1 Card (1-2)

♦	Number of the DS0 on this span (1-24)

NOTE:  If you reallocate DS0s at any time, you must re configure this response.


Terminate Connection

Hangs up the current call if one is in progress.


Terminate Script Execution

Provides a simple mechanism for disabling scripts without deleting their entire definition.  When the script parsing engine comes across this response, script execution is stopped immediately.

There are no restrictions on where this response can be placed in the script.

Usage Tip:  Inserting this response at the top of an existing script will cause the script not to execute.  But, at some later date, the script could be re-enabled by removing this response.


Test Analog NIC

Performs a complete analog NIC self-test for a particular modem entity where an event has occurred.  If any single test on the NIC fails, the entire test fails.  Success or failure of this test affects which response in the script runs next (see the Continue if Test Passes response).

Usage Tip:  Responses that perform tests are the mechanisms through which branching can be done in the response script execution.  See the Continue if Test Passes response for a further description of this branching.


Test Analog Phone Line

Performs a complete analog phone line test for a particular modem entity where an event has occurred, including a test for dial tone and loop current.  If any single test on the modem fails, the entire test fails. .

Usage Tip:  Responses that perform tests are the mechanisms through which branching can be done in the response script execution.  See the Continue If Test Passes response for a further description of this branching.


Test Modem

Performs a complete modem self test for a particular modem entity where an event has occurred.  This is not a complete card-level test, but rather a complete test of one modem on a given card.  If any single test on the modem fails, the entire test fails.

Usage Tip:  Responses that perform tests are the mechanisms through which branching can be done in the response script execution.  See the Continue If Test Passes response for a further description of this branching.


Test Module

(A module is defined as a NAC or NMC in the chassis.)

Tests all testable entities on the given module.  In  case of Dual or Quad modems, all modems on that card will be run through the self-test.

Usage Tip:  Responses that perform tests are the mechanisms through which branching can be done in the response script execution.  See the Continue If Test Passes response for a further description of this branching.


The Auto Response Engine

Since execution of the Auto Response scripts takes a finite amount of time, a number of events may occur nearly simultaneously.  The Auto Response engine in the NMC queues up events as they occur.  When the Auto Response threadtakes an event message from this queue, it runs the associated script.  This script is executed from start to finish before the Auto Response thread goes back to service the event queue.

A given Auto Response thread buffers up to 10 events.


Interaction with Device Event Enables

Chassis devices allow event reports to be either enabled or disabled through one or more configurable parameters.  With Auto Response, the NMC configures these objects based on whether Traps are enabled and if a response script is defined for the given event.

Although the configurable event enable is still crucial, it is no longer required for devices to store event enables in their NVRAM, as the NMC must always reconfigure them as it needs upon card insertion, reset, etc.  As of release 3.0, the NMC always configures a NAC's event enables based on the combination of trap enable definitions and auto response definitions.  A NAC with NVRAM storage of its trap enables is always overwritten with the NMC-stored definitions.

Those events generated because a threshold has been crossed can be disabled by setting thresholds to 0.  Auto Response will not execute scripts for events whose thresholds are set to 0.


Script Storage and NVRAM

Given NMC resource constraints (i.e., available RAM and NVRAM), for each kind of event that can occur on a given entity or card, there will be a single configurable object for a response script to be executed if the Auto Response engine detects that event.  Response scripts are limited to 20 bytes of storage in the MIB.  Most responses only require a single byte of storage in the script; however, some responses require one or more additional bytes to indicate response descriptors.


Compatibility with other Total Control Products

Interaction with managed devices will be in terms of events detected and the actions that the Auto Response (A/R) engine takes in response to such events.  All events detected by the A/R system either correlate directly with MBP “Event” messages, or are derived from other information available to the NMC.

All actions that the A/R system may take on a device come from the set of available actions that the Network Manager can currently take manually through TCM.  For such actions, the MBP exchange is identical to that of the manual invocation.  Auto Response functions with all modem cards and T1 Cards that can be managed by the NMC.


Exceptions

Script Errors

“ Simultaneous” Event Occurrences

Errors During Response Execution


Script Errors

Scripts are stored as a string of octets.  When a string is configured, it is not validated by the NMC in any way.  In the event that a script is configured with non-existent response IDs, or the required response descriptors are not present, the error(s) are detected upon execution of the script by the Auto Response engine.  Upon detection of such an error, script execution is terminated.


"Simultaneous" Event Occurrences
“Simultaneous” Event Occurrences

Since the Auto Response engine can only operate on a single response script at a time, events that occur during execution of a prior event's script are queued up and handled sequentially.  A maximum of ten outstanding event messages may be queued up for a single Auto Response thread without loss of data.  If an 11th event occurs and the Auto Response thread is not yet finished processing the current script, there will not be space in which to store this 11th event and it will be ignored.


Errors During Response Execution

Errors that occur during response execution, such as management bus failures, refusal of a command, etc. are ignored by the Auto Response engine.  The response script continues execution on the next subsequent response.

Response errors never terminate the script.  A special exception is made when a configuration request is denied.  In this case, the configuration request will pend and be periodically retried until the device accepts it at some future time; meanwhile, the script that initiated the configuration request continues to execute.


Definition Format

For each type of Network Application Card or Network Interface Card defined, the information is broken into the following categories:

♦	Topic (such as Programmed Settings)

♦	Group (such as Call Control Options)

♦	Parameter (such as Additional Answer Tone Time)

The Parameter category may be further divided into the following subsets:

♦	Command Setting Equivalent—a corresponding AT command, S-Register or DIP Switch setting.

♦	Definition—a text description of what the parameter does.

♦	Settings—the permissible values for the parameter.

♦	Default—any default settings that apply for a particular parameter, as implemented when the USR default button is selected in the Configuration screen.


Glossary of Terms

A

A&B signaling

Access method

Address

Address resolution

ANI

Answer

Answer mode

Answer supervision

Application (application program)

ARP

ARQ

ASCII

Asymmetrical modulation

Asynchronous communications

Asynchronous transmission

Attenuation

Auto answer

Auto dial

B

B8ZS

Balanced transmission mode

Bandwidth

Baseband

Baud Rate

BERT

Binary digit

Bisync

Bit Rate

BPS

BPV

Bridge

Broadband

Buffer

Bus topology

Byte

C

Carrier

CCITT

CEPT

Channel bank

Character

Characters Per Second

Chassis

Class 1/EIA-578

Client-server model

Cluster

CRC

CSU

D

Data communications

Data compression table

Data mode

DB9

DCE

Dedicated line

Default

Dial in

Dial out

Digital signals

DIN connector

DIP switches

Disconnect

DNIS

DNS

Domain

DS0

DS1

DSU

DSX-1

DTE

Duplex

E

E&M

EEPROM

EIA

End rack

Equalization

Error control

ESF

Ethernet

F

Facsimile

Fax mode

FDDI

FDM

Feature group

FEP

FGA

FGD

Flow control

Fractional T1

Frame

Full duplex

G

Gateway

Glare

H

Half duplex

Hard busy out

Hardware address

HDLC

Header

Hit

Host address

HST

HCU

Hz (Hertz)

I

Inband signaling

Internet

IP

IP address

IPX

IRB

ISDN

ITU-T

J

Jumper

K

KP/ST

L

LAN

LAPM

LED

Local Echo

M

MF tones

Midplane

Mid-rack

MNP

N

NAC

Netmask

Network address

NIC

Network management

Node

Node address

NVRAM

O

Off/On hook

Online fallback

Originate mode

OSI reference model

P

PAD

Parallel transmission

Parity

PCM

PSU

Protocol

R

RAM

Remote Digital Loopback

Remote echo

RIP

RJ11

Robbed Bit Signaling

ROM

Router

Routing protocol

RS-232

RS-422

S

SAP

SDLC

Seizure

Serial port

Serial transmission

Shunt

SNMP

Soft busy out

SRAM

Start/Stop bits

Subnet

Subnet address

Superframe

Synchronous communication

T

T1

T1 span line

TCP

TCP/IP

TDM

Terminal

Terminal mode

Throughput

Token Ring

Transmission rate

Transmit line buildout

TTL

Trunk

U

Unbalanced transmission mode

UTP

V

V.21 - Fax

V.21 - Modem

V.22

V.22 bis

V.23

V.25

V.27 ter

V.29

V.32

V.32 bis

V.32 terbo

V.34

V.42

V.42 bis

W

WAN

Wink

Word length

Workstation

X

X.25

X.28

X.29

X.3

Xmodem

XON/XOFF


A&B signaling

Procedure most often used in T1GlossT1.736 transmission facilities operated by U.S. telephone companies.  One bit is robbed from each of the 24 subchannels in every sixth frameGlossFrame.661 and is used for carrying dial and control information.


Access method

The mechanism or protocol by which a device or user may connect to and/or or use a network or host.


Address

A generic term for an identifier of a user, host, network, or service.  See also Host address, IP address, IPX, Network address, or node.


Address resolution

The conversion of an IP address into a corresponding hardware address, or vice versa, using ARP.   Also refers to the conversion of IPX addresses into IP addresses or vice versa.


ANI

Automatic Number Identification.  A feature that automatically identifies the calling party's telephone number.  Used by the Total Control modems to signal that special configurations or routing should be used.


Answer

An off hook signal from the called equipment.  This indicates that the call has been properly answered.  This is the time at which billing begins.  The T1 NAC is responsible for transmission of this signal when answering an incoming call and monitoring this signal when dialing an outgoing call.


Answer mode

A state in which the modem transmits at the predefined high frequency of the communications channel and receives at the low frequency.  The transmit/receive frequencies are the reverse of the calling modem which is in Originate mode.


Answer supervision

An off-hook signal transmitted toward the calling end of a switched connection when the called party answers.


Application (application program)

A computer program designed to perform a specific function, such as a word processor or spreadsheet.


ARP

Address Resolution Protocol.  This protocol dynamically finds the low level hardware address that corresponds to the high level address for a host or vice versa.  An IP address is an example of a high level address, so ARP would map IP addresses to the hardware address.

ARP is also used to map IP addresses to IPX addresses and vice versa.


ARQ

Automatic Repeat Request.  A general term for error control protocols which feature error detection and automatic retransmission of defective blocks of data.  See HST, MNP, and V.42.


ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange.  A 7-bit binary code (0's, 1's) used to represent letters, numbers, and special characters such as $, !, and /.  Supported by almost every computer and terminal manufacturer.


Asymmetrical modulation

A duplex transmission technique which splits the communications channel into one high speed channel and one slower channel.  During a call under asymmetrical modulation, the modem with the greatest amount of data to transmit is allocated the high speed channel.  The modem with less data is allocated the slow, or back channel (450 bps).  The modems dynamically reverse the channels during a call if the volume of data transfer changes.


Asynchronous communications

Communication in which no pre-established clock synchronization takes place.  Data is defined with start and stop bits.


Asynchronous transmission

Data transmission in which the length of time between transmitted characters may vary.

Because the time lapses between transmitted characters are not uniform, the receiving modem must be signaled as to when the data bits of a character begin and when they end.  The addition of start and stop bits to each character serves this purpose.


Attenuation

Reduction or loss of signal strength, measured in decibels; opposite of gain.  The difference between transmitted and received power.


Auto answer

A feature in modems enabling them to answer incoming calls over the phone lines without the use of a telephone receiver.


Auto dial

A feature in modems enabling them to dial phone numbers over the phone system without the use of a telephone transmitter.


B8ZS

Bipolar with Eight Zeros Substitution.  Binary 8-zero suppression; a DS1 line code that substitutes 000+-0- for 00000000 to maintain ones' density.


Balanced transmission mode

A method of transmission in which the signal lines and voltages are isolated from ground.  Balanced transmission is used in RS-422 communications, the type used on the Total Control Inter-Rack Bus.


Bandwidth

The measure of the speed at which a network topology, channel or communication line operates.  In digital communications, bandwidth describes the amount of data that can be transmitted over the line in bits per second.


Baseband

A transmission medium that digital signals are sent through without complicated frequency shifting.  Or, any network technology that uses a single carrier frequency and requires all nodes attached to the network to participate in every transmission


Baud Rate

The number of discrete signal events per second occurring on a communications channel.  Although not technically accurate, baud rate is commonly used to mean bit rate.


BERT

Bit Error Rate Test.  To measure the quality of the data transmission, a known pattern of bits is transmitted, and errors received are counted to figure the bit error rate (BER).


Binary digit

A 0 or 1, reflecting the use of a binary numbering system (only two digits).  Used because the computer recognizes either of two states, OFF or ON.  Shortened form of binary digit is bit.


Bisync

Binary Synchronous Control.  An earlier protocol developed by IBM for software applications and communicating devices operating in synchronous environments.  The protocol defines operations at the link level of communications, for example, the format of data frames exchanged between modems over a phone line.  See HDLC, SDLC.


Bit Rate

The number of binary digits, or bits, transmitted per second (bps). Communications channels using telephone channel modems are established at set bit rates, commonly 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 14,400.


BPS

The bits (binary digits) per second rate.


BPV

Bipolar Violation.  Presence of two consecutive one bits of the same polarity on the T carrier line.


Bridge

A device that connects two or more similar networks and forwards complete packets between them.


Broadband

A transmission medium that supports a wide range of frequencies and can carry multiple signals.


Buffer

A memory area used as temporary storage during input and output operations.  An example is the modem's command buffer.   Another is the Transmit Data flow control buffer used for flow control and to store copies of transmitted frames until they are positively acknowledged by the receiving modem.


Bus topology

A network topology in which nodes are connected to a single cable terminated at each end.


Byte

A group of binary digits stored and operated upon as a unit.  A byte may have a coded value equal to a character in the ASCII code (letters, numbers), or have some other value meaningful to the computer.  In user documentation, the term usually refers to 8-bit units or characters.  1 kilobyte (K) is equal to 1,024 bytes or characters; 64K indicates 65,536 bytes or characters.


Carrier

A continuous frequency capable of being either modulated or impressed with another information-carrying signal.  Carriers are  generated and maintained by modems via the transmission lines of the telephone companies.


CCITT

Consultative Committee on International Telephony and Telegraphy.  An organization formerly responsible for establishing telecommunications and data communications standards.  Now the ITU-T.


CEPT

Conference of European Posts and Telecommunications.  A European organization that issues standards on operational and tariff concerns.


Channel bank

A device that multiplexes many slow speed voice or data conversations onto a high speed link and controls the flow of these conversations.


Character

A representation, coded in binary digits, of a letter, number, or other symbol.


Characters Per Second

A data transfer rate generally estimated from the bit rate and the character length.

For example, at 2400 bps, 8-bit characters with Start and Stop bits (for a total of ten bits per character) will be transmitted at a rate of approximately 240 characters per second (cps).  Some protocols, such as USR-HST and MNP, employ advanced techniques such as longer transmission frames and data compression to increase cps.


Chassis

A standard 19-inch card cage that houses all Total Control Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs).


Class 1/EIA-578

An American standard used between facsimile application programs and facsimile modems for sending and receiving faxes.


Client-server model

A common way to describe network services and the programs of those services.  Examples include the DNS name server/name resolver and NFS file server/file client relationships.


Cluster

A group of 2 to 32 interconnected Total Control racks.  A cluster is interconnected with the Inter-Rack Bus (IRB) to form a single, homogeneous dial-up modem network.


CRC

Cyclic Redundancy Checking.  An error detection in which the block check character is the remainder after dividing all the serialized bits in a transmission block by a predetermined binary number.


CSU

Channel Service Unit.  A device that performs line conditioning, such as equalization and line reshaping, and incorporates line loopback test capability.  Provides a T1 line interface that converts polar to bipolar.


Data communications

A type of communications in which computers and terminals are able to exchange data over an electronic medium.


Data compression table

A table of values assigned for each character during a call under data compression.  Default values in the table are continually altered and built during each call:  the longer the table, the more efficient throughput gained.

If a destructive break is sent during a call (see the &Y command in the modem manual), causing the modems to reset the compression tables, you can expect diminished throughput.


Data mode

The mode in which the fax modem is capable of sending and receiving data files.  A standard modem without fax capabilities is always in data mode.


DB9

A 9-position connector used for serial interfaces, for example, a microcomputer's serial COM ports.


DCE

Data Communication or Circuit-Terminating Equipment.  In this documentation, the term applies to dial-up modems that establish and control the data link via the telephone network.


Dedicated line

A user-installed telephone line used to connect a specified number of computers or terminals within a limited area, for example, one building.  The line is a cable rather than a public-access telephone line.  The communications channel may also be referred to as nonswitched because calls do not go through telephone company switching equipment.


Default

Any setting assumed, at startup or reset, by the computer's software and attached devices, and operational until changed by the user.


Dial in

An asynchronous call placed from a terminal on a public data network (PDN) through a packet assembler/disassembler (PAD) to a synchronous remote host on a packet-switched network (PSN).


Dial out

A synchronous call placed from a remote host on a packet-switched network (PSN) through a packet assembler/disassembler (PAD) to an asynchronous terminal on a public data network (PDN).


Digital signals

Discrete, uniform signals.  In this documentation, the term refers to the binary digits 0 and 1.


DIN connector

A connector confirming to the Deutsch Industry Norm (DIN) standard.  DIN connectors are used to connect Total Control boards to the midplane.


DIP switches

Dual In-line Package switches.  DIP switches on Total Control boards are used to select specific functions, such as serial port speed and hardware reset.


Disconnect

An on-hook signal applied to the called trunk or from the called trunk, which ends the call connection.


DNIS

Dialed Number Identification Service.  A feature that automatically identifies part or all of the called party's telephone number.  Used by the Total Control modems to signal that special configurations or routing should be used.


DNS

Domain Name Service.  A distributed hierachical system that resolves host names into IP addresses.  The host information is distributed among name servers that are organized in an hierachy similiar to the UNIX file system hierachy.


Domain

In the Internet, a part of the naming hierachy.  Syntactically, a domain is a sequence of names (labels) separated by periods (.).  A domain is a generic term for a logical connection of entities.  For example, DNS is a collection of names that correspond to IP addresses (and vice versa).


DS0

Digital Service, level 0.  The worldwide standard speed (64 Kbps) for digitized phone-line communication.


DS1

Digital Service, level 1.  A digital communication standard for 1.544 Mbps in North America, 2.048 Mbps elsewhere.


DSU

Digital Service Unit.  A device that converts RS-232 or other terminal interface to a DSX-1 interface.


DSX-1

Digital Service Cross Connect, level 1.  Part of the DS1 specification.


DTE

Data Terminal or Terminating Equipment.  The device that generates or is the final destination of data.


Duplex

Indicates a communications channel capable of carrying signals in both directions. See Half Duplex, Full Duplex.


E&M

Ear and Mouth Signaling.  A form of signaling using separate leads (E&M) for supervisory signaling and for transmitting voice or data.  The E lead receives ground or is open from the signaling unit, and the M lead transmits battery or ground to the signaling unit.


EEPROM

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory.  A ROM that can be electrically erased and reprogrammed without removing it from its circuit or socket.  Also called E2PROM.


EIA

Electronic Industries Association.  Defines electronic standards in the U.S.


End rack

A rack that is at one of the physical ends of an IRB cluster, and is therefore cabled to only one other rack.


Equalization

A compensation circuit designed into modems to counteract certain distortions introduced by the telephone channel.  Two types are used:  fixed (compromise) equalizers and those that adapt to channel conditions.  USRobotics high speed modems use adaptive equalization.


Error control

Various techniques which check the reliability of characters (Parity) or blocks of data.  V.42, MNP and HST error control protocols use error detection (CRC) and retransmission of errored frames (ARQ).


ESF

Extended Superframe.  A T1 frame/format standard that uses a 193-bit frame with one bit for framing and 192 for user information and signals.


Ethernet

A popular 10 Mbps network architecture designed by Xerox that uses passive cabling (coax or twisted-pair) to connect workstations through the use of NICs (network interface cards).


Facsimile

A method for transmitting the image on a printed page from one point to another.  Commonly referred to as Fax.


Fax mode

The mode in which a fax modem is capable of sending and receiving files in a facsimile format.


FDDI

Fiber Distributed Data Interface.  An ANSI standard for a high speed (100 Mbps), token-passing, fiber optic-based network topology.  Up to 1000 stations can be connected with up to 3 km between stations.


FDM

Frequency Division Multiplexing.  A method of serving a number of simultaneous calls by means of a common transmission path with a different frequency for the transmission of each call.


Feature group

Four separate switching arrangements available between local exchange carriers and long distance carriers for customers who wish to make toll calls.


FEP

Front End Processor.  A peripheral computer to a mainframe CPU that handles communications.


FGA

Feature Group A.  Offers entry to the local exchange carriers network through a subscription-type line connection rather than a trunk.  The carrier requires the customer to dial a local number to reach their other common carrier (OCC), then dial an identification number, then dial the long distance number of the required party.


FGD

Feature Group D.  Offers both ANI and DNIS services.


Flow control

A mechanism that compensates for differences in the flow of input and output data from a modem or other device.


Fractional T1

A communication line consisting of some fraction of a standard T1 line.  One T1 line can support up to 24 64-Kbps channels; fractions are allocated in multiples of 64 Kbps.


Frame

A bundle of data organized for transmission.  Three principal elements are included:  control information, transmission, and error detection and correction bits.  A frame is the basic data transmission unit employed in bit-oriented protocols


Full duplex

Signal flow in both directions at the same time.  In microcomputer communications, may refer to the suppression of the online local echo.


Gateway

A network device that is capable of performing protocol conversions, and is used to connect two or more dissimilar networks.


Glare

Occurs when there is a simultaneous seizure on both ends of a two-way trunk.  If this occurs, each end of the trunk receives a prolonged off hook signal.


Half duplex

Signal flow in both directions, but only one way at a time.  In microcomputer communications, may refer to activation of the online Local Echo, which causes the modem to send a copy of the transmitted data to the screen of the sending computer.


Hard busy out

An operator can busy out any individual DS0 channel.  If the line is in use when a hard busy out is executed, the connection is immediately terminated.


Hardware address

The hardware address is intrinsic to a device attached to a network.  It uses the hexadecimal form and is usually hard-coded into the device by the manufacturer.

The ARP protocol maps the hardware address to the IP address.  ARP is also used to map IP addresses to IPX addresses and vice versa.

See also Address resolution.


HDLC

High-Level Data Link Control.  A standard protocol developed by the International Standards Organization for software applications and communicating devices operating in synchronous environments.  The protocol defines operations at the link level of communications, for example, the format of data frames exchanged between modems over a phone line.


Header

An array of pins soldered onto a Printed Circuit Board (PCB).  The header is used with a shunt to form a jumper, or strap.


Hit

A short, erroneous change in a signaling state.  Any change in a signaling state lasting less than 35 ms. is considered a hit.


Host address

The host address is that part of an IP address that uniquely identifies a node (device or user) on the network.  The portion of the IP address that constitutes the host address depends on what the first byte of the address is, and whether or not the network performs subnetting.


HST

High Speed Technology.  USRobotics' proprietary signaling scheme, design and error control protocol for high-speed modems.  HST incorporates trellis-coded modulation, for greater immunity from variable phone line conditions, and asymmetrical modulation for more efficient use of the phone channel at speeds of 4800 bps and above.  HST also incorporates MNP-compatible error control procedures adapted to asymmetrical modulation.


HCU

Hub Controller Unit.  A high speed microprocessor controller that is part of the Total Control Modem Management System.  The HCU automatically monitors and controls all cards in a rack, as well as communications with external devices.


Hz (Hertz)

A frequency measurement unit used internationally to indicate one cycle per second.


Inband signaling

Signaling that uses the same path or DS0 channel as PCM data.  This is a generic term and can take the form of PCM-encoded MF tones, robbed bit signaling or call connection patterns.


Internet

One of the largest internetworks, Internet is a collection of interconnected government research, military installation and university networks.  Based on the TCP/IP protocol suite.


IRB

Inter-Rack Bus.  The data path linking a number of Total Control racks to form a single, homogeneous dial-up modem network.


IP

Internet Protocol.  A packet switching protocol of the TCP/IP protocol suite.


IP address

The 32-bit address defined by the IP protocol.  The IP address is represented in dotted decimal notation (x.x.x.x, where x is any number between 0 and 255).  IP addresses have two parts:  the network portion of the address (the network address) and the host portion of the address (host address) that uniquely identifies the user or device residing on the network.

IP addresses are broken down into classes that define the size of the network:  A (large), B (medium), and C (small).

♦	If the first byte is 1-127, the address is a Class A address.  The first byte is the network address and the last three bytes are the host address.

♦	If the first byte is 129-191, the address is a Class B address.  The first two bytes are the network address and the last two bytes are the host address.

♦	If the first byte is 192-223, the address is a Class C address.  The first three bytes are the network address and the last byte is the host address.

♦	If the first byte is greater than 223, the address is reserved.  These addresses are sometimes referred to as Class D or multicast addresses.


IPX

Internetwork Packet eXchange.  The Novell protocol used by NetWare.  A router with IP routing can interconnect networks so that Novell NetWare clients (users and groups) can communicate with servers (file servers, print servers, etc.).

IPX address

The combination of a 32-bit network number and a 48-bit host number that uniquely identifies a node (user or device) on an IPX network.  Most IPX addresses are in hexadecimal format.  IPX addresses are sometimes referred to as network nodes.


ISDN

Integrated Services Digital Network.  A network system that uses the same digital communications equipment for all voice, data, fax and video.  The same digital line is used for integrated transmission.


ITU-T

International Telecommunications Union-Telecommunications Sector.  An international standards body that establishes telecommunications and data communications protocols.  Formerly the CCITT.


Jumper

A switch composed of a header and a shunt.  The shunt position on the header determines the jumper setting.


KP/ST

Key Pulsing/Start.  Key pulsing is a system of sending telephone calling signals in which digits are transmitted using pushbuttons.  Start indicates a termination of outpulsing.


LAN

Local Area Network.  A local collection of computers, printers, modems and other devices that allows attached workstations to share common resources.  All devices are interconnected through one of the standard network architectures such as Ethernet or Token Ring, and are managed by an operating system such as Novell's NetWare.


LAPM

Link Access Procedure for Modems.  An error control protocol incorporated in CCITT Recommendation V.42.  Like the MNP and HST protocols, LAPM uses cyclic redundancy checking (CRC) and retransmission of corrupted data (ARQ) to ensure data reliability.


LED

Light-Emitting Diode.  A solid state electronic device that can display light to indicate status, characters, or other information.


Local Echo

A modem feature that enables the modem to send copies of keyboard commands and transmitted data to the screen.  When the modem is in Command mode (not online to another system) the local echo is invoked through the ATE1 command.  The command causes the modem to display your typed commands.  When the modem is online to another system, the local echo is invoked through the ATF0 command.  This command causes the modem to display the data it transmits to the remote system.


MF tones

Multi-frequency tones.  MF tones are made up of six frequencies that provide 15 two-frequency combinations for indicating digits 0−9 and KP/ST signals.  In Feature Group B service, these tones represent the dialed number.


Midplane

The Printed Circuit Board (PCB) transversing the middle of the Total Control chassis that provides power to the system components and serves as a common interface between all units that plug into it.  There are four buses on the midplane:  Power Bus, Management Bus, TDM (Time Division Multiplexed) Bus, and Packet Bus.  Network Application Cards (NACs) plug into the midplane from the front; Network Interface Cards (NICs) plug into the midplane from the rear.


Mid-rack

A rack that is physically connected to two other racks in a cluster.  See End rack.


MNP

Microcom Networking Protocol.  An asynchronous error control protocol developed by Microcom, Inc., and now in the public domain.  The protocol ensures error-free transmission through error detection (CRC) and retransmission of errored frames.  USRobotics modems use MNP Levels 1-4 and Level 5 data compression.  MNP Levels 1-4 have been incorporated into CCITT Recommendation V.42.  Compare HST.


NAC

Network Application Card.  One of the front-loading components of the Total Control chassis.


Netmask

Sometimes also referred to as address mask or subnet mask.  This is a bit mask that identifies what bit(s) in an IP address correspond to the network and subnet portions of that IP address, and what bit(s) correspond to the host portion.

A subnet is defined by applying the netmask to the IP address.  If a bit in the netmask is on (set to 1), the corresponding part of the IP address is interpreted as a part of the network address (referred to as a subnet address).  If the bit is off, that part of the IP address is interpreted as a part of the host address.


Network address

The network address is the network portion of an IP address, or that part of the the IP address that identifies the network.


NIC

Network Interface Card.  One of the rear-loading components of the Total Control chassis.


Network management

The management of a switched network to provide the greatest possible efficiency with economy; avoiding congestion on public networks by switching to alternate routes on long distance calls.


Node

A point in a network where a service is provided or used.  Workstations and servers are nodes.


Node address

A node address is an eight-digit hexadecimal address that uniquely identifies devices as part of a network.


NVRAM

Nonvolatile Random Access Memory.  User-programmable random access memory whose data is retained when modem power is turned off.  Used to store a user-defined default configuration loaded into random access memory (RAM) at power on.


Off/On hook

Modem operations which are the equivalent of manually lifting a phone receiver (taking it off hook) and replacing it (going on hook).


Online fallback

A feature that allows high speed error control modems to monitor line quality and fall back to the next lower speed if line quality degrades.  The modems fall forward as line quality improves.


Originate mode

A state in which the modem transmits at the predefined low frequency of the communications channel and receives at the high frequency.  The transmit/receive frequencies are the reverse of the called modem which is in Answer mode.


OSI reference model

A seven layer structure describing network architectures and how data is passed through them.

Layer 7, Application.  Provides the interface to the user and formats user data before passing it to the lower layers (for example, FTP).

Layer 6, Presentation.  Manipulates application data (for example, compression and encryption).

Layer 5, Session.  Manages sessions and data transfers over them.

Layer 4, Transport.  Responsible for end-to-end delivery of data (TCP and UDP are examples of transport layer protocols).

Layer 3, Network.  Responsible for routing data between devices on a network (IP and IPX are examples of network layer protocols).

Layer 2, Datalink.  Responsible for hop-to-hop delivery of data (PPP is an example of a datalink protocol).

Layer 1, Physical.  Responsible for manipulating bits on the physical media (for example, a coaxial cable).


PAD

Packet Assembler/Disassembler.  A device that works in the packet-switched environment to establish, maintain, and disconnect end-to-end logical calls or connections.


Parallel transmission

The transfer of data characters using parallel electrical paths for each bit of the character, for example, 8 paths for 8-bit characters.  Data is stored in computers in parallel form, but may be converted to serial form for certain operations.  See Serial Transmission.


Parity

An error detection method that checks the validity of a transmitted character.  Character checking has been surpassed by more reliable and efficient forms of block-checking, including Xmodem-type protocols and the ARQ protocol implemented in quad modems.

The same type of parity must be used by two communicating computers, or both may omit parity.  When parity is used, a parity bit is added to each transmitted character.  The bit's value is 0 or 1, to make the total number of 1's in the character even or odd, depending on which type of parity is used.


PCM

Pulse Code Modulation.  Modulation of an analog signal in accordance with a specific mode.


PSU

Power Supply Unit.  In the Total Control system, the PSU converts AC power from the wall outlet to DC power for the rack.  The DC power is distributed to all cards in the rack via the midplane.


Protocol

A set of rules and conventions that allows devices to communicate.  The use of standard protocols allows products from multiple vendors to communicate on a common network.


RAM

Random Access Memory.  Memory that is available for use when the modem is turned on, but that clears all data when the power is turned off.  The modem's RAM holds the current operational settings, a flow control buffer, and a command buffer.


Remote Digital Loopback

A test that checks the phone link and a remote modem's transmitter and receiver.  Data entered from the keyboard is transmitted from the initiating modem, received by the remote modem's receiver, looped through its transmitter, and returned to the local screen for verification.


Remote echo

A copy of the data received by the remote system, returned to the sending system and displayed on the screen.  Remote echoing is a function of the remote system.


RIP

Routing Information Protocol.  Lets a router exchange routing information with neighboring routers by sending RIP packets.  RIP packets contain all routing information known to the router.


RJ11

The Universal Standard Order Code (USOC) standard for wiring a single-line, two-wire phone network interface, typically tip and ring signals from the public switched network.


Robbed Bit Signaling

Procedure most often used in T1 transmission facilities operated by U.S. telephone companies.  One bit is robbed from each of the 24 subchannels in every sixth frame and is used for carrying dial and control information.


ROM

Read Only Memory.  Permanent memory, not user-programmable.  The factory settings are stored in ROM and can be read (loaded) into RAM as an operational configuration if DIP switch 10 is ON at power on.


Router

A communications device designed to make decisions about which of several paths a packet of information takes.  The packets are distributed by the router according to address information contained within the packet.


Routing protocol

A protocol that routers (or gateways) use to exchange network topology information.  This information lets routers determine the best path to use when sending packets through that network (or to it).


RS-232

A technical specification published by the Electronic Industries Association that establishes mechanical and electrical interface requirements between computers, terminals, modems, and communication lines.


RS-422

The standard electronic interface for high-speed serial communications using a balanced transmission mode.  This EIA (Electronic Industries Association) standard is highly efficient for communications at high data rates (up to 10 Mbps) and long distances (up to 5000 feet).  The Inter-Rack Bus is compatible with RS-422.


SAP

Service Advertising Protocol.  Servers advertise their addresses and available services.  Routers gather this information and share this information with other routers using RIP packets.  This enables them to create and update databases of network service information.


SDLC

Synchronous Data Link Control.  A protocol developed by IBM for software applications and communicating devices operating in IBM's Systems Network Architecture (SNA).  The protocol defines operations at the link level of communications, for example, the format of data frames exchanged between modems over a phone line.  See Bisync, HDLC.


Seizure

An off hook signal transmitted on a previously idle trunk.  Detection by the T1 NAC of a seizure indicates an incoming call.


Serial port

A computer port that enables the transmission of data characters one bit at a time, using a single electrical path.  Also known as a communications port, or COM port.  On PC-compatible machines, this is a port for asynchronous, serial data transmission and, in the case of modems, for data reception.  Data is transmitted one bit at a time (serially) to devices such as a modem, a serial mouse, or a serial printer.


Serial transmission

The transfer of data characters one bit at a time, sequentially, using a single electrical path.  See Parallel Transmission.


Shunt

The plastic piece used to cover sections of a header on a jumper.  The shunt interconnects certain pins which, depending on placement, determine a functional mode.


SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol.  The protocol suite developed by the Internet community to manage network devices on TCP/IP-based networks and internetworks.


Soft busy out

An operator can busy out any individual DS0 channel.  If the line is in use when a soft busy out is executed, the busy out takes place after the call is disconnected.


SRAM

Static Random Access Memory.  Random access memory which retains recorded information even after main power is switched off by using a battery which supplies the minimum current necessary to refresh the system.


Start/Stop bits

The signaling bits attached to a character before the character is transmitted during Asynchronous Transmission.


Subnet

A subnet is a portion of a network that shares a network address with other portions of the network.  The network address for a subnet consists of the actual network address and a subnet address (which is actually a portion of the host address).  A netmask is used to determine what bits of the host address are the subnet address and what bits are the host address.


Subnet address

The subnet portion of an IP address.  The subnet address is actually a part of the host address and further subdivides the host address to create subnetworks within a given network.  A bit mask called the netmask determines what part of the host address refers to the subnet and what part to an actual host.


Superframe

A T1 frame/format standard that has 12 DS1 frames, each with 193 bit positions.  The first bit is the frame overhead-bit position which is used for frame and signaling phase alignment.


Synchronous communication

Communication in which two devices carefully synchronize data transmission according to a predefined clock signal.  Each requester is allocated a maximum bandwidth and guaranteed a response time not to exceed a specific delay.


T1

A high speed telecommunications line operating at 1.544 Mbps.  Each T1 line can support up to 24 64-Kbps channels.


T1 span line

Twenty-four 64 Kbps DS0 channels, multiplexed into one 1.544 Mbps DS1 rate.  Each DS0 channel carries the digital representation of an analog voice channel.


TCP

Transmission Control Protocol.  A transport layer, connection-oriented, end-to-end protocol.  Provides reliable, sequenced and unduplicated delivery of bytes to a remote or local user.


TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.  A protocol suite that supports large internetworks of communicating machines.  Developed by the Department of Defense to link multiple vendors across networks.


TDM

Time Division Multiplexing.  A transmission system in which characters or bits belonging to different messages are transmitted at successive times on the same channel.


Terminal

A device whose keyboard and display are used for sending and receiving data over a communications link.  Differs from a microcomputer in that it has no internal processing capabilities.  Used to enter data into or retrieve processed data from a system or network.


Terminal mode

An operational mode required for microcomputers to transmit data.  In Terminal mode the computer acts as if it were a standard terminal such as a teletypewriter, rather than a data processor.  Keyboard entries go directly to the modem, whether the entry is a modem command or data to be transmitted over the phone lines.  Received data is output directly to the screen.  The more popular communications software products control Terminal mode as well as enable more complex operations, including file transmission and saving received files.


Throughput

The amount of actual user data transmitted per second without the overhead of protocol information such as Start and Stop bits or frame headers and trailers.  Compare characters per second.


Token Ring

A 4 Mbps and 16 Mbps token-passing network architecture designed by IBM.


Transmission rate

Same as Bit Rate.


Transmit line buildout

Used to eliminate crosstalk problems when the transmitter energy causes errors on the low amplitude receive line.


TTL

Transistor-Transistor Logic.  The most widely used related group of logic circuits, which receive input from a multi-emitter transmitter and output from a pair of transistors.


Trunk

A communications channel between two switching systems.


Unbalanced transmission mode

A method of transmission in which the signals and voltages of the interface are referenced to a ground.  Unbalanced transmission is used in RS-232 communications.


UTP

Unshielded Twisted Pair.  Twisted insulated copper wires bundled into an unshielded cable, commonly used in modem telephone wiring systems.  Grades of UTP include DTP (Datagrade Twisted Pair) and DIW (Distributed Inside Wire).


V.21 - Fax

An ITU-T standard for facsimile operations at 300 bps.


V.21 - Modem

An ITU-T standard for modem communications at 300 bps.  Modems made in the U.S. or Canada follow the Bell 103 standard.  However, the modem can be set to answer V.21 calls from overseas.  Can be controlled with Register S27.


V.22

An ITU-T standard for modem communications at 1200 bps, compatible with the Bell 212A standard observed in the U.S. and Canada.


V.22 bis

An ITU-T standard for modem communications at 2400 bps.  The standard includes an automatic link negotiation fallback to 1200 bps and compatibility with Bell 212A/V.22 modems.


V.23

An ITU-T standard for modem communications at 1200 bps with a 75 bps back channel.  Used in the U.K.


V.25

An ITU-T standard for modem communications that includes an answer tone sequence different from the Bell answer tone used in the U.S. and Canada.  All USRobotics modems can be set with the B0 command so that they use the V.25 2100 Hz tone when answering overseas calls.


V.27 ter

An ITU-T standard for facsimile operations that specifies modulation at 4800 bps, with fallback to 2400 bps.


V.29

An ITU-T standard for facsimile operations that specifies modulation at 9600 bps, with fallback to 7200 bps.


V.32

An ITU-T standard for modem communications at 9600 bps and 4800 bps.  V.32 modems fall back to 4800 bps when line quality is impaired, and fall forward again to 9600 bps when line quality improves.


V.32 bis

An ITU-T standard that extends the V.32 connection range:  4800, 7200, 9600, 12K and 14.4K bps.  V.32 bis modems fall back to the next lower speed when line quality is impaired, and fall back further as necessary.  They fall forward to the next higher speed when line quality improves.


V.32 terbo

An AT&T interim standard for modem communications up to 21.6 Kbps.


V.34

An ITU-T standard for modem communications up to 28.8 Kbps.


V.42

An ITU-T standard for modem communications that defines a two-stage process of detection and negotiation for LAPM  error control.  V.42 also supports the MNP error control protocol, levels 1-4.


V.42 bis

An extension of ITU-T V.42 that defines a specific data compression scheme for use with V.42 and MNP error control.


WAN

Wide Area Network.  A collection of disparate, widely distributed and geographically isolated networks, connected by private or public communications lines.  The connection between a WAN and a LAN is typically made using a bridge, router or gateway.


Wink

An off-hook wink signal is the transition to the off-hook state from an on-hook state, then back to the on-hook state after a short period of time.  The T1 NAC uses the wink signal as a response to a trunk seizure.


Word length

The number of bits in a data character without parity, start or stop bits.


Workstation

A personal computer or terminal attached to the LAN.


X.25

An ITU-T recommendation describing the interface between DTE and DCE for terminals operating in packet mode, connected to a public data network via a dedicated circuit.


X.28

An ITU-T protocol that defines control procedures to establish a connection to a packet assembler/disassembler (PAD), the commands the terminal user sends to the PAD, and the service signals sent by the PAD to the terminal user.


X.29

An ITU-T protocol that defines the control messages sent between a packet assembler/disassembler (PAD) and the remote host on a packet-switched network (PSN).


X.3

An ITU-T protocol that defines a set of parameters the packet assembler/disassembler (PAD) uses to identify and control a terminal on a public data network (PDN).


Xmodem

The first of a family of error control software protocols used to transfer files between modems.  These protocols are in the public domain and are available from many bulletin board services.


XON/XOFF

Standard ASCII control characters used to tell an intelligent device to stop/resume transmitting data.  In most systems typing <Ctrl>-S sends the XOFF character.  Some devices understand <Ctrl>-Q as XON; others interpret the pressing of any key after <Ctrl>-S as XON.


HiPer ARC Configuration Group

  Local IP Address

  Gateway IP Address

  Trap Destination

  Gateway Net Mask

  Ethernet Framing

  Ethernet Interface Name

  Default Management Station IP Address

  Default Community String


Local IP Address

Use this parameter to set or view the local IP address used by the IP Gateway Card for management related access.

MIB Object:	ipgwCfgLocalIpAdrs

Settings: 	IP address


Gateway IP Address

Use this parameter to set or view the gateway used by the IP Gateway Card.

MIB Object:	ipgwCfgGatewayIpAdrs

Settings: 	IP address


Trap Destination

This parameter determines whether the IP Gateway Card sends SNMP traps to the NMC or only to its locally configured management stations.

MIB Object:	ipgwCfgTrapDest

Settings: 	nmc (1)

local (2, default)

both (3)


Gateway Net Mask

Use this parameter to set or view the subnet mask for the IP Gateway Card.

MIB Object:	ipgwCfgGatewayNetMask

Settings: 	IP address


Ethernet Framing

Use this parameter to set or view the type of ethernet framing used by the IP Gateway Card.

MIB Object:	ipgwCfgEthnetFraming

Settings: 	snap (1, default)

dix (2)


Ethernet Interface Name

Use this parameter to set or view the name of the ethernet interface used by the IP Gateway Card.

MIB Object:	ipgwCfgEthIfaceName

Settings: 	DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))


Default Management Station IP Address

Use this parameter to set or view the IP address of the management station that you have selected to manage the IP Gateway Card. This parameter is used with the default community string parameter for management security.

MIB Object:	ipgwCfgDefMgmtStationIp

Settings: 	IP Address (default is 0.0.0.0)


Does the default value for the Default Management Station IP Address imply that selecting an address that isn’t assigned effectively disables this feature?


Default Community String

Use this parameter to set or view the default SNMP community string used by the specified management station when communicating with the IP Gateway Card. This parameter is used with the default management station IP address parameter for management security.

MIB Object:	ipgwCfgDefCommStr

Settings: 	DisplayString (SIZE(0..32))


Gateway Traps Group

  Network Failed

  Network Restored


Network Failed

Use this parameter to enable or disable the generation of an SNMP trap when a network failure of the specified gateway is detected.

MIB Object:	gwTegwNetworkFailed

Settings: 	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Network Restored

Use this parameter to enable or disable the generation of an SNMP trap when a network restore of the specified gateway is detected.

MIB Object:	gwTegwNetworkRestored

Settings: 	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Trap Enables Group

  NAC Reset Trap


NAC Reset Trap

Use this parameter to enable or disable trap reporting for card reset requests initiated from the Gateway NAC user interface.

MIB Object:	ipgwTrapEnaUiReset

Settings: 	enable (1, default)

disable (2)


High Density Modem Event Thresholds

  DTE Idle Timeout Limit (min)

  Connection Timeout Limit

  Block Errors Limit

  Fallback Limit


Related MIB files: Mdm, hdtEt table


DTE Idle Timeout Limit (min)

Use this parameter to set or view the length of time in minutes for the modem to wait before reporting a 'DTE transmit data idle' event

MIB Object:	mdmEtDteIdleThresh

Settings:	0 - 255


Connection Timeout Limit

Use this parameter to set or view the length of time in seconds that the modem will maintain a connection when there is no activity on the phone line.

Note:  This feature is disabled when set to 0.

MIB Object:	mdmCcInactivityTimer

Settings:	0 - 255 (default is 0)


Block Errors Limit

Use this parameter to set or view the number of block errors that the modem will allow before running the associated script.

MIB Object:	mdmArBlersAtThresh

Settings:	0 - 20 (octal)


Fallback Limit

Use this parameter to set or view the number of fall backs that the modem will allow before running the associated script.

MIB Object:	mdmArFbacksAtThresh

Settings:	0 - 20 (octal)


High Density Modem Packet Bus Traps

  Packet Bus Active Trap

  Packet Bus Lost Trap

  Packet Bus Clock Lost Trap

  Packet Bus Clock Restored Trap


Related MIB files: Mdm, hdmTe table


Packet Bus Active Trap

Use this parameter to enable or disable the Packet Bus Active trap.

MIB Object:	mdmTePbActive

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Packet Bus Active Trap - what’s it do? (SMO, 07/17/97)


Packet Bus Lost Trap

Use this parameter to enable or disable the Packet Bus Lost trap.

MIB Object:	mdmTePbLost

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Packet Bus Lost Trap - what’s it do? (SMO, 07/17/97)


Packet Bus Clock Lost Trap

Use this parameter to enable or disable the generation of an SNMP trap upon detection of packet bus clock lost..

MIB Object:	hdmTePbClockLossEvent

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Packet Bus Clock Lost Trap - is “the NAC’s ability to report” the same as “SNMP trap”? (SMO, 07/17/97)  No, we were documenting mdmTePbClockLost in the last pass.  I fixed this to show that an SNMP trap is generated. (LTC, 02/11/97)


Packet Bus Clock Restored Trap

Use this parameter to enable or disable the generation of an SNMP trap upon detection of packet bus clock restored

MIB Object:	hdmTePbClockRestoreEvent

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Packet Bus Clock Restored Trap - is “the NAC’s ability to report” the same as “SNMP trap”? (SMO, 07/17/97) No, we were documenting mdmTePbClockRestored in the last pass.  I fixed this to show that an SNMP trap is generated. (LTC, 02/11/97)


High Density Modem Trap Enables

  On Incoming Call

  On Outgoing Call

  On Incoming Termination

  On Outgoing Termination

  On Connection Timeout

  On DTE Idle Timeout

  On Block Error Count

  On Fallback Count

  On DTE Issued Reset

  DTE Ring No Answer

  Incoming Connection Attempt Fail

  Outgoing Connection Attempt Fail


Related MIB files: Hdm


On Incoming Call

Use this parameter to enable or disable an SNMP trap when an incoming connection establishment is detected on the specified modem.

MIB Object:	hdmTeInConnEstablished

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Outgoing Call

Use this parameter to enable or disable an SNMP trap when an outgoing connection establishment is detected on the specified modem.

MIB Object:	hdmTeOutConnEstablished

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Incoming Termination

Use this parameter to enable or disable an SNMP trap when an incoming termination connection is detected on the specified modem.

MIB Object:	hdmTeInConnTerminated

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Outgoing Termination

Use this parameter to enable or disable an SNMP trap when an outgoing termination connection is detected on the specified modem.

MIB Object:	hdmTeOutConnTerminated

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Connection Timeout

Use this parameter to enable or disable an SNMP trap when the connection time is exceeded on the specified modem.

MIB Object:	hdmTeConnLimitExpired

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On DTE Idle Timeout

Use this parameter to enable or disable an SNMP trap when DTE transmit data idle is detected on the specified modem.

MIB Object:	hdmTeDteXmitDataIdle

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Block Error Count

Use this parameter to enable or disable an SNMP trap when the BLER count exceeds the threshold on the specified modem.

MIB Object:	hdmTeBlerCountAtThresh

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Fallback Count

Use this parameter to enable or disable an SNMP trap when the fallback count exceeds the threshold on the specified modem.

MIB Object:	hdmTeFallbkCountAtThresh

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On DTE Issued Reset

Use this parameter to enable or disable an SNMP trap when reset by DTE is detected on the specified modem.

MIB Object:	hdmTeResetByDTE

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


DTE Ring No Answer

Use this parameter to enable or disable the DTE Ring No Answer trap.

MIB Object:	hdmTeDteRingNoAns

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Incoming Connection Attempt Fail

Use this parameter to enable or disable an SNMP trap when an in bound connection attempt failure is detected on the specified modem.

MIB Object:	hdmTeInConnAttemptFail

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Outgoing Connection Attempt Fail

Use this parameter to enable or disable an SNMP trap when an out bound connection attempt failure is detected on the specified modem.

MIB Object:	hdmTeOutConnAttemptFail

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Template <-> Channel Mapping

Use the Template <-> Channel Mapping dialog box to assign the channels of one or more HiPer DSP cards to any of the four available templates.

Templates allow you to configure multiple channels at the same time. When you select a template for configuration, the TCM application treats all of the channels assigned to that template as a single channel.

Notes:  All channels on a card are initially assigned to Template 1.

A channel can only be assigned to one template at a time.

Changes made to HiPer DSP templates do not affect the associated channels until you perform a Refresh Template x Config Channels command (where x is the number of the modified template (1 through 4).

To assign channels to templates:

1	From the Configure menu, select HiPer DSP Mapping … The Template <-> Channel Mapping dialog box appears.

2	Click on a Slot tab (Slot 1 - Slot 16) to select the card you want to map.

3	Click once in the rectangle that intersects the channel you want to assign and the template it should belong to. An “x” indicates the template assignment of each channel.

4	Assign as many channels as you want using the method described in Step 3.

5	If you want to assign channels to templates on another card, select the matching Slot tab and repeat Steps 3 through 4.

Note: You can use the Clone button to clone selected channel mappings on the current card to all other selected cards .

Click OK to save your selected channel mappings.


To clone channel mappings from one card to others

1	From the TCM Console, select the HiPer DSP card you want to clone from and all HiPer DSP cards you want to clone to.

2	From the Configure menu, select HiPer DSP Mapping … The Template <-> Channel Mapping dialog box appears.

3	Click on the Slot tab for the card you want to clone from.

4	Use the mouse pointer and Ctrl key to select the channel mappings you want to clone.

5	Click Clone. The mappings for your selected channels are copied to the other selected HiPer DSP cards.


Templates allow you to configure multiple channels at the same time. When you select a template for configuration, Total Control Manager/SNMP treats all of the channels assigned to that template as a single channel.


This is a new secondary document for your project.

Click Topic (Ctrl+T) to add a new Help topic.


High Density Modem Cause Codes

  Analog Connection Blocked Error

  Digital Connection Blocked Error

  No IGWS Available Error Code

  Specific B Channel Blocked Error


Analog Connection Blocked Error

Use this parameter to set the error code returned to an ISDN switch when analog connections are being blocked.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgAnlgBlockErrCode

Settings:	0 - 127 (default is 58)


Digital Connection Blocked Error

Use this parameter to set the error code returned to an ISDN switch when digital connections are being blocked.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgDgtlBlockErrCode

Settings:	0 - 127 (default is 58)


No IGWS Available Error Code

Use this parameter to set the error code returned to an ISDN switch when there are no modems available to accept the requested connection.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgNoIgwsAvailErrCode

Settings:	0 - 127 (default is 58)


Specific B Channel Blocked Error

Use this parameter to set the error code returned to an ISDN switch when connections to a specific B channel are being blocked.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgChanBlockErrCode

Settings:	0 - 127 (default is 58)


High Density Modem Call Control Options

  Dial Tone Delay

  Carrier Detect Delay

  Inactive Timer

  Result Codes

  Verbal/Numeric Result Codes

  Result Code Groups

  ARQ Result Codes

  Response to +++

  AT Command Recognition

  V.32 300/600 Hz Tone Times

  V.23 Handshake Timer

  Rings for Automatic Answer

  Answer in Originate Mode

  Billing Delay Timer

  Default Phone Number

  Stored Phone Number 1

  Stored Phone Number 2

  Stored Phone Number 3

  ARQ Negotiation

  MNP/V.42 @ 1200 bps

  MNP/V.42 @ 2400 bps

  MNP/V.42 @ 9600 bps

  MNP/V.42 Link Request Timeout

  V.21 to 34 Fallback Timer

  Additional Answer Tone Time

  Billing Delay Timer

  T1 Call Setup

  Dial Sequence Tone

  Calling Initiation String

  ANI/DNIS Call Initiation Strings

  ANI-Based Incoming Call Digits

  DNIS-Based Incoming Call Digits

  V.42bis Compression over V.120


Dial Tone Delay

This parameter sets the number of seconds the modem waits to dial after detecting a dial tone.

MIB Object: 	hdmCcDialDelay

AT Command:  	S6

Settings: 	Integer values from 0 through 255, 2 (Default)


Carrier Detect Delay

This parameter sets the duration, in seconds, that the local modem waits to detect a  carrier signal from the remote modem.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcWaitForCarrier

AT Command:  	S7

Settings: 	Integer values from 0 through 255, 60 (Default)


Inactivity Timer

If the value of this function is set greater than 0, the Inactivity Timer is activated when there is no data activity in either the transmit or receive direction.  If no data activity is detected by the timeout period (specified in minutes), the modem hangs up.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcInactivityTimer

AT Command:  	S19

Settings: 	0 - 255, 0 (Default)


Result Codes

This parameter enables or disables the modem's result code messages to the modem's DTE, such as OK and CONNECT.  With Originate Only, the modem only displays result codes when placing a call.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcQuietResultCodes

AT Command:  	Qn, DIP Switch 3, DIP Switch 7

Settings:	No Result (Default), Display Result, Originate Only


Verbal/Numeric Result Codes

When set to Verbal, this parameter displays modem result codes as words.  When set to Numeric, this function displays modem result codes as numbers.

MIB Object: 	hdmCcResponseMode

AT Command:  	Vn, DIP Switch 2

Settings:	Verbal (Default) or Numeric


Result Code Groups

Selects one of the eight optional result code subsets.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcResultCodeOptions

AT Command: 	Xn

Settings:	0 - 7, 1 (Default)

Table 1 summarizes the result codes available with each of the Xn settings.  Table 2 defines these codes.

Result Code Options

Result Codes	X0	X1	X2	X3	X4	X5	X6	X7

0/OK	•	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

1/CONNECT	•	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

2/RING	•	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

3/NO CARRIER	•	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

4/ERROR	•	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

5/CONNECT 1200	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

6/NO DIAL TONE	•	•	•	•

7/BUSY	•	•	•	•	•

8/NO ANSWER	•	•	•	•	•

9/RESERVED

10/CONNECT 2400	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

11/RINGING	•	•	•

12/VOICE	•	•

13/CONNECT 9600	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

18/CONNECT 4800	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

20/CONNECT 7200 	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

21/CONNECT 12000	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

25/CONNECT 14400	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

43/CONNECT 16800 	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

85/CONNECT 19200	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

91/CONNECT 21600	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

99/CONNECT 24000	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

103/CONNECT 26400	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

107/CONNECT 28800	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

Functions

Adaptive Dialing	•	•	•	•	•	•

Wait for 2nd Dial Tone (W)	•	•	•	•	•

Wait for Answer (@)	•	•	•	•	•

Fast Dial	•	•	•	•

Result Code Definitions

Result Code	Meaning

0/OK	Command has been executed.

1/CONNECT	Connection established with another modem; if set to X0, connection may be at 300, 1200, 2400 or 9600 bps; if X1 or higher, connection is at 300 bps.

2/RING	Incoming ring detected.

3/NO CARRIER	Carrier detect has failed or carrier has been dropped due to disconnect.

4/ERROR	Command is invalid.

5/CONNECT 1200	Connection established with another modem at 1200 bps.

6/NO DIAL TONE	Dial tone not detected during the normal 2 seconds, set in Register S6.

7/BUSY	Busy signal detect; modem hangs up.

8/NO ANSWER	After waiting 5 seconds for an answer, modem hangs up; returned instead of NO CARRIER when the @ option is used.

10/CONNECT 2400	Connection established with another modem at 2400 bps.

11/RINGING	The modem has dialed; remote phone line is ringing.

12/VOICE	Voice answer at remote site; modem hangs up.

13/CONNECT 9600	Connection established at reported rate.  Same meaning for results of 4800 (18), 7200 (20), 12K (21), 14.4K (25), 16.8K (43, HST only), 19.2K (85), 21.6K (91), 24K (99), 26.4K (103) and 28.8K (107).

Adaptive Dialing	The modem attempts to use tone dialing and, if that doesn't work on the line, reverts to rotary dialing.

Wait for Another	The modem continues dialing as soon as it detects another dial tone.

  Dial Tone (W)

Wait for an 	The modem continues dialing when it detects 5 seconds of silence

  Answer (@)	on the line.

Fast Dial	The modem dials immediately on dial-tone detect, instead of waiting the normal 2 seconds, set in Register S6.


ARQ Result Codes

The ARQ Codes Suppressed/Displayed option toggles off and on the codes that indicate a successful error-control connection has been made.  The Include HST, V.32 option enables the display of HST/V.32 modulation codes in addition to the ARQ codes.  The Include Protocol option enables the display of all ARQ and protocol codes.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcArqResultCodeMode

AT Command:	&An

Settings:	ARQ Results Enabled (Default)

ARQ Results Disabled

Include HST, V.32

Include Protocol


Response to +++

This parameter determines the modem's response to an escape code sequence.  When set to Go On Hook, this sequence terminates the connection and the modem enters command mode.  When set to Enter Command Mode, an escape code puts the modem into online command mode without terminating the connection.  In this mode, AT commands may be given to the modem.  To return to the session, send the modem the ATO command.  If set to Ignore Escape Code, the modem ignores the escape sequence and passes it through as normal data.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcEscCodeRsp

AT Command: 	+++, DIP Switch 9

Settings:	Enter Command Mode (Default), Go On Hook, or Ignore Escape Code


AT Command Recognition

This parameter determines the modem's response to an escape code sequence.  When set to Go On Hook, this sequence terminates the connection and the modem enters command mode.  When set to Enter Command Mode, an escape code puts the modem into online command mode without terminating the connection.  In this mode, AT commands may be given to the modem.  To return to the session, send the modem the ATO command.  If set to Ignore Escape Code, the modem ignores the escape sequence and passes it through as normal data.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcAtRecognition

AT Command: 	+++, DIP Switch 9

Settings:	Enter Command Mode (Default), Go On Hook, or Ignore Escape Code


V.32 300/600 Hz Tone Times

This parameter sets the duration, in tenths of a second, of the EIA-specified Multimode Training sequence for V.32 modems, which includes U.S. Robotics Dual Standard modems set to answer V.32 calls (set to B0).  The delay gives V.32 modems additional time to connect with most U.S./Canada modems at 9600 bps before falling back to attempt a V.21 connection (to answer overseas calls, 300 bps) or a V.23 connection (some United Kingdom modems, 1200 bps with a 75-bps back channel).  The fallback occurs only if the modem is set for V.21 (S27, bit 0 enabled) and/or V.23 (S34, bit 3 enabled).

MIB Object:  	hdmCcV32ToneDuration

AT Command:  	S28

Settings: 	0 - 255, 8 (Default)


V.23 Handshake Timer

This parameter sets the duration, in tenths of a second, of the V.23 handshake timer for the multimode training sequence.  When set to 0 the V.23 answer tones are disabled, resulting in faster connect times on modems capable of Bell 208B operation.  The default setting should be appropriate for most installations.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcV23Timeout

AT Command:  	S45

Settings: 	0 - 255, 0 (Default)


Rings for Automatic Answer

This parameter sets the number of rings on which to answer incoming calls when the modem is in Auto Answer mode.  Setting to 0 disables the modem's Auto Answer feature.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcAutoAnswer

AT Command:  	S0, DIP Switch 5

Settings: 	Integer values from 0 through 255, 1 (Default)


Answer in Originate Mode

This parameter sets the modem to Auto Answer in Originate mode.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcAnswerInOrigMode

AT Command:  	S13.1

Settings:	Disable  (Default), or Enable


Default Phone Number

This parameter is the phone dial string stored in the modem's NVRAM at position 0, used by default when either the Dial on DTR or Auto Dial on Power Up options are enabled.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcPhoneString0

AT Command:  	&Z0

Settings:	Null (Default), Display String


Stored Phone Number 1

A phone number dial string of up to 40 characters stored in the modem's NVRAM at position 1.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcPhoneString1

AT Command:  	&Z1

Settings: 	Null (Default) or Display String


Stored Phone Number 2

A phone number dial string of up to 40 characters stored in the modem's NVRAM at position 2.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcPhoneString2

AT Command:  	&Z2

Settings: 	Null (Default) or Display String


Stored Phone Number 3

A phone number dial string of up to 40 characters stored in the modem's NVRAM at position 3.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcPhoneString2

AT Command:  	&Z3

Settings: 	Null (Default) or Display String


ARQ Negotiation

Setting this parameter to none, allows async connections without error control.  When set to Sync Mode, allows synchronous connections.  If set to Normal ARQ (default), the local modem attempts to connect under error control, but will connect without it if it can't be negotiated.  If set to ARQ Only, the local modem attempts to use error correction for async calls and hangs up if the remote modem is not using error correction.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcErrorCntlMode

AT Command:  	&Mn

Settings:	Normal ARQ  (Default), None, Sync Mode, or ARQ Only


MNP/V.42 @ 1200 bps

This parameter makes it possible to exclude MNP/V.42 from link negotiations at 1200 bps, by selecting the Disable setting.  The default setting includes these negotiations.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcMnpWith1200

AT Command:  	S51.0

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


MNP/V.42 @ 2400 bps

This parameter makes it possible to exclude MNP/V.42 from link negotiations at 2400 bps, by selecting the Disable setting. The default setting includes these negotiations.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcMnpWith2400

AT Command:  	S51.1

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


MNP/V.42 @ 9600 bps

This parameter makes it possible to exclude MNP/V.42 from link negotiations at 9600/14,400 bps (both V.32 and V.32 bis), by selecting the Disable setting.  The default setting includes these negotiations.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcMnpWith9600

AT Command:  	S51.2

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


MNP/V.42 Link Request Timeout

This parameter specifies the MNP/V42 link request timeout for negotiation of 1200 and 2400 bps calls.  Default=5."

MIB Object:  	hdmCcMnpTimeout

Settings:  	Integer values from 1 through 14, 5 (Default)


V.21 to V.23 Fallback Timer

This parameter sets the V21/V23 fallback timer.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcV21V23FallBackTimer

AT Command:	S29

Settings:  	Integer values from 1 through 255, 20 (Default)


Additional Answer Tone Time

This parameter selects the additional answer tone duration.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcAddnlAnswToneDur

AT Command:	S49

Settings:  	Integer values from 1 through 255, 16 (Default)


Billing Delay Timer

This parameter sets the billing delay duration.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcBillingDelayPeriod

AT Command:	S50

Settings:  	Integer values from 1 through 255, 100 (Default)


T1 Call Setup

This parameter determines how the T1 call is setup. A parameter value of none assumes a dedicated, or leased, DS0 line is assigned to the modem.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcT1CallSetupProc

Settings:  	Normal Setup (Default) or None


Dial Sequence Tone

This parameter enables or disables KP and ST MF tone encapsulation of the dial sequence.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcT1KpStMfTones

Settings:  	Enable (Default) or Disable


Call Initiation String

This parameter enables or disables call initiation strings.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcT1CallInitStrUse

Settings:  	Enable (Default) or Disable


ANI/DNIS Call Initiation Strings

This parameter selects either DNIS or ANI for the calling initiation string base.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcT1CallInitStrBase

Settings:  	dnisBase (Default) or aniBase


ANI-Based Incoming Call Digits

This parameter determines the number of ANI digits allowed in incoming calls.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcT1DialInAniDig

Settings:  	Integer values from 0 through 12, 0 (Default)


DNIS-Based Incoming Call Digits

This parameter determines the number or DNIS/DID digits allowed in incoming calls.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcT1DialInDnisDig

Settings:  	Integer values from 0 through 12, 0 (Default)


V.42bis Compression over V.120

This parameter shows the V.42bis compression over V.120.

MIB Object:  	hdmCcEnableV120v42Bis

Settings:  	Disable (1, Default)

Enable (2)


Topic created 6/23/98 by LTC

Related files hdmgrp.dat and hdm.mib


Select Card Level or HiPer DSP Template(s)

This dialog appears when you attempt to view or change programmed settings on one or more HiPer DSP cards selected at the card level of the TCM Console.

Note: Changes made to HiPer DSP templates do not affect the associated channels until you perform a Refresh Template x Config Channels command (where x is the number of the modified template (1 through 4)).

To open the Card Level parameter groups:

Click the Card Level radio button and then click OK. The card level parameter groups appear in the HiPer DSP Card Programmed Settings dialog box.

To open the HiPer DSP Templates parameter groups:

1	Click the HiPer DSP Template(s) button.

2	Select the templates that you want to change or view. Selected groups are indicated by an “x”.

3	Click OK. The HiPer DSP Programmed Settings dialog box appears.

4	Click on a parameter group in the Parameter Groups pulldown. The parameter values for your selected groups are displayed.


Selecting and Deselecting HiPer DSP Templates

You can select templates in the following ways:

To select all templates on one or more cards:

To select one or more templates on all selected cards:

To select all templates on all selected cards:

To select individual templates on a specific card:

To deselect a group:

Note: You can also combine these selection tools. For example, to select all templates on all cards except for Template 4 on Slot 3, click All, and then click once in the rectangle that intersects the Template 4 row and the Slot 3 column to deselect it.


Select Channels

This dialog appears when you attempt to view Performance Monitor data or view or change programmed settings, actions/commands, or trap settings on one or more HiPer DSP modems selected at the modem LED level of the card. You can select channels in the following ways:

To select all channels on one or more cards:

To select one or more channels on all selected cards:

To select all channels on all selected cards:

To select individual channels on a specific card:

To deselect a channel:

Note: You can also combine these selection tools. For example, to select all channels on all cards except for Channel 4 on Slot 3, click All, and then click once in the rectangle that intersects the Channel 4 row and the Slot 3 column to deselect it.


To select all channels on one or more cards

Click the slot numbers for those cards (Slot 1 - Slot 16).


To select one or more channels on all selected cards

Click the channel numbers (Channel 1 - Channel 24 or Channel 1 - Channel 30, depending on the version of software installed).


To select all channels on all selected cards

Click All.


To select individual channels on a specific card

Click once in the matching cell.

For example, to select Channel 1 on the card in Slot 3, click once in the rectangle that intersects the Channel 1 row and the Slot 3 column.


To deselect a channel:

Click once in any cell containing an "x" to deselect it.


To select all templates on one or more cards

Click the slot numbers for those cards (Slot 1 - Slot 16).


To select one or more templates on all selected cards

Click the template numbers (Template 1 - Template 4)


To select all templates on all selected cards

Click All.


To select individual templates on a specific card

Click once in the matching cell.

For example, to select Template 1 on the card in Slot 3, click once in the rectangle that intersects the Template 1 row and the Slot 3 column.


To deselect a template

Click once in any cell containing an "x" to deselect it.


Refresh Template Config Channels

HiPer DSP channels can be configured individually or as part of a configuration template, but every channel is always assigned to a template. Template changes, once activated, overwrite all channel level configurations with the template’s configuration values. The Refresh Template Config Channels command reduces the chance of accidentally overwriting your individual channel configurations.

To make your template changes active on the associated channels:

1	From the Configure menu, select Actions/Commands. The Total Control Manager Commands dialog box appears.

2	Set the first Command to Execute field to Software.

3	From the second Command to Execute field, select the refresh command that matchs the template you changed. The command syntax is:

Refresh Template x Config Channels (where x = 1, 2, 3, or 4).

4	Click Execute to make your template changes take effect.

5	Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each template changed.

6	Click Close to close the Total Control Manager Commands dialog box.


This is a new secondary document for your project.

Click Topic (Ctrl+T) to add a new Help topic.


DNIS Access Codes

  DNIS Group 1

  DNIS Group 1 Initialization String

  DNIS Group 2

  DNIS Group 2 Initialization String

  DNIS Group 3

  DNIS Group 3 Initialization String

  DNIS Default String


DNIS Group 1

This parameter is a user-defined number from one to ten digits. Also known as a DNIS Carrier Access Code Number, it is compared against the phone number dialed by an incoming call.  If there is a match, the modem is configured with DNIS Initialization String 1 before the call is answered.

MIB Object:	hdmCcCarrierAccessCode1

Settings:	Display String

Null	(Default)


DNIS Group 1 Initialization String

This parameter is a user-defined string from 1 to 30 characters.  This init string configures a modem when an incoming call matches DNIS Group 1.

MIB Object:	hdmCcCallingInitStr1

Settings: 	Display String

Null  (Default)


DNIS Group 2

This parameter is a user-defined number from one to ten digits.  Also known as a DNIS Carrier Access Code Number, it is compared against the phone number dialed by an incoming call.  If there is a match, the modem is configured with DNIS Initialization String 2 before the call is answered.

MIB Object:	hdmCcCarrierAccessCode2

Settings: 	Display String

Null  (Default)


DNIS Group 2 Initialization String

This parameter is a user-defined string from 1 to 30 characters.  This init string configures a modem when an incoming call matches DNIS Group 2.

MIB Object:	hdmCcCallingInitStr2

Settings: 	Display String

Null  (Default)


DNIS Group 3

This parameter is a user-defined number from one to ten digits.  Also known as a DNIS Carrier Access Code Number, it is compared against the phone number dialed by an incoming call.  If there is a match, the modem is configured with DNIS Initalization String 3 before the call is answered.

MIB Object:	hdmCcCarrierAccessCode3

Settings: 	Display String

Null  (Default)


DNIS Group 3 Initialization String

This parameter is user-defined string from 1 to 30 characters. This init string is used to configure a modem when an incoming call matches DNIS Group 3.

MIB Object:	hdmCcCallingInitStr3

Settings: 	Display String

Null  (Default)


DNIS Default String

This parameter is a user-defined string from 1 to 30 characters.  This init string configures a modem when an incoming call does not match any of the defined DNIS groups.

MIB Object:	hdmCcCallingInitStr4

Settings: 	Display String

Null  (Default)


High Density Modem Data Compression Settings

  Data Compression Mode


Data Compression Mode

The default setting allows the modem to negotiate V.42 bis, then MNP level 5 data compression for an Automatic Repeat Request (error control) call, when the modem's DTE rate is higher than the call's connection rate. When the DTE rate is equal to the connection rate, the modem disables compression. The Enabled option allows data compression regardless of the modem's DTE rate. The MNP without Compression option is available to users transferring already-compressed files, because MNP5 compression degrades throughput for those files.  (V.42 bis works very well with already-compressed files.)  The None option disables all data compression.

MIB Object:	hdmDcDataCompression

AT Command:  	&Kn

Settings:	AutoEnable

None

Enable

MNP without Compression


High Density Modem DTE Interface Settings
DTE Interface Settings for High Density Modems

  Carriage Return Character

  Line Feed Character

  Backspace Character

  Echo DTE Data

  Break Handling Methods

  DTE NVRAM Lock


Carriage Return Character

This parameter stores the ASCII decimal value of the carriage return character.

MIB Object:	hdmDiCarriageRetChar

AT Command:  	S3

Settings:	0 - 255, 13 (Default)


Line Feed Character

This parameter stores the ASCII decimal value of the line feed character.

MIB Object:	hdmDiLineFeedChar

AT Command:  	S4

Settings:	0 - 255, 10 (Default)


Backspace Character

This parameter stores the ASCII decimal value of the backspace character. A value of 128 through 255 disables the key's delete function.

MIB Object:	hdmDiBackspaceChar

AT Command:  	S5

Settings:	0 - 255, 8 (Default)


Echo DTE Data

This parameter enables or disables the echo of typed AT commands to the modem's DTE when the modem is in command mode.

MIB Object:	hdmDiCmdLocalEchoEna

AT Command:  	En, DIP Switch 4

Settings:	Disable (1, default)

Enable (2)


Break Handling Methods

Selects one of the methods for sending a break to abort a data transfer without disconnecting from the data link.  Destructive breaks flush the modem's transmit data buffer. Expedited breaks are sent immediately to the remote system. Not Sent indicates that the break is not sent to the remote modem; this can be used to clear data from the transmit buffer without passing on the break to the remote modem.

MIB Object:	hdmDiBreakHandling

AT Command:  	&Yn

Settings:	Destructive Expedited (Default)

Destructive Not Sent

Non-destructive Expedited

Non-destructive Not Sent


DTE NVRAM Lock

When Enabled, the modem's NVRAM settings and stored phone numbers are read-only and cannot be changed by the modem's DTE user.

MIB Object:	hdmDiDteNvramLock

AT Command:  	R&W

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


High Density Modem Dial Out Configuration

  Dial Out Timeslot Selection

  Timeslot Selection Direction

  Timeslot Selection Starting Point

  Channelized T1 Profile


Dial Out Timeslot Selection

Use this parameter to define how DS0s are chosen for Dial-out by CHT1 or CHE1 software.

MIB Object:	chT1E1DialOutDs0Selection

Settings:	notSupported (1)

fixedAssignment (2) -	chooses DS0 by searching usrds0cfgAssignedChannel for 	the corresponing DS0.

firstAvailable (3, default)


Timeslot Selection Direction

Use this parameter to set or view how DS0s are chosen (by hunting either up or down from the current starting DS0).

MIB Object:	usrds1CfgchT1E1DOSltDirt

Settings:	notSupported (1)

down (2)

up (3)


Timeslot Selection Starting Point

Use this parameter to set or view the DS0 that dial-out hunting uses as its starting point.

MIB Object:	usrds1CfgchT1E1DONextDS0

Settings:	integer


Channelized T1 Profile

Use this parameter to configure the channelized T1 profile.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgCht1Profile

Settings:	eAndMTypeIIFGB (2)

eAndMTypeIIFGD (3)

eAndMTypeIIGeneric (4)

loopStart (5)

groundStart (6)


High Density Modem Fractional Table Settings

  Frac Index


Related MIB files: Rfc1406


Frac Index

This object displays the value that uniquely identifies the related DS1 interface. This value also identifies the interface in the dsx1LineIndex object.

MIB Object:	dsx1FracIndex

Settings:	integer (1 - 7fffffff)


ISDN Modem Call Control Options for HiPer DSP

  V120 Rate Adaptation

  X75 Frame Size

  X75 Window Size


V120 Rate Adaptation

This parameter enables or disables V120 rate adaptation.

MIB Object:	hdmICcV120

Settings:  	disable (1, default)

enable (2)


What in the WORLD is V120? SMO, 09/22/97

Linked the current info to the help system.  LTC 10/13/97


X75 Frame Size

Use this parameter to set or view the X75 frame size.

MIB Object:	imdmCcFrameSize

Settings:  	Integer (1..2048 (default is 2048))


What is X75 frame size? SMO, 09/22/97

Linked the current info to the help system.  LTC 10/13/97


X75 Window Size

Use this parameter to set or view the X75 window size.

MIB Object:	imdmCcWindowSize

Settings:  	Integer (1..7 (default is 2))


What is X75 window size? SMO, 09/22/97

Linked the current info to the help system.  LTC 10/13/97


High Density Modem Line Interface Options
Line Interface Options for High Density Modems

  Dial Pause Delay

  Carrier Detect Delay

  Carrier Loss Detect Delay

  Tone Dial Spacing

  Guard Tone Frequency

  2100 Hz Answer Tone


Dial Pause Delay

This parameter sets the duration, in seconds, for the pause (,) option in the Dial command (ATD) and for the pause between dialing attempts with automatic redialing (> or A>) commands.

MIB Object:	hdmLiDialPause

AT Command:  	S8

Settings:	0 through 255, 2  (Default)


Carrier Detect Delay

This parameter sets the duration, in tenths of a second, that the remote modem's carrier signal must be present before the local modem recognizes the signal.  Ignored at speeds above 2400.

MIB Object:	hdmLiCarrierRecDelay

AT Command:  	S9

Settings: 	0 through 255, 6  (Default)


Carrier Loss Detect Delay

This parameter sets the duration, in tenths of a second, that the modem waits after the loss of the remote modem's carrier signal before hanging up.  This setting allows the modem to distinguish between a momentary lapse due to line quality and a true disconnect by the remote modem.

If this value is set to 255, the modem does not hang up on loss of carrier.  It hangs up only when DTR is dropped or if it receives the +++ escape code sequence and returns to command mode.  Note that the exact action taken by the modem on receipt of the escape sequence depends on the setting of the Escape Code Action parameter.  (When set to Ignore Escape Code or Enter Online Command Mode, the ATH command must be used to hang up the modem.)

MIB Object:	hdmLiCarrierLoss

AT Command:  	S10

Settings:	0 through 255, 7  (Default)


Tone Dial Spacing

This parameter sets the duration and spacing, in milliseconds, of dialed touch tones.

MIB Object:	hdmLiToneDialTiming

AT Command:  	S11

Settings: 	0 through 255, 70  (Default)


Guard Tone Frequency

This parameter is required for modems to answer calls originating from sites outside of North America.  The modems must be operating at 1200 or 2400 bps and the Handshake option must be set to the V.32 ITU-T answer sequence.  When European is selected, the modem sends a 550 Hz guard tone after the answer tone; when U.K. is selected, the modem sends a 1800 Hz guard tone after the answer tone.

MIB Object:	hdmLiGuardTone

AT Command:  	&Gn

Settings:	None  (Default)

European, 550 Hz

U.K., 1800 Hz


2100 Hz Answer Tone

This parameter enables or disables the 2100 Hz answer tone, allowing V.42 modems to connect more quickly and or eliminating problems with older 2400-bps modems that do not recognize this tone.

MIB Object:	hdmLiAnswerTone

AT Command:  	S27.3

Settings:	Enable  (Default) or Disable


This is a new secondary document for your project.

Click Topic (Ctrl+T) to add a new Help topic.


Modem Error Control Settings for High Density Modems

  MNP Level 3 Error Correction

  MNP Level 4 Error Correction

  Special 2400 bps MNP

  V.42/MNP Negotiation Method


MNP Level 3 Error Correction

This parameter disables MNPG level 3 so that MNP level 2 can be tested.

MIB Object:	hdmEcMnp3

AT Command:	S13.6

Settings:	Enable  (Default)

Disable


MNP Level 4 Error Correction

This parameter enable or disable MNPG level 4.  It may be necessary to disable this function when poor line conditions are expected.

MIB Object:	hdmEcMnp4

AT Command:  	S15.4

Settings:	Enable  (Default)

Disable


Special 2400 bps MNP

This parameter enables connections with earlier non-U.S. Robotics 2400-bps modems that are not fully compatible with the MNPG protocol.

MIB Object:	hdmEcMnpUnusual

AT Command:	S15.6

Settings:	Disable  (Default)

Enable


V.42/MNP Negotiation Methods

This parameter determines the error control handshaking mode.  The default allows full error-control handshaking:  the modem attempts to connect under V.42 error control and, if that fails, tries to connect under MNPG error control.  When set to disable either V.42 or MNP, the modem will only attempt to negotiate the enabled protocol. When set to disable the V.42 Detect Phase, this phase is skipped during the handshaking process, allowing for faster connections between V.42 modems.

MIB Object:	hdmEcV42MnpHandshake

Settings:	Enable All  (Default)

Enable V.42 Disable MNP

Disable V.42 Enable MNP

Disable Detection Phase


Modem Identification Group

  Data Pump Software Revision

  Supervisor Software Date


Data Pump Software Revision

Use this parameter to view the software revision being executed by the modem's data pump processor.

MIB Object:	mdmIDDataPumpSwRev

Settings:	DisplayString (SIZE(0..11))


Supervisor Software Date

Use this parameter to view the supervisor build date.

MIB Object:	mdmIDSupervisorDat

Settings:	DisplayString (SIZE(0..8))


High Density Modem Signal Converter Settings
Signal Converter Settings for High Density Modems

  Link Rate Minimum

  Link Rate Maximum

  Non-ARQ Transmit Buffer Size

  Buffer RX during MNP

  V.21 Modulation

  V.32 Unencoded Modulation

  V.32 Modulation

  V.32 bis Modulation

  V.32 Enhanced Mode

  V.32 Fast Retrain

  V.23 Call Negotiation

  Fallback Disable

  V.32 Turbo Modulation

  V.34 Modulation

  2400 Symbol Rate

  2743 Symbol Rate

  2800 Symbol Rate

  3000 Symbol Rate

  3200 Symbol Rate

  3429 Symbol Rate

  8S-2D Mapping

  16S-4D Mapping

  32S-2D Mapping

  64S-4D Mapping

  Non-linear Coding

  TX Level Deviation

  Preemphasis

  Precoding

  Shaping

  V.FC Modulation

  V.8 Mode

  V.8 Call Indicator

  V.34 +

  300 Baud

  1200 Baud

  2400 Baud

  High Speed

  V.42 Selective Reject


Link Rate Minimum

This parameter determines the minimum link rate.

MIB Object:  	hdmScLinkRateMin

Settings:	variable (1)

300 bps (2)

1200 bps (3)

2400 bps (4)

4800 bps (5)

7200 bps (6)

9600 bps (7)

12000 bps (8)

14400 bps (9)

16800 bps (10)

19200 bps (11)

21600 bps (12)

24000 bps (13)

26400 bps (14)

28800 bps (15)

31200 bps (16)

33600 bps (17)

33333 bps (18)

37333 bps (19)

41333 bps (20)

42666 bps (21)

44000 bps (22)

45333 bps (23)

46666 bps (24)

48000 bps (25)

49333 bps (26)

50666 bps (27)

52000 bps (28)

53333 bps (29)

54666 bps (30)

56000 bps (31)

57333 bps (32)

64000 bps (33)

28000 bps (34)

29333 bps (35)

30666 bps (36)

32000 bps (37)

34666 bps (38)

36000 bps (39)

38666 bps (40)

40000 bps (41)

58666 bps (42)

60000 bps (43)

61333 bps (44)

62666 bps (45)


Link Rate Maximum

This parameter determines the maximum link rate.

MIB Object:  	hdmScLinkRateMax

Settings: 	variable (1)

300 bps (2)

1200 bps (3)

2400 bps (4)

4800 bps (5)

7200 bps (6)

9600 bps (7)

12000 bps (8)

14400 bps (9)

16800 bps (10)

19200 bps (11)

21600 bps (12)

24000 bps (13)

26400 bps (14)

28800 bps (15)

31200 bps (16)

33600 bps (17)

33333 bps (18)

37333 bps (19)

41333 bps (20)

42666 bps (21)

44000 bps (22)

45333 bps (23)

46666 bps (24)

48000 bps (25)

49333 bps (26)

50666 bps (27)

52000 bps (28)

53333 bps (29)

54666 bps (30)

56000 bps (31)

57333 bps (32)

64000 bps (33)

28000 bps (34)

29333 bps (35)

30666 bps (36)

32000 bps (37)

34666 bps (38)

36000 bps (39)

38666 bps (40)

40000 bps (41)

58666 bps (42)

60000 bps (43)

61333 bps (44)

62666 bps (45)


Non ARQ Transmit Buffer Size

This parameter sets the size of the non-ARQ mode Transmit buffer. The smaller value is designed for bulletin board operations, to accommodate callers with slower modems so that they can control received data scrolling up and off the screen.

MIB Object:	hdmScNonArqBufSize

AT Command:  	S15.3

Settings:	1500 bytes (Default) or 128 bytes


Buffer RX During MNP

This parameter provides for applications where remote modems that are not MNP-compatible call in to rack modems that expect to go through MNP call negotiation.  The remote non-MNP modem may start sending data during what the rack modem expects to be the MNP negotiating period.  When Enabled, the rack modem buffers received data on the link until it either times out waiting for the MNP request (about six seconds), or determines that the first character received on the link is a ^M (carriage return).  When either of these conditions is met, the rack modem aborts the MNP negotiation phase, completes the call, and releases the buffered data received from the link.

MIB Object:  	hdmScNonMnpDataCapture

AT Command:  	S37.0

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


V.21 Modulation

When this parameter is enabled, the modem answers both Bell 103 and V.21 overseas calls at 300 bps, but only originates V.21 300-bps calls.  When this function is disabled, V.21 Modulation is disabled.

MIB Object:  	hdmScV21Mod

AT Command:  	S27.0

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


V.32 Unencoded Modulation

This parameter enables or disables unencoded modulation in V.32 mode, an option that is part of the ITU-T V.32 recommendation but is rarely used.

MIB Object:  	hdmScV32UnencodedMod

AT Command: 	S27.1

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


V.32 Modulaton

This parameter enables or disables V.32 modulation so that a Dual Standard modem's HST modulation may be tested.

MIB Object:  	hdmScV32Mod

AT Command: 	S27.2

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.32 bis Modulation

This parameter enables or disable V.32 bis modulation, which may be necessary for some testing or troubleshooting.

MIB Object:  	hdmScV32Bis

AT Command:  	S34.0

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.32 Enhanced Mode

This parameter enables or disables U.S. Robotics' enhanced V.32 mode of operation.  This mode allows asymmetrical speed switching and downshifts without retraining.  The Disable option may be necessary for some testing or troubleshooting.

MIB Object:  	hdmScV32BisEnhance

AT Command:  	S34.1

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.32 Fast Retrain

This parameter enables or  disables the faster retrains that occur with U.S. Robotics' enhanced V.32 mode of operation.  The Disable option may be necessary for some testing or troubleshooting.

MIB Object:  	hdmScV32QuickRetrain

AT Command:  	S34.2

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.23 Call Negotiation

This parameter allows the modem to negotiate a V.23 connection (used in U.K.) at 1200 bps after failing to negotiate a higher rate.

MIB Object:  	hdmScV23

AT Command:  	S34.3

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


Fallback Disable

This parameter defines whether or not the modem will be allowed to fall back to a lower speed if it detects a significant change in line characteristics.  If the modem is unable to maintain error-free transmission at the current speed and this setting is enabled, it falls back to a lower speed.  If the line then improves, the modem upshifts to a higher speed.

Note:  Applicable to modems operating in V.32, V.32bis, V.23terbo, V.FC, or V.34 modulation.

MIB Object:  	hdmScFallback

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.32 Terbo Modulation (S34.7)

This parameter enables or disables V.32 terbo mode, which permits connection rates up to 21.6 Kbps with compatible modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScV32TerboMode

AT Command:  	S34.7

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.34 Modulation

This parameter enables or disables V.34 mode, which permits connection rates up to 28.8 Kbps with compatible modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScV34ModeEnable

AT Command:  	S56.6

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


2400 Symbol Rate

This parameter allows the 2400 symbol rate to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFCSymRate2400

AT Command:  	S54.0

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


2743 Symbol Rate

This parameter allows the 2743 symbol rate to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFCSymRate2743

AT Command: 	S54.1

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


2800 Symbol Rate

This parameter allows the 2800 symbol rate to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFCSymRate2800

AT Command:  	S54.2

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


3000 Symbol Rate

This parameter allows the 3000 symbol rate to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFCSymRate3000

AT Command:  	S54.3

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


3200 Symbol Rate

This parameter allows the 3200 symbol rate to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFCSymRate3200

AT Command:  	S54.4

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


3429 Symbol Rate

This parameter allows the 3429 symbol rate to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFCSymRate3429

AT Command:  	S54.5

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


8S-2D Mapping

This parameter allows the 8S-2D mapping to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFC8S2DMapping

AT Command:  	S55.0

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


16S-4D Mapping

This parameter allows the 16S-4D mapping to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFC16S4DMapping

AT Command:  	S55.1

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


32S-2D Mapping

Parameter allows the 32S-2D mapping to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFC32S2DMapping

AT Command:  	S55.2

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


64S-4D Mapping

This parameter allows the 64S-4D mapping to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFC64S4DMapping

AT Command:  	S55.3

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Nonlinear Coding

This parameter allows the non-linear coding to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFCNonLinearCoding

AT Command:  	S56.0

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


TX Level Deviation

This parameter allows the transmit level deviation to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFCTxLevelDeviation

AT Command:  	S56.1

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Preemphasis

This parameter allows the preemphasis to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFCPreEmphasis

AT Command:  	S56.2

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Precoding

This parameter allows the precoding to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFCPreCoding

AT Command:  	S56.3

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Shaping

This parameter allows the shaping to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFCShaping

AT Command:  S56.4

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.FC Modulation

This parameter allows V.FC mode to be disabled in order to troubleshoot a connection.

MIB Object:  	hdmScVFCMode

AT Command:  S56.7

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.8 Mode

This parameter allows V.FC mode to be disabled in order to troubleshoot a connection.

MIB Object:  	hdmScV8

AT Command:  S56.7

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.8 Call Indicator

This parameter allows the V.8 call indicator to be enabled on V.34 modems.

MIB Object:  	hdmSCV8CallIndicator

AT Command:  S54.6

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


V.34 +

This parameter allows V.34 extended mode (link rates from 31.3Kbps to 33.6Kbps) to be disabled to troubleshoot a connection.

MIB Object:  	hdmScV34pMode

AT Command:  	S56.5

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


300 Baud

This parameter indicates if 300bps transmission has been disabled on the modem.

MIB Objects:	hdmSc300

AT Command:  ATS48.0

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


1200 Baud

This parameter indicates if 1200bps transmission has been disabled on the modem.

MIB Objects:	hdmSc1200

AT Command:  	ATS48.1

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


2400 Baud

This parameter indicates if 2400bps transmission has been disabled on the modem.

MIB Objects:	hdmSc2400

AT Command: 	ATS48.2

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


High Speed

This parameter determines whether a Dual Standard modem negotiates for V.32, HST, or whether a compatible modem negotiates for Bell 208. To answer calls originating overseas, leave this function at its V.32 default and change the Guard Tone parameter to an appropriate setting.  The HST setting allows a compatible modem to negotiate for a connection using U.S. Robotics' proprietary HST modulation.  The Bell 208 setting allows a compatible modem to negotiate for a 4800 bps synchronous connection.

Note:  Both V.34 and V.FC modulations preemp HST if both originate and answer modems support those protocols.  If you want to originate HST to a remote USR V.34 modem, V.FC and V.8 must both be disabled.

MIB Object:  	hdmScHighSpeed

AT Command:  	Bn

Settings:	V.32 - V.32 originate/V.25 answer (Default)

HST - HST originate/Bell answer

Bell 208 - Bell 208 originate and answer


V.42 Selective Reject

Selective Reject works under V.42 error control and offers significant throughput improvements over noisy lines.  The number of retransmitted blocks due to block errors (blers) is reduced because a specific data packet will be NAKed, rather than all packets received since the last ACKed packet.

MIB Objects:	hdmScSelectiveReject

AT Command:  	ATS51.6

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


High Density Modem Short Haul NIC

  Short Haul NIC Distance Range


Related MIB files: Rfc1406, Rds1, Rds0


Short Haul NIC Distance Range

Use this parameter to select one of the distance ranges supported by the short haul NIC.

MIB Object:	usrds1CfgShrtHaulDist

Settings:	notApplicable (1)

len0thru133Ft (2, default)

len133thru266Ft (3)

len266thru399Ft (4)

len399thru533Ft (5)

len533thru655Ft (6)


High Density Modem Span Line Blocking

  Block Call Type


Block Call Type

This parameter defines the call type that is blocked by your selected PRI span line.

Note: This parameter has no effect on a NAC operating in Rob Bit T1 mode.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgBlockCallType

Settings:	notSupported (1)

blockNone (2, default)

blockAnalog (3)

blockDigital (4)

blockAll (5)


HDM Identification

  Operational Status

  Serial Number

  Hardware Revision

  Software Version

  DRAM Installed (KB)

  ROM Installed (KB)


Related MIB files: Chs

This file contains the context sensitive Help topics for the following conditions and menu path:

HiPerDSP card, alarm LEDs selected, Performance Menu Session Monitor Option Select DS0s dialog, DS1-Chassis Performance Monitor with High Density Modem Span Line Selected , Disconnect Reasons


Operational Status

This object shows the operational status of the selected HiPer DSP card.

MIB Object:	uds1StatDchanOperational

Settings:	dChannelUp (1)

dChannelDown (2)


Serial Number


Hardware Revision

(New topic text goes here.)


Software Version

(New topic text goes here.)


DRAM Installed (KB)

(New topic text goes here.)


ROM Installed (KB)

(New topic text goes here.)


Timeslot Mapping and Blocking Group

  Timeslot Identification

  Block Call Type

  Channel Assigned to Timeslot


Timeslot Identification

Use this parameter to view the index value that uniquely identifies the timeslot of the specified CSU.

MIB Object:	usrds0CmdDs0Index

Settings:	Integer


Added this info to help system (10/14/97 LTC)


Block Call Type

Use this parameter to set or view the type of calls that are blocked by the specified DS0.

MIB Object:	usrds0CfgBlockCallType

Settings:	notSupported (1)

blockNone (2, default)

blockAnalog (3)

blockDigital (4)

blockAll (5)


Added this info to help system (10/14/97 LTC)


Channel Assigned to Timeslot

Use this parameter to set or view the modem channel the specified connects with.

Notes:

A value of 33 indicates that this DS0 is not restricted.

A value of 0 indicates that this NAC does not support the definition of this parameter.

MIB Object:	usrds0CfgDs0AssignedChnl

Settings:	Integer (0..255)


Added this info to help system (10/14/97 LTC)


x2/V.90 Configuration for High Density Modems

  Low-Speed Direction Minimum

  Low-Speed Channel Maximum

  x2 Client Mode

  x2 Server Mode

  x2 Symmetric Mode

  Remote x2 Server Transmitter

  Remote x2 Client Transmitter

  Remote x2 Client Transmitter Nonlinear

  Remote x2 Client Transmitter Trellis

  Transmitter 2743 Symbol Rate

  Transmitter 2800 Symbol Rate

  Transmitter 3429 Symbol Rate

  Transmitter Low Carrier 3000 Symbol

  Transmitter High Carrier 3000 Symbol

  Transmitter Low Carrier 3200 Symbol

  Transmitter 64S - 4D Mapping

  Receiver 3429 Symbol Rate

  x2 High-power Constellation

  V.90 Analogue Mode

  V.90 Digital Mode

  V.90 All Digital Mode


Low-Speed Direction Minimum

This parameter establishes the slowest speed at which a client modem is allowed receive information from a sever modem.

Setting for this parameter are often used to test modem and or line speeds.

You might also use this parameter to allow only client modems capable of x2 speeds to connect to an x2 server modem.

MIB Object:	hdmScX2LowerSpeedMin

Settings:	variable (1)

300 bps (2)

1200 bps (3)

2400 bps (4)

4800 bps (5)

7200 bps (6)

9600 bps (7)

12000 bps (8)

14400 bps (9)

16800 bps (10)

19200 bps (11)

21600 bps (12)

24000 bps (13)

26400 bps (14)

28800 bps (15)

31200 bps (16)

33600 bps (17)

33333 bps (18)

37333 bps (19)

41333 bps (20)

42666 bps (21)

44000 bps (22)

45333 bps (23)

46666 bps (24)

48000 bps (25)

49333 bps (26)

50666 bps (27)

52000 bps (28)

53333 bps (29)

54666 bps (30)

56000 bps (31)

57333 bps (32)

64000 bps (33)

28000 bps (34)

29333 bps (35)

30666 bps (36)

32000 bps (37)

34666 bps (38)

36000 bps (39)

38666 bps (40)

40000 bps (41)

58666 bps (42)

60000 bps (43)

61333 bps (44)

62666 bps (45)


Low-Speed Channel Maximum

This parameter establishes the fastest speed at which a client modem is allowed to receive information from a server modem.

Settings for this parameter are often used to test modem and or line speeds.

MIB Object: 	hdmScX2LowerSpeedMax

Settings:	variable (1)

300 bps (2)

1200 bps (3)

2400 bps (4)

4800 bps (5)

7200 bps (6)

9600 bps (7)

12000 bps (8)

14400 bps (9)

16800 bps (10)

19200 bps (11)

21600 bps (12)

24000 bps (13)

26400 bps (14)

28800 bps (15)

31200 bps (16)

33600 bps (17)

33333 bps (18)

37333 bps (19)

41333 bps (20)

42666 bps (21)

44000 bps (22)

45333 bps (23)

46666 bps (24)

48000 bps (25)

49333 bps (26)

50666 bps (27)

52000 bps (28)

53333 bps (29)

54666 bps (30)

56000 bps (31)

57333 bps (32)

64000 bps (33)

28000 bps (34)

29333 bps (35)

30666 bps (36)

32000 bps (37)

34666 bps (38)

36000 bps (39)

38666 bps (40)

40000 bps (41)

58666 bps (42)

60000 bps (43)

61333 bps (44)

62666 bps (45)


x2 Client Mode

This parameter enables a modem to act as an x2 client. The modem can receive information at x2 speeds.

Set this parameter value to Disable if you want to keep a client modem from receiving information at x2 speeds.

MIB Object: 	hdmScX2Client

AT Command:  	S76.0

Settings:	Enabled (Default) or Disabled


x2 Server Mode

This parameter enables a modem to act as an x2 server. The modem can distribute information at x2 speeds.

Set this parameter value to Disable if you want to keep a server modem from sending information at x2 speeds.

MIB Object:	hdmScX2Server

AT Command:  	S76.1

Settings:  	Enabled (Default) or Disabled


x2 Symmeteric Mode
x2 Symmetric Mode

When this parameter is enabled it requires both the server and client modem to send and receive information at the same x2 speed.

MIB Object:	hdmScX2Symmetric

AT Command:  	S76.2

Settings: 	Enabled (Default) or Disabled


Remote x2 Server Transmitter

This parameter selects the remote x2 server transmitter constellation.

MIB Object:	hdmScX2RemoteSrvConstSel

Settings:  	Automatic (Default), Reduced, or Expanded


Remote x2 Client Transmitter

This parameter selects the remote x2 client transmitter constellation.

MIB Object:	hdmScX2RemoteCltConstSel

Settings:  	Automatic (Default), Reduced, or Expanded


Remote x2 Client Transmitter nonlinear

This parameter selects the remote x2 client transmitter non linear constellation.

MIB Object:	hdmScX2RemoteNlrConstSel

Settings:  	Automatic (Default), Disable, or Force


Remote x2 Client Transmitter Trellis

This parameter selects the encoding for the remote X2 client transmitter trellis.

MIB Object:	hdmScX2RemoteCltTrelsSel

Settings:  	Automatic (Default), State16, State32, or State64


Transmitter 2743 Symbol Rate Disable
Transmitter 2743 Symbol Rate

This parameter enables or disables the x2 transmitter 2743 symbol rate.

MIB Object:	hdmScX22743

Settings:  	Enabled (Default) or Disabled


Transmitter 2800 Symbol Rate Disable
Transmitter 2800 Symbol Rate

This parameter enables or disables x2 transmitter 2800 symbol rate.

MIB Object:	hdmScX22800

Settings:  	Enabled (Default) or Disabled


Transmitter 3429 Symbol Rate Disable
Transmitter 3429 Symbol Rate

This parameter enables or disables x2 transmitter 3429 symbol rate.

MIB Object:	hdmScX23429

Settings:  	Enabled (Default) or Disabled


Transmitter Low Carrier 3000 Symbol

This parameter enables or disables the x2 transmitter low carrier 3000 symbol rate.

MIB Object:	hdmScX23000low

Settings:  	Enabled (Default) or Disabled


Transmitter High Carrier 3000 Symbol

This parameter enables or disables the x2 transmitter high carrier 3000 symbol rate.

MIB Object:	hdmScX23000high

Settings:  	Enabled (Default) or Disabled


Transmitter Low Carrier 3200 Symbol

This parameter enables or disables the x2 transmitter low carrier 3200 symbol rate.

MIB Object:	hdmScX23200low

Settings:  	Enabled (Default) or Disabled


Transmitter 64S - 4D Mapping Disable
Transmitter 64S - 4D Mapping

This parameter enables or disables the x2 transmitter 64S - 4D mapping.

MIB Object:	hdmScX264S4D

Settings:  	Enabled (Default) or Disabled


Receiver 3429 Symbol Rate Disable
Receiver 3429 Symbol Rate

This parameter enables or disables the x2 receiver 3429 symbol rate.

MIB Object:	hdmScX23429rcv

Settings:  	Enabled (Default) or Disabled


x2 High-power Constellation

This parameter enables or disables the x2 high-power constellation.

MIB Object:	hdmScHighPowerConst

Settings:  	disable (1, default)

enable (2)


V.90 Analogue Mode

This object enables or disables the V.90 client modulation.

MIB Object:	hdmScV90Analogue

mdmScV90Analogue

Settings:	Enable (1, default)

Disable (2)


V.90 Digital Mode

This object enables or disables the V.90 server modulation.

MIB Object:	hdmScV90Digital

mdmScV90Digital

Settings:	Enable (1, default)

Disable (2)


V.90 All Digital Mode

This object enables or disables the V.90 symmetric modulation.

MIB Object:	hdmScV90AllDigital

mdmScV90AllDigital

Settings:	Enable (1, default)

Disable (2)


High Density Modem D-Channel Service Traps

  On D-Channel In Service

  On D-Channel Out of Service


Related MIB files: Rds1, uds1TrapEnaTable


On D-Channel In Service

Use this parameter to enable or disable generation of an SNMP trap when the service state of a D channel on this span line changes to Inservice (from Out of Service, Maintenance or Standby).

MIB Object:	uds1TrapsEnaDchanInSrvc

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On D-Channel Out of Service

Use this parameter to enable or disable generation of an SNMP trap when the service state of a D channel on this span line changes from Inservice (to Out of Service, Maintenance, or Standby).

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaDchanOutOfSrvc

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


High Density Modem Loopback Traps

  On Loopback

  On Loopback Cleared


On Loopback

This parameter enables or disables the generation of an SNMP trap when loop back occurs on the span line.

MIB Object:	loopBackTrapEna

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Loopback Cleared

This parameter enables or disables the generation of an SNMP trap when loop back has cleared on the span line.

MIB Object:	loopBackClearedTrapEna

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


High Density Modem Trap Enables

  On Yellow Alarm

  On Red Alarm

  On Loss of Signal

  On Alarm Ind Signal

  On Continuous CRC

  On Physical State Change

  On Remote Frame

  On Yellow Alarm Cleared

  On Red Alarm Cleared

  On Loss of Signal Cleared

  On AIS Cleared

  On Continuous CRC Cleared

  On Remote Frame Cleared

  On Abnormal TELCO Response


On Yellow Alarm

This parameter enables or disables the generation of an SNMP trap when a yellow alarm occurs on the specified DS1.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaYellowAlarm

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Red Alarm

This parameter enables or disables the generation of an SNMP trap when a yellow alarm occurs on the specified DS1.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaRedAlarm

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Loss of Signal

This parameter enables or disables the generation of an SNMP trap when a loss of signal is detected on the specified DS1.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaLossOfSignal

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Alarm Ind Signal

This parameter enables or disables the generation of an SNMP trap when an alarm indication signal (AIS) is detected on the specified DS1.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaAlarmIndSignal

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Continuous CRC

This parameter enables or disables the generation of an SNMP trap when a continuous CRC condition is detected on the specified DS1.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaContCrcAlrm

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Physical State Change

This parameter enables or disables the generation of an SNMP trap when a change in the physical state of the specified DS1 is detected.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaPhysStateChng

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Yellow Alarm Cleared

This parameter enables or disables the generation of an SNMP trap when a yellow alarm condition is cleared on the specified DS1.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaYellowAlarmClr

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Red Alarm Cleared

This parameter enables or disables the generation of an SNMP trap when a yellow alarm condition is cleared on the specified DS1.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaRedAlarmClr

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Loss of Signal Cleared

This parameter enables or disables the generation of an SNMP trap when a loss of signal condition is cleared on the specified DS1.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaLossOfSgnlClr

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On AIS Cleared

This parameter enables or disables the generation of an SNMP trap when an alarm indication signal (AIS) is cleared on the specified DS1.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaAlrmIndSgnlClr

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Continuous CRC Cleared

This parameter enables or disables the generation of an SNMP trap when a continuous CRC condition is cleared on the specified DS1.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaContCrcAlrmClr

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Remote Frame

Use this parameter to enable or disable the generation of an SNMP trap whenever a Remote Multi-Frame Alignment condition is detected on the specified DS1.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaMultiFrame

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Added info for On Remote Frame to help system (LTC 10/16/97)


On Remote Frame Cleared

Use this parameter to enable or disable the generation of an SNMP trap whenever a Remote Multi-Frame Alignment condition is cleared on the specified DS1.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaMultiFrmClr

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Added info for On Remote Frame Cleared to help system (SMO, 10/22/97)


On Abnormal TELCO Response

Use this parameter to enable or disable the generation of an SNMP trap whenever the NCC signals the TELCO to disconnect a call and the TELCO does not respond.

MIB Object:	usrds1EvntelcoAbnornalRsp

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Added info for On Abnormal TELCO Response to help system (LTC 10/21/97)

Related files Rds1.mib and hdmds1.dat.


High Density Modem Timeslot Service Traps

  Timeslot In Service

  Timeslot Out Of Service

  On Timeslot State Change

  On Incoming Call Failure

  On Outgoing Call Failure


Related MIB files: Rds1


Timeslot In Service

Use this object to enable or disable the generation of an SNMP trap when a change in the service state of a DS0 on this span line (from Out of Service to In Service) is detected.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaDs0InSrvc

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Timeslot Out Of Service

Use this object to enable or disable the generation of an SNMP trap when a change in the service state of a DS0 on this span line (from In Service to Out of Service) is detected.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaDs0OutOfSrvc

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Timeslot State Change

Use this object to enable or disable the generation of an SNMP trap whenever a change in the physical state of the specified DS1 is detected.

MIB Object:	uds1TrapEnaPhysStateChng

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Added info to help system (LTC, 10/21/97)


On Incoming Call Failure

This parameter generates an SNMP trap if an incoming call fails at the DS0 level.

MIB Object:	usrds1EventDs0InConnFail

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Added info to help system (LTC, 10/21/97)


On Outgoing Call Failure

This parameter generates an SNMP trap if an outgoing call fails at the DS0 level.

MIB Object:	usrds1EventDs0InConnFail

Settings:	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Added info to help system (LTC, 10/21/97)


HDM Channel Level Analog Statistics

  Transmit carrier frequency (Hz)

  Receive carrier frequency (Hz)

  Transmit symbol rate

  Receive symbol rate

  Transmit Trellis rate

  Receive Trellis rate

  Transmit non-linear coding status

  Receive non-linear coding status

  Transmit precoding status

  Receive precoding status

  Receive shaping status

  Transmit shaping status

  Amount of pre-emphasis on TX

  Amount of pre-emphasis on RX

  Receive Level

  Transmit Level

  Signal to Noise ratio

  Near echo level

  Far echo level

  Round trip delay time


Related MIB files: Mdm.mib , mdmCs table


Transmit carrier frequency (Hz)

This object displays the transmit carrier frequency in Hertz.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQCarrFreqTx

Settings:	0 - 65535


State of Transmit carrier frequency (Hz) - need a better description (SMO, 07/18/97)

Added all of these topics to help system (LTC 10/21/97)


Receive carrier frequency (Hz)

This object displays the receive carrier frequency in Hertz.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQCarrFreqRx

Settings:	0 - 65535


State of Transmit carrier frequency (Hz) - need a better description (SMO, 07/18/97)


Transmit symbol rate

This object displays the transmit symbol rate.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQSymRateTx

Settings:	0 - 65535


Transmit symbol rate - need a better description (SMO, 07/18/97)


Receive symbol rate

This object displays the receive symbol rate.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQSymRateRx

Settings:	0 - 65535


Receive symbol rate - need a better description (SMO, 07/18/97)


Transmit Trellis rate

This object displays the transmit trellis rate.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQTrellisTx

Settings:	trellis8S-2D (1)

trellis16S-4D (2)

trellis32S-2D (3)

trellis64S-4D (4)


Transmit Trellis rate - need a better description and definitions for the settings (SMO, 07/18/97)


Receive Trellis rate

This object displays the receive trellis rate.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQTrellisRx

Settings:	trellis8S-2D (1)

trellis16S-4D (2)

trellis32S-2D (3)

trellis64S-4D (4)


Receive Trellis rate - need a better description and definitions for the settings (SMO, 07/18/97)


Transmit non-linear coding status

This object displays the status of transmit non-linear coding.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQNonLinCdTx

Settings:	off (1)

on (2)


Transmit non-linear coding status - need a better description (SMO, 07/18/97)


Receive non-linear coding status

This object displays the status of transmit non-linear coding.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQNonLinCdRx

Settings:	off (1)

on (2)


Receive non-linear coding status - need a better description (SMO, 07/18/97)


Transmit precoding status

This object displays the status of transmit precoding.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQPrecodingTx

Settings:	off (1)

on (2)


Transmit precoding status - need a better description (SMO, 07/18/97)


Receive precoding status

This object displays the status of receive precoding.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQPrecodingRx

Settings:	off (1)

on (2)


Receive precoding status - need a better description (SMO, 07/18/97)


Receive shaping status

This object displays the status of receive shaping.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQShapingTx

Settings:	off (1)

on (2)


Receive shaping status - need a better description (SMO, 07/18/97)


Transmit shaping status

This object displays the status of transmit shaping.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQShapingRx

Settings:	off (1)

on (2)


Transmit shaping status - need a better description (SMO, 07/18/97)


Amount of pre-emphasis on TX

This object displays the amount of pre-emphasis on TX in -dBm.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQPreemphTx

Settings:	0 - 65535


Amount of pre-emphasis on TX - need a better description (SMO, 07/18/97)


Amount of pre-emphasis on RX

This object displays the amount of pre-emphasis on RX in -dBm.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQPreemphRx

Settings:	0 - 65535


Amount of pre-emphasis on RX - need a better description (SMO, 07/18/97)


Receive Level

This object displays the receive level (x 10) in -dBm.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQRxLevel

Settings:	integer


Receive level - need a better description and a range, if one applies (SMO, 07/18/97)


Transmit Level

This object displays the transmit level (x 10) in -dBm.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQTxLevel

Settings:	integer


Transmit level - need a better description and a range, if one applies (SMO, 07/18/97)


Signal to Noise ratio

This object displays the signal to noise ratio (x 10) in -dBm.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQSNR

Settings:	integer


Signal to Noise ratio - need a better description and a range, if one applies (SMO, 07/18/97)


Near echo level

This object displays the near echo level (x 10) in -dBm.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQNearEcho

Settings:	integer


Near echo level - need a better description and a range, if one applies (SMO, 07/18/97)


Far echo level

This object displays the far echo level (x 10) in -dBm.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQFarEcho

Settings:	integer


Far echo level - need a better description and a range, if one applies (SMO, 07/18/97)


Round trip delay time

This object displays the round trip delay time in milliseconds.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQRndTripDly

Settings:	0 - 65535


Round trip delay time - need a better description and a range, if one applies (SMO, 07/18/97)


High Density Modem Channel Level Call Statistics

  Operational Status of a modem

  State of DTE’s EIA signals

  B Channel Used for the call

  TDM Time Slot Used for the call

  Call Reference Number

  Primary Card Slot

  Primary Card Span Line

  Timing Offset in parts per million

  Carrier Offset in Hertz

  PCM Coding

  Training Information

  x2 Signature

  V.90 Status


Related MIB files: Mdm.mib , mdmCs table


Operational Status of A Modem

This object displays the current status of a modem including presence (idle), availability (disabled), and call progress states.

MIB Object:	mdmCsStatus

Settings:	idle (1)

offHook (2)

dialing (3)

ringing (4)

ringRcvd (5)

linkNegotiation (6)

onlineOriginate (7)

onlineAnswer (8)

localCommandMode (9)

remoteCommandMode (10)

lineBusiedOut (11)

toneTest (12)

responderTest105 (13)

responderTest102 (14)

failed (33)

testingRom (49)

testingRam (50)

testingNvram (51)

analogLoopback (52)

localDigitalLoopback (53)

remoteDigitalLoopback (54)

selfTest (55)

phoneTest (56)

nonManagedDevice (57)

slotEmpty (58)

modemDisabled (59)

notResponding (60)

nonManagableDevice (61)

miuFailed (62)


Operational Status of a modem - we need definitions for the possible settings (SMO, 07/17/97)


State of DTE's EIA signals

This object displays the current state of the DTE's EIA signals.

MIB Object:	mdmDiEiaLineStatus

Settings:	0 - 255


State of DTE’s EIA signals - need a better description (SMO, 07/17/97)


B Channel Used for the call

This object displays the B Channel used for the call.

MIB Object:	mdmCsBChannelUsed

Settings:	integer


B Channel Used for the call - need a better description (SMO, 07/17/97)


TDM Time Slot Used for the call

This object displays the Time Division Multipexing Time Slot used for the call.

MIB Object:	mdmCsTDMTimeSlot

Settings:	integer


TDM Time Slot Used for the call - need a better description (SMO, 07/17/97)


Call Reference Number

This object displays the Call Reference number.

MIB Object:	mdmCsCallRefNum

Settings:	integer


Call Reference Number - need a description (SMO, 07/17/97)


Primary Card Slot

This object displays the Primary Card Slot.

MIB Object:	mdmCsPriCardSlot

Settings:	integer


Primary Card Slot - need a description (SMO, 07/17/97)


Primary Card Span Line

This object displays the Primary Card Span Line.

MIB Object:	mdmCsPriCardSpanLine

Settings:	integer


Primary Card Span Line - need a description (SMO, 07/17/97)


Timing Offset in parts per million

This object displays the Timing Offset in parts per million.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQTimingOffset

Settings:	integer


Timing Offset in parts per million - need a description (SMO, 07/17/97)


Carrier Offset in Hertz

This object displays the Carrier Offset in Hertz (Hz).

MIB Object:	mdmCsQCarrierOffset

Settings:	integer


Carrier Offset in Hertz - need a description (SMO, 07/17/97)


PCM Coding

This object displays the PCM Coding status.

MIB Object:	mdmCsQCoding

Settings:	mulaw (1)

alaw (2, default)


PCM Coding - need a description (SMO, 07/17/97)


Training Information

This object displays training information.

MIB Object:	mdmCsTrainingInfo

Settings:	0 - 64 (octal)


Training Information - need a description (SMO, 07/17/97)


x2 Signature

This object displays x2 diagnostic information from the selected modem in hexadecimal numbers.

MIB Object:	mdmCsX2signature

Settings:	0 - 255 (octal)


x2 Signature - Is Octet String the same as Octal? Why does the description specify hexidecimal while the settings are marked as Octet String (octal)? (SMO, 07/17/97)


V.90 Status

This object displays the V.90 status of the selected modem.

MIB Object:	mdmCsX2Status

Settings:	x2v90NotOperational(1)

x2Operational (2)

v8DisabledLocal (3)

x2DisabledLocal (4)

baud3200DisabledLocal (5)

speedLimitedLocal (6)

v8notDetectedFromRemote (7)

x2notDetectedFromRemote (8)

incompatibleX2Versions (9)

incompatibleX2Modes (10)

baud3200DisabledRemote (11)

excessiveHFAttenuation (12)

channelNoSymbolRate (13)

exitBeforeX2Connect (14)

vp90Operational (15)

x2v90Operational (16)

v90DisabledLocal (17)

x2v90DisabledLocal (18)

v90SymRatesDisabledLcl (19)

v90NotDetectedFrmRemote (20)

x2v90NotDetectedFrmRmt (21)

incompatibleV90Versions (22)

incompatibleV90Modes (23)

v90IncompactibleSymRate (24)


x2 status - we need definitions for the possible settings (SMO, 07/17/97

Changed all x2 to v90.  LTC 02/11/98)


High Density Modem Channel Level Modem Events

  Incoming Calls Total Connect Time (sec.)

  Incoming Calls Total Bytes Received

  Incoming Calls Total Bytes Transmitted

  Outgoing Calls Total Connect Time (sec.)

  Outgoing Calls Total Bytes Received

 Outgoing Calls Total Bytes Transmitted

  Incoming Connections Failed

  Outgoing Connections Failed


Related MIB files: Mdm.mib , mdmEv table


Incoming Calls Total Connect Time (sec.)

This object displays a cumulative total in seconds of the connection time for inbound calls.

MIB Object:	mdmEvInConnectTime

Settings:	seconds


Incoming Calls Total Connect Time (sec.) - Is that for all modems or the selected modems only? (SMO, 07/17/97)


Incoming Calls Total Bytes Received

This object displays a cumulative total of the number of bytes received on inbound calls.

MIB Object:	mdmEvInTotalBytesRx

Settings:	counter


Incoming Calls Total Bytes Received - Is that for all modems or the selected modems only? (SMO, 07/17/97)


Incoming Calls Total Bytes Transmitted

This object displays a cumulative total of the number of bytes transmitted on inbound calls.

MIB Object:	mdmEvInTotalBytesTx

Settings:	counter


Incoming Calls Total Bytes Transmitted - Is that for all modems or the selected modems only? (SMO, 07/17/97)


Outgoing Calls Total Connect Time (sec.)

This object displays a cumulative total in seconds of the connection time for outbound calls.

MIB Object:	mdmEvOutConnectTime

Settings:	seconds


Outgoing Calls Total Connect Time (sec.) - Is that for all modems or the selected modems only? (SMO, 07/17/97)


Outgoing Calls Total Bytes Received

This object displays a cumulative total of the number of bytes received on outbound calls.

MIB Object:	mdmEvOutTotalBytesRx

Settings:	counter


Outgoing Calls Total Bytes Received - Is that for all modems or the selected modems only? (SMO, 07/17/97)


Outgoing Calls Total Bytes Transmitted

This object displays a cumulative total of the number of bytes transmitted on outbound calls.

MIB Object:	mdmEvOutTotalBytesTx

Settings:	counter


Outgoing Calls Total Bytes Transmitted - Is that for all modems or the selected modems only? (SMO, 07/17/97)


Incoming Connections Failed

This object displays the number of times a modem reports an inbound connection failure.  This does not include connection failures reported due to no dial tone or no loop current.

MIB Object:	mdmEvInConnAttemptFails

Settings:	counter


Added to help system. (LTC, 10/20/97)


Outgoing Connections Failed

This object displays the number of times a modem reports an outbound connection failure.  This does not include connection failures reported due to no dial tone or no loop current.

MIB Object:	mdmEvOutConnAttemptFails

Settings:	counter


Added to help system. (LTC, 10/20/97)


High Density Modem Channel Level Modem Packet Bus Events

  Packet Bus Clock Status


Related MIB files: Mdm.mib , mdmSts table


Packet Bus Clock Status

This object displays the current status of the Packet Bus Clock.

MIB Object:	mdmStsPbClock

Settings:	notSupported (1)

clockMaster (2)

clockSlave (3)

noClockPresent (4)


Packet Bus Clock Status - need definitions for each setting (SMO, 07/17/97)

Added this info to the help system (LTC, 10/21/97)


High Density Modem DS0 Status

  DS0 Timeslot Status

  Channel Connected To DS0

  DS0 Service State

  Call ID

  Queued Action for DS0

  Q931 Call Reference Value


Related MIB files: Rds0


DS0 Timeslot Status

This object shows the current status of the specified timeslot.  Status values change dynamically while the system is operating.

MIB Object:	usrds0StatDs0

Settings:	other(1)

idle (2)

dialingIn (3)

dialingOut (4)

connectedIn (5)

connectedOut (6)

ds0CallDisc (22)

ds0IsDchan (23)

ds0OutOfServ (24)

ds0InMaint (25)

ds0IsFchan (26)


Channel Connected to DS0

This object shows the channel of the currently connected device.

MIB Object:	usrds0StatChanConnTo

Settings:	0 - 255 (255 is default)


DS0 Service State

This object shows the current service state of the specified DS0.

Note:  This object does not apply to Rob Bit T1 operation.

MIB Object:	usrds0StatDs0SrvcState

Settings:	notSupported (1)

inService (2)

localOutOfService (3)

maintenance (4)

remoteOutOfService (5)


Call ID

This object shows the associated call ID, if one exists.

MIB Object:	usrds0StatcallID

Settings:	integer


Queued Action for DS0

This object shows queued action, if any, on the specified DS0. For example, a soft busy-out command issued while a call is up would show up here.

MIB Object:	usrds0StatActionQueued

Settings:	notSupported (1)

none (2)

localOutOfService (3)

callIgnore (4)


Q931 Call Reference Value

This object shows the Q931 call refrence value for any active call on the specified DS0. This value is also used in the call event trap group.

MIB Object:	usrds0StatCallEventQ931Value

Settings:	integer


High Density Modem DS1 Bulk Access

  All idS0Stat Table Parameters

  AB Bit Status


Related MIB files: Rds1


All idS0Stat Table Parameters

This object shows a string of bytes that contain all of the ids0Stat table parameters for all the DS0's on the DS1.

MIB Object:	usrds1StatBlkAccessDs0Mdm

Settings:	(SIZE(0..255))


AB Bit Status

This object shows a string of bytes that contain the ABCD signaling transmit and receive bits for each DS0 on the span line.

MIB Object:	usrds1StatBulkAccessABSt

Settings:	(SIZE(0..255))


High Density Modem DS1 Call Statistics

  Time Elapsed

  Number of Valid Sampling Intervals

  Receiver Gain Applied

  Active Primary Switch Type

  D Channel Operational Status

  Continuous CRC Errors

  Physical State

  Line Status

  Loopback Initialization

  Timeslot Status Change

  Active Signal Mode

  No Idle Modem Available

  No Ring Off After Ring On

  Setting Up Call Telco Disconnect

  E & M Wink Start Timeout

  E & M Wink Too Short (<260ms)

  No Channel Available for Out Call


Related MIB files: Rfc1406, Rds1, Uds1


Time Elapsed

This object displays the number of seconds that have elapsed  since the beginning of the current error measurement period.

MIB Object:	dsx1TimeElapsed

Settings:	(0..899)


Number of Valid Sampling Intervals

This object displays the number of 15 minute intervals for which valid data was collected that have elapsed since the interface was brought on line. This object tracks a maximum of 96 intervals (24 hours

MIB Object:	dsx1ValidIntervals

Settings:	(0..96) = number of 15 minute intervals


Receiver Gain Applied

Use this object to set or view the amout of receiver gain applied to the received signal at the CSU.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgRvcGain

Settings:	notSupported (1)

dB12 (2) T1 or E1 Short Haul

dB26 (3) T1 Long Haul

dB36 (4) T1 Long Haul

dB43 (5) E1 Long Haul


Active Primary Switch Type

This object displays the primary switch type that the T1-PRI ISDN NAC is currently connected to.

MIB Object:	uds1StatSwitchTypeActive

Settings:	priSw4ESS (1)

priSw5ESS (2)

priSwDMS100 (3)

priSwICTR4 (4)

priSwVn4 (5)

priSwNI2 (6)

priSwINS1500 (7)

priSwTS014 (8)


D Channel Operational Status

This object displays the operational status of the D channel on the T1-PRI ISDN NAC.

MIB Object:	uds1StatDchanOperational

Settings:	dChannelUp (1)

dChannelDown (2)


Continuous CRC Errors

This object indicates when continuous CRC errors are being received on the E1 DS1 span line on the T1-PRI ISDN NAC (setting is true).

MIB Object:	uds1StatE1ContCrc

Settings:	false (1)

true (2)


Physical State

This object displays the physical state of the E1 DS1 span line on the T1-PRI ISDN NAC.

MIB Object:	uds1StatE1PhysicalState

Settings:	psF1Operational (1)

psF2Fc1RaiTempCrcErrors (2)

psF3Fc2LossOfSignal (3)

psF4Fc3AlarmIndSignal (4)

psF5Fc4RaiContCrcErrors (5)

psF6PowerOn (6)


Line Status

This object displays the line status of the interface. It can contain loopback, failure, received alarm and transmitted alarm information.

The dsx1LineStatus value is additive, representing multiple failures and a loopback state as the sum of their separate values. For example, a value of 2050 indicates a far end LOF and detection of a test code at the near end.

Note:  If the dsx1LoopbackState bit is set, the loopback can be determined from the dsx1LoopbackConfig object.

MIB Object:	dsx1LineStatus

Settings:	Any combination of the following values:

dsx1NoAlarm (1) = no alarm present

dsx1RcvFarEndLOF (2) = Far end LOF (Yellow Alarm)

dsx1XmtFarEndLOF (4) = Near end sending LOF Indication

dsx1RcvAIS (8) = Far end sending AIS

dsx1XmtAIS (16) = Near end sending AIS

dsx1LossOfFrame (32) = Near end LOF (Red Alarm)

dsx1LossOfSignal (64) = Near end Loss Of Signal

dsx1LoopbackState (128) = Near end is looped

dsx1T16AIS (256) = E1 TS16 AIS

dsx1RcvFarEndLOMF (512) = Far End Sending TS16 LOMF

dsx1XmtFarEndLOMF (1024) = Near End Sending TS16 LOMF

dsx1RcvTestCode (2048) = Near End detects a test code

dsx1OtherFailure (4096) = any line status not defined here


Loopback Initialization

This object shows whether the loopback was initiated by the network or by a command.

MIB Object:	uds1StatLoopBackInit

Settings:	none (1)

network (2)

command (3)


Timeslot Status Change

Use this parameter to view the current list of DS0s that have changed state. The possible states are In Service and Out of Service. This list is included in the corresponding SNMP trap.

MIB Object:	uds1StatDs0SrvcChngLst

Settings:	DisplayString (SIZE(0..96)


Active Signal Mode

Use this object to view or change the type of signaling used on this channel.

MIB Object:	usrds1StatSignalModeAtv

Settings:	none (1)

robbedBit (2)

bitOriented (3)

messageOriented (4)


Active Signal Mode is a stopgap for a flawed object in RFC1406.mib (dsx1SignalMode). The mib object name and title may change before TCS 3.0 LateLate. (SMO, 10/22/97)


No Idle Modem Available

Use this object to view the number of times an incoming call could not be completed because no idle modem was available.

MIB Object:	usrds1StatinCallmodemNA

Settings:	Integer


No Ring Off After Ring On

Use this object to view the number of times there was no ring off for the previous ring on. This feature is currently available for CHT1 PRI only.

MIB Object:	usrds1StatinCallLpStNoROf

Settings:	Integer


Setting Up Call Telco Disconnect

This object is incremented every time the TELCO disconnects a setting up call.

Note:  This object is available for PRI only.

MIB Object:	usrds1StatoCallTelcoDisct

Settings:	integer


E&M Wink Start Timeout

This object shows the total number of wink start timeouts. A start timeout occurs each time the telco fails to wink within 5 seconds.

Note:  This object is available for CHT1 only.

MIB Object:	usrds1StatoCallEMWinkTO

Settings:	integer


E&M Wink Too Short (<260ms)

This object shows the total number of winks that are too short (under 260 milliseconds).

Note:  This object is available for CHT1 only.

MIB Object:	usrds1StatoCallEMWnkTooSh

Settings:	integer


No Channel Available for Outcall

This object shows the total number of outgoing call requests that fail because there is no channel available for the outgoing call.

MIB Object:	usrds1StatoCallNoChAvl

Settings:	integer


High Density Modem DS1 Disconnect Reasons

  E & M Dial In No Telco Response

  E & M Dial Out No Telco Response

  Ground Dial In & Out No Telco Response


Related MIB files: Rds1

This file contains the context sensitive Help topics for the following conditions and menu path:

HiPerDSP card, alarm LEDs selected, Performance Menu Session Monitor Option Select DS0s dialog, DS1-Chassis Performance Monitor with High Density Modem Span Line Selected , Disconnect Reasons


E & M Dial In No Telco Response

This object shows the total number of times the TELCO did not respond to an NCT disconnect signal in an E&M dialin state mechine (CHT1 only).

MIB Object:	usrds1StatdiscNoTelcoRspDI

Settings:	integer


E & M Dial Out No Telco Response

This object shows the total number of times the TELCO did not respond to an NCT disconnect signal in an E&M dialout state machine (CHT1 only).

MIB Object:	usrds1StatdiscNoTelcoRspDO

Settings:	integer


Ground Dial In & Out No Telco Response

This object shows the total number of times the TELCO did not respond to an NCT disconnect signal in a ground start dial in and dial out state machine (CHT1 only).

MIB Object:	usrds1StatdiscNoTelcoRspGd

Settings:	integer


High Density Modem DS1 Far End Current Group

  Time Since Start of Error Measurement

  Valid Data Intervals

  Errored Seconds

  Severely Errored Seconds

  Severely Errored Framing Seconds

  Unavailable Seconds

  Controlled Slip Seconds

  Path Coding Violations

  Line Errored Seconds

  Bursty Errored Seconds

  Degraded Minutes


Related MIB files: Rfc1406


Time Since Start of Error Measurement

This object shows the number of seconds that have elapsed since the beginning of the current far end error measurement period.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndTimeElapsed

Settings:	(0 - 899)


Valid Data Intervals

This object shows the number of far end intervals for which valid data was collected in the last 24 hours.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndValidIntervals

Settings:	(0 - 96)


Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Far End Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndCurrentESs

Settings:	integer


Severely Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Far End Severely Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndCurrentSESs

Settings:	integer


Severely Errored Framing Seconds

This object shows the number of Far End Severely Errored Framing Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndCurrentSEFSs

Settings:	integer


Unavailable Seconds

This object shows the number of Unavailable Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndCurrentUASs

Settings:	integer


Controlled Slip Seconds

This object shows the number of Far End Controlled Slip Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndCurrentCSSs

Settings:	integer


Path Coding Violations

This object shows the number of Far End Path Coding Violations encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndCurrentPCVs

Settings:	integer


Line Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Far End Line Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndCurrentLESs

Settings:	integer


Bursty Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Bursty Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndCurrentBESs

Settings:	integer


Degraded Minutes

This object shows the number of Degraded Minutes (DMs) encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndCurrentDMs

Settings:	integer


High Density Modem DS1 Far End Interval Group

  Recently Completed Intervals

  Errored Seconds

  Severely Errored Seconds

  Severely Errored Framing Seconds

  Unavailable Seconds

  Controlled Slip Seconds

  Path Coding Violations

  Line Errored Seconds

  Bursty Errored Seconds

  Degraded Minutes


Related MIB files: Rfc1406


Recently Completed Intervals

This object shows a number between 1 and 96, where 1 is the most recently completed 15 minute interval and 96 the least recently completed 15 minute interval (assuming that all 96 intervals valid).

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndIntervalNumber

Settings:	(1 - 96)


The description of the mib object above doesn’t make any sense. What’s it for?


Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Far End Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndIntervalESs

Settings:	integer


Severely Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Far End Severely Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndIntervalSESs

Settings:	integer


Severely Errored Framing Seconds

This object shows the number of Far End Severely Errored Framing Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndIntervalSEFSs

Settings:	integer


Unavailable Seconds

This object shows the number of Unavailable Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndIntervalUASs

Settings:	integer


Controlled Slip Seconds

This object shows the number of Far End Controlled Slip Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndIntervalCSSs

Settings:	integer


Path Coding Violations

This object shows the number of Far End Path Coding Violations encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndIntervalPCVs

Settings:	integer


Line Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Far End Line Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndIntervalLESs

Settings:	integer


Bursty Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Bursty Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndIntervalBESs

Settings:	integer


Degraded Minutes

This object shows the number of Degraded Minutes (DMs) encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndIntervalDMs

Settings:	integer


High Density Modem DS1 Far End Total Group

  Errored Seconds

  Severely Errored Seconds

  Severely Errored Framing Seconds

  Unavailable Seconds

  Controlled Slip Seconds

  Path Coding Violations

  Line Errored Seconds

  Bursty Errored Seconds

  Degraded Minutes


Related MIB files: Rfc1406


Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Far End Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndTotalESs

Settings:	integer


Severely Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Far End Severely Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndTotalSESs

Settings:	integer


Severely Errored Framing Seconds

This object shows the number of Far End Severely Errored Framing Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndTotalSEFSs

Settings:	integer


Unavailable Seconds

This object shows the number of Unavailable Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndTotalUASs

Settings:	integer


Controlled Slip Seconds

This object shows the number of Far End Controlled Slip Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndTotalCSSs

Settings:	integer


Path Coding Violations

This object shows the number of Far End Path Coding Violations encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndTotalPCVs

Settings:	integer


Line Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Far End Line Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndTotalLESs

Settings:	integer


Bursty Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Bursty Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndTotalBESs

Settings:	integer


Degraded Minutes

This object shows the number of Degraded Minutes (DMs) encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1FarEndTotalDMs

Settings:	integer


High Density Modem DS1 Near End Current Group

  Errored Seconds

  Severely Errored Seconds

  Severely Errored Framing Seconds

  Unavailable Seconds

  Controlled Slip Seconds

  Path Coding Violations

  Line Errored Seconds

  Bursty Errored Seconds

  Degraded Minutes

  Line Code Violations


Related MIB files: Rfc1406


Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentESs

Settings:	integer


Severely Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Severely Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentSESs

Settings:	integer


Severely Errored Framing Seconds

This object shows the number of Severely Errored Framing Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentSEFSs

Settings:	integer


Unavailable Seconds

This object shows the number of Unavailable Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentUASs

Settings:	integer


Controlled Slip Seconds

This object shows the number of Controlled Slip Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentCSSs

Settings:	integer


Path Coding Violations

This object shows the number of path coding violations encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentPCVs

Settings:	integer


Line Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Line Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentLESs

Settings:	integer


Bursty Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Bursty Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentBESs

Settings:	integer


Degraded Minutes

This object shows the number of Degraded Minutes (DMs) encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentDMs

Settings:	integer


Line Code Violations

This object shows the number of line code violations encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentLCVs

Settings:	integer


High Density Modem DS1 Near End Interval Group

  Recently Completed Intervals

  Errored Seconds

  Severely Errored Seconds

  Severely Errored Framing Seconds

  Unavailable Seconds

  Controlled Slip Seconds

  Path Coding Violations

  Line Errored Seconds

  Bursty Errored Seconds

  Degraded Minutes

  Line Code Violations


Related MIB files: Rfc1406


Recently Completed Intervals

This object shows a number between 1 and 96, where 1 is the most recently completed 15 minute interval and 96 the least recently completed 15 minute interval (assuming that all 96 intervals are valid).

MIB Object:	dsx1IntervalNumber

Settings:	(1 - 96)


The description of the mib object above doesn’t make any sense. What’s it for?


Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentESs

Settings:	integer


Severely Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Severely Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentSESs

Settings:	integer


Severely Errored Framing Seconds

This object shows the number of Severely Errored Framing Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentSEFSs

Settings:	integer


Unavailable Seconds

This object shows the number of Unavailable Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentUASs

Settings:	integer


Controlled Slip Seconds

This object shows the number of Controlled Slip Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentCSSs

Settings:	integer


Path Coding Violations

This object shows the number of path coding violations encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentPCVs

Settings:	integer


Line Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Line Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentLESs

Settings:	integer


Bursty Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Bursty Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentBESs

Settings:	integer


Degraded Minutes

This object shows the number of Degraded Minutes (DMs) encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentDMs

Settings:	integer


Line Code Violations

This object shows the number of line code violations encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1CurrentLCVs

Settings:	integer


High Density Modem DS1 Near End Interval Group

  Recently Completed Intervals

  Errored Seconds

  Severely Errored Seconds

  Severely Errored Framing Seconds

  Unavailable Seconds

  Controlled Slip Seconds

  Path Coding Violations

  Line Errored Seconds

  Bursty Errored Seconds

  Degraded Minutes

  Line Code Violations


Related MIB files: Rfc1406


Recently Completed Intervals

This object shows a number between 1 and 96, where 1 is the most recently completed 15 minute interval and 96 the least recently completed 15 minute interval (assuming that all 96 intervals valid).

MIB Object:	dsx1IntervalNumber

Settings:	(1 - 96)


The description of the mib object above doesn’t make any sense. What’s it for?


Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1IntervalESs

Settings:	integer


Severely Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Severely Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1IntervalSESs

Settings:	integer


Severely Errored Framing Seconds

This object shows the number of Severely Errored Framing Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1IntervalSEFSs

Settings:	integer


Unavailable Seconds

This object shows the number of Unavailable Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1IntervalUASs

Settings:	integer


Controlled Slip Seconds

This object shows the number of Controlled Slip Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1IntervalCSSs

Settings:	integer


Path Coding Violations

This object shows the number of path coding violations encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1IntervalPCVs

Settings:	integer


Line Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Line Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1IntervalLESs

Settings:	integer


Bursty Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Bursty Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1IntervalBESs

Settings:	integer


Degraded Minutes

This object shows the number of Degraded Minutes (DMs) encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1IntervalDMs

Settings:	integer


Line Code Violations

This object shows the number of line code violations encountered by a DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 intervals. Each interval is 15 minutes long.

MIB Object:	dsx1IntervalLCVs

Settings:	integer


High Density Modem DS1 NPRI Statistics

  Invalid Bearer

  Invalid Channel ID

  Invalid Progress Indicator

  Invalid Calling Party

  Invalid Called Party

  Incoming Call Blocked


Related MIB files: Rds1


Invalid Bearer

This object shows the total number of “invalid bearer capability” errors received by the NPRI (PRI only).

MIB Object:	usrds1StatinCallInvdBrerCp

Settings:	integer


Invalid Channel ID

This object shows the total number of “invalid channel ID” errors received by the NPRI (PRI only).

MIB Object:	usrds1StatinCallInvdChID

Settings:	integer


Invalid Progress Indicator

This object shows the total number of “invalid progress indicator” errors received by the NPRI (PRI only).

MIB Object:	usrds1StatinCallInvdPgInd

Settings:	integer


Invalid Calling Party

This object shows the total number of invalid calling party numbers received by the NPRI (PRI only).

MIB Object:	usrds1StatinCallInvdClngP

Settings:	integer


Invalid Called Party

This object shows the total number of invalid called party numbers received by the NPRI (PRI only).

MIB Object:	usrds1StatinCallInvdCldP

Settings:	integer


Incoming Call Blocked

This object shows the total number of times the incoming call is blocked by the NPRI (PRI only).

MIB Object:	usrds1StatinCallCallBack

Settings:	integer


High Density Modem DS1 Near End Total Group

  Errored Seconds

  Severely Errored Seconds

  Severely Errored Framing Seconds

  Unavailable Seconds

  Controlled Slip Seconds

  Path Coding Violations

  Line Errored Seconds

  Bursty Errored Seconds

  Degraded Minutes

  Line Code Violations


Related MIB files: Rfc1406


Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1TotalESs

Settings:	integer


Severely Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Severely Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1TotalSESs

Settings:	integer


Severely Errored Framing Seconds

This object shows the number of Severely Errored Framing Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1TotalSEFSs

Settings:	integer


Unavailable Seconds

This object shows the number of Unavailable Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1TotalUASs

Settings:	integer


Controlled Slip Seconds

This object shows the number of Controlled Slip Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1TotalCSSs

Settings:	integer


Path Coding Violations

This object shows the number of path coding violations encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1TotalPCVs

Settings:	integer


Line Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Line Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1TotalLESs

Settings:	integer


Bursty Errored Seconds

This object shows the number of Bursty Errored Seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1TotalBESs

Settings:	integer


Degraded Minutes

This object shows the number of Degraded Minutes (DMs) encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1TotalDMs

Settings:	integer


Line Code Violations

This object shows the number of line code violations encountered by a DS1 interface in the previous 24 hour interval.

MIB Object:	dsx1TotalLCVs

Settings:	integer


Call Routing

  Inbound Call Routing Phone Number

  Inbound Call Routing Type


Related MIB files: Chs


Inbound Call Routing Phone Number

This parameter displays the inbound call routing phone number for the selected entity.

MIB Object:	t1hCrInboundPhNum

Settings:	DisplayString (SIZE(0..18 characters))


Inbound Call Routing Type

This parameter displays the inbound call routing type for the selected entity.

MIB Object:	t1hCrInBoundCallType

Settings:	DisplayString (SIZE(0..18 characters))


Call Statistics

  Group Selection


Related MIB files: T1h

The Group Selection topic is a duplicate of the Log Group Selection topic in NMCPSLG.rtf.


Group Selection

Use this parameter to set or view the optional call statistics groups included in log messages.  The groups are:

•	Usage (1)

•	Data Transfer (2)

•	Performance (3)

•	Operating Mode (4)

MIB Object:	t1hCfgLogCallStatGrpSel

Setting:	none (1, default)

groups 1 and 2 (2)

groups 1 and 3 (3)

groups 1 and 4 (4)

groups 1, 2 and 3 (5)

groups 1, 2 and 4 (6)

groups 1, 3 and 4 (7)

all groups (8)


HDM Identification

  Operational Status

  Serial Number

  Hardware Revision

  Software Version

  DRAM Installed (KB)

  ROM Installed (KB)


Related MIB files: Chs

Note that Routing Method and Call Routing parameter groups are documented in this file. These should be broken out into their own files after TCS 3.0 Early.


Operational Status

This parameter displays the operational status of the selected card.

MIB Object:	uchasEntityOperStatus

Settings:	other (1)

outOfService (2)

testing(3)

operational (4)

failed (5)

loading (6)

inLoopBackTest (7)


Serial Number

This parameter displays the serial number of the module in the specified slot.  If the slot is empty, this value is zero.

MIB Object:	uchasSlotModuleSerialNumber

Settings:	DisplayString (SIZE(0..31 characters))


Hardware Revision

This parameter displays the hardware version/revision level of the selected module.

MIB Object:	uchasSlotModuleVersion

Settings:	DisplayString (SIZE(0..124 characters))


Software Version

This parameter displays the software version/revision level of the selected entity.

MIB Object:	uchasEntityVersion

Settings:	DisplayString (SIZE(0..124 characters))


DIP Switch Settings

This parameter displays an integer that represents the DIP switch settings on the NAC.

MIB Object:	uchasSlotSwitchSettings

Settings:	0 - 1023

To convert the displayed integer to the actual DIP switch settings:

1.	Subtract the largest possible number value in the following table from the displayed integer.

2.	Place a 1 in the switch setting for the subtracted value.

3.	Subtract the largest possible number value in the following table from the remainder in Step 1.

4.	Place a 1 in the switch setting for the subtracted value.

5.	Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the remainder equals zero.

The conversion process is complete. The switch settings that contain a 1 are ON.


DRAM Installed (kb)
DRAM Installed

This parameter displays the number of kilobytes of dynamic random access memory (DRAM) installed on the NAC.

MIB Object:	uchasSlotRamInstalled

Settings:	0 through 4294967295


ROM Installed (kb)
ROM Installed

This parameter displays the number of kilobytes of flash read only memory (ROM) installed on the NAC.

MIB Object:	uchasSlotFlashInstalled

Settings:	0 through 4294967295


Modem Routing Method

This parameter displays the modem call routing method for the selected card.

MIB Object:	t1hCfgMdmRoutingMethod

Settings:	notSupported (1)

roundRobin (2)

firstAvailable (3)

fixedAssignment (4, default)


Inbound Call Routing Phone Number

This parameter displays the inbound call routing phone number for the selected entity.

MIB Object:	t1hCrInboundPhNum

Settings:	DisplayString (SIZE(0..18 characters))


Inbound Call Routing Type

This parameter displays the inbound call routing type for the selected entity.

MIB Object:	t1hCrInBoundCallType

Settings:	DisplayString (SIZE(0..18 characters))


Routing Method

  Modem Routing Method


Related MIB files: Chs


Modem Routing Method

This parameter displays the modem call routing method for the selected card.

MIB Object:	t1hCfgMdmRoutingMethod

Settings:	notSupported (1)

roundRobin (2)

firstAvailable (3)

fixedAssignment (4, default)


Modem Programmed Settings

  Modem Identification

  Line Interface Options

  Data Compression Settings

  DTE Interface Settings

  Signal Converter Settings

  Call Control Options

  Modem Error Control Settings

  Remote Modem Call Control Settings

  DNIS Access Codes

  Link Security Configuration

  Hub Security

  Cellular Configuration

  x2 Configuration

  Client Modem Identification

  ISDN Modem Call Control Options

  Optional Features


Modem Faults

Modem Event Thresholds

Trap Enables


Modem Event Thresholds

Block Errors Limit

Connection Timeout Limit (min)

DTE Idle Timeout Limit (min)

DTR False Event Timeout (sec)

DTR True Time Limit (sec)

Fall Back Limit


DTE Idle Timeout Limit (min)

Defines the length of time for the modem to wait before reporting a DTE Transmit Data Idle event.  There must be no activity for the specified number of minutes.  (See On DTE Idle Timeout.)

Settings: 	0 - 255

Default: 	0


Connection Timeout Limit (min)

Defines the number of minutes that a call may be connected before the NMC will report that a Connection Timeout Limit event has occurred.  A value of 0 for this parameter means that no time limit is to be observed.  (See On Connection Timeout.)

Settings:	0 - 255

Default: 	0


DTR False Event Timeout (sec)

Defines the number of seconds that will be used by the modem to qualify a DTR False event.  (See On DTR False.)

Settings: 	0 - 255

Default: 	0


DTR True Time Limit (sec)

Defines the number of seconds that will be used by the modem to qualify a DTR True event.  (See On DTR True.)

Settings: 	0 - 255

Default: 	0


Block Errors Limit

Defines the number of block errors that will be used to qualify a BLER Count at Threshold event for a given call.  (See On Block Error Count.)

Settings: 	0 - 255

Default: 	0


Fall Back Limit

Defines the number of line fallbacks that will be used to qualify a Fallback Count at Threshold event for a given call.  (See On Fallback Count.)

Settings: 	0 - 255

Default: 	0


Modem Parameters - Faults - Trap Enables
Trap Enables

Dial In Call Duration

Dial Out Call Duration

On Block Error Count

On Connection Failure

On Connection Timeout

On DTE Idle Timeout

On DTE Issued Reset

On DTR False

On DTR True

On Fallback Count

On Incoming Call

On Incoming Termination

On Missing Dial Tone

On Missing Loop Current

On Outgoing Call

On Outgoing Termination

Packet Bus Active

Packet Bus Lost


On Connection Failure

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection of a connect attempt failure event on the specified modem.  This does not include those connect attempt failures that are reported due to no dial tone and no loop current.

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


On Connection Timeout

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection of the expiration of the connection time limit on the specified modem.  (See Connection Timeout Limit.)

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, enableAll

Default:	disableAll


On DTR False

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection of a DTR false event on the specified modem.  (See DTR False Event Timeout.)

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


On DTR True

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection of a DTR True event on the specified modem.  (See DTR True Time Limit.)

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


On Incoming Call

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection of an incoming connection established on the specified modem.

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


On Incoming Termination

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection of an incoming call termination on the specified modem.

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


On Outgoing Call

Definition:  Enables an SNMP trap upon detection of an outgoing connection established by the specified modem.

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


On Outgoing Termination

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection of an outgoing connection terminated by the specified modem.

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, enableAll

Default:	disableAll


On DTE Issued Reset

Definition:  Enables an SNMP trap upon detection of a reset by the DTE on the specified modem.

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


On Block Error Count

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection of the BLER count reaching the threshold on the specified modem.  (See Block Errors Limit.)

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


On Fallback Count

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection of the fallback count reaching the threshold on the specified modem.  (See Fall Back Limit.)

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


On Missing Dial Tone

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection of missing dial tone on the specified modem.

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


On Missing Loop Current

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection of missing loop current on the specified modem.

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


On DTE Idle Timeout

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection of DTE transmit data idle on the specified modem.  (See DTE Idle Timeout Limit.)

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Packet Bus Active

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection that a packet bus link is active.  (See Packet Bus Lost.)

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Packet Bus Lost

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection that a packet bus link has been lost.  (See Packet Bus Active.)

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Dial Out Call Duration

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection that a dial out call (from the NMC) has ended.

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Dial In Call Duration

Enables an SNMP trap upon detection that a dial in call to the NMC) has ended.

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Modem Analog NIC Programmed Settings

NIC Description

NIC Line Status (RO)

NIC Revision

Operational Status


NIC Description

Displays the name of the NIC.

Settings:  Display String


NIC Line Status (RO)

Displays the current line status.

Settings:	Normal

Busy


Modem Analog NIC Faults

NIC Event Thresholds

Trap Enables


Modem Analog NIC Parameters - Faults - Trap Enables
Trap Enables

DTE Ring No Answer Event

Modem Ring No Answer Event


Modem Ring No Answer Event

Enable or disable the Modem Ring No Answer event.

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


DTE Ring No Answer Event

Enable or disable the DTE Ring No Answer event.

This event is used to detect a "dead-air" or "ring-no-answer" situation.  It is sent if one of the following conditions occur:

•	The Quad modem receives a digital call, sends an incoming call message to the NETServer, but does not receive an answer call message within 60 seconds.

•	The Quad modem receives a digital call, sends an incoming call message to the NETServer, but does not receive an answer call message before another call arrives.

•	The Quad modem receives an analog call, sends an incoming call message to the NETServer, but does not receive an answer call message before it detects a specified number of rings.  The number of rings can be selected by setting S-Register 0.

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


NIC Event Thresholds

Ring No Answer Events Threshold

Set up the threshold for the number of rings allowed before triggering a Ring No Answer event.

Settings:	Integer (0 - 255)


NETServer ISDN Programmed Settings

NETServer Configuration

NETServer Identification

Packet Bus Sessions


NETServer Identification

DIP Switch Settings

DRAM Installed

Hardware Revision

Operational Status

ROM Installed

Serial Number

Software Version


Operational Status

MIB Object:  uchasEntityOperStatus

Description:  Displays the current operational status.

Settings:	Other

Out of Service

Testing

Operational

Failed

Loading


Serial Number

MIB Object:  uchasSlotModuleSerialNumber

Description:  The Card's hardware serial number, as stored in EEPROM.

Settings:	Display String


Hardware Revision

MIB Object:  uchasSlotModuleVersion

Description:  The Card’s hardware revision level, as stored in EEPROM.

Settings:	Display String


Software Version

MIB Object:  uchasEntityVersion

Description:  The revision level of the software being executed by the Card's processor.

Settings: 	Display String


DIP Switch Settings on the NAC

MIB Object:  uchasSlotSwitchSettings

Description:  Displays the current  DIP switch settings on the selected NAC.

To interpret the integer displayed, convert into binary and read in a right-to-left fashion.

Example:  TCM  value = 1; Binary conversion = 0000000001

All DIP switches OFF, except DIP switch 1, which is ON.

Settings:	INTEGER


DRAM Installed

MIB Object:  uchasSlotRamInstalled

Description:  The number of Kbytes of DRAM on the Card.

Settings:	0..4294967295


ROM Installed

MIB Object:  uchasSlotFlashInstalled

Description:  The number of Kbytes of FLASH ROM on the Card.

Settings:	0..4294967295


Packet Bus Sessions

The Packet Bus Sessions configuration group contains parameters that assist the network administrator in configuring dynamic packet bus sessions.

Availability of Row for Packet Bus Session

Channel Session Assignment

Last Packet Communication Type

Session Assignment between Entities

Session Error Status

Session Packet Size

Session Packet Timeout Count

Session Request Status

Session Rx Packet Count

Session Status

Session Tx Packet Count

Slot Session Assignment


Slot Session Assignment

MIB Object:  pbSessionDestSlot

Description:  Identifies the slot to which a packet bus session has been assigned.

Settings:	1 - 64

Default:	7


Channel Session Assignment

MIB Object:  pbSessionDestChan

Description:  Identifies a particular entity to which a packet bus session has been assigned.

Settings:	1 - 255


Availability of Row for Packet Bus Session

MIB Object:  pbSessionRowState

Description:  Indicates if a packet bus row is available for assignment to a packet bus session.

Settings:	free
used

Default:	free


Session Assignment Between Entities

MIB Object:  pbSessionDestSess

Description:  A number that identifies the particular session from the other communicating Gateway.

Settings:	0 - 255


Session Status

MIB Object:  pbSessionStatus

Description: Displays the current status of the packet bus session.  A status of Unassigned coupled with a state of used indicates that a packet bus failure has occurred.

Settings:	unassigned
assigned
connected


Session Request Status

MIB Object:  pbSessionReqStatus

Description:  Used to assign or delete a session between entities.  A connect request an issuance of a packet bus session link start; a disconnect request is an issuance of a packet bus session link terminate.

Settings:	disconnected
connected

Default:	disconnected


Last Packet Communication Type

MIB Object:  pbSessionLastRequest

Description:  This parameter indicates the packet type last sent over the packet bus.

Settings:	unknown
open
close
listen
dial
disconnect
transmit
receive
setMode
query
flush
kill
reserve
answer
attach
disconnected
connected


Session Tx Packet Count

MIB Object:  pbSessionPktSent

Description: A counter that indicates number of packets that have been sent.

Setting:	Counter


Session Rx Packet Count

MIB Object:  pbSessionPktRcvd

Description: A counter that indicates number of packets that have been received.

Setting:	Counter


Session Packet Size

MIB Object:  pbSessionPktSize

Description: A number that indicates the packet size of the current or last established session.

Settings:	0..4294967295

Default:	0


Session Packet Timeout Count

MIB Object:  pbSessionBusTimeOut

Description: A counter that indicates number of packet bus timeout that have occurred.

Setting:	Counter


Session Error Status

MIB Object:  pbSessionErrorStatus

Description:  This parameter indicates the error status of the packet bus session.

Settings:	noError
invalidParm
socketNotOpened
noMoreSocket
connectionExist
connectionfailed
noMoreConnObj
noActiveConn
ackWaitTimeout
hwNakRcvd
otherBusError
linkStartRcvd
outOfSeqFrame
noMemory
nullPointer
invalidBlock
notInitialized
failedToRecv
invalidMsgType
exceedMaxSends
connectionReset
socketClosed
uiReqPending
heartbeatTimeout
remoteBusy
localBusy
noResponse
linkdownNoTx
nodataToTx
txPreAck
txTardyAck
txBusTimeout
rxBusTimeout
txTAL
rxTAL
txMasterTimeout
clkVanished
clkReturned
shutdown
frameerror
xIDTimeout
recvLSinInfoTransferState
recvIFrameWithWrongSeq
rxMsgBufferOverflow
linkDown
listeFailed
lisenRcvFailed
dtrDrop
answerFailed
openFailed
closeFailed
readFailed
writeFailed
autoParityFailed
setmodeFailed
badDataBase
padStreamsError
padError


NETServer Configuration

When you select this parameter group, the NETServer Manager configuration program is launched.


NETServer Faults

Packet Bus Traps


Packet Bus Traps

Packet Bus Active Session Trap

Packet Bus Congestion Trap

Packet Bus Session Error Trap

Packet Bus Session Inactive Trap

Packet Bus Session Lost Trap


Packet Bus Active Session Trap

Description:  Enables a trap when a packet bus session becomes active.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Packet Bus Congestion Trap

Description:  Enables a trap when a valid packet bus session is in progress but either the Modem or the Gateway packet bus driver is experiencing a congestion problem.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Packet Bus Session Lost Trap

Description:  Enables a trap when a valid Packet Bus session has been lost.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Packet Bus Session Inactive Trap

Description:  Enables a trap when a request is made to change a packet bus session from the active to inactive state.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Packet Bus Session Error Trap

Description:  Enables a trap when an error occurs during a packet bus session.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Network Management Card Programmed Settings

Added Cost Features

Auto Response Timer1

Auto Response Timer2

Auto Response Timer3

Auto Response Timer4

Configuration Group

Dial Out Configuration

Hub Security

Logging Group

NMC Identification

NMC Tests

System Group

  Network Management Card User Interface Configuration


NMC Identification

Chassis Temp (Deg. C) (RO)

DIP Switch Settings

DRAM Installed (KB) (RO)

General NMC Status (RO)

Hardware Revision (RO)

Number of Power up Failures (RO)

NVRAM Installed (KB) (RO)

Operational Status (RO)

Packet Bus Clocking Source

Serial Number (RO)

Software Compatibility Version (RO)

Software Version (RO)


Network Management Card Parameters - NMC Identification - Operational Status (RO)
Operational Status (RO)

This parameter indicates the current operation condition of a card.

Settings: 	Other

Out of Service

Testing

Operational

Failed

Loading

Operating NVRAM (X.25 only)

Administrative Changed (X.25 only)

Administrative NVRAM (X.25 only)


Network Management Card Parameters - NMC Identification - Serial Number (RO)
Serial Number (RO)

The Card's hardware serial number as stored in EEPROM.

Settings:	Display String


Network Management Card Parameters - NMC Identification - Hardware Revision (RO)
Hardware Revision (RO)

The hardware revision level of the Card as stored in EEPROM.

Settings:	Display String


Network Management Card Parameters - NMC Identification - Software Version (RO)
Software Version (RO)

The revision level of the software being executed by the Card's processor.

Settings: 	Display String


General NMC Status (RO)

This parameter indicates the general status or health of the Network Management Card.

Settings: 	Other, OK, or Non-critical Failure


DRAM Installed (KB) (RO)

This parameter indicates the amount of dynamic random access memory DRAM currently installed on the Network Management Card, expressed in kilobytes.

Settings:	Integer


NVRAM Installed (KB) (RO)

This parameter indicates the amount of nonvolatile random access memory (NRAM) currently installed on the Network Management Card, expressed in kilobytes.

Settings: 	Integer


Number of Power up Failures (RO)

This parameter indicates the number of power-up tests that failed during power up of the NMC.

Settings: 	Counter


Software Compatibility Version (RO)

This parameter indicates the version of Total Control Manager/SNMP with which the NMC is compatible.

Settings:	Display String


Packet Bus Clocking Source

Identifies the source of the backplane packet bus clock.  When the backplane clock fails for one NAC, the backplane is still the source. But if the clock fails for more than one NAC, the NMC takes over as the clock source.  A value of Not Applicable can mean there is no NMC clocking daughtercard (verified by the hardware revision level) or that the card is installed in a chassis that doesn’t have backplane clocking.

MIB Object:	nmcStatPktBusClkSrc

Settings:	notApplicable
backplaneActive
backplaneActive1ClkFail
nmcActive


Auto Response Timer1

Current Timer State--Timer1

Times Timer Triggered--Timer1

Start Date--Timer1

Start Time--Timer1

Timer Enable--Timer1

Timer Interval--Timer1

Stop Date--Timer1

Stop Time--Timer1


Timer Enable--Timer1

This parameter enables or disables Auto Response timers.

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


Start Date--Timer1

The date the timer becomes active.

Settings:	Display string (MM/DD/YY)


Stop Date--Timer1

The date the timer becomes passive (stops firing).

Settings:	Display string (MM/DD/YY)


Start Time--Timer1

The time (GMT) at which the timer becomes active.

Settings:	Display string (HH:MM:SS)


Stop Time--Timer1

The time (GMT) at which the timer becomes passive (stops firing).

Settings:	Display string (HH:MM:SS)


Timer Interval--Timer1

The rate at which the timer is to fire between start/stop time/date.  Measured in seconds.

Default:	0


Current Timer State--Timer1

This parameter indicates whether the timer is operational, currently active or currently passive.

Settings:	init,  passive, or active


Times Timer Triggered--Timer1

This parameter indicates the number of timer triggers that have occurred.

Default:	0


AutoResponse Timers
Auto Response Timer2

Current Timer State--Timer2

 Times Timer Triggered--Timer2

Start Date--Timer2

Start Time--Timer2

Stop Date--Timer2

Stop Time--Timer2

Timer Enable--Timer2

Timer Interval--Timer2


Timer Enable--Timer2

This parameter enables or disables Auto Response timers.

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


Start Date--Timer2

The date the timer becomes active.

Settings:	Display string (MM/DD/YY)


Stop Date--Timer2

The date the timer becomes passive (stops firing).

Settings:	Display string (MM/DD/YY)


Start Time--Timer2

The time (GMT) at which the timer becomes active.

Settings:	Display string (HH:MM:SS)


Stop Time--Timer2

The time (GMT) at which the timer becomes passive (stops firing).

Settings:	Display string (HH:MM:SS)


Timer Interval--Timer2

The rate at which the timer is to fire between start/stop time/date.  Measured in seconds.

Default:	0


Current State of the Timer--Timer2
Current Timer State (RO)--Timer2

This parameter indicates whether the timer is operational, currently active, or currently passive.

Settings:	init, passive, active


Times Timer Triggered--Timer2

This parameter indicates the number of timer triggers that have occurred.

Default:	0


AutoResponse Timers
Auto Response Timer3

Current Timer State--Timer3

Times Timer Triggered--Timer2

Start Date--Timer3

Start Time--Timer3

Stop Date--Timer3

Stop Time--Timer3

Timer Enable--Timer3

Timer Interval--Timer3


Timer Enable--Timer3

This parameter enables or disables Auto Response timers.

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


Start Date--Timer3

The date the timer becomes active.

Settings:	Display string (MM/DD/YY)


Stop Date--Timer3

The date the timer becomes passive (stops firing).

Settings:	Display string (MM/DD/YY)


Start Time--Timer3

The time (GMT) at which the timer becomes active.

Settings:	Display string (HH:MM:SS)


Stop Time--Timer3

The time (GMT) at which the timer becomes passive (stops firing).

Settings:	Display string (HH:MM:SS)


Timer Interval--Timer3

This parameter determines the rate at the timer fires between start/stop time/date.  Measured in seconds.

Default:	0


Current Timer State--Timer3

This parameter indicates whether the timer is operational, currently active or currently passive.

Settings:	init, passive, or active


Times Timer Triggered--Timer3

This parameter indicates the number of timer triggers that have occurred.

Default:	0


AutoResponse Timers
Auto Response Timer4

Current Timer State--Timer4

Times Timer Triggered--Timer4

Start Date--Timer4

Start Time--Timer4

Stop Date--Timer4

Stop Time--Timer4

Timer Enable--Timer4

Timer Interval--Timer4


Timer Enable--Timer4

This parameter enables or disables Auto Response timers.

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


Start Date--Timer4

The date the timer becomes active.

Settings:	Display string (MM/DD/YY)


Stop Date--Timer4

The date the timer becomes passive (stops firing).

Settings:	Display string (MM/DD/YY)


Start Time--Timer4

The time (GMT) at which the timer becomes active.

Settings:	Display string (HH:MM:SS)


Stop Time--Timer4

The time (GMT) at which the timer becomes passive (stops firing).

Settings:	Display string (HH:MM:SS)


Timer Interval--Timer4

The rate at which the timer is to fire between start/stop time/date.  Measured in seconds.

Default:	0


Current Timer State--Timer4

This parameter indicates whether the timer is operational, currently active or currently passive.

Settings:	initiate, passive, active


Times Timer Triggered--Timer4

This parameter indicates the number of timer triggers that have occurred.

Default:	0


Logging Group

The following parameters may be configured when you select the NMC from the Virtual Front Panel Display, select Programmed Settings from the Configuration Menu, and open the Logging Group.

Event Logging Server

Log Group Selection

Log Server’s UDP Port

Logging Client TX Retry

Primary Log Server IP Address

Secondary Log Server IP Address


Log Server Select
Event Logging Server

This parameter selects which RADIUS Accounting Server will log events.

That is, if the primary server were to stop accepting data for any reason, the data would be sent to a secondary server.  If the secondary server were to stop accepting data, the data would no longer be sent.  Information would then be lost unless you were able to get the primary server back up.  If you select the secondary server and the server experienced a problem receiving data, the data would simply be lost.

Note:  This setting is dynamic.  The parameter value reflects the server currently in use.  However, once the Primary and Secondary servers go down, the parameter value will be None.  Once None becomes the parameter value, you must reconfigure this parameter; it will not automatically change to Primary or Secondary when a server becomes available.

Settings:	none (Default), primary, or secondary


Primary Log Server IP Address

This specifies the IP address of the primary RADIUS Accounting Server.

Setting:  IP Address


Secondary Log Server IP Address

This specifies the IP address of the secondary RADIUS Accounting Server.

Setting:  IP Address


Log Server's UDP Port

The UDP port number of the RADIUS Accounting Server.

Default:  1646


Logging Client TX Retry

This parameter determines the no response retransmission count the NMC logging client observes for messages sent to the RADIUS Accounting Server.

Settings:	0 - 20, 3 (Default)


Log Group Selection

Description:  This parameter lets you specify what information will be sent by the NMC to the server.  This way, you can control traffic level and send only that information likely to be included in the logs kept by the server.  The groups are as follows:

Group 1 Usage Statistics  (always sent) User Name Call Start Date/Time  Call End Date/Time  Call Termination Reason Number Dialed—OUTGOING ONLY ANI--INCOMING ONLY DNIS--INCOMING ONLY Call Duration Group 2 Data Transfer Statistics Characters Sent Characters Received Octets Sent Octets Received Blocks Sent Blocks Received Blocks Resent Characters Lost Line Reversals	Group 3 Performance Statistics Block CRC Errors Link NAKs Link Fallbacks Link Upshifts Link Timeouts Initial Link TX Rate Final Link TX Rate Initial Link RX Rate Final Link RX Rate Retrains Requested Retrains Granted Group 4 Operating Mode Statistics Sync/Async Mode Modulation Type Originate/Answer Mode  Error Control Type Data Compression Type HST Back Channel Rate Default DTE Data Rate  High Freq Equali
Settings:	none	(only group 1 data sent)

group2	(data from groups 1 and 2 sent)

group3	(data from groups 1 and 3 sent)

group4	(data from groups 1 and 4 sent)

group23	(data from groups 1, 2 and 3 sent)

group24	(data from groups 1, 2 and 4 sent)

group34	(data from groups 1, 3 and 4 sent)

all	(data from all groups sent)

Default:	none


Configuration Group

Auto Config on Card Initialization

Chassis Name

Daylight Savings Time

GMT Time

NMC LED Display

System Date

System Time

Time Zone


GMT Time

Description:  This parameter reflects the current time in Greenwich Mean Time.  The value of this object is sent with any SNMP trap messages for use by the receiving Management Stations.


System Time

Description:  This parameter reflects the current time kept by the real-time clock on the NMC.  It has the capability to maintain the correct time for short durations without power.

The time is displayed in the format HH:MM:SS.

Settings:	Display String


System Date

Description:  This parameter is used to set and read the current date kept by the NMC's real-time clock.  It should be set to the local date where the chassis is physically located.

The date is displayed in the format MM/DD/YY.

Settings:	Display String


Time Zone

Description:  This parameter allows you to specify the time zone where this equipment is installed.  It is used in the conversion from local time to Greenwich Mean Time.  Zones are defined by their variance from GMT.  There are options for GMT plus and minus 12 to allow for the International Date Line.  GMT minus 12 indicates a position east of the International Date Line, while GMT plus 12 indicates a position west of the International Date Line.  (See also Daylight Savings Time.)

Settings:	easternUsa-gmtPlus5

centralUsa-gmtPlus6

mountainUsa-gmtPlus7

pacificUsa-gmtPlus8

gmtPlus9

gmtPlus10

gmtPlus11

gmtPlus12

gmtMinus12

gmtMinus11

gmtMinus10

gmtMinus9

gmtMinus8

gmtMinus7

gmtMinus6

gmtMinus5

gmtMinus4

gmtMinus3

gmtMinus2

gmtMinus1

gmtPlus0

gmtPlus1

gmtPlus2

gmtPlus3

gmtPlus4

Default: 	gmtPlus0


Daylight Savings Time

Description:  This parameter allows you to specify whether or not the NMC will honor Daylight Savings Time when converting from local time to Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).  (See also Time Zone.)

Settings:	Enable or Disable

Default: 	Enable


Auto Config on Card Insert
Auto Config on Card Initialization

Description:  This parameter specifies whether or not the NMC should configure cards automatically when they are inserted into the chassis or when the chassis is powered on.  If enabled, the values used to configure the card are those that were last saved to the NMC's NVRAM.  If a different type of card has been installed in the slot than was there when settings were last stored in the NMC's NVRAM, default values are used to configure the card.

Settings:	Disable or Enable

Default:	Disable


Chassis Name

Description:  This is the operator-defined name assigned to the chassis.

Settings: 	Display String

Default:	U.S. Robotics Nas Chassis


NMC LED Display

Description:  This is the operator-defined value (up to four alphanumeric characters) that will be displayed in the Hub Number/Status field on the front panel of the NMC.

Settings: 	Display String

Default: 	USR


Dial Out Configuration

AT Init String

Connection Failure Limit

Pause Between Retries (sec)

Retry Suspension Interval

WAN Connect Number

WAN Dial Out Attempt Limit


AT Init String
AT Initialization String

This parameter designates the initialization string the software will send to a connected modem before dialing the phone number of a remote wide area network (WAN) connection.

Settings:  	Display String, AT&FE0Q0&H1&R2&B1V1 (Default)


WAN Connect Number

This parameter defines the phone number the NMC uses to dial a modem connected to the wide area network (WAN) port if there is no existing connection when the NMC tries to send an IP datagram out that port.  When configuring this parameter with a modem dial string, the string must begin with the appropriate AT dial commands. For example, ATDT.

Settings:	Display String, 0 (Default)


WAN Dial Out Attempt Limit

This parameter specifies the number of attempts made to send a packet out the Wide Area Network (WAN) port during a dial-up connection. A parameter value of zero means no attempt limit is set. The NMC continues trying to transmit the packet until it succeeds.

Settings:	0 - 20, 0 (Default)


Pause Between Retries (sec)

This parameter sets the amount of time, in seconds, that the NMC pauses between attempts to transmit a packet.

Settings:	5 - 120, 20 (Default)


Retry Suspension Interval

This parameter determines how long, in seconds, the wide area network (WAN) port should suspend its efforts to send out a packet. This period applies when the number of failures has reached the maximum specified in the Connection Failure Limit parameter.

Settings:	0 - 300, 300 (Default)


Connection Failure Limit

This parameter determines how many connection failures to allow before suspending retries.  (See also Retry Suspension Interval.)

Settings:	0 - 50, 3 (Default)


NMC Tests

A/D Converter Test (RO)

EEPROM CRC Test (RO)

Ethernet Interface Interface Hardware

File System CRC Test (RO)

Flash Program VPP Test (RO)

Management Bus NIC Test (RO)

Management Bus Slot 1-16 Test (RO)

Management Bus UART #1/ #2

Manufacturing NVRAM CRC

MP Device Configuration

Power Supply Presence Test (RO)

Power-up A/D Converter Test (RO)

Power-up EEPROM CRC Test (RO)

Power-up Flash Program VPP Test (RO)

Power-up Power Supply Presence Test (RO)

User Interface WAN Port UART


Management Bus UART #1/ #2

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


User Interface WAN Port UART

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


Manufacturing NVRAM CRC

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


MP Device Configuration

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


Ethernet Interface Interface Hardware

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


A/D Converter Test (RO)

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


Network Management Card Parameters - NMC Tests - EEPROM CRC Test (RO)
EEPROM CRC Test (RO)

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


Flash Program VPP Test (RO)

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


Power Supply Presence Test (RO)

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


File System CRC Test (RO)

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


Management Bus Slot 1-16 Test (RO)
Management Bus Slot 1−16 Test (RO)

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


Management Bus NIC Test (RO)

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


Power-up A/D Converter Test (RO)

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


Power-up EEPROM CRC Test (RO)

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


Power-up Flash Program VPP Test (RO)

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


Power-up Power Supply Presence Test (RO)

Description:  Displays Pass or Fail for the latest test status.


Network Management Card Parameters - Programmed Settings - Hub Security
Hub Security

Change Password Message

Connect Success Message

Dial Back Attempt Limit

Dial Back Delay

Dial Back Name Prompt

Dial Back Password Prompt

Dial Back Pending Prompt

Dial Back Number Prompt

User Name Prompt

User Password Prompt

Invalid Modem Select Message

Login Failed Message

Modem Attempt Limit

Modem Select Prompt

New Password Message

No Modems Available Message

Restricted Number Prompt

Response Attempt Limit

Response Echo Enable

Response Timeout

Security Server IP Address

Security Server Retries

Security Server UDP Port

Security Server Unavailable

Security Server Select

Secondary Security Server IP

Third RADIUS Security Backup

Fourth RADIUS Security Server Backup

Fifth RADIUS Security Backup

Sixth RADIUS Security Backup

Seventh RADIUS Security Backup

Eighth RADIUS Security Backup

RADIUS Security Server Host

RADIUS Security Server DNS

Status Server Request Interval

Password Prompt


User Name Prompt

This is the first prompt that appears when users establish a connection with a security modem.  It may consist of up to 80 characters, and serves to identify the system and prompt users to enter their name.  (See User Password Prompt.)

Settings:	Display String

Default: 	^J^MU.S. ROBOTICS TOTAL CONTROL
^J^MUSERNAME:


User Password Prompt

This prompt appears after a valid response has been received to a User Name Prompt.  It may consist of up to 80 characters, and prompts users to enter their password.  (See User Name Prompt.)

Settings:	Display String

Default:	^J^MPASSWORD:


Dial Back Name Prompt

This prompt only appears when users are configured for dial back security (dialing back to either a stored or an entered number), and may consist of up to 80 characters.  In addition, the Request Login Validation on Dial Back field must be enabled for the user in the RADIUS user database.  (See Dial Back Password Prompt.)

Settings:	Display String

Default:

^J^MU.S. ROBOTICS TOTAL CONTROL DIAL BACK
^J^ MUSERNAME:


Dial Back Password Prompt

This prompt appears after a valid response has been supplied to the Dial Back Name Prompt.  It may consist of up to 80 characters.

Settings:	Display String

Default:	^J^MPASSWORD:


Dial Back Number Prompt

This prompt only appears if a user has been configured for Dial Back Entered mode in the RADIUS user database.  It may consist of up to 80 characters, and prompts users to enter a number at which the system can call them back.

Settings:	Display String

Default:

^J^MENTER YOUR DIAL BACK PHONE NUMBER:


Dial Back Pending Prompt

This message only appears if a user has been configured for Dial Back mode (to either a stored or an entered number) in the RADIUS user database.  It may consist of up to 80 characters.  This message confirms to users that they have logged in successfully, and lets them know that the system has reserved a modem to call them back.

Settings:	Display String

Default:  	^J^MSUCCESSFUL LOGIN, DIAL BACK PENDING.


Modem Select Prompt

This message only appears if a user is configured for Dial Back mode in the RADIUS user database, and also has enabled the Request Dial Back Modem Selection field.  The system displays a list of allowed dial back modems that have been entered for this user.  Users must enter the number that appears on the menu next to the modem of their choice.  This prompt may consist of up to 80 characters.

Settings:	Display String

Default:  	^J^MENTER YOUR DIAL BACK MODEM:


Login Failed Message

This message appears when users fail to enter a valid name/password combination.  It may consist of up to 80 characters.

Settings:	Display String

Default:  	^J^MINVALID LOGIN ATTEMPT.


Restricted Number Prompt

This message appears when a user has been prompted to enter a dial back phone number and the entered number violates the allowed numbers specified in the Call Restriction List.  It may consist of up to 80 characters.

Settings:	Display String

Default: 	^J^MRESTRICTED PHONE NUMBER.


Invalid Modem Select Message

This message appears when users that are configured for both Dial Back mode as well as Request Dial Back Modem Selection select a modem to which they are not allowed access, as defined in the list of Allowed Dial Back Modems.  This message may consist of up to 80 characters.

Settings:	Display String

Default:  	^J^MINVALID MODEM.


No Modems Available Message

This message appears when the system is unable to reserve a modem for dial back that was either selected by the user or defined in the list of Allowed Dial Back Modems.  It may consist of up to 80 characters.

Settings:	Display String

Default:  	^J^MSELECTED MODEM UNAVAILABLE.


Connect Success Message

This message confirms that users have successfully completed their login and may proceed with either their dial-in or dial-out call.  It may consist of up to 80 characters.

Settings:	Display String

Default:  	^J^MSECURITY CONNECTION SUCCESSFUL.


New Password Message

This prompt appears when a user's password has expired.  It follows the Change Password Message, and is issued once for the new password and then again to confirm the new password.  It may consist of up to 80 characters.

Settings:	Display String

Default:  	^J^MNEW PASSWORD:


Change Password Message

This parameter determines the message displayed during name/password authentication when a is expired.  It may consist of up to 80 characters.  This message is immediately followed by the New Password Message.

Settings:	Display String, 	^J^MPASSWORD EXPIRED (Default)


Response Timeout

This parameter determines how many seconds you have to respond to system prompts.  If you fail to respond within the specified time, you are disconnected; and a Dial Security login failure trap is generated.

Any login failures of this type also apply to the User Blocked (Blacklist) function if a valid user name is entered.  This field takes precedence over a modem's inactivity timer during a security login.

Settings: 	10 - 255, 30 (Default)


Response Attempt Limit

This parameter determines how many tries you are allowed per prompt during any one security session.  If the limit is reached, the call is terminated. For purposes of this parameter, user name and password are treated as a single prompt. If a valid name and an invalid password are entered, the failure is counted against both the Prompt Response Attempt Limit and the Failed Logins Before Blacklist.

Settings:	1 - 16, 1 (Default)


Response Echo Enable

This parameter enables or disables the NMC to echo the user's typed responses back to the management station screen. Password responses are echoed as X's.

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


Dial Back Delay

This parameter defines how long the NMC waits, in seconds,  before the next dial back when it is unable to connect.

Settings: 	1 - 100, 30 (Default)


Dial Back Attempt Limit

This parameter defines the number of times the NMC will attempt to dial back a user configured for dial back if an initial dial back attempt fails.

Settings: 	1 - 100, 1 (Default)


Security Server IP Address

This parameter identifies the IP address of the RADIUS security server where the NMC RADIUS client sends requests.

Settings: 	IP address


Security Server UDP Port

This parameter identifies the UDP port on the RADIUS security server where the NMC's RADIUS client issues requests.

Default:	1645


Security Server Retries

This parameter defines the number of attempts that the NMC's RADIUS client will make when attempting to send requests to a RADIUS security server.

Settings:	0 - 3, 1 (Default)


Modem Attempt Limit

This parameter defines how many times an attempt can be made to log in on any one modem without success.  If this value is exceeded, the Login Attempt Limit Exceeded trap is generated if it has been enabled.

Settings: 	1 - 16, 3 (Default)


Security Server Unavailable

This parameter specifies whether to deny or allow a call when a dial security server is unreachable.

MIB Object:	nmcHsServerUnavailable

Settings:	denyCall (Default) or allowCall


Security Server Select

This parameter specifies the server selection for RADIUS Security.

MIB Object	nmcHsServerSelect

Settings	primary (1)

secondary (2)

none (3)

third (4),

fourth (5)

fifth (6)

sixth (7)

seventh (8)

eighth (9)


Secondary Security Server IP

This parameter identifies the IP address of the Secondary RADIUS Security Server.

MIB Object	nmcHsSecondarySrvrAddr

Settings	IP Address


Third RADIUS Security Backup

This parameter identifies the IP address of the Third RADIUS Security backup server.

MIB Object	nmcHsSecurity3SrvrAddr

Settings	IP Address


Fourth RADIUS Security Server Backup

This parameter identifies the IP address of the Fourth RADIUS Security backup server.

MIB Object	nmcHsSecurity4SrvrAddr

Settings	IP Address


Fifth RADIUS Security Backup

This parameter identifies the IP address of the Fifth RADIUS Security backup server.

MIB Object	nmcHsSecurity5SrvrAddr

Settings	IP Address


Sixth RADIUS Security Backup

This parameter identifies the IP address of the Sixth RADIUS Security backup server.

MIB Object	nmcHsSecurity6SrvrAddr

Settings	IP Address


Seventh RADIUS Security Backup

This parameter identifies the IP address of the Seventh RADIUS Security backup server.

MIB Object	nmcHsSecurity7SrvrAddr

Settings	IP Address


Eighth RADIUS Security Backup

This parameter identifies the IP address of the Eighth RADIUS Security backup server.

MIB Object	nmcHsSecurity8SrvrAddr

Settings	IP Address


RADIUS Security Server Host

This parameter identifies the host name of the RADIUS Security server used to resolve IP addresses through DNS queries.

MIB Object	nmcHsSecuritySrvrName

Settings	Display String (Size (0..80))


RADIUS Security Server DNS

This parameter indicates RADIUS Security server IP addresses are resolved  through DNS queries. If disabled, the Security server address objects are used.

MIB Object	nmcHsSecuritySrvrDnsEna

Settings	enable (1)

disable (2, default)


Status Server Request Interval
Status-Server Request Interval

This parameter defines the interval in seconds between Status-Server requests for a failed RADIUS Security server connection.

MIB Object	nmcHsSecurityStatusInt

Settings	INTEGER 10..65535 (30, default)


Password Prompt

This parameter enables and disables the PASSWORD prompt for Dial-In Hub Security

MIB Object	nmcHsSecurityStatusInt

Settings	enable (1, default)

disable (2)


System Group

Chassis Type (RO)

System Up Time (ms) (RO)

USR Object ID (RO)


Chassis Type (RO)

Description:  Defines the type of chassis in which the NMC is installed.

Settings:	U.S. Robotics 7-slot chassis or U.S. Robotics 17-slot chassis


USR Object ID (RO)

Description:  Displays the object ID assigned by U.S. Robotics, containing the proprietary U.S. Robotics Enterprise ID.


System Up Time (ms) (RO)

Displays the amount of time, in milliseconds, since the network management portion of the system was last reinitialized.


Network Management Card Faults

Chassis Trap Enables

Hub Security Traps

NMC Trap Enables

Packet Bus Traps


Chassis Trap Enables

Card Inserted

Card Removed

Fan Failure Detected

Generate Watchdog Traps

High Temperature Detected

NMC Communication Error

Power Supply Failed

Power Supply Out of Range


Card Inserted

Description:  Enables a trap when a card is inserted into the chassis.  This parameter is effective across all slots in the chassis.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	enableTrap


Card Removed

Description:  Enables a trap when a card is removed from the chassis.  This parameter is effective across all slots in the chassis.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	enableTrap


Power Supply Out of Range

Description:  Enables a trap when a power supply enters a warning state, such as one or more output voltages being out of range.  This parameter is effective across all PSUs in the chassis.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	enableTrap


Power Supply Failed

Description:  Enables a trap when a power supply fails and is automatically shut down due to overvoltage, overcurrent, etc.  This parameter is effective across all PSUs in the chassis

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	enableTrap


High Temperature Detected

Description:  Enables a trap when the NMC detects the temperature in the chassis to be excessive.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	enableTrap


Fan Failure Detected

Description:  Enables a trap when the fan in the chassis is not rotating with sufficient speed to cool the power supplies.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	enableTrap


Generate Watchdog Traps

Description:  Enables a trap when a logical networking entity in the chassis undergoes a watchdog timeout event, indicating a software failure.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	enableTrap


NMC Communication Error

Description:  Enables a trap when the SNMP proxy agent in the NMC is not able to communicate properly with a logical networking entity in the chassis.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	enableTrap


PSU's Incompatible Trap

This parameter enables a trap when the PSUs in the chassis do not have the same ampere ratings.

MIB Object	uchasPsuIncompatible

Settings	enableTrap (1, default)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


NMC Trap Enables

Authentication Failure

Description:  This parameter indicates whether or not the SNMP Proxy Agent running in the NMC should send a trap upon reception of an SNMP message that was not properly authenticated.  MIB-I and II require a mechanism for enabling/disabling generation of this trap.

Settings:	Enable or Disable

Default:	Enable


Hub Security Traps

Dial Back Restricted Number

Dial In Login Failure

Dial Out Login Failure

Dial Out Restricted Number

Log Server Loss

Login Attempt Limit Exceeded

Response Attempt Limit Exceeded

Security Server Lost

User Blacklist Login

User Blacklist


Dial Out Login Failure

Description:  Enables/disables a trap when a dial out login security session has failed.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Dial In Login Failure

Description:  Enables/disables a trap when a dial in login security session has failed.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Dial Out Restricted Number

Description:  Enables/disables a trap when a dial out security session has failed as a result of attempting to dial a restricted phone number.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Dial Back Restricted Number

Description:  Enables/disables a trap when a dial back security session has failed as a result of attempting to dial a restricted phone number.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


User Blacklist

Description:  Enables/disables a trap when a security user has reached their final failed login attempt limit and is now being blacklisted.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


User Blacklist Login

Description:  Enables/disables a trap when a security login attempt by a currently blacklisted user occurs.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Response Attempt Limit Exceeded

Description:  Enables/disables a trap when a security user has failed to issue a valid response to a particular security prompt before the configured limit.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Login Attempt Limit Exceeded

Description:  Enables/disables a trap when a security session has failed because the indicated user does not appear in the security user database.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Log Server Loss
Log Server Lost

Description:  Enable/disable the trap generated when communication is lost with the Accounting/Event Logging Server.  This trap reports a trap sequence number, an event ID, the time the loss occurred (GMT), and whether the primary or secondary accounting server was lost.

Settings:	Disable or Enable

Default:	Disable


Security Server Lost

Description:  Enable/disable the trap generated when communication is lost with the Security Server.

Settings:	Disable or Enable

Default:	Disable


Packet Bus Traps

Packet Bus Clock Fail

Packet Bus Clock Switch

Single Packet Bus Clock Fail


Single Packet Bus Clock Fail

MIB Object:	nmcTeSinglePbClockFail

Description:  Enable/disable the trap generated when the NMC detects that there is a packet bus clock failure in a single slot.

Settings:	Enable or Disable

Default:	Enable


Packet Bus Clock Switch

MIB Object:	nmcStatPktBusClkSrc

Description:  Enable/disable the trap generated when the NMC detects that there is a packet bus clock failure in multiple slots and the NMC has assumed the role of clock master.

Settings:	Enable or Disable

Default:	Enable


Packet Bus Clock Fail

MIB Object:	nmcTePbClockFail

Description:  Enable/disable the trap generated when the NMC detects that the packet bus clock on the NMC daughter board has failed.  Check status of the Packet Bus Clocking Source (nmcStatPktBusClkSrc) in the NMC Identification group to determine if the NMC was acting as clock master.

Settings:	Enable or Disable

Default:	Enable


TFTP Timeout

Use this parameter to set or view the timeout in seconds for TFTP retries.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgTFTPTimeout

Setting:	Integer (1 - 30, 4 default)


Network Management Card Logging Group Configuration

  Event Logging Server

  Primary Logging Server Address

  Secondary Logging Server Address

  Log Server’s UDP Port

  Log Client TX Retry

  Log Group Selection

  MD5 Calculation

  Third Logging Server Address

  Fourth Logging Server Address

  Fifth Logging Server Address

  Sixth Logging Server Address

  Seventh Logging Server Address

  Eighth Logging Server Address

  Logging Server’s Name

  Logging Server’s DNS Enable

  Status Server Request Interval


Related MIB files: Nmc


Event Logging Server

Use this parameter to set or view the RADIUS Accounting Server that is currently logging events. Server IP addresses are assigned to each setting of this object in the matching Logging Group parameters.

If the current server stops accepting data for any reason, the next server in line assumes this responsibility. For example, if the primary server failed, the event logging data would be sent to the secondary server.

Note:  This setting is dynamic.  The parameter value reflects the server currently in use.  However, if the last specified server goes down, the parameter value will be None.  Once None becomes the parameter value, you must reconfigure this parameter; it will not automatically change to a specified server when one becomes available.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLogSrvrSelect

Settings:	primary (1)

secondary (2)

none (3, default)

third (4)

fourth (5)

fifth (6)

sixth (7)

seventh (8)

eighth (9)


Verify the operation of this object with Svetlana. For example, if “secondary” is selected as the event logging server, does the parameter change to “none” or “third” when the secondary server stops accepting data?

Corrected by Mike Roels on 08/11/97.


Primary Log Server IP Address

Use this parameter to set or view the IP address of the primary RADIUS Accounting Server.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLogPriSrvrAddr

Setting:	IP Address


Secondary Log Server IP Address

Use this parameter to set or view the IP address of the secondary RADIUS Accounting Server.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLogSecSrvrAddr

Setting:	IP Address


Log Server's UDP Port

Use this parameter to set or view the logging server's UDP port number. The default port is 1646.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLogUdpPortNum

Setting:	Integer (0..65535, 1646 default)


Log Client TX Retry

Use this parameter to set or view the NMC logging client transmission retry count.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLogRetryCnt

Setting:	(0..20, default is 3)


Log Group Selection

Use this parameter to set or view the optional call statistics groups included in log messages.  The groups are:

•	Usage (1)

•	Data Transfer (2)

•	Performance (3)

•	Operating Mode (4)

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLogCallStatGrpSel

Setting:	none (1, default)

groups 1 and 2 (2)

groups 1 and 3 (3)

groups 1 and 4 (4)

groups 1, 2 and 3 (5)

groups 1, 2 and 4 (6)

groups 1, 3 and 4 (7)

all groups (8)


I sent the following questions about Log Group Selection to Svetlana on 08/12/97 (SMO).

The description in Log Group Selection identifies 4 groups, but 8 are listed under settings. Even if you exclude 1 (none) and 8 (all), we're still short two groups in the description.

The default value (1, which equals none) isn't listed as a group (there is no group 1 in the settings section), but group 1 is always sent by this object.

How do I match up the groups in the description (Groups 1-4) to the groups in the Settings  section of the mib object?


MD5 Calculation

Use this optional parameter to enable or disable MD5 calculation by the accounting Client for accounting request messages.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLogMD5Calc

Setting:	enable (1)

disable (2, default)


Third logging server IP address

Use this parameter to set or view the IP address of the third RADIUS Accounting Server.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLog3SrvrAddr

Setting:	IP Address


Fourth logging server IP address

Use this parameter to set or view the IP address of the fourth RADIUS Accounting Server.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLog4SrvrAddr

Setting:	IP Address


Fifth logging server IP address

Use this parameter to set or view the IP address of the fifth RADIUS Accounting Server.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLog5SrvrAddr

Setting:	IP Address


Sixth logging server IP address

Use this parameter to set or view the IP address of the sixth RADIUS Accounting Server.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLog6SrvrAddr

Setting:	IP Address


Seventh logging server IP address

Use this parameter to set or view the IP address of the seventh RADIUS Accounting Server.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLog7SrvrAddr

Setting:	IP Address


Eighth logging server IP address

Use this parameter to set or view the IP address of the eighth RADIUS Accounting Server.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLog8SrvrAddr

Setting:	IP Address


Logging Server's Name

Use this parameter to set or view the logical host names of one or more logging servers. Host names can contain a maximum of 80 characters.

The NMCs DNS Resolver application queries the DNS using these logical host names to resolve one or more logging server IP addresses.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLogSrvrName

Settings:	DisplayString (SIZE(0..80))


Get an explanation of the 2nd paragraph in the Logging Server’s Name topic and the settings options for this mib object.

Corrected by Mike Roels on 08/11/97.


Logging Server's DNS Enable

Use this parameter to set or view the current state of the logging server host address DNS resolution (enabled or disabled).

Note: When this parameter is disabled, the logging server addresses are taken from the log server address objects.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLogDnsEna

Settings:	enable (1)

disable (2)


Status Server Request Interval

Use this parameter to set or view the interval in seconds between Status-Server requests for a failed RADIUS Accounting server connection.

MIB Object:	nmcCfgLogDnsEna

Settings:	Integer (10..65535, 30 default)


Network Management Card User Interface Configuration Parameter Group
Network Management Card User Interface Configuration

  LAN IP Address

  LAN Subnet Mask

  WAN IP Address

  WAN Subnet Mask

  Default Gateway IP Address

  NMC NIC LAN Interface

  Route Traffic between LAN and WAN

  Set UI Port to SLIP Port

  Second SLIP Port IP Address

  Second SLIP Port Subnet Mask

  UI Port Inactivity Timer

  Password for UI


LAN IP Address

This parameter defines the IP address of the LAN interface port on the network management card (NMC) network interface card (NIC).

MIB Object:	nmcUiCfgLanIPAddr

Settings: 	IP address


LAN Subnet Mask

This parameter defines the subnet mask for the IP address of the LAN interface port on the network management card (NMC) network interface card (NIC).

MIB Object:	nmcUiCfgLanSubnetMask

Settings:	IP address


WAN IP Address

This parameter defines the IP address of the WAN interface port on the network management card (NMC) network interface card (NIC).

MIB Object:	nmcUiCfgWanIPAddr

Settings:	IP address


WAN Subnet Mask

This parameter describes the subnet mask for the IP address of the WAN interface port on the network management card (NMC) network interface card (NIC).

MIB Object:	nmcUiCfgWanSubnetMask

Settings:	IP address


Default Gateway IP Address

This parameter defines the IP address of the Gateway to which the system will forward packets whose network identification does not match the network identification of either the LAN or WAN interface port on the network management card (NMC) network interface card (NIC).

MIB Object:	nmcUiCfgDefaultGwyIP

Settings:	IP address


LAN Interface Enable
NMC NIC LAN Interface

This parameter enables or disables the LAN interface on the network management card (NMC) network interface card (NIC)..

MIB Object:	nmcUiCfgLanifEnable

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Route Traffic Between LAN &
Route Traffic Between LAN and WAN

This parameter enables or disables the ability of the NMC to route traffic between its LAN and SLIP interfaces.

MIB Object:	nmcUiCfgRouteEnable

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Set UI Port to SLIP Port

This parameter configures the UI port as either SLIP or UI.

MIB Object:	nmcUiCfgUiSlipCfg

Settings:	uiport (Default) or slipport


Second SLIP Port Address

This parameter defines the IP address of the second SLIP port.

MIB Object:	nmcUiCfgWan2IpAddr

Settings:	IP address


Second SLIP Port Subnet Mask

This parameter defines the subnet mask for the second SLIP port.

MIB Object:	nmcUiCfgWan2SubnetMask

Settings:	IP address


UI Port Inactivity Time

This parameter defines the inactive time in minutes required to set the Inactivity Time trigger on the UI port. A setting of 0 disables the timer. The setting values are measured in minutes.

MIB Object:	nmcUiCfgInactiveTime

Settings:	0 through 1440, (Default 3)


Password for UI

This parameter enables or disables the PASSWORD protection for UI functions

MIB Object:	nmcUiCfgPassword

Settings:	enable (1)

disable (2, default)


LAN IP Address

This object defines the IP address of the LAN interface port on the NMC Network Interface Card.

Object name:	nmcUiCfgLanIPAddr

Settings: 	IP address


LAN Subnet Mask

This object defines the subnet mask for the IP address of the LAN interface port on the NMC Network Interface Card.

Object name:	nmcUiCfgLanSubnetMask

Settings:	IP address


WAN IP Address

This object defines the IP address of the WAN interface port on the NMC Network Interface Card.

Object name:	nmcUiCfgWanIPAddr

Settings:	IP address


WAN Subnet Mask

This object describes the subnet mask for the IP address of the WAN interface port on the NMC Network Interface Card.

Object name:	nmcUiCfgWanSubnetMask

Settings:	IP address


Default Gateway IP Address

This object defines the IP address of the Gateway to which the system will forward packets whose net ID does not match the net ID of either the LAN or WAN interface port on the NMC Network Interface Card.

Object name:	nmcUiCfgDefaultGwyIP

Settings:	IP address


LAN Interface Enable
NMC NIC LAN Interface

This object enables or disables the LAN interface on the NMC Network Interface.

Object name:	nmcUiCfgLanifEnable

Settings:	enable
disable


The default for the NMC NIC LAN Interface MIB object is not specified in the Nmc.mib file. This sort of thing is usually disabled as a default. Is Enable correct here?


Route Traffic Between LAN &
Route Traffic Between LAN & WAN

This object controls the ability of the NMC to route traffic between its LAN and SLIP interfaces

Object name:	nmcUiCfgRouteEnable

Settings:	enable (1, default)
disable (2)


Set UI Port to SLIP Port

This object configures the UI port as either SLIP or UI.

Object name:	nmcUiCfgUiSlipCfg

Settings:	uiport (1, default)
slipport (2)


Second SLIP Port Address

This object defines the IP address of the second SLIP port.

Object name:	nmcUiCfgWan2IpAddr

Settings:	IP address


Second SLIP Port Subnet Mask

This object defines the subnet mask for the second SLIP port.

Object name:	nmcUiCfgWan2SubnetMask

Settings:	IP address


UI Port Inactivity Time

This object defines the inactive time in minutes required to set the Inactivity Time trigger on the UI port. A setting of 0 disables the timer.

Object name:	nmcUiCfgInactiveTime

Settings:	0..1440 minutes (default is 3)


I’m skating on melted ice here. The description of UI Port Inactivity Time made no sense, so I substituted. VERIFY THIS DESCRIPTION BEFORE RELEASE.


Modem Performance

Call Statistics

Modem Events


Call Statistics

B Channel Used

Back Channel Rate

Blerr Qty

Blocks Received

Blocks Resent

Blocks Sent

Call Ref Num

Chars Lost

Chars Received

Chars Sent

Compression Type

Connect Fail Reason

Disconnect Reason

Equalization Type

Error Control Type

Fallback Enabled

Fallback Qty

Final Link Rate

Gain Hit Count

HST Line Reversal Qty

Initial Link Rate

Last Calling Party Num

Last Number Dialed In

Last Number Dialed Out

Link NAK Qty

Link Timeout Qty

MNP Settings

Modulation Type

Octets Received

Octets Sent

Originate Answer

Pri Card Slot

Pri Card Span Line

Retrains Granted

Retrains Requested

Rings

Sync Async Mode Used

TDM Time Slot

Upshift Qty

V.42 Settings


Last Calling Party Num

An ASCII string representing the current or last party calling this modem.  Only used in ANI (Answering Number Indicate) applications.

Settings: 	Display String


Last Number Dialed Out

 An ASCII string representing the last phone number dialed by the modem.

Settings: 	Display String


Last Number Dialed In

An ASCII string representing the last number dialed in (if known).  This is the DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service) number.

Settings: 	Display String


Sync Async Mode Used

Displays whether the current or last call was synchronous or asynchronous.

Settings:	Asynchronous

Synchronous


Originate Answer

Displays whether the last or current call was originated or answered, and in which mode.

Settings:	Originate in Originate Mode

Originate in Answer Mode

Answer in Originate Mode

Answer in Answer Mode


Rings

Displays the number of rings detected before the DTE answered with DTR on the last incoming call.

Settings: 	Integer


Disconnect Reason

Displays the reason that the last call was terminated.

Settings: 	DTR Drop

Escape Sequence

ATH Command

Carrier Loss

Inactivity Timeout

MNP Incompatible

Undefined

Remote Password

Link Password

Retransmit Limit

Link Disconnect Msg Received

No Loop Current

Invalid Speed

Unable to Retrain

Management Command

No Dial Tone

Keypress Abort

Line Busy

No Answer

Voice

No Answer Tone

No Carrier

Undetermined

V.42 Sabme Timeout

V.42 Break Timeout

V.42 Disconnect Command

V.42 ID Exchange Fail

V.42 Bad Setup

V.42 Invalid Code Word

V.42 String too Long

V.42 Invalid Command

None

V.32 Cleardown

Dial Security

Remote Access Denied

Loop Loss

DS0 Teardown

Prompt Not Enabled

No Prompting In Sync

Non-ARQ Mode

Mode Incompatible

No Prompt In Non-ARQ

Dialback Link

Link Abort

Autopass Failed

Packet Bus Generic Error

Packet Bus Link Error Tx Pre ACK

Packet Bus Link Error Tx Tardy ACK

Packet Bus Transmit Bus Timeout

Packet Bus Receive Bus Timeout

Packet Bus Link Error Tx TAL

Packet Bus Link Error Rx TAL

Packet Bus Transmit Master Timeout

Packet Bus Clock Missing

Packet Bus Received Ls While Link Up

Packet Bus Out Of Sequence Frame

Packet Bus Bad Frame

Packet Bus ACK Wait Timeout

Packet Bus Received ACK Sequence Error

Packet Bus Receive Overflow RNR Failed

Packet Bus Receive Msg Buffer Overflow

Gateway Disconnect Command Received

Class II Fax Hang-up Command

MNP Protocol Violation

HST Speed Swtich Timeout

Token Passing Timeout

DSP Interrupt Timeout

MNP Unpacked LMIs

Remote Digital Loopback Timer Expired

T1 Glare


Connect Fail Reason

Displays the last call attempt failure reason.

Settings: 	DTR Drop

Escape Sequence

ATH Command

Carrier Loss

Inactivity Timeout

MNP Incompatible

Undefined

Remote Password

Link Password

Retransmit Limit

Link Disconnect Msg Received

No Loop Current

Invalid Speed

Unable to Retrain

Management Command

No Dial Tone

Keypress Abort

Line Busy

No Answer

Voice

No Answer Tone

No Carrier

Undetermined

V.42 Sabme Timeout

V.42 Break Timeout

V.42 Disconnect Command

V.42 ID Exchange Fail

V.42 Bad Setup

V.42 Invalid Code Word

V.42 String too Long

V.42 Invalid Command

None

V.32 Cleardown

Dial Security

Remote Access Denied

Loop Loss

DS0 Teardown

Prompt Not Enabled

No Prompting In Sync

Non-ARQ Mode

Mode Incompatible

No Prompt In Non-ARQ

Dialback Link

Link Abort

Autopass Failed

Packet Bus Generic Error

Packet Bus Link Error Tx Pre ACK

Packet Bus Link Error Tx Tardy ACK

Packet Bus Transmit Bus Timeout

Packet Bus Receive Bus Timeout

Packet Bus Link Error Tx TAL

Packet Bus Link Error Rx TAL

Packet Bus Transmit Master Timeout

Packet Bus Clock Missing

Packet Bus Received Ls While Link Up

Packet Bus Out Of Sequence Frame

Packet Bus Bad Frame

Packet Bus ACK Wait Timeout

Packet Bus Received ACK Sequence Error

Packet Bus Receive Overflow RNR Failed

Packet Bus Receive Msg Buffer Overflow

Gateway Disconnect Command Received

Class II Fax Hang-up Command

MNP Protocol Violation

HST Speed Swtich Timeout

Token Passing Timeout

DSP Interrupt Timeout

MNP Unpacked LMIs

Remote Digital Loopback Timer Expired

T1 Glare


Initial Link Rate

The speed at which the modem initially connected on its last or current call.

Settings:	110 bps

300 bps

600 bps

1200 bps

2400 bps

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

12 Kbps

14 Kbps

16 Kbps

19 Kbps

38 Kbps

75 bps

450 bps

Unknown

57 Kbps

21 Kbps

24 Kbps

26 Kbps

28 Kbps


Initial Link Rate--RX
Initial Link Rate

The speed at which the modem initially connected on its last or current call.

Settings:	110 bps

300 bps

600 bps

1200 bps

2400 bps

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

12 Kbps

14 Kbps

16 Kbps

19 Kbps

38 Kbps

75 bps

450 bps

Unknown

57 Kbps

21 Kbps

24 Kbps

26 Kbps

28 Kbps


Initial Link Rate--TX
Initial Link Rate

The speed at which the modem initially connected on its last or current call.

Settings:	110 bps

300 bps

600 bps

1200 bps

2400 bps

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

12 Kbps

14 Kbps

16 Kbps

19 Kbps

38 Kbps

75 bps

450 bps

Unknown

57 Kbps

21 Kbps

24 Kbps

26 Kbps

28 Kbps


Final Link Rate

The current link rate of a connection, or the ending link rate of the last connection.

Settings:	110 bps

300 bps

600 bps

1200 bps

2400 bps

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

12 Kbps

14 Kbps

16 Kbps

19 Kbps

38 Kbps

75 bps

450 bps

Unknown

57 Kbps

21 Kbps

24 Kbps

26 Kbps

28 Kbps


Final Link Rate--RX
Final Link Rate

The current link rate of a connection, or the ending link rate of the last connection.

Settings:	110 bps

300 bps

600 bps

1200 bps

2400 bps

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

12 Kbps

14 Kbps

16 Kbps

19 Kbps

38 Kbps

75 bps

450 bps

Unknown

57 Kbps

21 Kbps

24 Kbps

26 Kbps

28 Kbps


Final Link Rate--TX
Final Link Rate

The current link rate of a connection, or the ending link rate of the last connection.

Settings:	110 bps

300 bps

600 bps

1200 bps

2400 bps

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

12 Kbps

14 Kbps

16 Kbps

19 Kbps

38 Kbps

75 bps

450 bps

Unknown

57 Kbps

21 Kbps

24 Kbps

26 Kbps

28 Kbps


Modulation Type

Specifies the modulation type  of the current or last call.

Note:	The value can be different from the object mdmCsInitModulationType only for X2/V.PCM calls.

MIB Object:	mdmCsModulationType

Settings:	usRoboticsHST (1)

ccittV32 (2)

ccittV22bis (3)

bell103 (4)

ccittV21 (5)

bell212 (6)

ccittV32bis (7)

ccittV23 (8)

noConnection (9)

bell208b (10)

v21FaxClass1 (11)

v27FaxClass1 (12)

v29FaxClass1 (13)

v17FaxClass1 (14)

v21FaxClass2 (15)

v27FaxClass2 (16)

v29FaxClass2 (17)

v17FaxClass2 (18)

v32Terbo (19)

v34 (20)

vFC (21)

v34plus (22)

x2server (23)

v110 (24)

v120 (25)

x75 (26)

asyncSyncPPP (27)

clearChannel (28)

x2client (29)

x2symmetric (30)

piafs (31)

x2version2 (32)

v90Analogue (33)

v90Digital (34)

v90AllDigital (35)


MNP Settings

Specifies the MNP error control settings in the current or last call (long format).

Settings:	Integer


V.42 Settings

Specifies the active V.42 data compression and error control settings in the current or last call (long format).

Settings:	Integer


Error Control Type

Specifies the error control settings in the current or last call (short form).

Settings:	None

MNP Level 3

MNP Level 4

ITU-T V.42

U.S. Robotics HST

None - Synchronous

MNP Level 2


Compression Type

Specifies the data compression used in the current or last call (short format).

Settings:	None

ITU-T V.42 bis

MNP Level 5


Equalization Type

Specifies the equalization used in the current or last call.

Settings:	Long

Short


Fallback Enabled

Specifies whether line speed fallbacks were negotiated on the current or previous call.

Settings:	Disable

Enable


Chars Sent

Specifies the number of characters sent on the current or previous call.

Settings:	Integer


Chars Received

Specifies the number of characters received in the current or previous call.

Settings:	Integer


Octets Sent

Specifies the number of octets sent in the current or previous call.

Settings:	Integer


Octets Received

Specifies the number of octets received in the current or previous call.

Settings:	Integer


Blocks Sent

Specifies the number of blocks sent in the current or previous call.

Settings:	Integer


Blocks Received

Specifies the number of blocks received in the current or previous call.

Settings:	Integer


Blocks Resent

Specifies the number of blocks the modem has had to retransmit due to block errors or timeouts in the current or previous call.

Settings:	Integer


Retrains Requested

Specifies the number of retrains requested in the current or previous call.

Settings:	Integer


Retrains Granted

Specifies the number of retrains granted in the current or previous call.

Settings:	Integer


HST Line Reversal Qty

Specifies the number of times the HST high and low speed directions have been reversed in the current or previous call.

Settings:	Integer


Chars Lost

Specifies the number of characters lost on the current or previous call.  Not meaningful on synchronous calls.

Settings:	Integer


Back Channel Rate

Specifies the negotiated HST back channel speed on the current or previous call.

Settings:	300 bps

450 bps

none


Blerr Qty

Specifies the number of block errors received on the link in the current or last call.

Settings:	Integer


Link Timeout Qty

Specifies the number of link protocol timeouts on the current or previous call.

Settings:	Integer


Fallback Qty

Specifies the quantity of link speed fallbacks that occurred on the current or previous call.

Settings:	Integer


Upshift Qty

Specifies the number of link speed upshifts have occurred in the current or previous call.

Settings:	Integer


Link NAK Qty

Specifies the quantity of negative acknowledgments sent in response to errored blocks received on the link in the current or previous call.

Settings:	Integer


Gain Hit Count

The modem calculates the gain that is required to adjust the received signal to the ideal.  This defines the number of times that the gain was recalculated during the current or previous call.

Settings:	Integer


mdmCsCallRefNum
Call Ref Num

Call Reference Number


mdmCsPriCardSlot
Pri Card Slot

Primary Card Slot


mdmCsTDMTimeSlot
TDM Time Slot

Time Division Multipexing Time Slot


mdmCsPriCardSpanLine
Pri Card Span Line

Primary Card Span Line


mdmCsBChannelUsed
B Channel Used

B Channel Used


Modem Events

BLERs

Call Duration

ConnectAttemptFails

ConnectTimeouts

DTE IdleTimeouts

DTRFalses

DTRTrues

Fallbacks

InConnectEstabs

InConnectTerms

MgmtBusFailures

NoLoops

NoTones

OutConnectEstabs

OutConnectTerms

ResetByDTEs

Security User Name

WatchdogTimeouts


WatchdogTimeouts

Quantity of times that a watchdog timeout has been detected for this modem.

Settings:	Counter


DTE IdleTimeouts

The number of times that the modem has registered no DTE activity for the specified time.

Settings: 	Counter


InConnectEstabs

The number of times that the modem has reported an incoming connection established event.

Settings: 	Counter


OutConnectEstabs

The number of times that the modem has reported an outgoing connection established event.

Settings: 	Counter


InConnectTerms

The number of times the modem has reported an incoming connection terminated event.

Settings: 	Counter


OutConnectTerms

The number of times the modem has reported an outgoing connection termination event.

Settings: 	Counter


ConnectAttemptFails

The number of times the modem has reported a connect attempt failure event.  This does not include those connect attempt failures that are reported due to no dial tone and no loop current.

Settings: 	Counter


ConnectTimeouts

The number of times that the NMC has detected a call that has a duration in excess of the defined threshold.

Settings: 	Counter


MgmtBusFailures

The number of times the NMC has been unable to get a response from the modem to requests on the management bus.

Settings: 	Counter


ResetByDTEs

The number of times that the modem has been reset by the DTE via the ATZ command or by DTR drop.

Settings: 	Counter


DTRFalses

The number of times the modem has reported DTR False events.

Settings: 	Counter


DTRTrues

The number of times the modem has reported DTR True events.

Settings: 	Counter


NoTones

The number of times the modem reported no tones.

Settings: 	Counter


NoLoops

The number of times the modem reported no loop current.

Settings: 	Counter


BLERs

The number of times the modem reported block errors (BLERs).

Settings: 	Counter


Fallbacks

The number of times the modem reported fallbacks.

Settings: 	Counter


Security User Name

The last security user that initiated a call.  This object is not saved to  NVRAM.

Settings: 	Display String


Call Duration

The length of time of the current or most recent call.

Settings: 	Display String (hh:mm:ss)


NETServer Performance

Packet Bus Datagrams


Packet Bus Datagrams

Datagram Bus Time Outs

Datagram Error Status

Datagrams Rcvd

Datagrams Sent


pbdgDatagramSentPkts
Datagrams Sent

This parameter displays the number of packet bus datagrams sent by this entity.

Settings:	Counter


pbdgDatagramRcvdPkts
Datagrams Rcvd

This parameter displays the number of packet bus datagrams received by this entity.

Settings:	Counter


pbdgDatagramBusTimeOuts
Datagram Bus Time Outs

This parameter displays the number of packet bus timeouts experienced by this entity.

Settings:	Counter


pbdgDatagramErrorStatus
Datagram Error Status

This parameter reflects the current error status of this entity.

Settings:	noError

invalidParm

socketNotOpened

noMoreSocket

ackWaitTimeout

hwNakRcvd

otherBusError

noMemory

nullPointer

notInitialized

failedToRecv

invalidMsgType

socketClosed

noResponse

noDataToTx

txPreAck

txTardyAck

txBusTimeOut

rxBusTimeOut

txTAL

rxTAL

txMasterTimeOut

clkVanished

clkReturned

shutdown

frameError

xIDTimeOut

invalidAckMeRtnMarker

invalidFragmentOffset

maxRxMsgLengthExceeded


Network Management Card Performance

ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) GroupICMP.InternetControlMessageProtocol.Group.531

IP (Internet Protocol) GroupIP.InternetProtocol.Group.511

Status GroupStatusGroup.505

TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) GroupTCP.TransmissionControlProtocol.Group.556

UDP (User Datagram Protocol) GroupUDP.UserDatagramProtocol.Group.569


Status Group

DRAM Installed

Event ID

NVRAM Installed

Status

Temperature


Status

Indicates the general status or health of the Network Management Card.

Settings:	Other

OK

Non-critical Failure


Event ID

This value increments once for each network management event detected by the Network Management Card.  It is used to correlate SNMP traps with events that occur in the system.

Settings: 	Integer


Temperature

Reflects the current temperature in the chassis as detected by the Network Management Card, expressed in degrees Celsius.

Settings: 	Integer


IP (Internet Protocol) Group

IP Default TTL

IP Forw Datagrams

IP Forwarding

IP Frag Creates

IP Frag Fails

IP Frag OKs

IP In Addr Errors

IP In Delivers

IP In Discards

IP In Hdr Errors

IP In Receives

IP In Unknown Protos

IP Out Discards

IP Out No Routes

IP Out Requests

IP Reasm Fails

IP Reasm OKs

IP Reasm Reqds

IP Reasm Timeout


IP Forwarding

Indicates whether or not this entity is acting as an IP router, or gateway.


IP Default TTL

The default value inserted in the IP header's time-to-live field.


IP In Receives

The total number of input datagrams received.


IP In Hdr Errors

The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers.


IP In Addr Errors

The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in the IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity.


IP Forw Datagrams

The number of IP datagrams that were forwarded to another entity because this entity was not their final destination.


IP In Unknown Protos

The number of datagrams received but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.


IP In Discards

The number of input datagrams received but discarded for reasons other than errors.


IP In Delivers

The total number of IP datagrams successfully delivered to IP user protocols, including ICMP.


IP Out Requests

The total number of IP datagrams that local IP user protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in request for transmission.


IP Out Discards

The number of output IP datagrams that were discarded for reasons other than errors.


IP Out No Routes

The number of output IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination.


IP Reasm Timeout

The maximum number of seconds that received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity.


IP Reasm Reqds

The number of IP fragments received that need to be reassembled at this entity.


IP Reasm OKs

The number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled.


IP Reasm Fails

The number of failures detected by the IP reassembly algorithm.


IP Frag OKs

The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity.


IP Frag Fails

The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded at this entity because they could not be fragmented.


IP Frag Creates

The number of IP datagram fragments that have been created as a result of fragmentation at this entity.


ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) Group

ICMP In Addr Masks

ICMP In Dest Unreachs

ICMP In Echo Reps

ICMP In Echos

ICMP In Errors

ICMP In Msgs

ICMP In Parm Probs

ICMP In Redirects

ICMP In Src Quenchs

ICMP In Time Excds

ICMP In Timestamp Reps

ICMP In Timestamps

ICMP Out Addr Mask Reps

ICMP Out Addr Masks

ICMP Out Dest Unreachs

ICMP Out Echo Reps

ICMP Out Echos

ICMP Out Errors

ICMP Out Msgs

ICMP Out Parm Probs

ICMP Out Redirects

ICMP Out Src Quenchs

ICMP Out Time Excds

ICMP Out Timestamp Reps

ICMP Out Timestamps


ICMP In Msgs

The total number of ICMP messages that the entity received.


ICMP In Errors

The number of ICMP messages that the entity received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors.


ICMP In Dest Unreachs

The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received.


ICMP In Time Excds

The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received.


ICMP In Parm Probs

The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.


ICMP In Src Quenchs

The number of ICMP Source Quench messages received.


ICMP In Redirects

The number of ICMP Redirect messages received.


ICMP In Echos

The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.


ICMP In Echo Reps

The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.


ICMP In Timestamps

The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received.


ICMP In Timestamp Reps

The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received.


ICMP Out Msgs

The total number of ICMP messages that this entity attempted to send.


ICMP Out Errors

The number of ICMP messages that this entity did not send because of ICMP-related problems.


ICMP Out Dest Unreachs

The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent.


ICMP Out Time Excds

The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.


ICMP Out Parm Probs

The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent.


ICMP Out Src Quenchs

The number of ICMP Source Quench messages sent.


ICMP Out Redirects

The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent.


ICMP Out Echos

The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.


ICMP Out Echo Reps

The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.


ICMP Out Timestamps

The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent.


ICMP Out Timestamp Reps

The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent.


ICMP In Addr Masks

The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received.


ICMP Out Addr Masks

The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent.


ICMP Out Addr Mask Reps

The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent.


TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) Group

TCP Active Opens

TCP Attempt Fails

TCP Curr Estab

TCP Estab Resets

TCP In Segs

TCP Max Conn

TCP Out Segs

TCP Passive Opens

TCP Retrans Segs

TCP Rto Algorithm

TCP Rto Max

TCP Rto Min


TCP Rto Algorithm

The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets.


TCP Rto Min

The minimum value (in milliseconds) permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeouts.


TCP Rto Max

The maximum value (in milliseconds) permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeouts.


TCP Max Conn

The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity can support.


TCP Active Opens

The number of times TCP connections have made a transition to the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state.


TCP Passive Opens

The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-REVD state from the LISTEN state.


TCP Attempt Fails

The number of failed connection attempts.


TCP Estab Resets

The number of resets that have occurred.


TCP Curr Estab

The number of TCP connections having a current state of either ESTABLISHED or CLOSE-WAIT.


TCP In Segs

The total number of segments received.


TCP Out Segs

The total number of segments sent.


TCP Retrans Segs

The total number of segments retransmitted.


UDP (User Datagram Protocol) Group

UDP In Datagrams

UDP In Errors

UDP No Ports

UDP Out Datagrams


UDP In Datagrams

The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to UDP users.


UDP No Ports

The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port.


UDP In Errors

The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port.


UDP Out Datagrams

The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity.


T1 Performance

DS0 Stats

Dual/Single T1 Card Performance

Span Line Current Group (15 minutes)

Span Line Interval Group (15-minute Intervals)

Span Line Total Group (24 hours)

T1 Call Statistics


DS0 Stats

Stat DS0

Stat Modem


Stat DS0

This parameter indicates the current status of the specified timeslot.  The status values change dynamically with system operation.

Settings:	Specified DS0 doesn’t match anything

Specified DS0 is idle

Incoming call is dialing

Outgoing call is dialing

Incoming call is connected

Outgoing call is connected

Soft Busy Out DS0

Hard Busy Out DS0

Auto Busy Out DS0

Modem Busy Out

This DS0 is ignoring incoming calls

Modem Call Ignore

This DS0 is under test

This DS0 is in an alarm state

DS0 Unavailable

DS0 state for modem tone tests

DS0 is not connected to TDM or any DS0

Configured for busy out state

An unsubscribed DS0 on Frac T1 line

Drop and insert mode


Stat Modem

This parameter identifies whether the modem connected to the specified timeslot is available or not.  A modem is considered available if the T1 Card identifies the modem's presence on the TDM bus.

Settings:	Corresponding modem is in other state

Corresponding modem is available

Corresponding modem in busy out

Corresponding modem in tone test

Corresponding modem is unused

Modem is connected to transparent Cfg. DS0


T1 Call Statistics

Circuit Identifier

D Channel Operational Status

E1 Continuous CRCs

E1 Physical State

Loopback

Red Alarm

Send Code

Stat Loss of Signal

Stat Out of Frame

Stat Receiver Gain

Stat Receiving AIS

Switch Type Active

Time Elapsed

Valid Intervals

Yellow Alarm


Time Elapsed

The number of seconds that have elapsed since the beginning of the current error-measurement period.

Settings:	Integer


Valid Intervals

The number of previous intervals for which valid data was collected.  The value is 96 unless the interface was brought online within the last 24 hours, in which case the value is the number of complete 15-minute intervals since the interface has been online.

Settings:	Integer


Loopback

Indicates whether or not the selected DS1 is in a loopback state, and what type of loopback.

Settings:	ds1NoLoop

ds1LocalLoopbackLocalSide

ds1LocalLoopbackRemoteSide

ds1RemoteLoopbackLocalSide

ds1RemoteLoopbackRemoteSide


Send Code

This variable indicates what type of code is being sent across the DS1 interface.

Settings: 	ds1OtherTest—sending a test pattern other than those described by this parameter

ds1SendNoCode—sending looped or normal data

ds1SendSetCode—sending a request for a loopback

ds1SendResetCode—sending a loopback termination request

ds1SendQRS—sending a Quasi-Random Signal test pattern


Yellow Alarm

Indicates whether or not the selected DS1 is in a yellow alarm condition.  This indicates that an OOF (Out of Frame) condition has occurred at the remote end.  It is also known as a Remote Frame Alarm (RFA).

Settings:	ds1NoYellowAlarm

ds1YellowAlarm


Red Alarm

Indicates whether or not the selected DS1 is in a red alarm condition.  A red alarm identifies when the framing pattern for the specified T1 line has been lost and data cannot be properly extracted.

Settings: 	ds1NoRedAlarm

ds1RedAlarm


Circuit Identifier

This variable contains the transmission vendor's circuit identifier, for the purpose of facilitating troubleshooting.

Settings:	Display String


Stat Receiver Gain

This parameter identifies the amount of gain applied to boost the receive signal level to an appropriate operating level.

Settings: 	0 dB

7 dB

15 dB

22 dB


Stat Out of Frame

This parameter identifies when the framing pattern for the specified T1 line has been lost and data cannot be properly extracted.  This condition is also known as red alarm.

Settings:	False

True


Stat Loss of Signal

This parameter indicates when 175 consecutive 0's have been detected.  The signal is considered recovered if the density of 1's reaches 12.5% (that is, four 1's within a 32-bit period).

Settings:	False

True


Stat Receiving AIS

This parameter identifies when the remote end of the specified T1 line has lost its receive signal and is transmitting a stream of all 1's to the local end.  This AIS condition is also known as blue alarm.

Settings:	False

True


uds1StatSwitchTypeActive
Switch Type Active

This parameter identifies the primary switch type that the PRI ISDN NAC is currently connected to.

Settings:	priSw4ESS
priSw5ESS
priSwDMS100
priSwICTR4


uds1StatDchanOperational
D Channel Operational Status

This parameter reflects the operational status of the D channel on the PRI ISDN NAC.

Settings:	dChannelUp
dChannelDown


uds1StatE1ContCrc
E1 Continuous CRCs

This parameter indicates when continuous CRC errors are being received on the E1 DS1 span line on the PRI ISDN NAC.

Settings:	true
false


uds1StatE1PhysicalState
E1 Physical State

This object reflects the physical state of the E1 DS1 span line on the PRI ISDN NAC.

Settings:	Operational
Fc1RaiTempCrcErrors
Fc2LossOfSignal
Fc3AlarmIndSignal
Fc4RaiContCrcErrors
PowerOn


Span Line Interval Group (15-minute Intervals)

Interval BPVs

Interval Bursty Errored Seconds

Interval CSSs

Interval CVs

Interval Delta Frame Aligns

Interval ESs

Interval Excess CRC Errors

Interval Frame Bit Errors

Interval Number

Interval SEFSs

Interval SESs

Interval UASs


Interval BPVs

This parameter shows the number of bipolar violations on the selected DS1 for the chosen interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Interval ESs

The number of Errored Seconds encountered by the DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 15-minute intervals.

Settings: 	Counter


Interval SESs

The number of Severely Errored Seconds encountered by the DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 15-minute intervals.

Settings: 	Counter


Interval SEFSs

The number of Severely Errored Framing Seconds encountered by the DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 15-minute intervals.

Settings: 	Counter


Interval UASs

The number of Unavailable Seconds encountered by the DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 15-minute intervals.

Settings: 	Counter


Interval CSSs

The number of Controlled Slip Seconds encountered by the DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 15-minute intervals.

Settings: 	Counter


Interval CVs

The number of Coding Violations encountered by the DS1 interface in one of the previous 96 15-minute intervals.

Settings: 	Counter


Interval Number

A number from 1 to 96, where 1 is the most recently completed 15-minute interval and 96 is the least recently completed 15-minute interval (assuming that all 96 intervals are valid).  This allows statistics to be displayed on a rolling 24-hour basis.

Settings: 	Integer


Interval Bursty Errored Seconds

The number of seconds in which there were more than 2 and less than 320 CRC errors in one of the previous 96 15-minute intervals.

Settings: 	Counter


Interval Frame Bit Errors

A specific bit pattern is used for the T1 receiver to determine frame alignment.  This parameter counts the number of incorrectly received framing bits in one of the previous 96 15-minute intervals.

Settings: 	Counter


Interval Delta Frame Aligns

This parameter counts the number of times the specified T1 receiver has reframed on a new framing pattern (for example, because of an Out of Frame condition) during the specified 15-minute interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Interval Excess CRC Errors

This parameter counts how often 32 out of any 33 consecutive CRCs are in error for the specified T1 line during the specified 15-minute interval.  The counter is only valid in ESF format.

Settings: 	Counter


Span Line Current Group (15 minutes)

Current BPVs

Current Bursty Errored Seconds

Current CSSs

Current CVs

Current Delta Frame Aligns

Current ESs

Current Excess CRC Errors

Current Frame Bit Errors

Current SEFSs

Current SESs

Current UASs


Current ESs

The number of Errored Seconds encountered by the DS1 interface in the current 15-minute interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Current SESs

The number of Severely Errored Seconds encountered by the DS1 interface in the current 15-minute interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Current BPVs

This parameter shows the current number of bipolar violations on the selected DS1.

Settings: 	Counter


Current SEFSs

The number of Severely Errored Framing Seconds encountered by the DS1 interface in the current 15-minute interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Current UASs

The number of Unavailable Seconds encountered by the DS1 interface in the current 15-minute interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Current CSSs

The number of Controlled Slip Seconds encountered by the DS1 interface in the current 15-minute interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Current CVs

The number of Coding Violations encountered by the DS1 interface in the current 15-minute interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Current Bursty Errored Seconds

The number of seconds in the current 15-minute interval in which there were more than 2 and less than 320 CRC errors.

Settings: 	Counter


Current Frame Bit Errors

A specific bit pattern is used for the T1 receiver to determine frame alignment.  This parameter counts the number of incorrectly received framing bits in the current 15-minute interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Current Delta Frame Aligns

This parameter counts the number of times the specified T1 receiver has reframed on a new framing pattern (for example, because of an Out of Frame condition) during the current 15-minute interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Current Excess CRC Errors

This parameter counts how often 32 out of any 33 consecutive CRCs are in error for the specified T1 line during the current 15-minute interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Span Line Total Group (24 hours)

Total BPVs

Total Bursty Errored Seconds

Total CSSs

Total CVs

Total Delta Frame Aligns

Total ESs

Total Excess CRC Errors

Total Frame Bit Errors

Total SEFSs

Total SESs

Total UASs


Total ESs

The number of Errored Seconds encountered by the DS1 interface during the previous 24-hour interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Total SESs

The number of Severely Errored Seconds encountered by the DS1 interface during the previous 24-hour interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Total SEFSs

The number of Severely Errored Framing Seconds encountered by the DS1 interface during the previous 24-hour interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Total UASs

The number of Unavailable Seconds encountered by the DS1 interface during the previous 24-hour interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Total CSSs

The number of Controlled Slip Seconds encountered by the DS1 interface during the previous 24-hour interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Total BPVs

The number of Bipolar Violations encountered by the DS1 interface during the previous 24-hour interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Total CVs

The number of Coding Violations encountered by the DS1 interface during the previous 24-hour interval.

Settings: 	Counter


Total Bursty Errored Seconds

The number of seconds over the last 24-hour period in which there were more than 2 and less than 320 CRC errors.

Settings: 	Counter


Total Frame Bit Errors

A specific bit pattern is used for the T1 receiver to determine frame alignment.  This parameter counts the number of incorrectly received framing bits over the last 24-hour period.

Settings: 	Counter


Total Delta Frame Aligns

This parameter counts the number of times the specified T1 receiver has reframed on a new framing pattern (for example, because of an Out of Frame condition) during the last 24-hour period.

Settings: 	Counter


Total Excess CRC Errors

This parameter counts how often 32 out of any 33 consecutive CRCs are in error for the specified T1 line during the last 24-hour period.  The counter is only valid in ESF format.

Settings: 	Counter


Dual/Single T1 Card Performance
T1 Card Performance

Current Timing Source

Identifies which clock is currently being used as the T1 Card transmit timing source.

Settings:  	spanLineA

spanLineB

internalClock

tdmBusClock


PRI Performance

Packet Bus Datagrams

Span Line Current Group (15 minutes)

Span Line Interval Group (15-minute Intervals)

Span Line Total Group (24 hours)

T1 Call Statistics

Timeslot Status Group


Timeslot Status Group

Stat Chan Conn To

Stat Dev Conn To

Stat DS0

Stat Slot Conn To


Stat DS0

This parameter indicates the current status of the specified timeslot.  The status values change dynamically with system operation.

Settings:	Specified DS0 doesn’t match anything

Specified DS0 is idle

Incoming call is dialing

Outgoing call is dialing

Incoming call is connected

Outgoing call is connected

DS0 cal is being torn down

DS0 is span line D-channel

DS0 is out of service

Ds0 is in maintenance mode


Stat Dev Conn To

This parameter indicates the device connected to the DS0.

Settings:	Not connected to any device

Connected to an ISDN Gateway

Connected to a Quad B-channel modem


Stat Slot Conn To

This parameter indicates the slot connected to the DS0.

Settings:	1..16


Stat Chan Conn To

This parameter indicates the channel connected to the DS0.

Settings:	1..4


X.25 Performance

LAPB Interface Statistics

WAN Connection Statistics

X.25 Interface Operations Statistics


WAN Connection Statistics

x25wanStatsCTS

x25wanStatsDCD

x25wanStatsDSR

x25wanStatsGoodFramesRx

x25wanStatsGoodFramesTx

x25wanStatsRxAborts

x25wanStatsRxCrcErrs

x25wanStatsRxFrameNoBuf

x25wanStatsRxOverflows

x25wanStatsRxRingQSize

x25wanStatsRxTooLong

x25wanStatsRxTooShort

x25wanStatsRxUnderruns

x25wanStatsTxBadPackets

x25wanStatsTxRingQFull

x25wanStatsTxTooShort

x25wanStatsTxUnderruns

x25wanStatsUnrecoveredRx


x25wanStatsGoodFramesTx

A count of the number of good frames transmitted since this entity was initialized.


x25wanStatsGoodFramesRx

A count of the good frames received since this entity was initialized.


x25wanStatsTxUnderruns

A count of the number of transmit underruns that have been seen by this entity since initialization.


x25wanStatsRxUnderruns

A count of the number of received underruns that have been seen by this entity since initialization.


x25wanStatsRxCrcErrs

The number of received crc errors since this entity was initialized


x25wanStatsRxFrameNoBuf

The number of times this entity has received data without a buffer to place it into.


x25wanStatsUnrecoveredRx

The number of overrun frames that the entity was unable to recover.


x25wanStatsRxAborts

The number of receive frame aborts seen by this entity since initialization.


x25wanStatsRxTooLong

The number of frames received that exceeded the defined maximum receive frame size.


x25wanStatsTxTooShort

The number of times that the upper protocol layers attempted to transmit too small a frame.


x25wanStatsRXTooShort

A count of the number of frames received that were smaller than the minimum frame size.


x25wanStatsTxBadPackets

The number of bad packets that the WAN interface received for transmission from the upper layers of the X.25 protocol stack.


x25wanStatsTxRingQFull

A count of the number of times the circular buffer used for transmission was full when a transmission was attempted by the upper layers of the X.25 protocol stack.


x25wanStatsRxRingQSize

A number that indicates the received circular queue size on the X.25 WAN.


x25wanStatsDSR

X.25 WAN interface DSR signal status.


x25wanStatsCTS

X.25 WAN interface CTS signal status.


x25wanStatsDCD

X.25 WAN interface DCD signal status.


x25wanStatsRxOverflows

The number of receive buffer overflows seen by this entity since initialization.


LAPB Interface Statistics

ulpbStatDISCCmdsRcvd

ulpbStatDISCCmdsTrnsmt

ulpbStatDMRspsRcvd

ulpbStatDMRspsTrnsmt

ulpbStatFRMRRspsRcvd

ulpbStatFRMRRspsTrnsmt

ulpbStatIFrameCmdsRcvd

ulpbStatIFrameCmdsTrnsmt

ulpbStatREJCmdsRcvd

ulpbStatREJCmdsTrnsmt

ulpbStatREJRspsRcvd

ulpbStatREJRspsTrnsmt

ulpbStatRNRCmdsRcvd

ulpbStatRNRCmdsTrnsmt

ulpbStatRNRRspsRcvd

ulpbStatRNRRspsTrnsmt

ulpbStatRRCmdsRcvd

ulpbStatRRCmdsTrnsmt

ulpbStatRRRspsRcvd

ulpbStatRRRspsTrnsmt

ulpbStatSABMCmdsRcvd

ulpbStatSABMCmdsTrnsmt

ulpbStatUARspsRcvd

ulpbStatUARspsTrnsmt


ulpbStatDISCCmdsRcvd

Number of DISC commands received.


ulpbStatDISCCmdsTrnsmt

Number of DISC commands transmitted.


ulpbStatDMRspsRcvd

Number of DM responses received.


ulpbStatDMRspsTrnsmt

Number of DM responses transmitted.


ulpbStatFRMRRspsRcvd

Number of FRMR responses received.


ulpbStatFRMRRspsTrnsmt

Number of FRMR responses transmitted.


ulpbStatIFrameCmdsRcvd

Number of I-frame command received.


ulpbStatIFrameCmdsTrnsmt

Number of I-frame commands transmitted.


ulpbStatREJCmdsRcvd

Number of REJ commands received.


ulpbStatREJCmdsTrnsmt

Number of REJ commands transmitted.


ulpbStatREJRspsRcvd

Number of REJ responses received.


ulpbStatREJRspsTrnsmt

Number of REJ responses transmitted.


ulpbStatRNRCmdsRcvd

Number of RNR commands received.


ulpbStatRNRCmdsTrnsmt

Number of RNR commands transmitted.


ulpbStatRNRRspsRcvd

Number of RNR responses received.


ulpbStatRNRRspsTrnsmt

Number of RNR responses transmitted.


ulpbStatRRCmdsRcvd

Number of RR commands received.


ulpbStatRRCmdsTrnsmt

Number of RR commands transmitted.


ulpbStatRRRspsRcvd

Number of RR response received.


ulpbStatRRRspsTrnsmt

Number or RR response transmitted.


ulpbStatSABMCmdsRcvd

Number of SABM commands received.


ulpbStatSABMCmdsTrnsmt

Number of SABM commands transmitted.


ulpbStatUARspsRcvd

Number of UA response received.


ulpbStatUARspsTrnsmt

Number of UA response transmitted.


X.25 Interface Operations Statistics

ux25StatCallsRcvdEstab

ux25StatCallsRcvd

ux25StatCallsSentEstab

ux25StatCallsSent

ux25StatDataPktsRcvd

ux25StatDataPktsSent

ux25StatDiagPktsRcvd

ux25StatDiagPktsSent

ux25StatIntrptPktsRcvd

ux25StatIntrptPktsSent

ux25StatPVCsInDatTrnsfrState

ux25StatRcvrNotRdyRcvd

ux25StatRcvrNotRdySent

ux25StatRcvrRdyRcvd

ux25StatRcvrRdySent

ux25StatResetsRcvd

ux25StatResetsSent

ux25StatRestartsRcvd

ux25StatRestartsSent

ux25StatSVCsInDatTrnsfrState


ux25StatCallsRcvd

Number of incoming calls.


ux25StatCallsRcvdEstab

Number of incoming calls established.


ux25StatCallsSent

Number of outgoing calls.


ux25StatCallsSentEstab

Number of outgoing calls established.


ux25StatDataPktsRcvd

Number of data packets received.


ux25StatDataPktsSent

Number of data packets sent.


ux25StatDiagPktsRcvd

Number of diagnostic packets received.


ux25StatDiagPktsSent

Number of diagnostic packets sent.


ux25StatIntrptPktsRcvd

Number of interrupt packets received.


ux25StatIntrptPktsSent

Number of interrupt packets sent


ux25StatPVCsInDatTrnsfrState

Number of PVCs in Data Transfer State.


ux25StatRcvrNotRdyRcvd

Number of receiver not ready received.


ux25StatRcvrNotRdySent

Number of receiver not ready sent.


ux25StatRcvrRdySent

Number of receiver ready sent.


ux25StatRcvrRdyRcvd

Number of receiver ready received.


ux25StatResetsRcvd

Number of resets received.


ux25StatResetsSent

Number of resets sent.


ux25StatRestartsRcvd

Number of restarts received.


ux25StatRestartsSent

Number of restarts sent.


ux25StatSVCsInDatTrnsfrState

Number of SVCs in Data Transfer State.


This is a new secondary document for your project.

Click Topic (Ctrl+T) to add a new Help topic.


Optional Features

  How to . . .

This software offers the following Optional (or Added Cost) features, in this version:

  Cellular Support

  ISDN Support

  V.90 Support

Optional features can be enabled at for specific cards or for an entire hub.


Cellular Support

  How to . . .

Cellular modem support equips your modem card to processes cellular telecommunications protocols.

You can purchase Cellular Support as an option for an  existing modem card or you can order Cellular Support already installed on a new card.


ISDN Support

  How to . . .

ISDN modem support equips your modem card to processes digital telecommunications protocols.

You can purchase ISDN Support as an option for an  existing modem card or you can order ISDN Support already installed on a new card.


V.90 Support

  How to . . .

V.90 modem support equips your modem card to processes telecommunications protocols at speeds nearly twice as fast as other modems.

You can purchase V.90 Support as an option for an  existing modem card or you can order V.90 Support already installed on a new card.


How to . . .

  Enable or Install Cellular Support

  Enable or Install ISDN Support

  Enable or Install V.90 Support


Enabling or Installing Cellular Support

1. 	Call the U.S. Robotics Technical Support organization to purchase a feature enable key for this option. See the Calling Technical Support topic in this help system.

2. 	Click the NMC card to highlight it.

3. 	On the Configure menu click Feature Enable.

4. 	Type the feature enable key you purchased in the Feature Key box and click OK.

Cellular Support should now be enabled.


Enabling or Installing ISDN Support

1. 	Call the U.S. Robotics Technical Support organization to purchase a feature enable key for this option. See the Calling Technical Support topic in this help system.

2. 	Click the NMC card to highlight it.

3. 	On the Configure menu click Feature Enable.

4. 	Type the feature enable key you purchased in the Feature Key box and click OK.

ISDN Support should now be enabled.


Enabling or Installing V.90 Support

1. 	Call the U.S. Robotics Technical Support organization to purchase a feature enable key for this option. See the Calling Technical Support topic in this help system.

2. 	Click the NMC card to highlight it.

3. 	On the Configure menu click Feature Enable.

4. 	Type the feature enable key you purchased in the Feature Key box and click OK.

V.90 Support should now be enabled.


PIAFS


Cellular Configuration

  MNP10 Negotiation

  MNP Extended Services

  MNP10 Compression Type

  MNP10 Cellular

  MNP10 Link Speed

  MNP10 V.42 bis Short Form

  ETC Maximum Link Rate

  ETC Transmit Level

  ETC Negotiation

  ETC Fixed/Mobile

  ETC Calling Tone

  Force ETC Settings

  ETC DCE Startup Rate

  ETC Transmit Deemphasis

  MNP10 Fallback

  MNP10 Fall Forward

  Do Not Originate with ETC

  MNPX Detection Pattern


MNP10 Negotiation

Enabling this parameter allows a cellular modem to connect using MNP10.

MIB Object:	mdmCeMnp10Dis

AT Command:	S60.0

Settings:	Disable (Default)

Enable


MNP Extended Services

Extended Services (MNPX) allows the modems to negotiate MNP10 as a part of the V.42 negotiation process.  If the connecting modem does not support either V.42 or MNPX, MNP10 is negotiated under MNP.

With MNPX disabled, modems can not negotiate MNP10 under V.42.

Note:  If MNPX is disabled, calls from modems using MNPX and V.42 connect without MNP10.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeMnpxDis

AT Command:  	S60.1

Settings:	Disable  (Default)

Enable


MNP10 Compression Time
MNP10 Compression Type

This parameter applies to cellular modems with data compression enabled. With the V.42 bis setting, the modem decides which type of compression engine to use on a case-by-case basis. Selecting MNP5 allows only that type of compression to be used on a cellular call. If unsuccessful, no compression is used in the connection. Used for testing purposes only.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeComp

AT Command:	 S60.2

Settings:	MNP5  (Default)

V.42 bis


MNP10 Cellular

Uses Dynamic Transmit Level Adjustment (DTLA).  With the default, non-cellular setting, DTLA is only used if the originating modem is set for an MNP10 cellular call.  Enable only when originating from a cellular link.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeOperDis

AT Command:  	S60.3

Settings:	Disable (Default)

Enable


MNP10 Link Speed

Forces a V.22 1200 bps link rate for MNP10 connections.  Use the 1200 bps option to provide stability and reliability for extremely noisy MNP10 link conditions.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeLinkSpeed

AT Command:  	S60.4

Settings:	Link at High Speed (Default)

Link at 1200 bps V.22


MNP10 V.42 bis Short Form

Provides V.42bis compatibility when originating to some older MNP10 modems that do not have MNPX capabilities. The short from assumes that the maximum string length is 32 octets and the direction of compression is always bi-directional. When disabled, V.42 bis is negotiated with MNPX.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeShortFormRules

AT Command:  	S61

Settings:	Disable  (Default)

Form 1 Code Words 512

Form 2 Code Words 1024

Form 3 Code Words 2048


ETC Max. Link Rate
ETC Maximum Link Rate

Sets maximum DCE rate, preventing modems from connecting or falling forward to link rates higher than specified. Lowering the maximum link rate to 9600 bps can provide more stability for cellular calls under adverse conditions. However, higher throughput is sacrificed for calls over stronger cellular links that can support higher link rates.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeDceBitraLim

AT Command:  	S64

Settings:	Max DCE Rate (Default)

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

12000 bps

14400 bps


ETC Transmit Level

This parameter allows a cellular modem to control the DCE transmit level or permits a specific decibel level to be imposed for a cellular operation.

A reduced transmit level is required for data transfer across cellular links. When ETC is established for a call, the modem automatically reduces its transmit level to the value specified by this parameter.

With the default setting, the modem sets the transmit level according to ETC specifications based on whether it is transmitting over T1 or analog lines and whether the modem is set for fixed site or mobile. We do not recommend changing this setting.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeDceTxLev

AT Command:  	S65

Settings:	Modem control TX level (Default)

10 dBm through 25 dBm


ETC Negotiation

This parameter controls whether or not the modem will use ETC in response to the ETC calling tone.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeV42EtcDis

AT Command:  	S66.0

Settings:	Disable  (Default)

Enable


ETC Fixed/Mobile

Determines whether a cellular modem will use a fixed site or mobile site cellular profile.  The cellular profile sets transmit levels based on ETC specifications. With the exception of certain nautical and aerospace applications, most Total Control installations are fixed site.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeV42CellSite

AT Command:  	S66.1

Settings:	Fixed site (Default)

Mobile site


ETC Calling Tone

Determines whether or not the ETC calling tone is sent out by a cellular modem during link establishment, telling the answering modem to use ETC settings.

Enable the ETC calling tone when originating calls from the mobile side (cell side) of a cellular link.  Disable calling tone only if you experience problems when originating calls to noncellular modems.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeV42EtcCallToneDis

AT Command:  	S66.2

Settings:	Disable (Default)

Enable


Force ETC Settings

If ETC negotiation is enabled, this parameter forces ETC transmit level control for all incoming calls.

Some callers may wish to negotiate ETC using the earlier 1.0 version, which does not generate the ETC calling tone used in version 1.1. For the modem to implement ETC when answering calls from modems with the earlier 1.0 version, it must be set to force ETC for every call it receives.  In this circumstance, the system administrator may wish to dedicate some modems for cellular calls only.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeV42EtcTxLevConDis

AT Command:  	S66.3

Settings:	Disable (Default)

Enable


ETC DCE Startup Rate

This parameter permits selection of the DCE startup rate for a Cellular modem. Some cellular links may be so poor that calls are dropped even before the modems can initialize modulation and error control negotiation.  To reduce the number of dropped calls, the modem should be set to a 9600 bps startup rate.  The modems negotiate at the lower and more stable link rate, and after ETC has been implemented, raise the link rate to the higher levels afforded by ETC.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeDceStartRate

AT Command:  	S66.4 and S66.5

Settings:	Auto (Default)

4800 bps

9600 bps


ETC Transmit De-emphasis
ETC Transmit Deemphasis

This parameter permits selection of DCE transmit deemphasis for a Cellular modem.  Transmit deemphasis is recommended when connecting over a cellular link, whether the modem is on the fixed site or mobile site.  When enabled, transmit deemphasis is automatically implemented whenever the modem receives an ETC call.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeV42DceTxDemDis

AT Command:  	S66.6

Settings:	Disable (Default)

Enable


MNP10 Fallback

When enabled, this parameter prevents the modem from falling back to lower speeds during MNP10 connections.  Used for testing purposes only.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeMnp10FallbackDis

AT Command:  	S60.5

Settings:	Disable (Default)

Enable


MNP10 Fall Forward

Prevents the modem from falling forward to higher speeds during MNP10 connections.  Used for testing purposes only.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeMnp10FallforDis

AT Command:  	S60.6

Settings:	Disable (Default)

Enable


Do Not Originate with ETC

Use the “disable” setting to disable ETC when originating calls to a non-cellular modem, yet allows ETC negotiation in answer mode.  If the modem is used to place outgoing calls to non-cellular modems, use this setting to disable ETC during originate mode.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeDbNoEtcDis

AT Command:  	S66.7=1

Settings:	Disable (Default)

Enable


MNPX Detection Pattern

The MNPX pattern expedites MNP10 negotiation when connecting to other modems that support MNPX.

The MNPX detection pattern can cause problems when dialing to modems without MNPX—they connect, but without MNP10.  Disable the MNPX detection pattern if you experience this problem when dialing to modems without MNPX.  In answer mode, the MNPX detection pattern should always be enabled.

MIB Object:  	mdmCeMnpxDetPhaEna

AT Command:  	S60.7

Settings:	Enable (Default)

Disable


Call Control Options

  Dial Tone Delay

  MNP/V.42 Link Request Timeout

  Carrier Detect Delay

  Inactive Timer

  Dial on DTE Active

  Auto Dial on Power Up

  DTR Low Before Ready

  Result Codes

  Verbal Numeric Result Codes

  Result Code Groups

  ARQ Result Codes

  Response to +++

  AT Command Recognition

  Management System Result Codes

  V.32 300/600 Hz Tone Times

  V.23 Handshake Timer

  V.21 to V.23 Fallback Timer

  Rings for Automatic Answer

  Additional Answer Tone Time

  Answer in Originate Mode

  Billing Delay Timer

  Default Phone Number

  Stored Phone Number 1

  Stored Phone Number 2

  Stored Phone Number 3

  ARQ Negotiation

  MI/MIC Closure for Call Detection

  MNP/V.42 @ 1200 bps

  MNP/V.42 @ 2400 bps

  MNP/V.42 @ 9600 bps

  Data/Fax Mode

  T1 Call Setup

  T1 Tone Type

  Dial Sequence Tone

  Calling Initialization String

  ANI/DNIS Call Initialization Strings

  Blocked (Blacklist) Restriction

  Off-Hook Restriction

  ANI-Based Incoming Call Digits

  DNIS-Based Incoming Call Digits

  Packet Bus Answer Only

  T1 Idle Disconnect Pattern

  Originate MP10

  Originate MP10EC

  ATZ Handling Over Packet Bus

  DTMF Command Extended

  Default Dial-Out PRI Slot


Dial Tone Delay

This parameter sets the number of seconds the modem waits to dial after detecting a dial tone.

AT Command:  	S6

Settings: 	0 - 255, 2 (Default)


MNP/V.42 Link Request Timeout

This parameter stores the duration of the timeout, in seconds, when the modem is negotiating an MNP/V.42 link request for 1200/2400 answer mode.

AT Command:  S52

Settings: 	0 - 14, 5 (Default)


Carrier Detect Delay

This parameter sets the duration, in seconds, that the local modem waits to detect a  carrier signal from the remote modem.

AT Command:  S7

Settings: 	0 - 255, 60 (Default)


Inactive Timer

If the value of this function is set greater than 0, the Inactivity Timer is activated when there is no data activity in either the transmit or receive direction.  If no data activity is detected by the timeout period (specified in minutes), the modem hangs up.

AT Command:  S19

Settings: 	0 - 255, 0 (Default)


Dial on DTE Active

If enabled, the modem dials the number stored in position 0 of the modem's NVRAM when DTR is raised.  When disabled, no number is automatically dialed when DTR is raised.

AT Command:  S13

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


Auto Dial on Power Up

If this function is enabled, the modem dials the number stored in position 0 of the modem's NVRAM when the modem is powered on or reset.  When it is disabled, the number is not dialed when the modem is powered on or reset.

AT Command:  S13.4

Settings:	Disable  (Default) or Enable


DTR Low Before Ready

When enabled, the modem requires that DTR go low before it will accept another call.  The modem also implements a Fast Connect in Native Mode feature, which asserts CD before the link negotiation process is complete.  This feature is reserved for a private, custom application and is not recommended for general usage.

AT Command:  	S27.6

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


Result Codes

This parameter enables or disables the modem's result code messages to the modem's DTE, such as OK and CONNECT.  With Originate Only, the modem only displays result codes when placing a call.

AT Command:  Qn, DIP Switch 3, DIP Switch 7

Settings:	No Result, Display Result (default), Originate Only


Verbal Numeric Result Codes

When set to Verbal, this parameter displays modem result codes as words.  When set to Numeric, this function displays modem result codes as numbers.

AT Command:  Vn, DIP Switch 2

Settings:	Verbal (Default) or Numeric


Result Code Groups

Selects one of the eight optional result code subsets.

AT Command: 	Xn

Settings:	0 - 7, 1 (Default)

Table 1 summarizes the result codes available with each of the Xn settings.  Table 2 defines these codes.

Result Code Options

Result Codes	X0	X1	X2	X3	X4	X5	X6	X7

0/OK	•	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

1/CONNECT	•	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

2/RING	•	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

3/NO CARRIER	•	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

4/ERROR	•	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

5/CONNECT 1200	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

6/NO DIAL TONE	•	•	•	•

7/BUSY	•	•	•	•	•

8/NO ANSWER	•	•	•	•	•

9/RESERVED

10/CONNECT 2400	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

11/RINGING	•	•	•

12/VOICE	•	•

13/CONNECT 9600	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

18/CONNECT 4800	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

20/CONNECT 7200 	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

21/CONNECT 12000	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

25/CONNECT 14400	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

43/CONNECT 16800 	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

85/CONNECT 19200	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

91/CONNECT 21600	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

99/CONNECT 24000	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

103/CONNECT 26400	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

107/CONNECT 28800	•	•	•	•	•	•	•

Functions

Adaptive Dialing	•	•	•	•	•	•

Wait for 2nd Dial Tone (W)	•	•	•	•	•

Wait for Answer (@)	•	•	•	•	•

Fast Dial	•	•	•	•

Result Code Definitions

Result Code	Meaning

0/OK	Command has been executed.

1/CONNECT	Connection established with another modem; if set to X0, connection may be at 300, 1200, 2400 or 9600 bps; if X1 or higher, connection is at 300 bps.

2/RING	Incoming ring detected.

3/NO CARRIER	Carrier detect has failed or carrier has been dropped due to disconnect.

4/ERROR	Command is invalid.

5/CONNECT 1200	Connection established with another modem at 1200 bps.

6/NO DIAL TONE	Dial tone not detected during the normal 2 seconds, set in Register S6.

7/BUSY	Busy signal detect; modem hangs up.

8/NO ANSWER	After waiting 5 seconds for an answer, modem hangs up; returned instead of NO CARRIER when the @ option is used.

10/CONNECT 2400	Connection established with another modem at 2400 bps.

11/RINGING	The modem has dialed; remote phone line is ringing.

12/VOICE	Voice answer at remote site; modem hangs up.

13/CONNECT 9600	Connection established at reported rate.  Same meaning for results of 4800 (18), 7200 (20), 12K (21), 14.4K (25), 16.8K (43, HST only), 19.2K (85), 21.6K (91), 24K (99), 26.4K (103) and 28.8K (107).

Adaptive Dialing	The modem attempts to use tone dialing and, if that doesn't work on the line, reverts to rotary dialing.

Wait for Another	The modem continues dialing as soon as it detects another dial tone.

  Dial Tone (W)

Wait for an 	The modem continues dialing when it detects 5 seconds of silence

  Answer (@)	on the line.

Fast Dial	The modem dials immediately on dial-tone detect, instead of waiting the normal 2 seconds, set in Register S6.


ARQ Result Codes

The ARQ Codes Suppressed/Displayed option toggles off and on the codes that indicate a successful error-control connection has been made.  The Include HST, V.32 option enables the display of HST/V.32 modulation codes in addition to the ARQ codes.  The Include Protocol option enables the display of all ARQ and protocol codes.

AT Command:	&An

Settings:	ARQ Results Enabled (Default)

ARQ Results Disabled

Include HST, V.32

Include Protocol


Response to +++

This parameter determines the modem's response to an escape code sequence.  When set to Go On Hook, this sequence terminates the connection and the modem enters command mode.  When set to Enter Command Mode, an escape code puts the modem into online command mode without terminating the connection.  In this mode, AT commands may be given to the modem.  To return to the session, send the modem the ATO command.  If set to Ignore Escape Code, the modem ignores the escape sequence and passes it through as normal data.

AT Command: 	+++, DIP Switch 9

Settings:	Enter Command Mode (Default), Go On Hook, or Ignore Escape Code


AT Command Recognition

When set to Enable All, all DTE commands may be issued by the DTE user.  When set to Ignore, no AT commands may be issued by the DTE user.  When set to Query Only, only those AT commands that do not change a modem's configuration settings may be issued by the DTE user.

AT Command:	DIP Switch 8

Settings:	Enable All  (Default), Ignore, or Query Only


Management System Result Codes

When enabled, the modem may send various management system messages to the DTE in response to AT commands; these messages are similar to modem result codes.  When disabled, the modem will not transmit management system messages.

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.32 300/600 Hz Tone Times

This parameter sets the duration, in tenths of a second, of the EIA-specified Multimode Training sequence for V.32 modems, which includes U.S. Robotics Dual Standard modems set to answer V.32 calls (set to B0).  The delay gives V.32 modems additional time to connect with most U.S./Canada modems at 9600 bps before falling back to attempt a V.21 connection (to answer overseas calls, 300 bps) or a V.23 connection (some United Kingdom modems, 1200 bps with a 75-bps back channel).  The fallback occurs only if the modem is set for V.21 (S27, bit 0 enabled) and/or V.23 (S34, bit 3 enabled).

AT Command:  S28

Settings: 	0 - 255, 8 (Default)


V.23 Handshake Timer

This parameter sets the duration, in tenths of a second, of the V.23 handshake timer for the multimode training sequence.  When set to 0 the V.23 answer tones are disabled, resulting in faster connect times on modems capable of Bell 208B operation.  The default setting should be appropriate for most installations.

AT Command:  	S45

Settings: 	0 - 255, 0 (Default)


V.21 to V.23 Fallback Timer

This parameter sets the duration, in tenths of a second, of the V.21/V.23 fallback timer.

AT Command:  	S29

Settings:	0 - 255, 20 (Default)


Rings for Automatic Answer

This parameter sets the number of rings on which to answer incoming calls when the modem is in Auto Answer mode.  Setting to 0 disables the modem's Auto Answer feature.

AT Command:  S0, DIP Switch 5

Settings: 	0 - 255, 1 (Default)


Additional Answer Tone Time

This parameter sets extra answer tone time, in msec., transmitted in answer mode. The modem normally transmits 1000 msec.  Allowable values are 0-255.  Values greater than 30 are treated as 30, so the answer tone can be increased to a maximum of 4000 msec..  The default is 16, which produces an answer tone of 2600 msec.

AT Command:  	S49

Settings:	0 through 255

16  (Default)


Answer in Originate Mode

This parameter sets the modem to Auto Answer in Originate mode.

AT Command:  	S13.1

Settings:	Disable  (Default)

Enable


Billing Delay Timer

Sets the billing delay period, in fiftieths of a second.  This defines a period of silence between the time the modem goes off-hook and when it begins the answer sequence.

AT Command:  	S50

Settings:	0 - 255, 100 (Default)


Default Phone Number

This parameter is the phone dial string stored in the modem's NVRAM at position 0, used by default when either the Dial on DTR or Auto Dial on Power Up options are enabled.

AT Command:  &Z0

Settings:	Null (Default), Display String


Stored Phone Number 1

A phone number dial string of up to 40 characters stored in the modem's NVRAM at position 1.

AT Command:  	&Z1

Settings: 	Null (Default) or Display String


Stored Phone Number 2

A phone number dial string of up to 40 characters stored in the modem's NVRAM at position 2.

AT Command:  	&Z2

Settings: 	Null (Default) or Display String


Stored Phone Number 3

A phone number dial string of up to 40 characters stored in the modem's NVRAM at position 3.

Command Setting Equivalent:  &Z3

Settings: 	Null (Default) or Display String


ARQ Negotiation

Setting this parameter to none, allows async connections without error control.  When set to Sync Mode, allows synchronous connections.  If set to Normal ARQ (default), the local modem attempts to connect under error control, but will connect without it if it can't be negotiated.  If set to ARQ Only, the local modem attempts to use error correction for async calls and hangs up if the remote modem is not using error correction.

AT Command:  	&Mn

Settings:	Normal ARQ  (Default), None, Sync Mode, or ARQ Only


MI/MIC Closure for Call Detection

This parameter enables or disable the Mode Indicate/Mode Indicate Common (MI/MIC) closure function required by some PBXs.

AT Command:	S34.5

Settings:	Disable, (Default) or Enable


MNP/V.42 @ 1200 bps

This parameter makes it possible to exclude MNP/V.42 from link negotiations at 1200 bps, by selecting the Disable setting.  The default setting includes these negotiations.

AT Command:  S51.0

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


MNP/V.42 @ 2400 bps

This parameter makes it possible to exclude MNP/V.42 from link negotiations at 2400 bps, by selecting the Disable setting. The default setting includes these negotiations.

AT Command:  	S51.1

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


MNP/V.42 @ 9600 bps

This parameter makes it possible to exclude MNP/V.42 from link negotiations at 9600/14,400 bps (both V.32 and V.32 bis), by selecting the Disable setting.  The default setting includes these negotiations.

AT Command:  S51.2

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Data/Fax Mode

This parameter sets a compatible fax modem to the correct mode for data or fax transmission.

AT Command:	+FCLASS=

Settings:	Data Mode  (Default)

Fax Class 1 Mode

Data Fax Class 1 Mode

Fax Class 2 Mode

Data Fax Class 2 Mode


T1 Call Setup

This parameter determines T1 call setup procedures used:  'normal' or 'none'.  None assumes a dedicated (leased) DS0 is assigned to the modem.

AT Command:  	S47.0

Settings:	Normal Setup  (Default) or No Setup


T1 Tone Type

This parameter determines if Multi-Frequency (MF) or Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones are use for T1 dialout signaling.

AT Command:  	S47.1

Settings:	MF tones  (Default) or DTMF tones


Dial Sequence Tone

This parameter determines the usage of Key Pulse (KP) and Start (ST) Multi-Frequency (MF) tone encapsulation of the dial sequence.  Required for Automatic Number Indicate (ANI) and Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS).

AT Command:  	S47.2

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Calling Initialization String

This parameter determines if calling initialization strings are used or not.  Applies to ANI/DNIS calls.

AT Command:  	S47.3

Settings:	Enable  (Default) or Disable


ANI/DNIS Call Initialization Strings

Determines if the calling initialization strings are based upon DNIS  or ANIG.

AT Command:  S47.4

Settings:	DNIS base (Default) or ANI base


Blocked (Blacklist) Restriction

This parameter disables Blocked User restriction, which sets a limit of 12 failed call attempts in a row.  Required primarily for international modems.

AT Command:	S40.1

Settings:	Enable  (Default) or Disable


Off-Hook Restriction

This parameter enables or disable off-hook restriction.  Required primarily for international modems.

AT Command: 	S40.2

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


ANI-Based Incoming Call Digits

This parameter sets the number of ANI digits allowed on dial-in calls.

AT Command:  S62

Settings: 	0 - 12, 0  (Default)


DNIS-Based Incoming Call Digits

This parameter sets the number of DNIS/Direct Inward Dial (DID) digits allowed on dial-in calls.

AT Command:	S63

Settings: 	0 - 12, 0  (Default)


Packet Bus Answer Only

This parameter enables or disables when you want the call to be routed over the Packet Bus to a gateway card.  If the packet bus link is not up, wither an unavailable or busy pattern will be sent to the T1 card, depending on the particular software version.  Outgoing calls from the RS-232 port will also be blocked.

AT Command:  	S47.5

Settings:	Disable (Default), or 	Enable


T1 Idle Disconnect Pattern

This parameter changes the idle/disconnect pattern used over the chassis TDM bus between the modem and a T1 card during call setup and teardown.  Change this setting only in situations where stray in-band characters from T1 DS0s are frequently misinterpreted by the modem as the idle/disconnect pattern, causing unexpected modem disconnects.

Warning: The T1 card must be set for the same value. Do not change this value without also setting the T1 card for the same value. Requires a T1 card compatible with this feature.

Reserved Patterns:  	0, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 121, 128, 129, 130, 133, 134, and 255

MIB Object:	mdmCcIdleDiscPatt

AT Command:  	ATS71

Settings:	0 - 255, 1 (Default)


Originate MP10

Originates using MNP10.

Note:  Originate MNP10EC (S61.5) must be set to disabled, otherwise the modem originates MNP10EC.

MIB Objects:	mdmCcMnp10

AT Command:  	ATS61.4

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


Originate MP10EC

Originates using MNP10EC.  Falls back to MNP10 if answering modem does not support MNP10EC.  MNP10 Enhanced Cellular (MNP10EC) provides more robust data transmission over adverse cellular conditions than MNP10.  MNP10EC is automatically negotiated when MNP10 Negotiation is enabled (S60.0=1) and the modem receives an MNP10EC call.

MIB Objects:	mdmCcMnp10Ec

AT Command:  	ATS61.5

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


ATZ Handling Over Packet Bus

This parameter determines how the modem will respond to an AT Z (reset) command sent via gateway cards over the packet bus.

MIB Object:	mdmCcAtzPbHandling

AT Command:  	ATS72

Settings:	normalAtz (Default), atzPbIgnored, or atzPbNvram


DTMF Command Extended

This parameter enables or disables DTMF extended support.

MIB Object:	mdmCcExtDTMFToneSupport

Settings:	Disable  (Default)

or Enable


Default Dial-Out PRI Slot

This parameter defines the slot in the hub which houses the default Dialout PRI device.

MIB Object:	mdmCcDefltPRISlot

Settings: 	1 through 5, 1  (Default)


Client Modem Identification

  Manufacturer Identification

  Product Code

  Serial Number

  Firmware Version

  Firmware Build Date


Manufacturer Identification

This read-only parameter displays the client modem Manufacturer Identification.

MIB Object:	cmdmIdManufactureId


Product Code

This read-only parameter displays the client modem Product Code.

MIB Object:	cmdmIdProductCode


Serial Number

This read-only parameter displays the client modem Serial number.

MIB Object:	cmdmIdSerialNo


Firmware Version

This read-only parameter displays the client modem Hardware Version number.

MIB Object:	cmdmIdHwVer


Firmware Build Date

This read-only parameter displays the client modem Software Version number.

MIB Object:	cmdmIdSwVer


DNIS Access Codes

  DNIS Group 1

  DNIS Init String 1

  DNIS Group 2

  DNIS Init String 2

  DNIS Group 3

  DNIS Init String 3

  DNIS Default String


DNIS Group 1

This parameter is a user-defined number from one to ten digits. Also known as a DNIS Carrier Access Code Number, it is compared against the phone number dialed by an incoming call.  If there is a match, the modem is configured with DNIS Initialization String 1 before the call is answered.

Settings:	Display String

Null	(Default)


DNIS Initial String 1

This parameter is a user-defined string from 1 to 30 characters.  This init string configures a modem when an incoming call matches DNIS Group 1.

Settings: 	Display String

Null  (Default)


DNIS Group 2

This parameter is a user-defined number from one to ten digits.  Also known as a DNIS Carrier Access Code Number, it is compared against the phone number dialed by an incoming call.  If there is a match, the modem is configured with DNIS Initialization String 2 before the call is answered.

Settings: 	Display String

Null  (Default)


DNIS Initial String 2

This parameter is a user-defined string from 1 to 30 characters.  This init string configures a modem when an incoming call matches DNIS Group 2.

Settings: 	Display String

Null  (Default)


DNIS Group 3

This parameter is a user-defined number from one to ten digits.  Also known as a DNIS Carrier Access Code Number, it is compared against the phone number dialed by an incoming call.  If there is a match, the modem is configured with DNIS Initalization String 3 before the call is answered.

Settings: 	Display String

Null  (Default)


DNIS Initial String 3

This parameter is user-defined string from 1 to 30 characters. This init string is used to configure a modem when an incoming call matches DNIS Group 3.

Settings: 	Display String

Null  (Default)


Default String

This parameter is a user-defined string from 1 to 30 characters.  This init string configures a modem when an incoming call does not match any of the defined DNIS groups.

Settings: 	Display String

Null  (Default)


Data Compression Settings

  Data Compression Mode


Data Compression Mode

The default setting allows the modem to negotiate V.42 bis, then MNP level 5 data compression for an Automatic Repeat Request (error control) call, when the modem's DTE rate is higher than the call's connection rate. When the DTE rate is equal to the connection rate, the modem disables compression. The Enabled option allows data compression regardless of the modem's DTE rate. The MNP without Compression option is available to users transferring already-compressed files, because MNP5 compression degrades throughput for those files.  (V.42 bis works very well with already-compressed files.)  The None option disables all data compression.

AT Command:  &Kn

Settings:	AutoEnable

None

Enable

MNP without Compression


DTE Interface Settings

  Escape Guard Time Escape Guard Time

  Modem Escape Character Modem Escape Character

  Carriage Return Character

  Line Feed Character

  Backspace Character

  Backspace Functionality

  Modem Reset on DTR Drop

  Pause before Result Codes

  Appletalk Interbridge Network

  Break Length

  Xon Flow Control Character

  Xoff Flow Control Character

  DSR Mode Pulse Length

  Synchronize  RTS  Delay before CTS

  Result Codes above 9600

  Echo DTE Data

  Half Duplex DTE Echo

  DTE Rate Mode

  Assert CD at Connection

  DTR Override

  DSR Functionality

  Transmit Flow Control Mode

  Software Flow Control

  Hardware Flow Control

  Break Handling Methods

  DTE NVRAM Lock

  Default DTE Data Format

  Default DTE Data Rate

  Modem Unable Message for

  Default V.25 bis Data Rate

  DTE Interface Source

  DTE Interface Slot

  Busy Out

  AT Command Interface

  DTR Recognition Time


Escape Guard Time

This parameter defines the guard time, in 50ths of a second, for the modem escape code sequence.

AT Command:  S12

Settings: 	0 - 255, 50 = 1 second (Default)


Modem Escape Character

This parameter stores the ASCII decimal value of the escape code character, used to escape to online command mode.  The default character is + (plus sign).  A value of 128 through 255 disables the escape code.

AT Command:  	S2

Settings: 	0 - 255, 43 (Default)


Carriage Return Character

This parameter stores the ASCII decimal value of the carriage return character.

AT Command:  	S3

Settings:	0 - 255, 13 (Default)


Line Feed Character

This parameter stores the ASCII decimal value of the line feed character.

AT Command:  	S4

Settings:	0 - 255, 10 (Default)


Backspace Character

This parameter stores the ASCII decimal value of the backspace character. A value of 128 through 255 disables the key's delete function.

AT Command:  	S5

Settings:	0 - 255, 8 (Default)


Backspace Functionality

This parameter determines the operation of the Delete key.  When set to Delete, the Delete key erases the character to the right of the cursor.  When set to Backspace, the Delete key deletes the character to the left of the cursor.

Settings:	Delete (Default) or Backspace


Modem Reset on DTR Drop

When Enabled, the modem hangs up and is reset when DTR drops.  When Disabled, the modem does not reset when DTR drops.

AT Command:  	S13.0

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


Pause before Result Codes

When Enabled, a 250-millisecond pause precedes the transmission of modem result codes.

AT Command:  	S13.2

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Appletalk Interbridge Network

This parameter should be enabled only when compatibility with an AppleTalk InterBridge Network is required.

AT Command:  	S15.7

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


Break Length

This parameter sets the duration of breaks, in 10-millisecond increments, sent by the modem to the DTE when in ARQ (error control) mode.

AT Command:  	S21

Settings: 	0 - 255, 10 (Default)


Xon Flow Control Character

This parameter stores the ASCII decimal value of the XON character.

Settings: 	0 - 255, 17 (Default)


Xoff Flow Control Character

This parameter stores the ASCII decimal value of the XOFF character.

AT Command:  	S23

Settings:	0 - 255, 19 (Default)


DSR Mode Pulse Length

This parameter determines the length of a pulse, in 20-millisecond increments, when the modem is configured for pulsed DSR mode.

AT Command:  	S24

Settings: 	0 - 150, 150 (Default)


Synchronize  RTS  Delay before CTS

This parameter sets the duration, in 10-millisecond increments, of the delay between the DTE assertion of RTS and the modem's assertion of CTS.  This function is valid only for synchronous communications when the Hardware Flow Control Method parameter is set to RTS/CTS Delayed.

AT Command:  	S26

Settings:	0 - 255, 1 (Default)


Result Codes above 9600

This parameter determines if, on establishment of a connection, result codes above 9600 are sent to the DTE. The higher codes should be disabled if there is a communications software incompatibility, and 9600 will be displayed in place of the higher codes.

AT Command:  	S27.7

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Echo DTE Data

This parameter enables or disables the echo of typed AT commands to the modem's DTE when the modem is in command mode.

AT Command:  	En, DIP Switch 4

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


Half Duplex DTE Echo

Description:  Defines whether or not the DTE transmitted data is echoed back during a half duplex connection.

AT Command:  	Fn

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


DTE Rate Mode

When this parameter is set to the default, Follows Link Rate, the modem switches its DTE speed to match the connection (link) rate.  With the Fixed setting, the modem's serial port automatically detects the incoming DTE speed on every AT command and stays at that speed regardless of the connection (link) speed.  With the ARQ Fixed/Non-ARQ Follows setting, the modem's serial port reverts to the fixed mode for ARQ (error-corrected) calls, or Follows Link Rate for non-ARQ (non-error-corrected) calls.

AT Command:  &Bn

Settings:	Follows Link Rate (Default), Fixed, or ARQ Fixed/Non-ARQ Follows


Assert CD at Connection

When this parameter is set to Enable, the modem asserts CD when it connects with a remote modem, and drops CD when it disconnects.  When set to Disable, CD remains true (high) until the modem is reset.

AT Command:  &Cn, DIP Switch 6

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


DTR Override

This parameter determines how the modem interprets the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal from the DTE.  When set to Disable, the modem always assumes that DTR is true (high).  When set to Enable, DTR is not overridden:  the computer must assert DTR for the modem to accept incoming calls and AT commands, and dropping DTR terminates a call.

AT Command:  	&Dn, DIP Switch 1

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


DSR Functionality

This parameter is required by some systems to enable the modem to signal the DTE when the modem is ready to answer a call.  DSR signaling is normally overridden.  Some systems require one of the pulsed DSR options.  When set to Modem Controlled, the modem controls DSR.  When set to Pulsed CTS Follows CD, the modem sends a three-second pulsed DSR signal on loss of carrier, and Clear to Send (CTS) follows Carrier Detect (CD).  The Pulsed option is the same, but CTS does not follow CD.

AT Command:  	&Sn

Settings:	DSR Overridden (Default)

Modem Controlled

Pulsed CTS Follows CD

Pulsed


Transmit Flow Control Mode

This parameter disables or enables one of the transmit data flow control options, required when the modem is set for error control or the DTE interface speed is higher than the link speed.  None means that no flow control is used.  The Hardware setting is recommended:  the modem raises/lowers the Clear to Send (CTS) signal at theRS-232 interface, which requires communication software that supports CTS.  The Software setting requires software support of XON/XOFF signaling. The Hardware and Software setting is provided for users who are unsure of what their equipment supports; with this option, both methods are attempted.

AT Command: 	&Hn

Settings:	None (Default), Hardware, Software, or Hardware and Software


Software Flow Control

The None setting means that no software flow control is implemented.  Leave this default in place unless your system does not support hardware flow control.

When set to XON/XOFF Local/Remote, the modem acts on XON/XOFF signals from the DTE and also passes them to the remote DTE.  Use in ARQ mode only.  Note that signals sent to the remote DTE may interfere with XON/XOFF signaling.

When set to XON/XOFF Local, the modem acts on XON/XOFF signals from the DTE but does not pass them to the remote computer.  This ensures that the remote computer does not confuse your XON/XOFF signals with those from its attached modem.  This is recommended for ARQ mode.

Use HP Host Mode when the modem is attached to a Hewlett Packard host computer using the ENQ/ACK protocol and the remote DTE is an HP terminal that recognizes the ENQ/ACK exchange.  Use in either ARQ or non-ARQ mode.  The modem's Transmit Data flow control setting must be either disabled or set to hardware flow control.

Use HP Terminal Mode when the modem is attached to an HP terminal.  This setting implements the HP ENQ/ACK protocol when the remote DTE is an HP host.  Use in either ARQ or non-ARQ mode.  The modem's Transmit Data flow control setting must be either disabled or set to hardware flow control.

Local Incoming XON/XOFF operates as XON/XOFF Local,  but in non-ARQ mode the modem checks the phone line for XON/XOFF characters and acts on those characters.

AT Command:  &In

Settings:	None (Default)

XON/XOFF Local/Remote

XON/XOFF Local

HP Host Mode

HP Terminal Mode

Local Incoming XON/XOFF


Hardware Flow Control

The default setting disables received data hardware flow control, not usually required for asynchronous communications. Some synchronous systems require a delay between the RTS signal from the DTE and the modem's Clear to Send response; use the RTS/CTS Delayed option for systems requiring this setting.  When set to Data on RTS High, the modem stops passing received data to the DTE when the DTE drops RTS and resumes when the DTE raises RTS.

AT Command:  	&Rn

Settings:	RTS Ignored (Default), RTS/CTS Delayed, or Data on RTS High


Break Handling Methods

Selects one of the methods for sending a break to abort a data transfer without disconnecting from the data link.  Destructive breaks flush the modem's transmit data buffer. Expedited breaks are sent immediately to the remote system. Not Sent indicates that the break is not sent to the remote modem; this can be used to clear data from the transmit buffer without passing on the break to the remote modem.

AT Command:  	&Yn

Settings:	Destructive Expedited (Default)

Destructive Not Sent

Non-destructive Expedited

Non-destructive Not Sent


DTE NVRAM Lock

When Enabled, the modem's NVRAM settings and stored phone numbers are read-only and cannot be changed by the modem's DTE user.

AT Command:  	R&W

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


Default DTE Data Format

This parameter sets a default DTE data format in applications where the DTE does not send AT commands to the modems.  The modems typically use AT commands to set the DTE data format automatically; if they don't detect AT commands, they default to the format set with this function.

Settings:	8 bits No Parity  (Default)

7 bits Even Parity

7 bits Odd Parity

7 bits Mark Parity


Default DTE Data Rate

This parameter sets a default DTE data rate in applications where the DTE does not send AT commands to the modems.  The modems typically use AT commands to automatically set the DTE data rate; if they don't detect AT commands, they will default to the rate set with this function.

AT Command:  	&Bn

Settings:	9600 bps (Default)

110 bps

300 bps

600 bps

1200 bps

2400 bps

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

19 Kbps

38 Kbps

Unknown

57 Kbps

115 Kbps


Modem Unable Message for
Modem Unable Message for Busy Out DTE

This parameter controls a Modem Unavailable message returned by the modem to the DTE if the DTE tries to send data to the modem while the modem is engaged in a remote access session.  This function is provided so that the message can be disabled if it causes problems with the communications software at the DTE.

AT Command:  	S34.6

Settings:	Enable (Disable) or Disable


Default V.25 bis Data Rate

This parameter function establishes the default DTE rate for V.25 bis synchronous mode.

AT Command:  %Nn

Settings:	1200 bps

2400 bps

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

12K bps

14K bps

16K bps

19K bps

21K bps

24K bps

26K bps

28K bps

 	9600 bps  (Default)


DTE Interface Source

This parameter specifies either NIC or Packet Bus as the source for the DTE interface.

Settings:	NIC (Default) or Packet Bus


DTE Interface Slot

This parameter specifies the slot address that is serving as the DTE interface  source when the Source of DTE Interface parameter is configured for Packet Bus.

Settings:	1 - 16


Busy Out

This parameter specifies whether the modem will support either the current transmit clock or a busy out feature.

Settings:	Ext Clock 1 (Default) or Busy Out


AT Command Interface

Provides an interface for issuing an AT command to the modem.  This object can be stored to NVRAM and subsequently configured during power-up.

Settings: 	Null (Default) or Display String


DTR Recognition Time

This parameter determines how quickly the modem will react when DTR transitions from off to on.

MIB Object:	mdmDiDtrRecognitionTime

AT Command:	S25

Settings:	1 through 255, 20 ms  (Default)


Hub Security

  Dial In Enable

  Dial Out Enable

  DTR DCD Delay

  DTR DSR Delay


Dial In Enable

This parameter allows the modem to be configured for dial-in security.  Enabling this effectively disables the modem's built-in Link Security operation.

Settings:	No dial in security will be negotiated 	(Default)

Connection allowed when no NMC present

No calls answered when no NMC present

Hold phone line busy when no NMC present


Dial Out Enable

This parameter allows the modem to be configured for dial-in security.  Enabling this effectively disables the modem's built-in Link Security operation.

Settings:	No dial in security will be negotiated	(Default)

Connection allowed when no NMC present

No calls answered when no NMC present

Hold phone line busy when no NMC present


DTR DCD Delay

This parameter allows configuration of a time delay, in 100ths of a second, between receipt of DTR and assertion of DCD when the user on an incoming security call has successfully completed the security dialog.  This parameter only applies to modems using an RS-232-like interface.

Settings:	0 - 255  (Default = 1)


DTR DSR Delay

This parameter allows configuration of a time delay, in 100ths of a second, between detection of DTR and assertion of DSR when an incoming security call has successfully completed security negotiation.

Settings: 	0 - 255  (Default = 1)


ISDN Modem Call Control Options

  V 110 Rate Adaptation

  Force Fixed Network Rate

  Force Network Rate Speed

  Enable 45 - 65 Second Link Delay

  Analog Calls Over Digital

  Async PPP/Sync PPP

  X.75

  Set Data Mode on Modem

  Set Originate HDLC Protocol

  Set Originate Non-HDLC Protocol

  Set Originate Analog Modem/Fax


V 110 Rate Adaption
V 110 Rate Adaptation

This parameter enables or disables V110 rate adaptation for a modem.

MIB Object:	imdmCcRateAdapV110

AT Command:	S67.0

Settings:	Enable

or Disable (default)


Force Fixed Network Rate

Setting this parameter to notForced allows a modem to use a data transfer rate slower than the current network rate if the modem cannot achieve the network rate.

Set this parameter value to forceNetworkRate if you want to require a modem to use the current network rate.

 Object:	ImdmCcFixedNtwkRate

AT Command:	S67.1

Settings:	notForced (Default)

or forceNetworkRate


Force Network Rate Speed

This parameter establishes the speed of the data transfer rate on the network.

MIB Object: 	imdmCcNetworkRate

AT Command:	S67.2

Setting:	56 Kbps (Default)

or 64 Kbps


Enable 45 - 65 Second Link Delay

This parameter enables or disables a 45 to 65 second delay before a link attempt.

MIB Object:	imdmCcBcLinkDly

AT Command:	S67.4

Settings:	noDelay  (Default)

or Delay


Allow Analog Calls Over Digital
Analog Calls Over Digital

Setting this parameter to Allow enables analog data communication calls over digital connections.

MIB Object:	imdmCcDisAnlgOvrDig

AT Command:	S68.0

Settings:	Allow (Default)

or Disallow


Allow Async PPP/ Sync PPP
Asynchronous PPP/ Synchronous PPP

This parameter enables or disables asynchronous point to point protocol (PPP) communication to synchronous PPP communication.

MIB Object:	imdmCcDisAsyncPPP

AT Command:	S68.4

Settings:	Disable  (Default)

or Enable


Allow X.75
X.75

This parameter enables or disables X.75 communication.

MIB Object: 	imdmCcDisX75

AT Command:	68.5

Settings:	Disable  (Default)

Enable


Set Data Mode on Modem

This parameter sets the data mode of the modem.

MIB Object:	imdmCcStarV2

AT Command:	*V2

Settings:	autodetect  (Default)

v120rateAdapOnly

v110rateAdapOnly

  	modemOrFaxOnly

  	clearChannelSync

  	asyncSyncPPPconv

  	x75


Set Originate HDLC Protocol

This parameter sets the originate High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) protocols of the modem.

MIB Object:	imdmCcStarU1

AT Command:	*U1

Settings:	none  (Default)

v120

x75

PPP


Set Originate Non-HDLC Protocol

This parameter sets the originate Non-High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) protocols of the modem.

MIB Object:	imdmCcStarU2

AT Command:	*U2

Settings:	None  (Default)

or V110


Set Originate Analog Modem/Fax

This parameter sets the originate Analog modem/fax data mode of the modem.

MIB Object: 	imdmCcStarU3

AT Command:	*U3

Settings:	None (Default)

analogModemFax


Line Interface Options

  Dial Pause Delay

  Carrier Detect Delay

  Carrier Loss Detect Delay

  Tone Dial Spacing

  RX Delay after CD

  Modem Transmitter

  Transmitter Level

  Pulse/Tone Dial

  Guard Tone Frequency

  Leased Line Operation

  Leased Line Restore Delay after CD

  Pulse Dialing Country

  2100 Hz Answer Tone

  Remote Access Escape Guard

  Remote Access Escape Code

  Remote Access Attempt Limit

  Remote Access View Password

  Remote Access Configuration

  Line Interface Source


Dial Pause Delay

This parameter sets the duration, in seconds, for the pause (,) option in the Dial command (ATD) and for the pause between dialing attempts with automatic redialing (> or A>) commands.

AT Command:  	S8

Settings:	0 through 255

2  (Default)


Carrier Detect Delay

This parameter sets the duration, in tenths of a second, that the remote modem's carrier signal must be present before the local modem recognizes the signal.  Ignored at speeds above 2400.

AT Command:  	S9

Settings: 	0 through 255

 	6  (Default)


Carrier Loss Detect Delay

This parameter sets the duration, in tenths of a second, that the modem waits after the loss of the remote modem's carrier signal before hanging up.  This setting allows the modem to distinguish between a momentary lapse due to line quality and a true disconnect by the remote modem.

If this value is set to 255, the modem does not hang up on loss of carrier.  It hangs up only when DTR is dropped or if it receives the +++ escape code sequence and returns to command mode.  Note that the exact action taken by the modem on receipt of the escape sequence depends on the setting of the Escape Code Action parameter.  (When set to Ignore Escape Code or Enter Online Command Mode, the ATH command must be used to hang up the modem.)

AT Command:  	S10

Settings:	0 through 255

 	7  (Default)


Tone Dial Spacing

This parameter sets the duration and spacing, in milliseconds, of dialed touch tones.

AT Command:  	S11

Settings: 	0 through 255

 	70  (Default)


RX Delay After CD

When S35 is set to a number greater than 0, and the Custom Connect/Disconnect Mode is enabled (S27.6), the modem inserts an RX character transmission delay.  The number selected for the delay represents 10 millisecond units between CD and the first received character.  This feature is reserved for a private, custom application and is not recommended for general usage.

AT Command:  S35, S27.6

Settings: 	0 through 255

0  (Default)


Modem Transmitter

This parameter enables or disables the modem's transmitter.  When an additional DTE and modem share a phone line for monitoring, the transmitter of the second modem is placed in Receive Only state by selecting Disable.  This feature should be used only at 1200 or 300 bps.

AT Command:  	Cn

Settings:	Enable  (Default)

Disable


Transmitter Level

This parameter sets the decibel level of the modem's transmitter.

Settings: 	9 through 20 (analog)

3 through 30 (digital)

 	11  (Default)


Pulse/Tone Dial

This parameter determines whether the modem uses pulse or tone for dialing when initiating outgoing calls.

AT Command:  	P, T

Settings:	Tone  (Default)

Pulse


Guard Tone Frequency

This parameter is required for modems to answer calls originating from sites outside of North America.  The modems must be operating at 1200 or 2400 bps and the Handshake option must be set to the V.32 ITU-T answer sequence.  When European is selected, the modem sends a 550 Hz guard tone after the answer tone; when U.K. is selected, the modem sends a 1800 Hz guard tone after the answer tone.

AT Command:  	&Gn

Settings:	None  (Default)

European, 550 Hz

U.K., 1800 Hz


Leased Line Operation

This parameter enables or disables leased line operation.  When enabled, the local and remote modems make a continuous connection without dialing.  Should the connection be broken, the modems will attempt to automatically reestablish it.

Note:  USR modems are designed to operate with two-wire leased lines.  For four-wire lines a converter is required, which can usually be obtained from your local telephone company.

AT Command:  	&Ln

Settings:	Disable  (Default)

Enable


Leased Line Restore Delay after CD
Leased Line Restore Delay after CD Loss

This parameter sets the duration, in seconds, of the amount of time the modem waits between when it senses loss of carrier and when it attempts to restore a leased-line connection.  The default setting of 15 should be appropriate for most installations.

AT Command:	S44

Settings: 	0 - 255

15  (Default)


Pulse Dialing Country

Description:  This function sets the ratio of the off-hook/on-hook interval for North American or British Commonwealth pulse dialing.

AT Command:  	&Pn

Settings:	North America   (Default)

British Commonwealth


2100 Hz Answer Tone

This parameter enables or disables the 2100 Hz answer tone, allowing V.42 modems to connect more quickly and or eliminating problems with older 2400-bps modems that do not recognize this tone.

AT Command:  	S27.3

Settings:	Enable  (Default)

Disable


Remote Access Escape Guard

This parameter sets the duration, in 20 millisecond increments, of the guard time that the modem requires for the remote access escape sequence.

AT Command:  S43

Settings: 	0 through 255

 	200  or 4 sec.  (Default)


Remote Access Escape Code

This parameter stores the ASCII decimal value of the remote access escape code character. The default is the decimal value for the tilde (~).

AT Command:  	S42

Settings: 	0 through 255

 	126  (Default)


Remote Access Attempt Limit

This parameter stores the number of login attempts the modem will accept for a remote access session.  The default value of 0 disables remote access.  If a user exceeds the number of attempts specified here, the normal online session resumes and the user is blacklisted from further remote access attempts during that session.

AT Command:  	S41

Settings: 	0 through 255

 	0  (Default)


Remote Access View Password

This parameter defines a password, up to 8 alphanumeric characters, that must be entered during a remote access login.  It grants rights to query the modem and view modem status.  If left undefined, no password is needed for view-only privileges.

AT Command:  	%P0

Settings: 	Password


Remote Access Configuration
Remote Access Configuration Password

This parameter defines a password of up to 8 alphanumeric characters that must be entered by a user during a remote access login.  It grants rights both to query the modem for status and to reconfigure the modem.  If left undefined, no password is needed for view/configure privileges.

AT Command:  %P1

Settings: 	Password


Line Interface Source

This parameter specifies either the Network Interface Card (NICG) installed behind the modem or the Time Division Multiplexed (TDMG) Bus as the source for the line interface.

AT Command:  %Dn

Settings:	nic

t1TDM (default)

priTdm


This is a new secondary document for your project.

Click Topic (Ctrl+T) to add a new Help topic.


Link Security Configuration

  Link Security Enable

  Fallback Password Prompting

  Forced Password Prompting

  Local Access Password Enable

  Dialback Prompting

  Autopass Password

  Local Access Password

  Fallback Password


Link Security Enable

This parameter enables or disables the link security feature in the modem.

AT Command:  	S53.0

Settings:	Disable  (Default)

Enable


Fallback Password Prompting

This parameter enables or disables the prompting by the called modem when the Autopass Password supplied by the caller fails, or if no password is supplied at all.

AT Command:	S53.1

Settings:	Disable  (Default)

Enable


Forced Password Prompting

When this parameter is enabled, the modem prompts the remote user for a password regardless of the success of the modem in negotiating the Autopass Password.

AT Command:  	S53.3

Settings:	Disable  (Default)

Enable


Local Access Password Enable

This parameter enables or disables the Local Access Password feature used to establish a security check when accessing any security setting.

AT Command:  	S53.2

Settings:	Disable

Enable


Dialback Prompting

When enabled this parameter, after successful password validation, the modem disconnects and dials out to the originating modem.

AT Command:  	%A=

Settings:	Disable  (Default)

Enable


Autopass Password

This parameter sets the Autopass Password that establishs Link Security during call negotiation.

AT Command:  	%V=

Settings: 	Display String (Size (0..8))


Local Access Password

This parameter contains the Local Access Password used when accessing any security setting when the Local Access Password Enable parameter is enabled.

Command Setting Equivalent:  %L=

Settings: 	Display String (Size (0..8))


Fallback Password

This parameter contains the Fallback Password that must be entered if the Autopass Password is not satisfied.

AT Command:  	%A=

Settings:	Display String (Size (0..8))


Modem Error Control Settings

  MNP Level 3 Error Correction

  MNP Level 4 Error Correction

  Special 2400 bps MNP

  V.42 MNP Negotiation Method

  ARQ Buffer Reset Delay


MNP Level 3 Error Correction

This parameter disables MNPG level 3 so that MNP level 2 can be tested.

AT Command:  	S13.6

Settings:	Enable  (Default)

Disable


MNP Level 4 Error Correction

This parameter enable or disable MNPG level 4.  It may be necessary to disable this function when poor line conditions are expected.

AT Command:  	S15.4

Settings:	Enable  (Default)

Disable


Special 2400 bps MNP

This parameter enables connections with earlier non-U.S. Robotics 2400-bps modems that are not fully compatible with the MNPG protocol.

AT Command:  	S15.6

Settings:	Disable

Enable


V.42 MNP Negotiation Method

This parameter determines the error control handshaking mode.  The default allows full error-control handshaking:  the modem attempts to connect under V.42 error control and, if that fails, tries to connect under MNPG error control.  When set to disable either V.42 or MNP, the modem will only attempt to negotiate the enabled protocol. When set to disable the V.42 Detect Phase, this phase is skipped during the handshaking process, allowing for faster connections between V.42 modems.

AT Command:  	S27.4-5

Settings:	Enable All  (Default)

Enable V.42 Disable MNP

Disable V.42 Enable MNP

Disable Detection Phase


ARQ Buffer Reset Delay

This parameter sets the duration, in seconds, before a forced hang-up and clearing of the Transmit buffer when DTR drops during an Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) call.  This allows time for a remote modem to acknowledge receipt of all transmitted data.  If the modem is in Smart mode and receives the ATH command to hang up, it ignores this setting and hangs up immediately.

AT Command:  	S38

Settings: 	Integer

0  (Default)


Modem Identification

  Modem Model

  Serial Number

  Hardware Revision

  Software Version

  Operational Status

  Country of Operation

  Ring Indicate

  Data Set Ready

  Clear to Send

  Carrier Detect

  Data Terminal Ready

  Request to Send

  The Dip Switch Settings

  DRAM Installed (KB)

  ROM Installed (KB)


Modem Model

This parameter is the model name of the modem installed in this slot of the hub.

Settings:	Unknown

V.32 bis Dual Standard

HST

V.32 bis

V.32 bis PLUS Dual Standard

V.32 bis PLUS

V.32 bis PLUS Fax

V.34 Dual Standard

V.34

V.34 Fax


Serial Number

The modem's hardware serial number as stored in EEPROM.

Settings:	Display String


Hardware Revision

The hardware revision level of the modem as stored in EEPROMG.

Settings:	Display String


Software Version

The revision level of the software being executed by the modem's processor.

Settings:	Display String


Operational Status

This parameter indicates the operation condition that currently exists on the modem.

Settings:	Idle

Off Hook

Dialing

Ringing

Ring Received

Link Negotiation

Online Originate

Online Answer

Local Command Mode

Remote Command Mode

Line Busied Out

Testing ROM

Testing RAM

Testing NVRAM

Analog Loopback

Local Digital Loopback

Remote Digital Loopback

Self-Test

Phone Test

Non-managed Device

Slot Empty

Modem Disabled

Failed

Non-manageable Device

MIU Failed


Country of Operation

The country of origin of the modem.  International standards may affect the defaults programmed into a modem.

Settings:	Unknown

North America

Japan

Finland

Sweden

UK

Norway

Switzerland

Netherlands

South Africa

Italy

New Zealand

Czech

Belgium

Denmark

Australia

France

Germany

CCITT

Austria

Ireland


Ring Indicate

This function provides a mechanism for the console to determine the current state of the DTEG EIAG signals.  Indicates the current state of the following signals:  Ring Indicate, Data Set Ready, Clear to Send, Carrier Detect, Data Terminal Ready, and Request to Send.

Settings:	High or Low


Data Set Ready

This function provides a mechanism for the console to determine the current state of the DTEG EIAG signals.  Indicates the current state of the following signals:  Ring Indicate, Data Set Ready, Clear to Send, Carrier Detect, Data Terminal Ready, and Request to Send.

Settings:	High or Low


Clear to Send

This function provides a mechanism for the console to determine the current state of the DTEG EIAG signals.  Indicates the current state of the following signals:  Ring Indicate, Data Set Ready, Clear to Send, Carrier Detect, Data Terminal Ready, and Request to Send.

Settings:	High or Low


Carrier Detect

This function provides a mechanism for the console to determine the current state of the DTEG EIAG signals.  Indicates the current state of the following signals:  Ring Indicate, Data Set Ready, Clear to Send, Carrier Detect, Data Terminal Ready, and Request to Send.

Settings:	High or Low


Data Terminal Ready

This function provides a mechanism for the console to determine the current state of the DTEG EIAG signals.  Indicates the current state of the following signals:  Ring Indicate, Data Set Ready, Clear to Send, Carrier Detect, Data Terminal Ready, and Request to Send.

Settings:	High or Low


Request to Send

This function provides a mechanism for the console to determine the current state of the DTEG EIAG signals.  Indicates the current state of the following signals:  Ring Indicate, Data Set Ready, Clear to Send, Carrier Detect, Data Terminal Ready, and Request to Send.

Settings:	High or Low


Dip Switch Settings

This parameter displays the current  DIP switch settings on the selected modem card. To interpret the integer displayed, convert into binary and read in a right-to-left fashion.

Example:  TCM  value = 1; Binary conversion = 0000000001

All DIP switches Off, except DIP switch 1, which is On.

MIB Object:  uchasSlotSwitchSettings

Settings:	Integer


DRAM Installed (KB)

The number of Kbytes of DRAM on the modem card.

MIB Object:  uchasSlotRamInstalled

Settings:	0 through 4294967295


ROM Installed (KB)

The number of Kbytes of FLASH ROM on the modem card.

MIB Object:  uchasSlotFlashInstalled

Settings:	0 through 4294967295


Signal Converter Settings

  Link Rate Speed Select

  Non-ARQ Transmit Buffer Size

  Buffer RX during MNP

  HST Modulation

  Modem Equalization

  HST Mode Lower Speed

  V.21 Modulation

  V.32 Unencoded Modulation

  V.32 Modulation

  Bell 208

  V.32 bis Modulation

  V.32 Enhanced Mode

  V.32 Fast Retrain

  V.32 Call Negotiation

  Answer Sequence

  Fallback Disable

  Synchronize Timing Source

  V.32 Turbo Modulation

  V.34 Modulation

  2400 Symbol Rate

  2743 Symbol Rate

  2800 Symbol Rate

  3000 Symbol Rate

  3200 Symbol Rate

  3429 Symbol Rate

  8S-2D Mapping

  16S-4D Mapping

  32S-2D Mapping

  64S-4D Mapping

  Non-linear Coding

  TX Level Deviation

  Preemphasis

  Precoding

  Shaping

  V.FC Modulation

  V.8 Mode

  V.8 Call Indicator

  V.34 +

  300 Baud

  1200 Baud

  2400 Baud

  High Speed Handshaking

  V.42 Selective Reject

  Phone Exclusion Delay

  Minimum High Speed Direction


Link Rate Speed Select

This parameter determines the link rate.  Variable means the link rate varies according to the connection sequence.  With a fixed rate, the modem connects only if the remote modem is operating at the same rate.

MIB Object:	mdmScLinkRateSelect

AT Command:	&Nn

Settings:	Variable  (Default)

300 bps

1200 bps

2400 bps

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

12000 bps

14400 bps

16800 bps

19200 bps

21600 bps

24000 bps

26400 bps

28800 bps

31200 bps

33600 bps

33333 bps

37333 bps

41333 bps

42666 bps

44000 bps

45333 bps

46666 bps

48000 bps

49333 bps

50666 bps

52000 bps

53333 bps

54666 bps

56000 bps

57333 bps

64000 bps

28000 bps

29333 bps

30666 bps

32000 bps

34666 bps

36000 bps

38666 bps

40000 bps

58666 bps

60000 bps

61333 bps

62666 bps


Non-ARQ Transmit Buffer Size

This parameter sets the size of the non-ARQ mode Transmit buffer. The smaller value is designed for bulletin board operations, to accommodate callers with slower modems so that they can control received data scrolling up and off the screen.

AT Command:  	S15.3

Settings:	1500 bytes (Default) or 128 bytes


Buffer RX during MNP

This parameter provides for applications where remote modems that are not MNP-compatible call in to rack modems that expect to go through MNP call negotiation.  The remote non-MNP modem may start sending data during what the rack modem expects to be the MNP negotiating period.  When Enabled, the rack modem buffers received data on the link until it either times out waiting for the MNP request (about six seconds), or determines that the first character received on the link is a ^M (carriage return).  When either of these conditions is met, the rack modem aborts the MNP negotiation phase, completes the call, and releases the buffered data received from the link.

AT Command:  	S37.0

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


HST Modulation

This parameter enables or disables HST mode so that a Dual Standard modem may be tested for ITU modulations.

Note:  Both V.34 and V.FC modulations pre-emp HST if both originate and answer modems support those protocols.  If you want to originate HST to a Courier V.34 modem, V.FC and V.8 must both be disabled.

AT Command:  	S13.5

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Modem Equalization

This parameter enables or disables high-frequency equalization, a process that compensates for line distortions at high frequencies.  Valid for Dual Standard modems in HST mode only.

AT Command:  	S15.0

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


HST Mode Lower Speed

This parameter determines the back channel rate in HST mode.  Under HST mode, data flow is asymmetrical:  the connection speed in one direction is 14.4 or 16.8 Kbps, and in the other direction (called the back channel) it is 450 bps or 300 bps.  The modems switch the fast and slow channels when the volume of data flow changes.  The default setting of 450 bps is correct for most HST modems; the 300 bps setting is available for compatibility with earlier HST modems.

AT Command:  	S15.2

Settings:	450 bps (Default) or 300 bps


V.21 Modulation

When this parameter is enabled, the modem answers both Bell 103 and V.21 overseas calls at 300 bps, but only originates V.21 300-bps calls.  When this function is disabled, V.21 Modulation is disabled.

AT Command:  	S27.0

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


V.32 Unencoded Modulation

Description:  This function enables or disables unencoded modulation in V.32 mode, an option that is part of the ITU-T V.32 recommendation but is rarely used.

AT Command: 	S27.1

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


V.32 Modulation

This parameter enables or disables V.32 modulation so that a Dual Standard modem's HST modulation may be tested.

AT Command: 	S27.2

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Bell 208

This parameter allows Bell 208-compatible modems to include this synchronous 4800 bps modulation in link negotiation.

AT Command:  	S31.0

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


V.32 bis Modulation

This parameter enables or disable V.32 bis modulation, which may be necessary for some testing or troubleshooting.

AT Command:  	S34.0

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.32 Enhanced Mode

This parameter enables or disables U.S. Robotics' enhanced V.32 mode of operation.  This mode allows asymmetrical speed switching and downshifts without retraining.  The Disable option may be necessary for some testing or troubleshooting.

AT Command:  	S34.1

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.32 Fast Retrain

This parameter enables or  disables the faster retrains that occur with U.S. Robotics' enhanced V.32 mode of operation.  The Disable option may be necessary for some testing or troubleshooting.

AT Command:  	S34.2

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.23 Call Negotiation

This parameter allows the modem to negotiate a V.23 connection (used in U.K.) at 1200 bps after failing to negotiate a higher rate.

AT Command:  	S34.3

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


Answer Sequence

This parameter defines the handshaking options used when negotiating high

speed calls.

MIB Object:	mdmScHiSpeedModulation

Settings:	v32

hst

bell208


Fallback Disable

This parameter defines whether or not the modem will be allowed to fall back to a lower speed if it detects a significant change in line characteristics.  If the modem is unable to maintain error-free transmission at the current speed and this setting is enabled, it falls back to a lower speed.  If the line then improves, the modem upshifts to a higher speed.

Note:  Applicable to modems operating in V.32, V.32bis, V.23terbo, V.FC, or V.34 modulation.

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Syncronize Timing Source
Synchronize Timing Source

This parameter specifies the clock source when the modem is operating in synchronous mode.

AT Command:  	&Xn

Settings:	Internal (Default), External, or Receive Link Clock


V.32 Terbo Modulation (S34.7)

This parameter enables or disables V.32 terbo mode, which permits connection rates up to 21.6 Kbps with compatible modems.

AT Command:  	S34.7

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.34 Modulation

This parameter enables or disables V.34 mode, which permits connection rates up to 28.8 Kbps with compatible modems.

AT Command:  	S56.6

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


2400 Symbol Rate

This parameter allows the 2400 symbol rate to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

AT Command:  	S54.0

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


2743 Symbol Rate

This parameter allows the 2743 symbol rate to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

AT Command: 	S54.1

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


2800 Symbol Rate

This parameter allows the 2800 symbol rate to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

AT Command:  	S54.2

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


3000 Symbol Rate

This parameter allows the 3000 symbol rate to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

AT Command:  	S54.3

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


3200 Symbol Rate

This parameter allows the 3200 symbol rate to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

AT Command:  	S54.4

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


3429 Symbol Rate

This parameter allows the 3429 symbol rate to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

AT Command:  	S54.5

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


8S-2D Mapping

This parameter allows the 8S-2D mapping to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

AT Command:  	S55.0

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


16S-4D Mapping

This parameter allows the 16S-4D mapping to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

AT Command:  S55.1

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


32S-2D Mapping

Parameter allows the 32S-2D mapping to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

AT Command:  S55.2

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


64S-4D Mapping

This parameter allows the 64S-4D mapping to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

AT Command:  S55.3

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Non-linear Coding

This parameter allows the non-linear coding to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

AT Command:  	S56.0

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


TX Level Deviation

This parameter allows the transmit level deviation to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

AT Command:  	S56.1

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Preemphasis

This parameter allows the pre-emphasis to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

AT Command:  S56.2

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Precoding

This parameter allows the precoding to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

AT Command:  	S56.3

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Shaping

This parameter allows the shaping to be disabled on V.FC/V.34 modems.

AT Command:  S56.4

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.FC Modulation

This parameter allows V.FC mode to be disabled in order to troubleshoot a connection.

AT Command:  S56.7

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.8 Mode

This parameter allows V.FC mode to be disabled in order to troubleshoot a connection.

AT Command:  S56.7

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


V.8 Call Indicator

This parameter allows the V.8 call indicator to be enabled on V.34 modems.

AT Command:  S54.6

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


V.34 +

This parameter allows V.34 extended mode (link rates from 31.3Kbps to 33.6Kbps) to be disabled to troubleshoot a connection.

AT Command:  	S56.5

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


300 Baud

This parameter indicates if 300bps transmission has been disabled on the modem.

MIB Objects:	mdmSc300

AT Command:  ATS48.0

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


1200 Baud

This parameter indicates if 1200bps transmission has been disabled on the modem.

MIB Objects:	mdmSc1200

AT Command:  	ATS48.1

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


2400 Baud

This parameter indicates if 2400bps transmission has been disabled on the modem.

MIB Objects:	mdmSc2400

AT Command: 	ATS48.2

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


High Speed
High Speed Handshaking

This parameter determines whether a Dual Standard modem negotiates for V.32, HST, or whether a compatible modem negotiates for Bell 208. To answer calls originating overseas, leave this function at its V.32 default and change the Guard Tone parameter to an appropriate setting.  The HST setting allows a compatible modem to negotiate for a connection using U.S. Robotics' proprietary HST modulation.  The Bell 208 setting allows a compatible modem to negotiate for a 4800 bps synchronous connection.

Note:  Both V.34 and V.FC modulations preemp HST if both originate and answer modems support those protocols.  If you want to originate HST to a remote USR V.34 modem, V.FC and V.8 must both be disabled.

AT Command:  	Bn

Settings:	V.32 - V.32 originate/V.25 answer (Default)

HST - HST originate/Bell answer

Bell 208 - Bell 208 originate and answer


V.42 Selective Reject

Selective Reject works under V.42 error control and offers significant throughput improvements over noisy lines.  The number of retransmitted blocks due to block errors (blers) is reduced because a specific data packet will be NAKed, rather than all packets received since the last ACKed packet.

MIB Objects:	mdmScSelectiveReject

AT Command:  	ATS51.6

Settings:	Enable (Default) or Disable


Phone Exclusion Delay

Handset disabled for a period of 6 seconds before going off hook.  This setting is rarely used.

MIB Objects:	mdmScPhExclusionDel

AT Command:  	ATS51.7

Settings:	Disable (Default) or Enable


Minimum High Speed Direction

This parameter displays the minimum high-speed direction link speed.

MIB Objects:	mdmScHighSpeed

Settings:	variable

300 bps

1200 bps

2400 bps

4800 bps

7200 bps

9600 bps

12000 bps

14400 bps

16800 bps

19200 bps

21600 bps

24000 bps

26400 bps

28800 bps

31200 bps

33600 bps

33333 bps

37333 bps

41333 bps

42666 bps

44000 bps

45333 bps

46666 bps

48000 bps

49333 bps

50666 bps

52000 bps

53333 bps

54666 bps

56000 bps

57333 bps

64000 bps

28000 bps

29333 bps

30666 bps

32000 bps

34666 bps

36000 bps

38666 bps

40000 bps

58666 bps

60000 bps

61333 bps

62666 bps


x2/v.90 Configuration

  Low-Speed Direction Minimum Speed

  Low-Speed Channel Maximum Speed

  x2 Client Mode

  x2 Server Mode

  x2 Symmetric Mode

  x2 High-power Constellation

  Power Level (S82)

  Power Level Application (S81.0)

  x2 Version 2 Modulation (S81.1)

  x2 Fallback to V.34 (S76.3)


Lower Speed Direction Minimum
Low-Speed Direction Minimum Speed

This parameter establishes the slowest speed at which a client modem is allowed receive information from a sever modem.

Setting for this parameter are often used to test modem and or line speeds.

You might also use this parameter to allow only client modems capable of x2 speeds to connect to an x2 server modem.

MIB Object:	mdmScLowerSpeedMin

Settings:	300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, 14000, 16000, 19000, 21000, 2400, 26000, 31000, 33000, 33333, 37333, 41333, 42666, 44000, 45333, 46666, 48000, 49333, 50666, 52000, 53333, 54666, 56000, 57333, or 64000 All the values listed here are in bits per second (bps).


Lower Speed Direction Maximum
Low-Speed Channel Maximum Speed

This parameter establishes the fastest speed at which a client modem is allowed to receive information from a server modem.

Settings for this parameter are often used to test modem and or line speeds.

MIB Object: 	mdmScLowerSpeedMax

Settings:	variable (1)

300 bps (2)

1200 bps (3)

2400 bps (4)

4800 bps (5)

7200 bps (6)

9600 bps (7)

12000 bps (8)

14400 bps (9)

16800 bps (10)

19200 bps (11)

21600 bps (12)

24000 bps (13)

26400 bps (14)

28800 bps (15)

31200 bps (16)

33600 bps (17)

33333 bps (18)

37333 bps (19)

41333 bps (20)

42666 bps (21)

44000 bps (22)

45333 bps (23)

46666 bps (24)

48000 bps (25)

49333 bps (26)

50666 bps (27)

52000 bps (28)

53333 bps (29)

54666 bps (30)

56000 bps (31)

57333 bps (32)

64000 bps (33)

28000 bps (34)

29333 bps (35)

30666 bps (36)

32000 bps (37)

34666 bps (38)

36000 bps (39)

38666 bps (40)

40000 bps (41)

58666 bps (42)

60000 bps (43)

61333 bps (44)

62666 bps (45)


x2 Client Mode Disable
x2 Client Mode

This parameter enables a modem to act as an x2 client. The modem can receive information at x2 speeds.

Set this parameter value to Disable if you want to keep a client modem from receiving information at x2 speeds.

MIB Object: 	mdmScX2Client

AT Command:  	S76.0

Settings:	Enabled (Default) or Disabled


x2 Server Mode Disable
x2 Server Mode

This parameter enables a modem to act as an x2 server. The modem can distribute information at x2 speeds.

Set this parameter value to Disable if you want to keep a server modem from sending information at x2 speeds.

MIB Object:	mdmScX2Server

AT Command:  	S76.1

Settings:  	Enabled (Default) or Disabled


x2 Symetric Mode
x2 Symmetric Mode

When this parameter is enabled it requires both the server and client modem to send and receive information at the same x2 speed.

MIB Object:	mdmScX2Symmetric

AT Command:  	S76.2

Settings: 	Enabled (Default) or Disabled


Remote x2 Server Transmitter

(Future Topic)


Remote x2 Client Transmitter

(Future Topic)


Remote x2 Client Transmitter non

(Future Topic)


Remote x2 Client Transmitter Trellis

(Future Topic)


Transmitter 2743 Symbol Rate Disable

(Future Topic)


Transmitter 2800 Symbol Rate Disable

(Future Topic)


Transmitter 3429 Symbol Rate Disable

(Future Topic)


Transmitter Low Carrier 3000 Symbol

(Future Topic)


Transmitter High Carrier 3000 Symbol

(Future Topic)


Transmitter Low Carrier 3200 Symbol

(Future Topic)


Transmitter 64S-4D Mapping Disabled

(Future Topic)


Receiver 3429 Symbol Rate Disable

(Future Topic)


x2 High-power Constellation

This parameter enables or disables the x2 high-power constellation.

MIB Object:	hdmScHighPowerConst

Settings:  	disable (1, default)

enable (2)


Power Level (S82)

This parameter configures the power level. It applies to S-register S82.

MIB Object:	mdmScTxPwrLvl

Settings:  	INTEGER (0..31)


Power Level Application (S81.0)

This parameter configures where the power level is applied. It applies to S-register S81.0."

MIB Object:	mdmScTxPwrLvlApplied

Settings:  	inputToFarEndOfCodec (1)

outputOfTheServerModem (2)


x2 Version 2 Modulation (S81.1)

This parameter displays the x2 Version 2 Modulation. It applies to S-register S81.1

MIB Object:	mdmScX2Version2

Settings:	enabled (1)

disabled (2)


x2 Fallback to V.34 (S76.3)

This parameter displays the x2 fallback to v34. It applies to S-register S76.3

MIB Object:	mdmScV34Fallback

Settings:	enabled (1)

disabled (2)


T1 Programmed Settings

DS0 Configuration States

DS0 Configuration Types

DS0 <-> Modem Configuration

DS0 Time Slots

DS1 Trunk Settings

T1 Programmed Settings

T1 Identification

T1 Tests


DS0 Configuration States

DS0s 1−24

Description:  For each DS0 channel on the T1 Card, sets the configuration state.

Settings:	Normal State

Busied Out

Transparent State

Unused State


DS0 Configuration Types

DS0s 1−24

Description:  Currently, allows only a connection to the TDM Bus.

Settings:	Connect to the TDM Bus
Connect to Span Line 1
Connect to Span Line 2


DS0 <-> Modem Configuration

Description:  Displays the DS0<->Modem Configuration Window.  See DS0 Configuration.


DS0MdmCFG3
DS0 <-> Modem Configuration

Description:  Displays the DS0<->Modem Configuration Window.  See DS0 Configuration.


DS0 Time Slots

DS0s 1−24

Description:  Each DS0 may be switched to a different TDM Bus time slot from 0 (unused) to 256.

Settings: 	0 - 256


DS1 Trunk Settings

Acknowledgment Wink

Automatic Busy Out

Delay Sending Address Info

Dial-in Address

Dial-in/Dial-out Trunk Signal Start

Dial-in/Dial-out Trunk Type

E&M No Address Timer

Framing Mode

Idle Byte Pattern

Jitter Attenuation Mode

Line Coding Options

Primary Switch Type Set

Response to Remote Loopback

Stuffed Byte Sent to TELCO

Transmitter Attenuation


Framing Mode

Description:  This describes the DS1 line type implemented on this circuit.  The line type affects the bits per second the circuit can carry, as well as how usage/error statistics are interpreted.

Settings:	Other

DS1 ESF.  AT&T Extended SuperFrame format.

DS1 D4.  AT&T D4 format.

DS1 ANSI-ESF.  ANSI Extended SuperFrame format.

DS1 G704.  ITU-T Recommendation G.704 section 2.1.3.2.

DS1 G704-CRC.  ITU-T Recommendation G.704 section 2.1.3.1.

Default: 	DS1 D4


Line Coding Options

Description:  Select a line coding scheme, or Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI), for T1 span lines 1 and 2, individually.  A line coding scheme ensures a sufficient density of 1's in the bit stream, required by the T1 standard for clock synchronization.  In selecting AMI (no line coding), you risk losing data.

IMPORTANT:  Usually the TELCO specifies the Framing Mode and Line Coding of the T1 line.  Make sure the options are set in accordance with the type of T1 line purchased.

Settings:	Other

ZCS (Zero Code Suppression)

B8ZS (Binary 8 Zero Suppression)

AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)

Default: 	AMI


Response to Remote Loopback

Description:  This parameter configures the T1 Card to either ignore or respond to remotely initiated loopback requests on the selected DS1.

Settings:	Ignore or Respond

Default:	Ignore


Jitter Attenuation Mode

Description:  The T1 NIC hardware provides a 193-bit frame buffer to compensate for low frequency jitter with the synchronization to the T1 network.  This buffer can be placed in either the receive or transmit data path.  The default setting is the transmitter.  The transmitter is recommended when the T1 Card is using internal timing instead of timing from the span line.

Settings:	Attenuate Jitter on Transmitter  or Attenuate Jitter on Receiver

Default:	Attenuate Jitter on Transmitter


Transmitter Attenuation

Description:  This parameter is used to configure the amount of transmitter attenuation that is to be applied to the transmit signal in order to eliminate crosstalk problems when the transmitter energy causes errors on the low amplitude receive line.

Settings:	0 dB, 7 dB, 15 dB, or 22 dB

Default:	0 dB


Automatic Busy Out

Description:  This can be set to enable or disable the automatic busy out feature for all timeslots on the specified trunk(s), based on the availability of the corresponding  modem channel.  If enabled, when a modem is considered idle and that modem is not sending the idle pattern to the T1 Card on the TDM bus, the timeslot is busied out.

Settings:	Disabled or Enabled

Default:	Disabled


Dial-in Address

Description:  This parameter identifies whether or not address information (DNIS and ANI numbers) will be transferred as part of the call setup for the specified T1 line.

Settings:	DNIS, No Address, ANI-DNIS, or ANI

Default: 	DNIS


Dial-in/Dial-out Trunk Signal Start

Description:  This parameter specifies whether Wink, Immediate or Dial Tone will be used for start supervision on dial-in and dial-out calls on the specified DS1.

Settings:	Wink, Immediate, or Dial Tone

Default:	Wink


Acknowledgment Wink

Description:  This parameter is used to enable or disable an acknowledgment wink after dial-in address information has been received for the specified DS1.

Settings:	Disabled or Enabled

Default:	Disabled


Delay sending address info.

Description:  This parameter allows an adjustable delay, in milliseconds, in sending out address information from the T1 NAC to the telephone company.

Settings:	70 - 300

Default: 	70


Stuffed Byte Sent to TELCO

Description:  Allows an adjustable "stuffed byte" to be sent to the TELCO in order to maintain a sufficient density of 1's for a fractional T1 application.

Settings:	0 - 255

Default:	254


Dial-in/Dial-out Trunk Type

Description:  Sets the type of trunk to be used for dial-in and dial-out calls.  E&M Type II is the standard for Wink and Immediate Start trunks.

Settings:	E&M Type II, Loop Start, or Ground Start

Default:	E&M Type II


E&M No Address Timer

This parameter is used for E&M type II trunks without a DNIS address.

If the timer is set to >0 and the modem does not signal the NAC to answer the call, the ch T1 NAC disconnects the call when the timer expires.

Settings:	0 - 125

Default:	0


Dual T1 Programmed Settings

Internal Timing Source

Line A Timing Source

Line B Timing Source

T1 Idle Disconnect Pattern

T1 Presence in Chassis

TDM Bus Timing Source

Call Event Filter

Wireless Mode


Line A Timing Source

Description:  Specifies the priority of the Line A timing source.  The timing source with the highest priority clocks data on the T1 span line and drives the TDM bus.  Priority assignment of timing sources allows switching to the next highest priority timing source if the current source fails.

Any timing source can be disabled by assigning the value Not Allowed.  If not disabled, two or more timing sources cannot be assigned the same priority.

Settings:	Not Allowed

High

Medium High

Medium

Low

Default: 	High


Line B Timing Source

Description:  Specifies the priority of the Line B timing source.  The timing source with the highest priority clocks data on the T1 span line and drives the TDM bus.  Priority assignment of timing sources allows switching to the next highest priority timing source if the current source fails.

Any timing source can be disabled by assigning the value Not Allowed.  If not disabled, two or more timing sources cannot be assigned the same priority.

Settings:	Not Allowed

High

Medium High

Medium

Low

Default: 	Medium High


Internal Timing Source

Description:  Specifies the priority of the internal timing source.  The timing source with the highest priority clocks data on the T1 span line and drives the TDM bus.  Priority assignment of timing sources allows switching to the next highest priority timing source if the current source fails.

Any timing source can be disabled by assigning the value Not Allowed.  If not disabled, two or more timing sources cannot be assigned the same priority.

Settings:	Not Allowed

High

Medium High

Medium

Low

Default: 	Not Allowed


TDM Bus Timing Source

NOTE:  Setting the TDM Bus as a timing source is NOT ALLOWED.  This parameter may be set in the system but it will be ignored.

Specifies the priority of the TDM bus timing source.  The timing source with the highest priority clocks data on the T1 span line and drives the TDM bus.  Priority assignment of timing sources allows switching to the next highest priority timing source if the current source fails.

Any timing source can be disabled by assigning Not Allowed.  Two or more timing sources cannot have the same priority.

Settings:	Not Allowed (default)

High

Medium High

Medium

Low


Call Event Filter

This parameter filters the types of call event traps generated and specifies the class of calls to

filter out.

MIB Objects:	dt1CfgCallEventFilter

Settings:	notSupported(1)

filterOutNone(2)

filterOutBoth(3)

filterOutSuccess(4, default)

filterOutFailure(5)


Added Call Event Filter to help (LTC 10/16/97)


Wireless Mode

Use this parameter to configure the T1 wireless mode of operations at power up.

MIB Objects:	dt1CfgWirelessMode

Settings:	normal (1, default)

wireless (2)


Added Wireless Mode to help (LTC 10/16/97)


T1 Presence in Chassis

MIB Objects:	dt1CfgNumT1TypeNacs

Description:  Indicates the number of T1 and/orT1/E1 PRI NACs in the chassis.

Settings:	notSupported, single, or multiple

Default:	notSupported


T1 Idle Disconnect Pattern

MIB Objects:	dt1CfgIdleDiscPatt

Description:  Allows you to change the idle/disconnect pattern used over the chassis TDM bus between the modem and a T1 card during call setup and teardown.  Change this setting ONLY in situations where stray in-band characters from T1 DS0s are frequently misinterpreted by the modem as the idle/disconnect pattern, causing unexpected modem disconnects.

Reserved Patterns:  0, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 121, 128, 129, 130, 133, 134, and 255

WARNING:  The Modem card must be set for the same value.  Do not change this value without also setting the Modem card for the same value.  Requires a T1 card compatible with this feature.

Settings:	0 - 255

Default:	1


T1 Identification

Hardware Revision (RO)

Operational Status (RO)

Serial Number (RO)

Software Version (RO)


T1 Card Parameters - T1 Identification - Serial Number (RO)
Serial Number (RO)

Description:  The Card's hardware serial number as stored in EEPROM.

Settings:	Display String


T1 Card Parameters - T1 Identification - Hardware Revision (RO)
Hardware Revision (RO)

Description:  The hardware revision level, as stored in EEPROM.

Settings:	Display String


T1 Tests

CSU 1/2 Test (RO)

EEPROM CRC Test (RO)

Framer 1/2 Test (RO)

Internal Timing Source Test (RO)

Management Bus UART Test (RO)

NIC Presence Test (RO)

NMI Test (RO)

RAM Test (RO)

ROM Test (RO)

TDM Bus Timing Source Test (RO

Time/Space Switch Test (RO)

User Interface Test (RO)

Watchdog Test (RO)


RAM Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass or Fail


ROM Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass or Fail


Watchdog Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass or Fail


NMI Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass or Fail


T1 Card Parameters - T1 Tests - EEPROM CRC Test (RO)
EEPROM CRC Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass or Fail


User Interface Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass or Fail


Management Bus UART Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass or Fail


Framer 1/2 Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass or Fail


Time/Space Switch Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass or Fail


CSU 1/2 Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass or Fail


NIC Presence Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass or Fail


Internal Timing Source Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass or Fail


TDM Timing Source Test (RO)
TDM Bus Timing Source Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass or Fail


T1 Faults

Trap Enables (DS1)

Trap Enables (DT1)


Trap Enables (DS1)

Trap on AIS Cleared

Trap on Alarm Ind Signal

Trap on Loss of Signal Cleared

Trap on Loss of Signal

Trap on Red Alarm Cleared

Trap on Red Alarm

Trap on Yellow Alarm Cleared

Trap on Yellow Alarm


Trap on Alarm Ind Signal

Description:  This alarm indicates to the remote end a loss of the received signal.  It is also known as a blue alarm.  AIS occurs when a stream of 1's is received.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on Loss of Signal

Description:  This occurs when 175 consecutive 0's are detected in the NIC.  The signal is recovered if the density of 1's reaches 12.5%, that is, four 1's are received within a 32-bit period.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on Red Alarm

Description:  This alarm indicates that a receiver has reframed on a new framing pattern — it has synchronized at a new frame alignment due to an Out of Frame (OOF) condition.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on Yellow Alarm

Description:  This indicates that an OOF (Out of Frame) condition has occurred at the remote end.  It is also known as a Remote Frame Alarm (RFA).

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on Yellow Alarm Cleared

MIB Object:  yellowAlarmClear

Description:  This indicates that an OOF (Out of Frame) condition—also known as a Remote Frame Alarm (RFA)—has cleared at the remote end.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on Red Alarm Cleared

MIB Object:  redAlarmClear

Description:  This indicates that an Out of Frame (OOF) condition has been cleared.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on Loss of Signal Cleared

MIB Object:  lossOfSignalClear

Description:  This indicates the signal is recovered and the density of 1’s has reached 12.5%; that is, four 1’s were received within a 32-bit period.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on AIS Cleared

MIB Object:  alarmIndicationSignalClear

Description:  This indicates an Alarm Indicate Signal has been cleared and the remote end has been notified that the signal is being received.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap Enables (DT1)

Trap on Timing Source Change

Description:  This enables the SNMP proxy agent to generate a trap upon detection of the T1 Card switching to an alternate transmit timing source.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


PRI Programmed Settings

PRI Call Routing Group

PRI Configuration

PRI Identification

PRI Tests

PRI Trunk Settings

Packet Bus Group

DS0 Channel Mapping Group

Cause Codes Group

Span Line Blocking Group

NFAS Support Group

DSO Service Traps Group


PRI Identification

DIP Switch Settings

DRAM Installed

Hardware Revision

Operational Status

ROM Installed

Serial Number

Software Version


Operational Status

MIB Object:  uchasEntityOperStatus

Description:  Displays the current operational status.

Settings:	Other
Out of Service
Testing
Operational
Failed
Loading


Serial Number

MIB Object:  uchasSlotModuleSerialNumber

Description:  The Card's hardware serial number, as stored in EEPROM.

Settings:	Display String


Hardware Revision

MIB Object:  uchasSlotModuleVersion

Description:  The Card’s hardware revision level, as stored in EEPROM.

Settings:	Display String


Software Version

MIB Object:  uchasEntityVersion

Description:  The revision level of the software being executed by the Card's processor.

Settings:	Display String


DIP Switch Settings on the NAC
DIP Switch Settings

MIB Object:  uchasSlotSwitchSettings

Description:  Displays the current  DIP switch settings on the selected NAC.

To interpret the integer displayed, convert into binary and read in a right-to-left fashion.

Example:  TCM  value = 1; Binary conversion = 0000000001

All DIP switches OFF, except DIP switch 1, which is ON.

Settings:	INTEGER


DRAM Installed on the NAC
DRAM Installed (KB)

MIB Object:  uchasSlotRamInstalled

Description:  The number of Kbytes of DRAM on the Card.

Settings:	0..4294967295


ROM Installed on the NAC
ROM Installed (KB)

MIB Object:  uchasSlotFlashInstalled

Description:  The number of Kbytes of FLASH ROM on the Card.

Settings:	0..4294967295


PRI Configuration

Analog Modem Calls

Internal Timing Source

ISDN-GW Slot

Line A Timing Source

Line B Timing Source

TDM Bus Timing Source

Modem Call Routing Method


Packet Bus Group

Packet Bus Clock Master


Packet Bus Clock Master

MIB Object:  pbdgCfgMasterClock

Description:  This object is used to disable the ability for a NAC to act as packet bus clock master.

Note:  This object must be disabled if it is being installed in a new chassis.  Leaving it enabled and installing it in a new chassis will have adverse effects on the system clocking.

Settings:	notSupported
enable
disable

Default:	enable


DS0 Channel Mapping Group

Block Call Type

DSO Assigned Slot Number

DSO Assigned Channel Number


Block Call Type

MIB Object:  ids0CfgBlockCallType

Description:  An object that defines the type of calls to be blocked by the specified DS0.  A value of blockAll(5) results in all calls to this DS0 being blocked.

Settings:	notSupported
blockNone
blockAnalog
blockDigital
blockAll

Default:	blockNone


DSO Assigned Slot Number

MIB Object:  ids0CfgDs0AssignedSlot

Description:  Defines which slot (1 thru 16) the specified DS0 is restricted to connect with.  A value of 17 indicates that this DS0 is not restricted.  If a value of 0 is returned, it indicates that this NAC does not support the definition of this object.

Settings:	0..17

Default:	17


DSO Assigned Channel Number

MIB Object:  ids0CfgDs0AssignedChannel

Description:  Defines which channel of a modem the specified DS0 is restricted to connect with.  A value of 33 indicates that this DS0 is not restricted.  If a value of 0 is returned, it indicates that this NAC does not support the definition of this object.

Settings:	0..33

Default:	33


Cause Codes Group

Analog Connection Blocked Error Code

Digital Connection Blocked Error Code

No Modem Available Error Code

No IGWS Connections Avaialble Error Code

Specific B Channel Blocked Error Code


Span Line Blocking Group

PRI Span Block Call Type


NFAS Support Group

NFAS is the mechanism that allows multiple PRI span lines to negotiate their call set up via a single D-channel.

Nfas ID

Nfas D Channel Use


DS0Service Status

DS0 Service State Status


Analog Connection Blocked Error Code

MIB Object:  uds1CfgAnlgBlockErrCode

Description:  This is the error code that will be returned to an ISDN switch when analog connections are being blocked.

Settings:	0..127

Default:	58


Digital Connection Blocked Error Code

MIB Object:  uds1CfgDgtlBlockErrCode

Description:  This is the error code that will be returned to an ISDN switch when digital connections are being blocked.

Settings:	0..127

Default:	58


No Modem Available Error Code

MIB Object:  uds1CfgNoMdmAvailErrCode

Description:  This is the error code that will be returned to an ISDN switch when there are no modems available to accept the requested connection.

Settings:	0..127

Default:	58


No IGWS Connections Avaialble Error Code

MIB Object:  uds1CfgNoIgwsAvailErrCode

Description:  This is the error code that will be returned to an ISDN switch when no IGWS connections are available.

Settings:	0..127

Default:	58


Specific B Channel Blocked Error Code

MIB Object:  uds1CfgChanBlockErrCode

Description:  This is the error code that will be returned to an ISDN switch when connections to a specific B channel are being blocked.

Settings:	0..127

Default:	58


PRI Span Block Call Type

This object determines if a PRI span line will block calls of a specific type.  This object does not apply to a NAC operating in Rob Bit T1 mode.

MIB Object:  uds1CfgBlockCallType

Settings:	notSupported
blockNone
blockAnalog
blockDigital
blockAll

Default:	blockNone

The following new extensions have been added to the uds1CmdFunction in the UDS1 MIB:

inService

localOutOfService

blockAnalogCalls

blockDigitalCalls

blockAllCalls

blockNoCalls


Nfas ID

MIB Object:  uds1CfgNfasId

Description:  This defines the NFAS ID associated with a PRI span line.  This object does not apply to Rob Bit T1 operation.

Settings:	0..255

Default:	0


Nfas D Channel Use

MIB Object:  uds1CfgNfasDChannel

Description:  This determines how a PRI span line will use the DS0 normally assigned as a D channel when NFAS is being used.  This object does not apply to Rob Bit T1 operation.

Settings:	notSupported
dchannel
extraBchannel
backupDchannel

Default:	dchannel


DS0 Service State Status

MIB Object:  ids0StatDs0SrvcState

Description:  This is the current service state of a DS0.  This object does not apply to Rob Bit T1 operation.

Settings:	notSupported
inService
localOutOfService
maintenance
remoteOutofService

The following new DS0 state option has been added to the ids0StatDs0 object in the IDS0 MIB:

ds0LclOutOfService


D Channel Traps Group

Dchannel In Service Trap Enable

DChannel Out of Service Trap Enable


Dchannel In Service Trap Enable

MIB Object:  uds1TrapEnaDchanInSrvc

Description:  Enable the generation of an SNMP trap upon detection of a change in the service state of a D channel on this span line from Out of service, Maintenance or Standby states to In Service.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


DChannel Out of Service Trap Enable

MIB Object:  uds1TrapEnaDChanOutOfSrvc

Description:  Enable the generation of an SNMP trap upon detection of a change in the service state of a D channel on this span line from In Service to Out of Service, Maintenance or Standby.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll


DSO Service Traps Group

DS0 In Service Trap Enable

DS0 Out of Service Enable


DS0 In Service Trap Enable

MIB Object:  uds1TrapEnaDs0InSrvc

Description:  Enable the generation of an SNMP trap upon detection of a change in the service state of a DS0 on this span line from Out of Service to In Service.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


DS0 Out of Service Enable

MIB Object:  uds1TrapEnaDs0OutOfSrvc

Description:  Enable the generation of an SNMP trap upon detection of a change in the service state of a DS0 on this span line from In Service to Out of Service.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Line A Timing Source

MIB Object:  dt1CfgSpanATmgSrcPrio

Description:  Specifies the priority of the Line A timing source.  The timing source with the highest priority clocks data on the T1 span line and drives the TDM bus.  Priority assignment of timing sources allows switching to the next highest priority timing source if the current source fails.

Any timing source can be disabled by assigning the value Not Allowed.  If not disabled, two or more timing sources cannot be assigned the same priority.

Settings:	Not Allowed
High
Medium High
Medium
Low

Default:	High


Line B Timing Source

MIB Object:  dt1CfgSpanBTmgSrcPrio

Description:  Specifies the priority of the Line B timing source.  The timing source with the highest priority clocks data on the T1 span line and drives the TDM bus.  Priority assignment of timing sources allows switching to the next highest priority timing source if the current source fails.

Any timing source can be disabled by assigning the value Not Allowed.  If not disabled, two or more timing sources cannot be assigned the same priority.

Settings:	Not Allowed
High
Medium High
Medium
Low

Default:	Medium High


Internal Timing Source

MIB Object:  dt1CfgInternTmgSrcPrio

Description:  Specifies the priority of the internal timing source.  The timing source with the highest priority clocks data on the T1 span line and drives the TDM bus.  Priority assignment of timing sources allows switching to the next highest priority timing source if the current source fails.

Any timing source can be disabled by assigning the value Not Allowed.  If not disabled, two or more timing sources cannot be assigned the same priority.

Settings:	Not Allowed
High
Medium High
Medium
Low

Default:	Not Allowed


TDM Bus Timing Source

MIB Object:  dt1CfgTdmBusTmgSrcPrio

Note:  Do not set the TDM bus as a timing source.

Description:  Specifies the priority of the TDM bus timing source.  The timing source with the highest priority clocks data on the T1 span line and drives the TDM bus.

Default:	Low


ISDN-GW Slot

MIB Object:  idt1CfgAssgndISDNGateway

Description:  Identifies the chassis slot of the Gateway Card assigned to this PRI ISDN card.

NOTE:  Not applicable for the E1/PRI card.

Settings:	0..16

Default:	16


Analog Modem Calls

MIB Object:  idt1CfgMdmCallsAllowedEna

Description:  Indicates if modem calls are disabled/enabled for this PRI ISDN card.

T1/PRI:  This parameter is always disabled, unless the card is in Slot 1.

E1/PRI:  This parameter is always enabled on the E1/PRI card.

Settings:	Enable
Disable

Default:	Enable


Modem Call Routing Method

MIB Object:  idt1CfgMdmRoutingMethod

Description:  Defines the mechanism used to determine modem call routing for this NAC.

Settings:	notSupported
roundRobin
firstAvailable
fixedAssignment

Default:	roundRobin


PRI DS1 Trunk Settings
PRI Trunk Settings

Acknowledgment Wink

Auto Busy

Dial Out Address Delay

Dial-in Address Type

Dial-in/Dial-out Trunk Signal Start

Dial-in/Dial-out Trunk Type

Framing Mode

Idle Byte Pattern

Jitter Attenuation

Line Coding Options

Primary Switch Type Set

Response to Remote Loopback

Stuffed Byte Sent to TELCO

Transmitter Attenuation


Framing Mode

MIB Object:  ds1LineType

Description:  This describes the DS1 line type implemented on this circuit.  The line type affects the bits per second the circuit can carry, as well as how usage/error statistics are interpreted.

Settings:

DS1 ESF.	AT&T Extended SuperFrame format.

DS1 D4.	AT&T D4 format.

DS1 ANSI-ESF.	ANSI Extended SuperFrame format.

DS1 G704.	ITU-T Recommendation G.704 section 2.1.3.2.  Corresponds to CEPT CCS without CRC4 in the E1/PRI User Interface.

G704-CRC.	ITU-T Recommendation G.704 section 2.1.3.1.  Corresponds to CEPT CCS with CRC4 in the E1/PRI User Interface.

Other	N/A

Defaults:

T1/PRI card	DS1 ESF

E1/PRI card	G704-CRC

DASS/2 card	G704-CRC


Line Coding Options

MIB Object:  uds1CfgZeroCoding

Description:  Select a line coding scheme, or Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI), for T1 span lines 1 and 2, individually.  A line coding scheme ensures a sufficient density of 1’s in the bit stream, required by the T1 standard for clock synchronization.  In selecting AMI (no line coding), you risk losing data.

IMPORTANT:  Usually the TELCO specifies the Framing Mode and Line Coding of the T1 line.  Make sure the options are set in accordance with the type of T1 line purchased.

Settings:	Other
ZCS (Zero Code Suppression)
B8ZS (Binary 8 Zero Suppression)
HDB3 ( High Density Bipolar 3 Zeros)
ZBTSI (Zero Byte Time Slot Interchange)
AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)

T1/PRI Default:	B8ZS

E1/PRI Default:	HDB3


Response to Remote Loopback

MIB Object:  uds1CfgRespToRemoteLoopbk

Description:  Configures the T1 Card to either ignore or respond to remotely initiated loopback requests on the selected DS1.

NOTE:  Not applicable for the E1/PRI card.

Settings:	Ignore
Respond

Default:	Ignore


Jitter Attenuation

MIB Object:  uds1CfgJitterAttenuation

Description:  The T1 NIC hardware provides a 193-bit frame buffer to compensate for low frequency jitter with the synchronization to the T1 network.  This buffer can be placed in either the receive or transmit data path.  The default setting is the transmitter.  The transmitter is recommended when the T1 card is using internal timing instead of timing from the span line.

Settings:	Attenuate Jitter on Receiver
Attenuate Jitter on Transmitter

T1/PRI Default:	Attenuate Jitter on Transmitter

E1/PRI Default:	Attenuate Jitter on Receiver


Transmitter Attenuation

MIB Object:  uds1CfgXmitLineBuildOut

Description:  This parameter is used to configure the amount of transmitter attenuation that is to be applied to the transmit signal in order to eliminate crosstalk problems when the transmitter energy causes errors on the low amplitude receive line.

NOTE:  Transmitter attenuation is not applicable to the E1/PRI card.

Settings:	0 dB
7 dB
15 dB
22 dB

Default:	0 dB


The Primary Switch Type Set
Primary Switch Type Set

MIB Object:  uds1CfgPriSwitchType

Description:  This sets the primary switch type for the T1-PRI ISDN NAC.  The setting takes effect after the card has been reset.

Settings:	priSw4ESS (1)
priSw5ESS (2, T1/PRI default)
priSwDMS100 (3)
priSwICTR4 (4, E1/PRI default)
priSwVn4 (5)

priSwNI2 (6)

priSwINS1500 (7)

priSwDASS2 (8, DASS/2 default)

priSwTS014 (9)


Defaults for E1/PRI and DASS/2 are listed, but they aren’t mentioned in the description. Should they be listed as E1-PRI ISDN NAC and DASS-2 ISDN NAC?


The Idle Byte Pattern
Idle Byte Pattern

MIB Object:  uds1CfgIdleByte

Description:  This sets the idle byte pattern for the PRI ISDN NAC.  The setting takes after the card has been reset.

NOTE:  When configured via the RS-232 User Interface, the setting is in Hex format.  This is the digital translation of that Hex string.

Settings:	0..255

Defaults:

T1 Pri card	254

E1 CAS card	85

DASS/2 card	42


Incoming Call Barring Keyword

Use this parameter to set or view the keyword used for DASS2 Incoming Call Barring control.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgIcbKeyword

Settings: 	DisplayString (SIZE(4..4))


DS1 Service State Configuration

Use this parameter to set or view the DS1 service state.

Note:  This parameter can configure the DS1 service state for power up if it is saved to NVRAM.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgServiceState

Settings: 	notSupported (1)

inService (2, default)

localOutOfService (3)


PRI Tests

Channel 1 of HDLC Test (RO)

Channel 2 of HDLC Test (RO)

CSU 1/2 Test (RO)

EEPROM CRC Test (RO)

Flash ROM Test (RO)

Framer 1/2 Test (RO)

Management Bus UART Test (RO)

NIC Presence Test (RO)

NMI Test (RO)

RAM Test (RO)

ROM Test (RO)

Time/Space Switch Test (RO)

User Interface Test (RO)

Watchdog Test (RO)


Flash ROM Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass
Fail


RAM Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass
Fail


ROM Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass
Fail


Watchdog Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass
Fail


NMI Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass
Fail


EEPROM CRC Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass
Fail


User Interface Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass
Fail


Management Bus UART Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass
Fail


Framer 1/2 Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass
Fail


Time/Space Switch Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass
Fail


CSU 1/2 Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass
Fail


NIC Presence Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass
Fail


Channel 1 of HDLC Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass
Fail


Channel 2 of HDLC Test (RO)

Description:  This shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass
Fail


PRI Call Routing Group

Inbound Phone Number

Inbound Call Type


Inbound Phone Number

MIB Object:  idt1CrInboundPhNum

Description:  This is the phone number dialed by one of the 48 inbound calls.  It is used to route the call to the appropriate gateway card.

NOTE:  Not applicable for the E1/PRI card.

Settings:	Display String


Inbound Call Type

MIB Object:  idt1CrInboundCallType

Description:  This is the call type of one of the inbound calls.  It is used to determine whether the call should be routed through a modem or directly to the gateway card.

NOTE:  This parameter is applicable to T1/PRI only.

Settings:	analog (1, default)
digital (2)


PRI Faults

Trap Enables

Call Event Traps Group

D Channel Traps Group


Trap Enables

On AIS Cleared

On Alarm Ind Signal

On CRC Cleared

On CRC

On Loss of Signal Cleared

On Loss of Signal

On Physical State Change

On Red Alarm Cleared

On Red Alarm

On Yellow Alarm Cleared

On Yellow Alarm


Trap on Alarm Ind Signal
On Alarm Ind Signal

MIB Object:  alarmIndicationSignal

Description:  This alarm indicates to the remote end a loss of the received signal.  It is also known as a blue alarm.  AIS occurs when a stream of 1’s is received.

E1/PRI:  Corresponds to the physical layer state F4, which is Received Alarm Indication of AIS (Alarm Indication Signal).

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on Loss of Signal
On Loss of Signal

MIB Object:  lossOfSignal

Description:  This occurs when 175 consecutive 0’s are detected in the NIC.  The signal is recovered if the density of 1’s reaches 12.5%; that is, four 1’s are received within a 32-bit period.

E1/PRI:  Corresponds to the physical layer state F3, which is an indication of OOF (Out of Frame) or LOS (Loss of Signal).

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on Red Alarm
On Red Alarm

MIB Object:  redAlarm

Description:  This alarm indicates that a receiver has reframed on a new framing pattern it has synchronized at a new frame alignment due to an Out of Frame (OOF) condition.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on Yellow Alarm
On Yellow Alarm

MIB Object:  yellowAlarm

Description:  This indicates that an OOF (Out of Frame) condition has occurred at the remote end.  It is also known as a Remote Frame Alarm (RFA).

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on CRC
On CRC

MIB Object:  contCrcAlarm

Description:  This indicates that a continuous CRC error condition has occurred on the DS1.  Corresponds to physical layer state F5, which is an indication of CRC errors.

Note:  This parameter is applicable to E1/PRI only.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on Physical State Change
On Physical State Change

MIB Object:  phyStateChng

Description:  This indicates that a physical state change has occurred on the DS1.

Note:  This parameter is applicable to E1/PRI only.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on Yellow Alarm Cleared
On Yellow Alarm Cleared

MIB Object:  yellowAlarmClear

Description:  This indicates that an OOF (Out of Frame) condition—also known as a Remote Frame Alarm (RFA)—has cleared at the remote end.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on Red Alarm Cleared
On Red Alarm Cleared

MIB Object:  redAlarmClear

Description:  This indicates that an Out of Frame (OOF) condition has been cleared.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on Loss of Signal Cleared
On Loss of Signal Cleared

MIB Object:  lossOfSignalClear

Description:  This indicates the signal is recovered and the density of 1’s has reached 12.5%; that is, four 1’s were received within a 32-bit period.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on AIS Cleared
On AIS Cleared

MIB Object:  alarmIndicationSignalClear

Description:  This indicates an Alarm Indicate Signal has been cleared and the remote end has been notified that the signal is being received.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Trap on CRC Cleared
On CRC Cleared

MIB Object:  contCrcAlarmClear

Description:  This indicates a continuous CRC error condition has cleared on the DS1.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Call Event Traps Group

Call Event Trap Filter

Packet Bus Clock Loss Trap Enable

Packet Bus Clock Restore Trap Enable


Call Event Trap Filter

MIB Object:  dt1CfgCallEventFilter

Description:  This objects provides a means to filter the types of call event traps generated.  It specifies the class of calls to filter out.

Settings:	notSupported
filterOutNone
filterOutBoth
filterOutSuccess
filterOutFailure

Default:	filterOutSuccess


Packet Bus Clock Loss Trap Enable

MIB Object:  pbdgCfgClockLossEvent

Description:  This object is used to disable the ability for a NAC to report when the packet bus clock has been lost.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Packet Bus Clock Restore Trap Enable

MIB Object:  pbdgCfgClockRestoreEvent

Description:  This object is used to disable the ability for a NAC to report when the packet bus clock has been restored.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Contents

Press F1 for assistance with Help.

How to . . .

Work with the File Menu

Work with the View Menu

Configure Devices

Trap and Test Faults

Monitor Performance

Work with Security

Work with Accounting

Display Windows

Use Help


Working with the File Menu

New

Open

Close

Save

Save As

Modify

Delete

Save Configuration

Restore Configuration

Save NVRAM

Restore NVRAM

Import SDL

Print

Print Preview

Print Setup

Exit


Saving and Restoring NVRAM

About . . .

Saving NVRAM

Restoring NVRAM

How to . . .

Save NVRAM

Restore NVRAM


Configuring Devices

On the main menu bar, click on Configuration to display the following options.

Programmed Settings

Actions/Commands

Software Download

Feature Enable

Inventory

AutoResponse

Using the Configuration Window

Cellular Feature

DS0 Configuration

Non-Native Card Support

Security


Programmed Settings

HiPer ARC Card

HiPer DSP Card

Modem Card

Modem Analog NIC

NETServer ISDN Card

Network Management Card

T1 Card

T1 Primary Rate ISDN Card

Wireless Access Gateway Card

X.25 Gateway Card


Trapping and Testing Faults

Modem Testing

Remote Testing

Modem Card

Modem Analog NIC Faults

NETServer ISDN Card

Network Management Card

T1 Faults

T1 Primary Rate ISDN Card

Wireless Access Gateway Card

X.25 Gateway Card


Monitoring Performance

Modem Card

NETServer Card

Network Management Card

T1 Card

T1 Primary Rate ISDN Card

Wireless Access Gateway Card

X.25 Gateway Card


Displaying Windows

Cascade

Tile

Arrange


HiPer DSP Programmed Settings

Selecting and Deselecting HiPer DSP Templates

Note: Changes made to HiPer DSP templates do not affect the associated channels until you perform a Refresh Template x Config Channels command (where x is the number of the modified template (1 through 4)).

HiPer DSP Card Selected - Templates

High Density Modem Line Interface Options

High Density Modem Data Compression Settings

High Density Modem DTE Interface Settings

High Density Modem Signal Converter Settings

Call Control Options

Modem Error Control Settings

High Density Modem Cause Codes

DNIS Access Codes

HiPer DSP Card Selected - Card Level

HiPer DSP Identification

Routing Method

Call Routing

Call Statistics

Span Line Selected

Trunk Settings

Span Line Blocking

Short Haul NIC

High Density Modem Dial Out Configuration

Timeslot Mapping and Blocking

Timeslot Service Configuration

Use LEDs Selected

Modem Identification

High Density Modem Line Interface Options

High Density Modem Data Compression Settings

High Density Modem DTE Interface Settings

High Density Modem Signal Converter Settings

Call Control Options

Modem Error Control Settings

High Density Modem Fractional Table Settings

V.42/MNP Negotiation Methods


HiPer ARC Programmed Settings

HiPer ARC Configuration


X.25 Gateway Identification

This configuration group contains parameters that identify the X.25 PAD in the chassis.

CPU TypeCPU_Type

DIP Switch Settings

DRAM Installed

FLASH Installed

Hardware Revision

RAM Installed

ROM Installed

Serial Number

Software Version

User Interface Status

X.25 Database Status


Dip Switch Settings

Displays the current  DIP switch settings on the selected NAC.  To interpret the integer displayed, convert into binary and read in a right-to-left fashion.

MIB Object:	uchasSlotSwitchSettings

Example:  TCM  value = 1; Binary conversion = 0000000001

All DIP switches OFF, except DIP switch 1, which is ON.

Settings:	Integer


DRAM Installed (KB)

The number of Kbytes of DRAM on the Card.

MIB Object:	uchasSlotRamInstalled

Settings:	0 - 4294967295


ROM Installed (KB)

The number of Kbytes of FLASH ROM on the Card.

MIB Object:	uchasSlotFlashInstalled

Settings:	0 - 4294967295


Configuration Group

This group contains parameters that provide information specific to the X.25 PAD in the chassis.

System Date

System Time

User Interface Port


System Time

X.25 gateway system time.

Default:	00:00:00l


System Date

X.25 gateway system date.

Default:	01-01-95.


X.25 Database Status

The operation condition that currently exists on the database.

MIB Object:	x25wIdOperCfgSts

Settings:	Operating NVRAM:  The card’s Operating and administrative configurations match.

Administrative Changed:  The Administrative configuration has been changed, but it has not yet been saved to NVRAM and the card has not yet been reset.

Administrative NVRAM:  The Administrative configuration has been changed and saved to NVRAM, but the card has not yet been reset


CPU Type

The CPU type in the selected X.25 PAD Card.

MIB Object:	x25gwIdCpuType

Settings:	80386 or 80486


RAM Installed

The number of DRAM Kbytes on the X.25 PAD Card.

MIB Object:	x25gwIdRamInstalled

Settings:	0 - 4294967295


FLASH Installed

The number of FLASH ROM Kbytes on the X.25 PAD Card.

MIB Object:	x25gwIdFlashInstalled

Settings:	0 - 4294967295


User Interface Status

The current status of the RS-232 User Interface.  If active, the UI port is available for RS-232 configuration.  If inactive, DIP switch 5 has been set to disable the port for RS-232 configuration and enable Management Over X.25 (MOX).

MIB Object:	x25gwIdMgmtConnect

Settings:	active or inactive


User Interface Port

Indicates if you want the PAD to Manage Over X.25 (MOX) via special cabling to the NMC or you plan to use normal management from the local NMC over the Management Bus.

Note:  This parameter is for Future use.

MIB Object:	x25gwCfgUiPort

Settings:	Normal (default)

Maximum


Management Over X.25 (MOX)

This configuration group contains parameters used specifically for the MOX operations.

Call User Data String

Routing Type

X.121 Subaddress


Routing Type

The type of call routing configured for outgoing calls.  This setting should be configured the same for the PADs at both ends of the connection.

MIB Object:	x25gwCfgRoutingType

Settings:

none	If you set the parameter to this value, all calls will be treated as regular X.25 calls.  A MOX call will not be recognized and may be rejected altogether. (default)

subAddr	If you set the parameter to this value, the PAD will look at all X.25 calls for network subaddressing (last two digits of the X.121 address) before routing the call.  If the digits match those configured by the X.121 Subaddress parameter, the call is routed to the NMC as a MOX call.

callUserData	If you set the parameter to this value, the remote (answering) PAD will look at the call user data in every call request packet before routing the call.  If the CUD begins with “at” and there is a CUD match in the database, the call is treated like a MOX call and is routed to the NMC.

Mgt Only	If you set the parameter to this value, the PAD will treat all calls like MOX calls.

both	If you set the parameter to this value, the PAD will look at both the subaddress and the CUD to determine the call type and route it appropriately.


Call User Data String

This 12 character alphanumeric string is compared to the incoming X.25 call request CUD.  If they match, the call is routed to the NMC.  If the Routing Type parameter is configured for Mgt Only, configuring the Call User Data is unnecessary.

Note:  The CUD string must begin with an “at” followed by the actual CUD.  For instance, if the actual CUD is “NSaxTomO” the Call User Data String configured in this parameter would be “atNSaxTomO.”

MIB Object:	x25gwCfgCudRout

Settings:	String


X.121 Subaddress

This two-digit number is compared to the subaddress identifier (digits 14 and 15) in the incoming X.25 call address.  If they match, the call is routed to the NMC.  If the Routing Type parameter for the PAD is configured for Mgt Only, configuring the X.121 Subaddress parameter is unnecessary.

MIB Object:	x25gwCfgX121SubAddr

Default:	00


X.25 Tests

EEPROM CRC Test (RO)

Management Bus UART Test (RO)

NIC Diagnostic Self Test

NMI Test (RO)

RAM Test (RO)

ROM Test (RO)

User Interface Test (RO)

Watchdog Test (RO)


NIC Diagnostic Self Test

This parameter shows the latest status of the test.

Settings:	Pass or Fail


Packet Bus Sessions

The Packet Bus Sessions configuration group contains parameters that assist the network administrator in configuring dynamic packet bus sessions.

Availability of row for packet bus session

Channel Session Assignment

Last Packet Communication Type

Session Assignment between Entities

Session Error Status

Session Packet Size

Session Packet Timeout Count

Session Rx Packet Count

Session Status

Session Tx Packet Count

Slot Session Assignment


Slot Session Assignment

Identifies the slot of the entity in the chassis to which a packet bus session has been assigned.

MIB Object:	pbSessionDestSlot

Settings:	1 - 17


Channel Session Assignment

Identifies a particular entity in a slot.

MIB Object:	pbSessionDestChan

Settings:	1 - 48


Availability of Row for Packet Bus Session

Indicates if a Packet Bus row is available for assignment to a Packet Bus Session.

MIB Object:	pbSessionRowState

Settings:	free (default)

used


Session Assignment between Entities

Used to assign or delete a session between entities specified by the table indices.  Connected means a packet bus session link start has been requested, and disconnected means a packet bus session link termination has been requested.

MIB Object:	pbSessionReqStatus

Settings:	disconnected (default)

connected


Session Status

Displays the current status of the packet bus session.  A status of Unassigned coupled with a state of used indicates that a packet bus failure has occurred.

MIB Object:	pbSessionStatus

Settings:	unassigned

assigned

connected


Session Request Status

Used to assign or delete a session between entities.  A connect request an issuance of a packet bus session link start; a disconnect request is an issuance of a packet bus session link terminate.

MIB Object:	pbSessionReqStatus

Settings:	disconnected (default)

connected


Last Packet Communication Type

This parameter indicates the packet type last sent over the packet bus.

MIB Object:	pbSessionLastRequest

Settings:	unknown
open
close
listen
dial
disconnect
transmit
receive
setMode
query
flush
kill
reserve
answer
attach
disconnected
connected


Session Tx Packet Count

A counter that indicates number of packets that have been sent.

MIB Object:	pbSessionPktSent

Setting:	Counter


Session Rx Packet Count

A counter that indicates number of packets that have been received.

MIB Object:	pbSessionPktRcvd

Setting:	Counter


Session Packet Size

A number that indicates the packet size of the current or last established session.

MIB Object:	pbSessionPktSize

Settings:	0 - 4294967295 (0 = default)


Session Packet Timeout Count

A counter that indicates number of packet bus timeout that have occurred.

MIB Object:	pbSessionBusTimeOut

Setting:	Counter


Session Error Status

This parameter indicates the error status of the packet bus session.

MIB Object:	pbSessionErrorStatus

Settings:	noError
invalidParm
socketNotOpened
noMoreSocket
connectionExist
connectionfailed
noMoreConnObj
noActiveConn
ackWaitTimeout
hwNakRcvd
otherBusError
linkStartRcvd
outOfSeqFrame
noMemory
nullPointer
invalidBlock
notInitialized
failedToRecv
invalidMsgType
exceedMaxSends
connectionReset
socketClosed
uiReqPending
heartbeatTimeout
remoteBusy
localBusy
noResponse
linkdownNoTx
nodataToTx
txPreAck
txTardyAck
txBusTimeout
rxBusTimeout
txTAL
rxTAL
txMasterTimeout
clkVanished
clkReturned
shutdown
frameerror
xIDTimeout
recvLSinInfoTransferState
recvIFrameWithWrongSeq
rxMsgBufferOverflow
linkDown
listeFailed
lisenRcvFailed
dtrDrop
answerFailed
openFailed
closeFailed
readFailed
writeFailed
autoParityFailed
setmodeFailed
badDataBase
padStreamsError
padError


Packet Bus Traps

Packet Bus Active Session Trap

Packet Bus Congestion Trap

Packet Bus Session Error Trap

Packet Bus Session Inactive Trap

Packet Bus Session Lost Trap


Packet Bus Active Session Trap

Enables a trap when a packet bus session becomes active.

Settings:	disableAll (default)

enableTrap

enableLog

enableAll


Packet Bus Congestion Trap

Enables a trap when a valid packet bus session is in progress but either the Modem or the Gateway packet bus driver is experiencing a congestion problem.

Settings:	disableAll (default)

enableTrap

enableLog

enableAll


Packet Bus Session Lost Trap

Enables a trap when a valid Packet Bus session has been lost.

Settings:	disableAll, enableTrap, enableLog, or enableAll

Default:	disableAll


Packet Bus Session Inactive Trap

Enables a trap when a request is made to change a packet bus session from the active to inactive state.

Settings:	disableAll (default)

enableTrap

enableLog

enableAll


Packet Bus Session Error Trap

Enables a trap when an error occurs during a packet bus session.

Settings:	disableAll (default)

enableTrap

enableLog

enableAll


X.25 Programmed Settings

Configuration Group

LAPB Configuration

Management Over X.25

Packet Bus Sessions

PLP Configuration

WAN Configuration

X.25 Gateway Identification


PLP Configuration

PLP configuration parameters are separated into 11 logical groups to simplify PLP configuration:

PLP Closed User Groups

PLP D-Bit Control

PLP Localization Information

PLP Network Identification

PLP Packet & Window Sizes

PLP Subscription Options

PLP Throughput Class Windows & Packets

PLP Throughput Class

PLP Timers (0.1 sec) & Retransmission Values

PLP Transit Delay

PLP Virtual Circuit Ranges


LAPB Configuration

The parameters in this group set up the link so both the DTE and DCE can send frames.  It defines frame transfer parameters, and defines rules for timing and frame formatting.

Busy-State Timer

Ignore any UA Frames Received

Link Idle Timer

Max. Delay before Sending RR

Max. Number of Unacknowledged IPDUs

Max. Size of LAPB I Frame

N2--Max. Number of PDU Transmissions

P-Bit Response Timer

Reject Response Timer

Reject S-Frame without P-Bit Set

Retransmit Frame Reject

Send DM on Entry to ADM State

T1--Acknowledgment Timer

Transmit Frame Reject

Transmit Probe

Transmit Window Size


WAN Configuration

The parameters in this configuration group define the interface between the X.25 PAD and the X.25 PSN.

Baud Rate of Internal Clock Source

Clock Source

Interface Monitoring Using DCD

Max. Frame Size

Options

Physical Interface Type (RS232 or V.35)


Packet Level Protocol Configuration

PLP configuration parameters are separated into 11 logical groups to simplify PLP configuration.

PLP Closed User Groups

PLP D-Bit Control

PLP Localization Information

PLP Network Identification

PLP Packet & Window Sizes

PLP Subscription Options

PLP Throughput Class Windows & Packets

PLP Throughput Class

PLP Timers (0.1 sec) & Retransmission Values

PLP Transit Delay

PLP Virtual Circuit Ranges


Network Identification

The parameters in this configuration group specify the network protocol, X.25 version, and packet-level protocol to be used by the X.25 PAD and the connected PSN.

Network Protocol Mode

Packet Level Protocol Mode

X.25 Version


Network Protocol Mode

This parameter allows the user to select a specific network protocol to be used.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnNetMode
ux25OperNetMode

Settings:	accunet	luxpac
austpac	pacnet
datanet	pss
datapac	telenet
datapak	telepac
datex_p	transpac
dcs	tymnet
ddn	venus_p
ddx_p	x25_80
f_datapac	x25_84 (default)
finpac	x25_88
itapac	x25_llc


X.25 Version

The version of the X.25 protocol being used over the network.  The NetWare mode of X25_LLC overrides any value in this field to the 1984 standard.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnProtocolVersion
ux25OperProtocolVersion

Settings:	80
84 (default)
88


Packet Level Protocol Mode

Indicates the DTE/DCE nature of the link.  The DXE (DTE or DCE) parameter is resolved using ISO 8208 for DTE-DTE operation.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnInterfaceMode
ux25OperInterfaceMode

Note:  The physical layer of the PAD is always a DTE; this parameter only applies to the X.25 protocol level.

Settings:	dce
dte
dxe (default)


Virtual Circuit Ranges
PLP Virtual Circuit Ranges

The parameters in this configuration group specify the allowable ranges of logical channels assigned to a particular type of virtual circuit.

Note:  Subnetworks A and B can both use the same logical channel numbers, but each incoming call will be routed to the highest available channel.  If you want calls routed differently, depending on the subnetwork, carefully select appropriate logical channel numbers when configuring the virtual circuit range for each subnetwork.  If the wrong logical channel is selected for a call, and the call is dropped, subsequent calls will not go through (on that channel) until the T21 Call Request Response Timer has expired.

Related Topics:

Incoming Logical Channel Range

Outgoing Logical Channel Range

PVC Range

Two-Way Logical Channel Range


PVC Range

Lowest PVC

Establishes the low end of the permanent virtual circuit range.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnLowestPVCVal
ux25OperLowestPVCVal

Settings:	0 - 4095 (default = 0)

Highest PVC

Establishes the high end of the permanent virtual circuit range.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnHighestPVCVal
ux25OperHighestPVCVal

Settings:	0 - 4095 (default = 0)


Incoming Channel Range
Incoming Logical Channel Range

Lowest Incoming Logical Channel

Establishes the low end of the one-way incoming logical channel.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnChannelLIC
ux25OperChannelLIC

Settings:	0 - 4095 (default = 0)

Highest Incoming Logical Channel

Establishes the high end of the one-way incoming logical channel.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnChannelHIC
ux25OperChannelHIC

Settings:	0 - 4095 (default = 0)


Two-Way Channel Range
Two-Way Logical Channel Range

Lowest Two-Way Logical Channel

Establishes the low end of the two-way incoming logical channel.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnChannelLTC
ux25OperChannelLTC

Settings:	0 - 4095 (default = 1024)

Highest Two-Way Logical Channel

Establishes the high end of the two-way incoming logical channel.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnChannelHTC
ux25OperChannelHTC

Settings:	0 - 4095 (default = 1087)


Outgoing Channel Range
Outgoing Logical Channel Range

Lowest Outgoing Logical Channel

Establishes the low end of the one-way outgoing logical channel.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnChannelLOC
ux25OperChannelLOC

Settings:	0 - 4095 (default = 0)

Highest Outgoing Logical Channel

Establishes the high end of the one-way outgoing logical channel.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnChannelHOC
ux25OperChannelHOC

Settings:	0 - 4095 (default = 0)


Packet and Window Sizes
PLP Packet & Window Sizes

The parameters in this configuration group specify allowable packet and window sizes, as well as the sequence numbering method on the PSN.

Default Local Packet Size

Default Local Window Size

Default Remote Packet Size

Default Remote Window Size

Max. Local Packet Size

Max. Local Window Size

Max. NSDU Length

Max. Remote Packet Size

Max. Remote Window Size

Sequence Numbering Option


Sequence Numbering Option

Indicates whether Modulo 8 or 128 sequence numbering operates on the network.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnPktSequencing
ux25OperPktSequencing

Settings:	8 or 128 (default = 8)


Maximum Local Packet Size
Max. Local Packet Size

The maximum acceptable size of packets in the direction local-to-remote.  That is, on any incoming call, a value for the packet size parameter greater than this value will be negotiated down to an acceptable size when the call is accepted.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnLocMaxPktSize
ux25OperLocMaxPktSize

Settings:	128

256 (default)

512


Maximum Remote Packet Size
Max. Remote Packet Size

The maximum acceptable size of packets in the direction remote-to-local.  That is, on any incoming call, a value for the packet size parameter greater than this value will be negotiated down to an acceptable size when the call is accepted.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnRemMaxPktSize
ux25OperRemMaxPktSize

Settings:	128

256 (default)

512


Default Local Packet Size

Specifies, on a particular subnetwork, the value of the default packet size for the direction local-to-remote.  May be nonstandard, provided the value is agreed on by all communicating parties on the LAN or between the DTE and DCE.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnLocDefWinSize
ux25OperLocDefWinSize

Settings:	16

32

64

128

256 (default)

512


Default Remote Packet Size

Specifies, on a particular subnetwork, the value of the default packet size for the direction remote-to-local.  May be nonstandard, provided the value is agreed on by all communicating parties on the LAN or between the DTE and DCE.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnRemDefWinSize
ux25OperRemDefWinSize

Settings:	16

32

64

128

256 (default)

512


Maximum Local Window Size
Max. Local Window Size

The largest acceptable window size on the local network.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnLocMaxWinSize
ux25OperLocMaxWinSize

Settings:	2 - 127 (default = 7 )

Note:  127 only allowed for Modulo 128 networks.


Maximum Remote Window Size
Max. Remote Window Size

The largest acceptable window size on the remote network.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnRemMaxWinSize
ux25OperRemMaxWinSize

Settings:	2 - 127 (default = 7 )

Note:  127 only allowed for Modulo 128 networks.


Default Local Window Size

Specifies, on a particular subnetwork, the value of the default window size.  May be nonstandard, provided the value is agreed on by all communicating parties on the LAN between the DTE and DCE.  Most networks use a value of 2.

Note:  The sequence of the numbering scheme affects the range of this parameter.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnLocDefWinSize
ux25OperLocDefWinSize

Settings:	1 - 127 (default = 7)


Default Remote Window Size

Specifies, on a particular subnetwork, the value of the default window size.  May be nonstandard, provided the value is agreed on by all communicating parties on the LAN between the DTE and DCE.  Most networks use a value of 2.

Note:  The sequence of the numbering scheme affects the range of this parameter.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnRemDefWinSize
ux25OperRemDefWinSize

Settings:	1 - 127 (default = 7)


Maximum NSDU Length
Max. NSDU Length

Specifies a default maximum length of the Network Service Data Unit, beyond which concatenation will be stopped and the data currently held will be passed to the Network Service user.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnMaxNSDULimit
ux25OperMaxNSDULimit

Settings:	0 - 32000 octets (default = 256)


Timers and Re-Transmission Values
Timers (0.1 sec) & Retransmission Values

The parameters in this configuration group specify allowable timer and re-transmission values.

Acknowledgment Delay--Withhold Pending RR

DTE/DCE Resolution Timer

Link-Level Hold Time

R20--DTE Restart Request Retransmit Count

R22--DTE Reset Request Retransmit Count

R23--DTE Clear Request Retransmit Count

Status Transmission Timer

T20--Restart Request Response Timer

T21--Call Request Response Timer

T22--Reset Request Response Timer

T23--Clear Request Response Timer

T25--Window Rotation Timer

T26--Interrupt Response Timer


Acknowledgment Delay-Withhold Pending RR
Acknowledgment Delay--Withhold Pending RR

Specifies the maximum number of ticks (0.1 second units) for which a pending acknowledgment is withheld.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnAckDelay
ux25OperAckDelay

Settings:	0 - 32000 (default = 5)


T20-Restart Request Response Timer
T20--Restart Request Response Timer

Specifies in ticks (0.1 second units) the time the DTE waits before responding to a restart request.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnRstrtTime
ux25OperRstrtTime

Settings:	0 - 32000 (default = 1800)


T21-Call Request Response Timer
T21--Call Request Response Timer

Specifies in ticks (0.1 second units) the time the DTE waits for a response after a clear request has been issued.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnCallTime
ux25OperCallTime

Settings:	0 - 32000 (default = 2000)


T22-Reset Request Response Timer
T22--Reset Request Response Timer

Specifies in ticks (0.1 second units) the time the DTE waits before responding to a reset request.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnRstTime
ux25OperRstTime

Settings:	0 - 32000 (default = 1800)


T23-Clear Request Response Timer
T23--Clear Request Response Timer

Specifies in ticks (0.1 second units) the time the DTE waits before responding to a clear request.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnClrTime
ux25OperClrTime

Settings:	0 - 32000 (default = 1800)


Tvalue-Status Transmission Timer
Status Transmission Timer

This parameter is related, but does not correspond exactly, to the DTE Window Status Transmission Timer, T24.  It specifies in ticks (0.1 second units) the maximum time during which acknowledgments of data received from the remote transmitter will be withheld.  When the timer expires, any withheld acknowledgments will be carried by an X.25 level 3 “Receiver Not Ready” control packet.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnWinStatTime
ux25OperWinStatTime

Settings:	0 - 32000 (default = 750)


T25-Window Rotation Timer
T25--Window Rotation Timer

Specifies in ticks (0.1 second units) the DTE will wait for a packet acknowledgment.  If no ACK is received within this timeframe, the DTE sends a reset request and the DTE/DCE packet counters are reset to 0.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnWinRotTime
ux25OperWinRotTime

Settings:	0 - 32000 (default = 1500)


T26-Interrupt Response Timer
T26--Interrupt Response Timer

This parameter is not currently implemented.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnIntrptTime
ux25OperIntrptTime


Idlevalue-Link-Level Hold Time
Link-Level Hold Time

This parameter is not used by the U.S. Robotics X.25 PAD.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnIdleValue
ux25OperIdleValue

Settings:	0 - 32000 (default = 0)


Connectvalue-DTE/DCE Resolution Timer
DTE/DCE Resolution Timer

Specifies the number of ticks (0.1 second units) for which the DTE/DCE resolution phase must be completely implemented in order to prevent the (unlikely) event that two packet level entities cannot resolve their DTE/DCE nature.  If this time allowance expires without resolution, the link connection will be disconnected and all pending connections aborted.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnConnectValue
ux25OperConnectValue

Settings:	0 - 32000 (default = 2000)


R20-DTE Restart Request Retransmit Count
R20--DTE Restart Request Retransmit Count

Specifies the number of times a DTE restart request may be retransmitted.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnRstrtCnt
ux25OperRstrtCnt

Settings:	1 - 255 (default = 1)


R22-DTE Reset Request Retransmit Count
R22--DTE Reset Request Retransmit Count

Specifies the number of times a DTE reset request may be retransmitted.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnRstCnt
ux25OperRstCnt

Settings:	1 - 255 (default = 1)


R23-DTE Clear Request Retransmit Count
R23--DTE Clear Request Retransmit Count

Specifies the number of times a DTE clear request may be retransmitted.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnClrCnt
ux25OperClrCnt

Settings:	1 - 255 (default = 1)


Transit Delay Parameters
PLP Transit Delay

The parameters in this configuration group specify the allowable attributable delays.

Local Delay (msecs)

Specifies (in milliseconds) the transit delay attributable to internal processing.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnLocalDelay
ux25OperLocalDelay

Settings:	0 - 32000 (default = 5)

Access Delay (msecs)

Specifies (in milliseconds) the transit delay attributable to the line transmission rate.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnAccessDelay
ux25OperAccessDelay

Settings:	0 - 32000 (default =5)


Throughput Class Parameters
PLP Throughput Class

The parameters in this group specify allowable local and remote throughput.  Throughput Class is the consistent throughput available under optimal conditions for a virtual call or permanent virtual circuit.

Default Local Throughput Class

Default Remote Throughput Class

Max. Local Throughput Class

Max. Remote Throughput Class

Min. Local Throughput Class

Min. Remote Throughput Class


Maximum Local Throughput Class
Max. Local Throughput Class

Sets the maximum supported value of the throughput class Quality of Service parameter.  According to ISO 8208, this parameter is bound in the range of 3 to 12, corresponding to a range of 75 to 48000 bps.  However, the valid range supported here is 0 to 15.  This caters to nonstandard X.25 implementations, which use the Throughput Class Window/Packet Parameters.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnLocMaxThruPutClass
ux25OperLocMaxThruPutClass

Settings:	0 - 15 (default = 12)


Maximum Remote Throughput Class
Max. Remote Throughput Class

This parameter sets the maximum supported value of the throughput class Quality of Service parameter.  According to ISO 8208, this parameter is bound in the range of 3 to 12, corresponding to a range of 75 to 48000 bps.  However, the valid range supported here is 0 to 15.  This caters to nonstandard X.25 implementations, which use the Throughput Class Window/Packet Parameters.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnRemMaxThruPutClass
ux25OperRemMaxThruPutClass

Settings:	0 - 15 (default = 12)


Default Local Throughput Class

In some networks, such as TELENET, negotiation of throughput class is restricted to a configured default throughput class.  In other PSDNs, this value should be set equal to the value of the Maximum Local Throughput Class.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnLocDefThruPutClass
ux25OperLocDefThruPutClass

Settings:	0 - 15 (default = 12)


Default Remote Throughput Class

In some networks, such as TELENET, negotiation of throughput class is restricted to a configured default throughput class.  In other PSDNs, this value should be set equal to the value of the Maximum Remote Throughput Class.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnRemDefThruPutClass
ux25OperRemDefThruPutClass

Settings:	0 - 15 (default = 12)


Minimum Local Throughput Class
Min. Local Throughput Class

According to ISO 8208, the throughput class parameter is defined in the range of 3 to 12.  Some PSDNs may provide different mapping, in which case this parameter is the minimum value.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnLocMinThruPutClass
ux25OperLocMinThruPutClass

Settings:	0 -15 (default = 12)


Minimum Remote Throughput Class
Min. Remote Throughput Class

According to ISO 8208, the throughput class parameter is defined in the range of 3 to 12.  Some PSDNs may provide different mapping, in which case this parameter is the minimum value.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnRemMinThruPutClass
ux25OperRemMinThruPutClass

Settings:	0 - 15 (default =3)


Closed User Groups
PLP Closed User Groups

The parameters in this configuration group specify the X.25 PAD response to closed user groups.

If your X.25 PAD subscribes to Closed User Groups, call routing is determined by the type of CUGs allowed by your network provider.

Basic or Extended Format

Preferential

Reject Incoming Calls

With Incoming Access

With Incoming and Outgoing Access

With Outgoing Access


With Incoming and Outgoing Access

Specifies whether or not this DTE subscribes to one or more Closed User Groups with Outgoing and Incoming Access.  Outgoing access means the DTE can make calls outside the CUG; incoming access means the DTE will accept calls from outside the CUG.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnSubCugIaoa
ux25OperSubCugIaoa

Settings:	Enable (default)

Disable


Preferential

Specifies whether or not this DTE subscribes to a Preferential Closed User Group.  If enabled, this parameter implies that the DTE belongs to more than one CUG and has outgoing access.  If your network provider uses preferential CUGs, enable this parameter.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnSubCugPref
ux25OperSubCugPref

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


With Outgoing Access

Specifies whether or not this DTE subscribes to one or more Closed User Groups with Outgoing Access.  The DTE belongs to a CUG, but can place calls outside the CUG, as well.  Enable this parameter if your network provider offers you a choice of whether or not you want to use a Preferential CUG.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnSubCugoa
ux25OperSubCugoa

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


With Incoming Access

Specifies whether or not this DTE subscribes to Closed User Groups with Incoming Access.  The DTE belongs to a CUG, but will accept calls from outside the CUG.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnSubCugia
ux25OperSubCugia

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Basic or Extended Format

Defines the maximum number of Closed User Groups to which this DTE subscribes.  This will be one of two ranges:  Basic (100 or fewer) or Extended (between 101 and 1000).

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnCugFormat
ux25OperCugFormat

Settings:	Basic (default)

Extended


Reject Incoming Calls

Provides the means to reject incoming calls in which a CUG is identified in the call request (which is necessary in some networks, such as DDN).  If this parameter is disabled, incoming calls specifying a CUG will be ignored.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnBarInCug
ux25OperBarInCug

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Subscription Options
PLP Subscription Options

The parameters in this configuration group specify any additional features are supplied by the X.25 PSN.

Bar Incoming Calls

Bar Incoming Extended Call Packets

Bar Incoming TOA/NPI Address Format

Bar Outgoing Calls

Fast Select No Restriction

Fast Select with Restriction

Local Charging Prevention

NUI Override

Reverse Charging

Subscribe to Extended Call Packets

Subscribe to TOA/NPI Address Format


Subscribe to Extended Call Packets

Allows you to indicate if the PAD subscribes to extended call packets (window and packet size negotiation permitted) in both directions.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnSubExtended
ux25OperSubExtended

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Bar Incoming Extended Call Packets

Allows the PAD to treat window and packet size negotiation in incoming packets as a procedure error.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnBarExtended
ux25OperBarExtended

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Fast Select No Restriction

Allows you to indicate if your setup subscribes to fast select with no restriction on response (the PAD will allow extended data).

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnSubFstSelNoRstrct
ux25OperSubFstSelNoRstrct

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Fast Select with Restriction

Allows you to indicate if your setup subscribes to fast select with restriction on response (the PAD will clear any extended data with a reject response).

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnSubFstSelWthRstrct
ux25OperSubFstSelWthRstrct

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Reverse Charging

Allows you to indicate if the PAD will accept incoming calls that specify the reverse charging facility.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnAccptRvsChrgng
ux25OperAccptRvsChrgng

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Local Charging Prevention

Allows you to indicate if the PAD subscribes to local charging prevention.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnSubLocChargePrevent
ux25OperSubLocChargePrevent

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Subscribe to TOA/NPI Address Format

Allows you to indicate if the PAD subscribes to Type of Access/Network Provider Interface address format.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnSubToaNpiFormat
ux25OperSubToaNpiFormat

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Bar Incoming TOA/NPI Address Format

Allows the PAD to bar incoming call setup and clearing packets that use Type of Access/Network Provider Interface address format.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnBarToaNpiFormat
ux25OperBarToaNpiFormat

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


NUI Override

Allows you to indicate if the PAD subscribes to Network User Identifier Override.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnSubNuiOverride
ux25OperSubNuiOverride

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Bar Incoming Calls

Allows the PAD to bar incoming calls (calls to the PAD).

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnBarInCall
ux25OperBarInCall

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Bar Outgoing Calls

Allows the PAD to bar outgoing calls (calls from the PAD).

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnBarOutCall
ux25OperBarOutCall

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Localization Information
PLP Localization Information

The parameters in this configuration group specify how the X.25 PAD responds to diagnostic packets, international calls, hexadecimal network addresses, and priority packets.

Allow Hex Digits in DTE Address

Allow Incoming Diagnostic Packets

Allow Omission of Diagnostic Byte

Bar Non-Privileged Listen

Data Network Identification Code

Discard Diagnostic Packets on Non-Zero LCN

International Call Priority

International Call Recognition

ITU-T Clear Length Restriction

Priority Encode Control

Priority Packet Forced Value

Source Address Control

Use Diagnostic Packets


Allow Omission of Diagnostic Byte

Allows the PAD to omit the diagnostic byte in incoming restart, clear, and reset indication packets.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnAccNoDiagnostic
ux25OperAccNoDiagnostic

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Use Diagnostic Packets

Allows the PAD to use diagnostic packets.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnUseDiagnosticPacket
ux25OperUseDiagnosticPacket

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


1980 ITU-T Clear Length Restriction
ITU-T Clear Length Restriction

Allows the PAD to restrict the length of a clear indication to 5 bytes and a clear confirm to 3 bytes.

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Allow Incoming Diagnostic Packets

Allows the PAD to allow incoming diagnostic packets.

Settings:	Enable (default)

Disable


Discard Diagnostic Packets on Non-Zero LCN

Allows you to indicate if the PAD discards diagnostic packets on a non-zero Logical Channel Number.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnDiscNzDiagnostic
ux25OperDiscNzDiagnostic

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Allow Hex Digits in DTE Address

Determines whether DTE addresses may contain hexadecimal digits.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnAcceptHexAdd
ux25OperAcceptHexAddr

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Bar Non-Privileged Listen

Allows you to bar a non-privileged user (i.e., one without superuser privilege) from listening for incoming calls.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnBarNonPrivilegeListen
ux25OperBarNonPriviliegeListen

Settings:	Enable (default)

Disable


International Call Recognition

Determines whether outgoing international calls will be accepted.  The main use of this field is in conjunction with the International Call Priority  field.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnIntlAddrRecognition
ux25OperIntlAddrRecognition

Settings:	Not Distinguished (default)

Examine DNIC (Data Network Identification Code)

One Prefix

Zero Prefix


Data Network Identification Code

This four-digit ID identifies the network carrying the call.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnDnic
ux25OperDnic

Settings:	Any four digits (default = 0000)


International Call Priority

Determines whether some prioritizing method is to be used for international calls.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnIntlPrioritized
ux25OperIntlPrioritized

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Priority Encode Control

Describes how the priority request is to be encoded for this PSDN.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnPrtyEncodeCtrl
ux25OperPrtyEncodeCtrl

Settings:	X2588 (default)

76 DATAPAC

80 DATAPAC


Priority Packet Forced Value

Determines if priority call requests and priority incoming calls should have the associated packet size parameter forced to a particular value.  A value of prioPktSz0 accepts the non-priority packet size.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnPrtyPktForcedVal
ux25OperPrtyPktForcedVal

Settings:	0 (default)

4 - 12


Source Address Control

Provides a means to override or set the calling address in outgoing call requests for this PSDN (Packet Switched Data Network).

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnSrcAddrCtrl
ux25OperSrcAddrCtrl

Settings:	OmitDte = Force omission of the calling DTE address, even if the network service user supplied one.

UseLocal = Use the DTE address configured in the Address Template (LOCAL_ADDRESS) even if the network service user does NOT supply a DTE address.

ForceLocal = Force the calling DTE address to that contained in LOCAL_ADDRESS even if the network service user supplied one.

Nothing = No special action; calling DTE addresses are encoded as if provided by the network service user. (default)


D-Bit Control

The parameters in this configuration group specify the X.25 PAD response to delivery information flags.

D-Bit Accept In

D-Bit Accept Out

D-Bit Data In

D-Bit Data Out


D-Bit Accept In

Defines the action to take when a Call Accept is received with the D-bit (delivery confirmation bit) set and there is no local D-bit support.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnDbitInAccept
ux25OperDbitInAccept

Settings:	clearCall (default)

leaveDbit

zeroDbit


D-Bit Accept Out

Defines the action to take when a remote user sends a Call Accept with the D-bit (delivery confirmation bit) set when the local user did not request use of the D-bit.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnDbitOutept
ux25OperDbitOutept

Settings:	clearCall (default)

leaveDbit

zeroDbit


D-Bit Data In

Defines the action to take when a data packet is received with the D-bit (delivery confirmation bit) set and the local user did not request use of the D-bit.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnDbitInData
ux25OperDbitInData

Settings:	clearCall (default)

leaveDbit

zeroDbit


D-Bit Data Out

Defines the action to take when the local user sends a data packet with the D-bit (delivery confirmation bit) set, but the remote user has not indicated D-bit support.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnDbitOutData
ux25OperDbitOutData

Settings:	clearCall (default)

leaveDbit

zeroDbit


Throughput Class Window/Packet Parameters
Throughput Class Windows & Packets

The parameters in this configuration group specify window and packet negotiation and throughput.

If your network provider does not use the standard values for Throughput Class parameters defined in the Throughput Class Parameters logical PLP group, some configuration in this logical group may be necessary.

Related Topics:

Packet Mapping

Throughput Class Negotiation

Throughput Class Window/Packet Size Configuration for Non-Standard X.25 Networks

Type

Window Mapping


Negotiation
Throughput Class Negotiation

Determines if throughput class negotiation will be used for certain network procedures.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnThclassNegToDef
ux25OperThclassNegToDef

Settings:	Disable (default)

Enable


Type

Defines the means by which throughput class encodings can be used to assign packet and window sizes.  Some implementations of X.25 do not use the X.25 packet and window negotiation and rely on mapping the throughput class to these parameters.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnThclassType
ux25OperThclassType

Settings:	Nothing (default)

lowNibble

highNibble

bothNibbles

Note:  (Nibble=4 bits)


Win Mapping
Window Mapping

Consists of 16 integers (0 to 15) mapped between throughput class (both RX and TX directions) and a window size parameter.  The 16 integers are separated by periods (full stops).  An integer from 1 to 127 between full stops will alter the default setting for the subnetwork; 0 accepts the default value.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnThclassWinMap
ux25OperThclassWinMap

Settings:	1 - 127 (default = 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0)


Pkt Mapping
Packet Mapping

Consists of integers (0 to 15) mapped between throughput class (both RX and TX directions) and a packet size parameter.  The 16 integers are separated by periods (full stops).  An integer from 4 to 9 between full stops will alter the default setting for the subnetwork; 0 accepts the default value.

MIB Objects:	ux25AdmnThclassPackMap
ux25OperThclassPackMap

Settings:	4 - 9 (24 through 29)

Default:	0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0


Throughput Class Window/Packet Size Configuration for Non-Standard X.25 Networks

If your network provider does not provide the standard Throughput Class facility, throughput class window and packet mapping is available.  This allows you to approximate a throughhput class using a specific window and packet size.  Refer to the Throughput Class Window/Packet Parameters logical group in the X.25 Installation/Operation Manual to set up an approximate throughput class.

An octet is made up of a low nibble and a high nibble (a nibble is 4 bits).  When you have a non-standard X.25 network and must approximate a throughput class, you must select low nibble, high nibble, or both nibbles as a mapping method.

The Hex value of the nibble determines the selection of the window and packet sizes.  If you elect to use the low nibble or the high nibble, window and packet sizes for both local-to-remote and remote-to-local directions are determined by the Hex value of that nibble.  If you elect to use both nibbles as the type of encoding to be used, the Hex value of the low nibble determines packet and window sizes in the local-to-remote direction and the high nibble determines packet and window sizes in the remote-to-local direction.

Example 1     Low Nibble

If you elect to use the low nibble, and the Hex value of the low nibble is 3 (0011), the third value in the window size series and the third value in the packet size series will be used to approximate a throughput class.

Example 2     High Nibble

If you elect to use the high nibble, and the Hex value of the high nibble is 1 (0001), the first value in the window size series and the first value in the packet size series will be used to approximate a throughput class.

Example 3     Both Nibbles

If you elect to use both nibbles, and the Hex value of the high nibble is 1 (0001) and the Hex value of the low nibble is 3 (0011), the first value in the window size series and the first value in the packet size series will be used to approximate a throughput class in the remote-to local direction.  The third value in the window size series and the third value in the packet size series will be used to approximate a throughput class in the local-to-remote direction.


DNIC

Data Network Identification Code


PSDN

Packet Switched Data Network


D-Bit

Delivery Confirmation Bit


N2-Max Number of PDU Transmissions
N2--Max. Number of PDU Transmissions

The maximum number of times that a PDU (packet data unit) is sent following the expiration of the Acknowledgment timer, P-Bit (Poll Bit) timer, or Reject timer.  It also limits the number of times a Receive Ready with P-Bit set message is sent when the remote host is busy and the Busy timer expires.

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnN2RxmitCount
ulpbOperN2RxmitCount

Settings:	1 - 255 (default = 2)


T1-Acknowledgment Timer
T1--Acknowledgment Timer

Time (in tenths of a second) during which the LAPB protocol layer in the X.25 PAD expects to receive an acknowledgment of an outstanding IPDU (information packet data unit) or an unexpected response to a sent unnumbered PDU.

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnT1AckTimer
ilpbOperT1AckTimer

Settings:	1 - 3000 (default = 70)


P-Bit Response Timer

Time (in tenths of a second) during which LAPB expects to receive a PDU (packet data unit) with the F-Bit (Final bit) set to 1 in response to a command with P-Bit (Poll bit) set to 1.

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnTpfVal
ulpbOperTpfVal

Settings:	1 - 3000 (default = 10)


Reject Response Timer

Time (in tenths of a second) during which LAPB expects to receive a reply to a sent REJ TPDU (reject timer packet data unit).

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnTrejVal
ulpbOperTrejVal

Settings:	1 - 10000 (default = 25)


Busy State Timer
Busy-State Timer

Time (in tenths of a second) during which LAPB waits for an indication of the clearance of a busy condition at the other LAPB.

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnTbusyVal
ulpbOperTbusyVal

Settings:	1 - 30000 (default 100)


Link Idle Timer

Time (in tenths of a second) during which the LAPB expects to receive a PDU (packet data unit) from the other LAPB.  If it expires, the Poll/Final (P/F) cycle is initiated, which may result in link disconnection.  A value of zero disables this function.

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnLinkIdleTime
ulpbOperLinkIdleTime

Settings:	0 - 32000 (default = 250)


Max Delay before Sending RR
Max. Delay before Sending RR

Maximum delay (in tenths of a second) before transmitting a delayed RR (receiver ready).  The PAD will send an RR, based on this timer, even if there is no data forthcoming.  Never set this to a larger value than the T1--Acknowledgment Timer value or the call will be dropped when the T1 timer expires.

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnT2AckDelayTime
ilpbOperT2AckDelayTime

Settings:	1 - 3000 (default = 4)


Max Number of Unacknowledged IPDUs
Max. Number of Unacknowledged IPDUs

Maximum number of unacknowledged IPDUs (information packet data units) that can be received before the RR (receiver ready) acknowledging them all must be sent.

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnRecKWindowSz
ulpbOperRecKWindowSz

Settings:	1 - 127 (default = 3)


Transmit Window Size

The number of unacknowledged sequenced PDUs (packet data units) that may be sent at one time.

Normal mode = 1 to 7 (Modulo 8 sequence numbering is used).

Extended mode = 1 to 127 (Modulo 128 sequence numbering is used).

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnXmitKWindowSz
ulpbOperXmitKWindowSz

Settings:	1 - 127 (default = 7)


Transmit Probe

The position in the data stream, before the window is closed, at which an IPDU (information packet data unit) is sent with the P-Bit (poll bit) set to ask for an acknowledgment from the receiver.

Normal mode = 1 to 7 (Modulo 8 sequence numbering is used).

Extended mode = 1 to 127 (Modulo 128 sequence numbering is used).

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnLocProbe
ulpbOperLocProbe

Settings:	1 - 127 (default = 0)


Maximum Size of LAPB I Frame

This parameter defines the maximum Information (I) frame size, comprised of:  max user data size + X.25 header length + LAPB header length.

LAPB requires all incoming I frames above a certain size to be rejected by a FRMR (frame reject).

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnMaxRecFrameSz
ulpbOperMaxRecFrameSz

Settings:	133 - 263, 517 - 519 (default = 261)


Ignore any UA Frames Received

This parameter instructs LAPB to ignore any UA (unnumbered acknowledgment) frames received when the connection is in an ERROR state (an indecipherable frame has been received).

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnIgnUaError
ulpbOperIgnUaError

Settings:	enable
disable (default)


Retransmit Frame Reject

Instructs LAPB to retransmit a frame reject if one is received when the connection is in an ERROR state (an indecipherable frame has been received).

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnFrmrFrmrError
ulpbOperFrmrFrmrError

Settings:	enable
disable (default)


Transmit Frame Reject

Instructs LAPB to transmit a frame reject if an invalid response is received when the connection is in an ERROR state (an indecipherable frame has been received).

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnFrmrInvrspErrror
ulpbOperFrmrInvrspError

Settings:	enable
disable (default)


Reject S-Frame without P-Bit Set

Instructs LAPB to send a frame reject if a Supervisor frame is received without the P-Bit (poll bit) set.

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnSframePbit
ulpbOperSframePbit

Settings:	enable
disable (default)


Send DM on Entry to ADM State

Instructs LAPB to transmit a Diagnostic Message when the PAD enters administrative state.

MIB Objects:	ulpbAdmnDmOnAdm
ulpbOperDmOnAdm

Settings:	enable
disable (default)


Options

This parameter is not currently implemented.


Maximum Frame Size
Max. Frame Size

The maximum number of bytes allowed in each frame.

Note:  Frame size should always be larger than packet size.

MIB Objects:	x25wanAdminMaxFrameSize
x25wanOperMaxFrameSize

Settings:	133..519 (default = 300)


Baud Rate of Internal Clock Source

The baud rate of the clock generated internally.

MIB Objects:	x25wanAdminClockSource
x25wanOperClockSource

Settings:	0..384000 (default = 57600)


Physical Interface Type

The type of physical interface between the PAD and the WAN.

MIB Objects:	x25wanAdminType
x25wanOperType

Settings:	rs232
v35 (default)


Interface Monitoring Using DCD

Affects the handling of RS-232 signaling by telling the PAD if it should look at DCD (in addition to DSR) to determine if a line is operational.

MIB Objects:	x25wanAdminLinkAvailable
x25wanOperLinkAvailable

Settings:	Enable
Disable (default)


Clock Source

Selects the transmission timing source.

MIB Objects:	x25wanAdminClockSource
x25wanOperClockSource

Settings:  	dceRxTx	=	Receive timing from Host for transmit and receive

dceRxOnly	=	Receive timing from Host for transmit only

Internal	=	Use internal clock source (default)


X.25 Faults

X.25 Subnet Traps

X.25 Traps


X.25 Subnet Traps

WAN status change to link active

WAN status change to out of service


WAN status change to out of service

Enables generation of a trap when the WAN port status changes from Link Active to Out Of Service.

MIB Objects:  x25wanTrapEnaOutOfSvc?

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll (default)
enableLog
enableAll


WAN status change to link active

A unique value for each X.25 Subnet in the chassis.  The value of this object matches the value of the index of the corresponding X.25 Subnet's entry in the entity table of the chassis MIB.

MIB Objects:  x25wanTrapEnabIndex

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll (default)
enableLog
enableAll


X.25 Traps

Report NAC Resets


Report NAC Resets

Enables reporting of NAC Reset by user interface command traps.

Settings:	enableTrap
disableAll (default)
enableLog
enableAll


READ-ONLY X.25 Parameters

Note:  X.25 Gateway parameter values are displayed for both read-write and read-only parameters.  Read-write parameter values may be altered in the interface, but they will not be truly revised until the card has been reset.  Once the card has been reset, the read-write values become the read-only values, as well.  The read-only value is the value currently operating in the Gateway’s database.

READ ONLY is called Operational;  READ WRITE is called Administrative.


Timeslot Service Configuration Group

  Timeslot Service Configuration


Timeslot Service Configuration

Use this parameter to set or view the service state of a specified DS0.

MIB Object:	usrds0CfgDs0SrvcState

Settings:	notSupported (1)

inService (2, default)

localOutOfService (3)

fractionalUnused (4)


Added this info on Timeslot Service Configuration to help system (LTC 1/16/97)


PIAFs Configuration Group

  PIAFs Protocol

  PIAFs V42bis Compression


PIAFs Protocol

Use this parameter to enable or disable PIAFs protocol.

MIB Object:	mdmScPiafs

Settings:	enable (1, default)

disable (2)


What is PIAFs protocol? SMO, 09/23/97


PIAFs V42bis Compression

Use this parameter to enable or disable PIAFS V42bis compression protocol.

MIB Object:	mdmScPiafsV42bis

Settings:	enable (1, default)

disable (2)


Channel Mapping Group

  Group Number

Test against the endo


Group Number

Use this parameter to set or view the HiPer DSP card level configuration (group 1..4) of the specified channel.

MIB Object:	mdmMaChannelConfig

Settings:	notSelected

group1 (1)

group2 (2)

group3 (3)

group4 (4)


Is notSelected (in Group Number) represented by zero? SMO, 09/23/97


Dual DASS/2 Trunk Settings

  Call Proceeding/Connect On

  ALERTING Response on Setup

  Incoming Call Baring Keyword

  DS1 Service State Configuration


Related Files

Uds1.mib

ids1.dat

ds2ch.dat

LTC 10/8/97

LTC 11/18/97


Call Proceeding/Connect On

Use this parameter to determine whether CALL_PROCEEDING and CONNECT

response are sent when a SETUP message is received from the TELCO.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgCallProceedingRsp

Settings:	Off (1)

On (2, default)


ALERTING Response on Setup

Use this parameter to determine if an ALERTING response is sent when a SETUP message is received from the TELCO.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgAlertingRsp

Settings:	Off (1)

On (2, default)


Incoming Call Barring Keyword

Use this keyword for DASS2 Incoming Call Barring control.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgIcbKeyword

Settings:	DisplayString (SIZE(4..4))


DS1 Service State Configuration

This parameter shows the current state of the DS1 Service.

MIB Object:	uds1StatServiceState

Settings:	notSupported (1)

inService (2, default)

localOutOfService (3)


RADIUS DNS Settings

  Primary DNS Server's IP Address

  Secondary DNS Server's IP

  Primary DNS Server Retries

  DNS Server’s UDP Port

  DNS Server Select


Primary DNS Server's IP Address

This parameter identifies the primary DNS server's IP address.

MIB Object	nmcCfgDnsPriSrvrAddr

Settings	IpAddress


Secondary DNS Server's IP

This parameter identifies the secondary DNS server's IP address.

MIB Object	nmcCfgDnsSecSrvrAddr

Settings	IpAddress


Primary DNS Server Retries

This parameter identifies the maximum number of retries that will be attempted to

query a DNS before trying the secondary DNS.

MIB Object	nmcCfgDnsRetryCnt

Settings	INTEGER (0..20)


DNS Server's UDP Port

This parameter identifies the logging server's UDP port number.

MIB Object	nmcCfgDnsUdpPortNum

Settings	INTEGER 0..65535 (53, default)


DNS Server Select

This parameter identifies the server selection for DNS.

MIB Object	nmcCfgDnsSrvrSelect

Settings	none (1, default)

primary (2)

secondary (3)


Network Time Protocol

  Primary NTP Server's IP Address

  Secondary NTP Server's IP

  Synchronization Interval

  Operational Mode


Primary NTP Server's IP Address

This parameter identifies the primary NTP server's IP address.

MIB Object	nmcNtpSrvrPrimAddr

Settings	IpAddress


Secondary NTP Server's IP

This parameter identifies the secondary NTP server's IP address. This server is only accessed when responses from the primary NTP server fail.

MIB Object	nmcNtpSrvrSecdAddr

Settings	IpAddress


Synchronization Interval

This parameter identifies the synchronization interval between successive NTP requests in seconds.

MIB Object	nmcNtpSyncInterval

Settings	INTEGER (600..86400)


Operational Mode

This parameter identifies the operational mode of the NTP client. In unicast mode, the NTP requests the current time from the primary NTP and uses the secondary NTP as a backup.

MIB Object	nmcNtpOperationalMode

Settings	disabled (1)

unicast (2)


NMC Trap Enables

  On DNS Server Lost

  On NTP Server Lost

  On NTP Server Restored

  On Primary NTP Server Failed

  On DNS Server Restored

  On Primary DNS Server Failed

  On Logging Server Restored

  On Logging Server Lost

  On Logging Server Group Operational

  On Logging Server Group Degraded

  On Logging Server Group Non-Operational

  On RADIUS Server Restored

  On RADIUS Server Group Operational

  On RADIUS Server Group Degraded

  On RADIUS Server Group Non-Operational


On DNS Server Lost

This parameter enables or disables a trap generated when communication with the primary and secondary DNS server is lost.

MIB Object	nmcTeDnsSrvrLoss

Settings	enable(1)

disable(2)


On NTP Server Lost

This parameter enables or disables the trap generated when communication with all NTP servers fails.

MIB Object	nmcTeNtpSrvrLoss

Settings	enable(1)

disable(2)


On NTP Server Restored

This parameter enables or disables the trap generated when communication with the NTP server is restored.

MIB Object	nmcTeNtpSrvrRestore

Settings	enable(1)

disable(2)


On Primary NTP Server Failed

This parameter enables or disables the trap generated when communication with the primary NTP server fails, but the secondary is restored.

MIB Object	nmcTeNtpSrvrDegraded

Settings	enable(1)

disable(2)


On DNS Server Restored

This parameter enables or disables the trap generated when communication with the primary DNS server is restored.

MIB Object	nmcTeDnsSrvrRestore

Settings	enable(1)

disable(2)


On Primary DNS Server Failed

This parameter enables or disables the trap generated when communication with the primary DNS server has failed, but the secondary DNS server is operational.

MIB Object	nmcTeDnsSrvrDegraded

Settings	enable (1)

disable (2, default)


On Logging Server Restored

This parameter enables or disables the trap generated when communication with a logging server is restored.

MIB Object	nmcTeLogSrvrRestore

Settings	enable (1)

disable (2)


On Logging Server Lost

This parameter enables or disables the trap generated when communication with a logging server is lost.

MIB Object	nmcTeLogSrvrLoss

Settings	enable (1)

disable (2)


On Logging Server Group Operational

This parameter enables or disables the trap generated when communication with the group of logging servers is operational with the primary server in service.

MIB Object	nmcTeLogSrvrGroupOper

Settings	enable (1)

disable (2)


On Logging Server Group Degraded

This parameter enables or disables the trap generated when communication to the RADIUS Security server group is degraded due to failure to contact the primary server.

MIB Object	nmcTeSecSrvrGroupDegr

Settings	enable (1)

disable (2)


On Logging Server Group Non-Operational

Enables or disables the trap generated when communication to the RADIUS Security server group is non-operational due to failure to contact any Security servers.

MIB Object	nmcTeSecSrvrGroupNonOp

Settings	enable (1)

disable (2)


On RADIUS Server Restored

This parameter enables or disables the trap generated when communication with the RADIUS Security server is restored.

MIB Object	nmcTeSecSrvrRestore

Settings	enable (1)

disable (2, default)


On RADIUS Server Group Operational

This parameter enables or disables the trap generated when communication to the RADIUS Security server group becomes operational.

MIB Object	nmcTeSecSrvrGroupOper

Settings	enable (1)

disable (2, default)


On RADIUS Server Group Degraded

This parameter enables or disables the trap generated when communication to the RADIUS Security server group becomes degraded because of failure to contact primary server.

MIB Object	nmcTeSecSrvrGroupDegr

Settings	enable (1)

disable (2, default)


On RADIUS Server Group Non-Operational

This parameter enables or disables the trap generated when communication to the RADIUS Security server group becomes non-operational because of failure to contact any Security servers.

MIB Object	nmcTeSecSrvrGroupNonOp

Settings	enable (1)

disable (2, default)


NMC Functional Group Monitor Setup

Status Group

  Source of packet bus clock

  NMC’s packet bus status


Source of packet bus clock

The source of the backplane packet bus clock.

MIB Object	nmcStatPktBusClkSrc

Settings	notApplicable (1)

backplaneActive (2)

backplaneActive1ClkFail (3)

nmcActive (4)


NMC's packet bus status

The NMC's packet bus  clock status.

MIB Object	nmcStatNmcPktBusClk

Settings	notApplicable (1)

available (2)

active (3)

ailed (4)


NMC Functional Group Monitor Setup

ICMP Group

  icmpInAddrMasks

  icmpInAddrMaskReps


icmpInAddrMasks

This parameter lists the number of ICMP In Address Masks messages sent.

MIB Object	icmpInAddrMasks


icmpInAddrMaskReps

This parameter lists the number of ICMP In Address Mask Reps messages sent.

MIB Object	icmpInAddrMaskReps


NMC Functional Group Monitor Setup

Network Time Protocol Group

  Time Since Last Successful Sync (sec)

  Last Successfully Synchronized Server

  Time Since Last Failed NTP Sync (sec)

  Last Failed to Synchronize Server


Time Since Last Successful Sync (sec)

The time since the last successful NTP synchronization in seconds.

MIB Object	nmcNtpLastSyncTime

Settings	INTEGER


Last Successfully Synchronized Server

The last NTP server used to successfully synchronize time.

MIB Object	nmcNtpLastSyncServer

Settings	none (1)

primary (2)

secondary (3)


Time Since Last Failed NTP Sync (sec)

The time since the last failed NTP synchronization attempt in seconds.

MIB Object	nmcNtpLastFailedTime

Settings	INTEGER


Last Failed to Synchronize Server

The last NTP server used in a failed attempt to synchronize time.

MIB Object	nmcNtpLastFailedServer

Settings	none (1)

primary (2)

secondary (3)


NMC Functional Group  Monitor Setup

Failure Reasons

  Hub Security Server Failure

  DNS Server Failure

  Logging Server Failure


Hub Security Server Failure

This value defines the failure reason for the last failure of RADIUS Security server access.

MIB Object	nmcHsSecurityFailure

Settings	none (1)

other (2)

commFailure (3)

invalidResponse (4)

disabledServer (5)


DNS Server Failure

This value defines the failure reason for last failure of the DNS resolver query.

MIB Object	nmcCfgDnsSrvrFailure

Settings	none(1),

other (2),

commFailure(3),

invalidEntry(4)


Logging Server Failure

This value defines the failure reason for the last failure of RADIUS accounting server access.

MIB Object	nmcCfgLogSrvrFailure

Settings	none (1)

other (2)

commFailure (3)

invalidResponse (4)

disabledServer (5)


PIAFS Configuration

  PIAFS Protocol

  PIAFS v42bis Compression


PIAFS Protocol

Use this parameter to enable/disable PIAFS protocol. It corresponds to S Register 72.4.

MIB Object	mdmScPiafs

Settings	enable (1, default)

disable (2)


PIAFS v42bis Compression

Use this parameter to enable/disable PIAFS V42bis compression protocol. It corresponds to S Register 72.5.

MIB Object	mdmScPiafsV42bis

Settings	enable (1, default)

disable (2)


Packet Bus Traps

  Packet Bus Clock Lost Trap

  Packet Bus Clock Restored Trap

  Incoming Connections Failed

  Outgoing Connections Failed


Packet Bus Clock Lost Trap

Use this parameter to disable the NAC’s ability to report when the packet bus clock is lost

MIB Object	mdmTePbClockLossEvent

Settings	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Packet Bus Clock Restored Trap

Use this parameter to disable the NAC’s ability to report when the packet bus clock is restored.

MIB Object	mdmTePbClockRestoreEvent

Settings	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Incoming Connections Failed

Use this parameter to generate an SNMP trap upon detection of an inbound connection attempt failure on the specified modem.

MIB Object	mdmTeInConnAttemptFail

Settings	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Outgoing Connections Failed

Use this parameter to generate an SNMP trap upon detection of an outbound connection attempt failure on the specified modem.

MIB Object	mdmTeOutConnAttemptFail

Settings	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Frequency and Probe Level

This parameter displays the frequency and probe level in decibels (dB).

MIB Object	mdmCsFreqProbeData

Frequencies	Frequency 150 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 300 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 450 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 600 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 750 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 900 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 1050 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 1200 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 1350 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 1500 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 1650 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 1800 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 1950 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 2100 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 2250 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 2400 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 2550 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 2700 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 2850 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 3000 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 3150 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 3300 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 3450 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 3600 (x 0.1dB)

Frequency 3750 (x 0.1dB)


Trap Enables

  On Call Event

  On Call Arrive

  On Call Connect

  On Call Termination

  On Call Failure


On Call Event

This parameter enables the generation of an SNMP trap to track calls entering and exiting the NAC.

MIB Object	dt1TrapEnaCallEvent

Settings	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2, default)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Call Arrive

This parameter enables the generation of an SNMP trap to track call arrivals the NAC.

MIB Object	dt1TrapEnaCallArriveEvent

Settings	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Call Connect

This parameter enables the generation of an SNMP trap to track call connects.

MIB Object	dt1TrapEnaCallConnEvent

Settings	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Call Termination

This parameter enables the generation of an SNMP trap to track normal call terminations.

MIB Object	dt1TrapEnaCallTermEvent

Settings	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


On Call Failure

This parameter enables the generation of an SNMP trap to track failed call terminations.

MIB Object	dt1TrapEnaCallFailEvent

Settings	enableTrap (1)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


Short Haul NIC

  Short Haul NIC Distance Range


Short Haul NIC Distance Range

This parameter displays various distance ranges supported by Short Haul NIC.

MIB Object	uds1CfgShrtHaulDist

Settings	notApplicable (1)

len0thru133Ft (2)

len133thru266Ft (3)

len266thru399Ft (4)

len399thru533Ft (5)

len533thru655Ft (6)


Remote Modem Call Control Settings

  Send On Connect

  Send Speed Shift Retrain

  Send On Planned Disconnect

  Receive On Connect

  Receive Speed Shift Retrain

  Receive On Planned Disconnect


Send On Connect (S79.0)

Use this parameter to enable or disable RMMIE for sending on call connect.

MIB Object:	rmdmScSendOnConnect

Settings:	enabled (1)

disabled (2)


What is RMMIE? Kurt says it stands for Remote Modem Management, but we can’t get the last two letters. (SMO, 11/10/97).


Send Speed Shift Retrain (S79.1)

Use this parameter to enable or disable RMMIE for sending on Speed Shift or Retrain.

MIB Object:	rmdmScSendSpeedShiftRet

Settings:	enabled (1)

disabled (2)


Send On Planned Disconnect

Use this parameter to enable or disable RMMIE for sending on Planned Disconnect.

MIB Object:	rmdmScSendOnPlanDisc

Settings:	enabled (1)

disabled (2)


Receive On Connect (S80.0)

Use this parameter to enable or disable RMMIE for receive on connection.

MIB Object:	rmdmScRcvConnect

Settings:	enabled (1)

disabled (2)


Receive Speed Shift Retrain

Use this parameter to enable or disable RMMIE for receive on Speed Shift or Retrain.

MIB Object:	rmdmScRcvSpeedShiftRet

Settings:	enabled (1)

disabled (2)


Receive On Planned Disconnect

Use this parameter to enable or disable RMMIE for receive on Planned Disconnect.

MIB Object:	rmdmScRcvOnPlanDisc

Settings:	enabled (1)

disabled (2)


Cause Codes

  Analog Connection Blocked

  Digital Connection Blocked

  No Modems Available

  No IWGS Available

  Specific B Channel Blocked


Related Files

Uds1.mib

ds2ch.dat

LTC 11/18/97


Analog Connection Blocked

This error code is returned to an ISDN switch when analog connections are blocked.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgAnlgBlockErrCode

Settings:	INTEGER (0..127)  (default = 58)


Digital Connection Blocked

This error code is returned to an ISDN switch when digital connections are blocked.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgDgtlBlockErrCode

Settings:	INTEGER (0..127)  (default = 58)


No Modems Available

This error code is returned to an ISDN switch when no modems are available to accept the requested connection.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgNoMdmAvailErrCode

Settings:	INTEGER (0..127)  (default = 58)


No IWGS Available

This error code is returned to an ISDN switch when no IGWS connections are available.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgNoIgwsAvailErrCode

Settings:	INTEGER (0..127)  (default = 58)


Specific B Channel Blocked

This error code is returned to an ISDN switch when connections to a specific B channel are blocked.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgChanBlockErrCode

Settings:	INTEGER (0..127)  (default = 58)


Span Line Blocking

  PRI Span Block Call Type


PRI Span Block Call Type

This parameter determines if a PRI span line will block calls of a specific type.  This parameter does not apply to a NAC operating in Rob Bit T1 mode.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgBlockCallType

Settings:	notSupported (1)

blockNone (2, default)

blockAnalog (3)

blockDigital (4)

blockAll (5)


DASS/2 Channel Mapping and Blocking


Block Call Type


DSO Assigned Slot Number


DSO Assigned Channel Number

(New topic text goes here.)


Modem Call Routing Method

This parameter defines the mechanism used for modem call routing for this-PRI ISDN Card.

MIB Object:	idt1CfgMdmRoutingMethod

Settings:	notSupported (1)

roundRobin (2)

firstAvailable (3)

fixedAssignment (4)


Set DS0 Out of Service upon NAC

If fixed modem routing is engaged this parameter places DS0s out of service upon removal Quad Modem NAC.

MIB Object:	dt1CfgSetDs0OutofService

Settings:	enable (1)

disable (2)


INFO Message Timeout

This parameter sets the time out delay in seconds between INFO messages. This parameter is effective if overlap rx mode is enabled.

MIB Object:	idt1CfgInfoMsgTimeOut

Settings:	INTEGER 0..255  (Default = 12)


DNIS Length

This parameter sets the total number of digits expected in the inbound phone number. In the E1-PRI.  This is only effective when overlap rx mode is enabled.

MIB Object:	idt1CfgInbDNISLength

Settings:	INTEGER 1..15  (Default = 15)


Select PCM Companding

This parameter sets the total number of digits expected in the inbound phone number. In the E1-PRI.  This only is effective when overlap rx mode is enabled.

MIB Object:	idt1CfgSelectCompanding

Settings:	INTEGER 1..15  (Default = 15)


Modem Status

Use this parameter to view the current status of RMMIE.

MIB Object:	rmdmCsStatus

Settings:	notEnabledInLocalModem (1)

notDetectedInRemoteModem (2)

ok (3)


What’s RMMIE stand for? SMO, 02/12/98


Number of Received Updates

Use this parameter to view the number of RMMIE updates received from the remote modem.

MIB Object:	rmdmCsNumOfUpdates

Settings:	INTEGER (0..4294967295)


Time Since Last Update (sec)

Use this parameter to view the number of seconds since the last RMMIE update was received from the remote modem.

MIB Object:	rmdmCsLastUpdateTime

Settings:	INTEGER (0..4294967295)


Last Update Event

Use this parameter to view the type of event that caused the last RMMIE update.

MIB Object:	rmdmCsLastUpdateEvent

Settings:	none (1)

initialConnection (2)

retrain (3)

speedShift (4)

plannedDisconnect (5)


Total Power Level (dBm)

Use this parameter to view the total power level (in negative tenths of a dBm) of the signal received by the remote modem.

MIB Object:	rmdmCsRcvTotPwrLvl

Settings:	INTEGER (0..4294967295)


Total Power Level at 3300 Hz (dBm)

Use this parameter to view the power level (in negative tenths of a dBm) of the signal received by the remote modem at 3300 Hz.

MIB Object:	rmdmCsRcvPwrLvl3300Hz

Settings:	INTEGER (0..4294967295)


Total Power Level at 3750 Hz (dBm)

Use this parameter to view the power level (in negative tenths of a dBm) of the signal received by the remote modem at 3750 Hz.

MIB Object:	rmdmCsRcvPwrLvl3750Hz

Settings:	INTEGER (0..4294967295)


Power Level of Cancelled Near Echo (dBm)

Use this parameter to view the power level (in negative tenths of a dBm) of the near echo canceled by the remote modem.

MIB Object:	rmdmCsPwrLvlNearEchoCanc

Settings:	INTEGER (0..4294967295)


Power Level of Cancelled Far Echo (dBm)

Use this parameter to view the power level (in negative tenths of a dBm) of the far echo canceled by the remote modem.

MIB Object:	rmdmCsPwrLvlFarEchoCanc

Settings:	INTEGER (0..4294967295)


Power Level of Noise (dBm)

Use this parameter to view the power level (in negative tenths of a dBm) of the noise received by the remote modem.

MIB Object:	rmdmCsPwrLvlNoiseRx

Settings:	INTEGER (0..4294967295)


Power Level of Tx (dBm)

Use this parameter to view the power level (in negative tenths of a dBm) of the signal transmitted by the remote modem.

MIB Object:	rmdmCsPwrLvlSignalTx

Settings:	INTEGER (0..4294967295)


x2 Status

Use this parameter to view the status of x2 in the remote modem.

MIB Object:	rmdmCsX2Status

Settings:	x2v90notOperational (1)

x2operational (2)

v8Disabled (3)

x2Disabled (4)

remote3200Disabled (5)

invalidSpeedSetting (6)

v8NotDetected (7)

x2NotDetected (8)

incompatibleX2Version (9)

incompatibleX2Modes (10)

local3200Disabled (11)

excessHighFrequencyAtten (12)

connectNotSupport3200 (13)

retrainBeforeConnection (14)

v90Operational (15)

x2v90Operational (16)

v90Disabled (17)

x2v90Disabled (18)

v90SymRatesDisabled (19)

v90NotDetected (20)

x2v90NotDetected (21)

incompatibleV90Versions (22)

incompatibleV90Modes (23)

v90IncompatibleSymRate (24)


Disconnect Reason

Use this parameter to determine why the remote modem is disconnecting.

MIB Object:	rmdmCsDisconnectReason

Settings:	none (1)

dteNotReady (2)

dteInterfaceError (3)

dteRequest (4)

escapeToOnlineCommandMode (5)

athCommand (6)

inactivityTimeout (7)

arqProtocolError (8)

arqProtocolRetransmitLim (9)

invalidComprDataCodeword (10)

invalidComprDataStringLen (11)

invalidComprDataCommand (12)


Reframing Counts

TO DO: Enter topic text here!


Bulk Access

  DS1 Type Timeslot and State

  DS0 and Modem State

  AB bit Status


These topics were added by LTC on 06/24/98

Missing information for the MIB names; the info at the bottom of the file is my best guess.


DS1 Type Timeslot and State


DS0 and Modem State

TO DO: Enter topic text here!


AB bit Status

TO DO: Enter topic text here!


This parameter contains the ds0StatDs0 and ds0StatModem parameters for all the DS0's on the DS1

ds0BulkAccessStatDs0Modem OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX OCTET STRING (SIZE(0..255))

ACCESS read-only

STATUS mandatory

::= { ds0BulkAccessEntry 3 }

ds0BulkAccessTable OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF Ds0BulkAccessEntry

ACCESS not-accessible

STATUS mandatory

DESCRIPTION

"A table of parameters for each DS0 accessed in a bulk

format"

::= { ds0 4 }

ds0BulkAccessEntry OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX Ds0BulkAccessEntry

ACCESS not-accessible

STATUS mandatory

DESCRIPTION

"There is one bulk DS0 access for each DS1 in the chassis"

INDEX { ds0BulkAccessDs1Index }

::= { ds0BulkAccessTable 1 }

Ds0BulkAccessEntry ::=

SEQUENCE {

ds0BulkAccessDs1Index

    INTEGER,

ds0BulkAccessCfgTSS

    OCTET STRING,

ds0BulkAccessStatDs0Modem

    OCTET STRING,

ds0BulkAccessABStat

    OCTET STRING

}

ds0BulkAccessDs1Index OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX INTEGER

ACCESS read-only

STATUS mandatory

DESCRIPTION

"The index value which uniquely identifies the CSU to which

this entry is applicable.  The value of

ds0BulkAccessDs1Index matches the value of the index for

the corresponding DS1 entity in the entity table of the

chassis MIB. "

::= { ds0BulkAccessEntry 1 }

ds0BulkAccessCfgTSS OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX OCTET STRING (SIZE(0..255))

ACCESS read-only

STATUS mandatory

DESCRIPTION

"This object contains the ds0CfgType, ds0CfgTimeSlot and

ds0CfgState parameters for all the DS0's on the DS1"

::= { ds0BulkAccessEntry 2 }

ds0BulkAccessStatDs0Modem OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX OCTET STRING (SIZE(0..255))

ACCESS read-only

STATUS mandatory

DESCRIPTION

"This object contains the ds0StatDs0 and ds0StatModem

parameters for all the DS0's on the DS1"

::= { ds0BulkAccessEntry 3 }

ds0BulkAccessABStat OBJECT-TYPE

SYNTAX OCTET STRING (SIZE(0..255))

ACCESS read-only

STATUS mandatory

DESCRIPTION

"This object contains the AB bit status"

::= { ds0BulkAccessEntry 4 }


Chassis Trap Enables

Chassis cards send a wide range of unsolicited messages, or events, to the NMC during normal operation. The NMC discards the bulk of these messages by default as they are received. Trap enables instruct the NMC to send one or both of the following when the matching event is received:

•	a trap message (to the management station)

•	a log message (to the RADIUS server)

The chassis trap enables are:

Card Inserted

Card Removed

Power Supply Out of Range

Power Supply Failed

High Temperature Detected

Fan Failure Detected

Generate Watchdog Traps

NMC Communication Error

PSU’s Incompatible Trap


Card Inserted

Enables a trap when a card is inserted into the chassis.  This parameter is effective across all slots in the chassis.

Settings:	enableTrap (default)
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll


Card Removed

Enables a trap when a card is removed from the chassis.  This parameter is effective across all slots in the chassis.

Settings:	enableTrap (default)
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll


Power Supply Out of Range

Enables a trap when a power supply enters a warning state, such as one or more output voltages being out of range.  This parameter is effective across all PSUs in the chassis.

Settings:	enableTrap (default)
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll


Power Supply Failed

Enables a trap when a power supply fails and is automatically shut down due to overvoltage, overcurrent, etc.  This parameter is effective across all PSUs in the chassis

Settings:	enableTrap (default)
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll


High Temperature Detected

Enables a trap when the NMC detects the temperature in the chassis to be excessive.

Settings:	enableTrap (default)
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll


Fan Failure Detected

Enables a trap when the fan in the chassis is not rotating with sufficient speed to cool the power supplies.

Settings:	enableTrap (default)
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll


Generate Watchdog Traps

Enables a trap when a logical networking entity in the chassis undergoes a watchdog timeout event, indicating a software failure.

Settings:	enableTrap (default)
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll


NMC Communication Error

Enables a trap when the SNMP proxy agent in the NMC is not able to communicate properly with a logical networking entity in the chassis.

Settings:	enableTrap (default)
disableAll
enableLog
enableAll


PSU's Incompatible Trap

This parameter enables a trap when the PSUs in the chassis do not have the same ampere ratings.

MIB Object:	uchasPsuIncompatible

Settings	enableTrap (1, default)

disableAll (2)

enableLog (3)

enableAll (4)


High Density Modem PRI Trunk Settings

  Framing Mode

  Line Coding Options

  Send Code

  Circuit Identifier

  Loopback Configuration

  Line Status

  Signal Mode

  Transmit Clock Source

  FAC Data Link

  NIC Type

  Response to Remote Loopback

  Jitter Attenuation

  Transmit Line Build Out

  Dial In Address

  Dial In/Out Trunk Start Signal

  Acknowledgment Wink on Dial in

  Dial Out Address Delay

  Dial In/Out Trunk Type

  Primary Switch Type

  Idle Byte Pattern

  Tone Type

  Number of DTMF Tones

  Receiver Gain


Framing Mode

Use this variable to set or view the type of DS1 line using this circuit. The type of DS1 line affects the number of bits per second that the circuit can carry and the interpretation of the usage and error statistics.

MIB Object:	dsx1LineCoding

Settings:	other (1)

dsx1ESF (2) = Extended SuperFrame DS1

dsx1D4 (3) = AT&T D4 format DS1

dsx1E1 (4) = CCITT Recommendation G.704 (Table 4a)

dsx1E1-CRC (5) = CCITT Recommendation G.704 (Table 4b)

dsx1E1-MF (6) = G.704 (Table 4a) with TS16 multiframing enabled

dsx1E1-CRC-MF (7) = G.704 (Table 4b) with TS16 multiframing enabled


Linked current info for Framing Mode to the help system (LTC 10/16/97)


Line Coding Options

Use this parameter to set the type of zero code suppression used on the selected link.

MIB Object:	dsx1LineCoding

Settings:	dsx1JBZS (1) = jammed bit zero suppression

dsx1B8ZS (2) = specified pattern of normal bits and bipolar violations

dsx1HDB3 (3) = E1 links

dsx1ZBTSI (4) = ANSI clear channels

dsx1AMI (5) = E1 links

other(6)


Send Code

Use Send Code to perform a loopback mode test on the remote end of a DS1 interface, and to restore the remote end to normal operation after the test.

Note: SNMP errors may occur if Send Code commands are used out of their normal sequence. The following sequence starts while looped or normal data is being sent across the DS1 interface (dsx1SendNoCode). The sequence is:

1	Send a request for a line loopback on the remote end (dsx1SendLineCode). The request is sent for six seconds. Note that dsx1SendQRS and dsx1SendNoCode commands sent during this interval will generate SNMP errors.

2	When the line loopback is established, send a Quasi-Random Signal test pattern (dsx1SendQRS) to test the DS1 interface. While this test pattern is being sent, you can only issue the same command (dsx1SendQRS) or issue a command to stop sending the test pattern (dsx1SendNoCode).

3	When the test is completed, issue a command to stop sending the test pattern (dsx1SendNoCode).

4	Send a request to restore the remote end to normal operation (dsx1SendResetCode). Six seconds after this command is issued, Send Code is set to dsx1SendNoCode. At this point you can start the test again or resume normal operation of the DS1 interface.

MIB Object:	dsx1SendCode

Note:  This field is not affected by Save/Restore Configuration.

Settings:	dsx1SendNoCode(1) = sending looped or normal data

dsx1SendLineCode(2) = sending a request for a line loopback

dsx1SendResetCode(4) = sending a loopback termination request

dsx1SendQRS(5) = sending a Quasi-Random Signal (QRS) test pattern


Circuit Identifier

Use this parameter to set or view the transmission vendor’s circuit identifier.

MIB Object:	dsx1CircuitIdentifier

Settings:	0 - 255


Loopback Configuration

Use this parameter to set or view the DS1 loopback configuration.

Note: Agents supporting read/write access return badValue in response to a request for a loopback state that the interface does not support.

MIB Object:	dsx1LoopbackConfig

Note:  This field is not affected by Save/Restore Configuration.

Settings:	dsx1NoLoop (1) = not in the loopback state.

dsx1PayloadLoop (2) = the signal received at this interface is looped through the device.

dsx1LineLoop (3) = the signal received at this interface is looped back out without passing through the device.

dsx1OtherLoop (4) = other types of loopback


Line Status

Topic information is not yet available.


Signal Mode

Use this parameter to set or view the DS1 signal mode.

MIB Object:	dsx1SignalMode

Settings:	none (1) = no bits are reserved for signaling on this channel.

robbedBit (2) = T1 Robbed Bit  Signaling.

bitOriented (3) = E1 Channel Associated Signaling

messageOriented (4) = Common Channel Signaling is in use on channel 16 of an E1 link or channel 24 of a T1 link.


Transmit Clock Source

Use this parameter to set or view the transmit clock source.

MIB Object:	dsx1TransmitClockSource

Settings:	loopTiming (1) = the recovered receive clock is used as the transmit clock.

localTiming (2) = a local clock source is used as the transmit clock.

throughTiming (3) = the receive clock recovered from another interface is used as the transmit clock.


FAC Data Link

Use this parameter to set or view the facilities data link type.

MIB Object:	dsx1Fdl

Settings:	other (1) = a protocol other than one of the following is used.

dsx1Ansi-T1-403 (2) = the FDL exchange recommended by ANSI.

dsx1Att-54016 (4) = ESF FDL exchanges.

dsx1Fdl-none (8) = the device does not use the FDL.

Topic information is not yet available.


NIC Type

Use this parameter to set or view the T1/E1 interface type.

MIB Object:	usrds1CfgNicCfgType

Settings:	notSupported (1)

longHaul (2)

shortHaul (3)


Response to Remote Loopback

This object configures the selected CSU to either ignore or respond to remotely initiated loopback requests.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgRespToRemoteLoopbk

Settings:	ignore (1)

respond (2)


Jitter Attenuation

This parameter attenuates jitter on either the receiver or transmitter of the selected CSU.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgJitterAttenuation

Settings:	attenJitterOnRcvr (1)

attenJitterOnTxmtr (2)


Transmit Line Build Out

Use this parameter to set the amount of attenuation applied to the transmit signal (in order to

control cross-talk, etc.). Values shown in the enumeration are negative.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgXmitLineBuildOut

Settings:	dB0pt0 (1)

negdB7pt5 (2)

negdB15pt0 (3)

negdB22pt5 (4)


Dial In Address

This parameter determines if MF/DTMF is transferred as part of the call setup for your selected T1 line.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgDialInAdr

Settings:	noAddress(1),

dnis(2),

ani-dnis(3),

ani(4)


Dial In/Out Trunk Start Signal

Use this parameter to set the Dial-in/Dial-out trunk start signal type.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgDialInOutTrunkSt

Settings:	wink (1, default)

immediate (2)

dialTone (3)


Acknowledgement Wink on Dial In
Acknowledgment Wink on Dial In

Use this parameter to enable or disable an acknowledgement wink after the dial-in address information has been received.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgDialInAdrAckWinkEn

Settings:	disabled(1)

enabled(2)


Dial Out Address Delay

Use this parameter to adjust the delay when sending address information from the T1 NAC to the TELCO.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgDialOutAdrDly

Settings:	70 - 3000


Dial In/Out Trunk Type

Use this parameter to set the Dial-In/Dial-out trunk type

MIB Object:	uds1CfgDialInOutTrunkType

Settings:	eAndMTypeII (1, default)

loopStart(2)

groundStart(3)


Primary Switch Type

Use this parameter to set the primary switch type for the T1-PRI ISDN NAC. This setting takes effect at NAC boot time.

Note: There are separate T1 and E1 default values for this parameter.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgPriSwitchType

Settings:	priSw4ESS (1)

priSw5ESS (2, T1 default)

priSwDMS100 (3)

priSwICTR4 (4, E1 default)

priSwVn4 (5)

priSwNI2 (6)

priSwINS1500 (7)

priSwTS014 (8)


Idle Byte Pattern

Use this parameter to set the idle byte pattern for the T1-PRI ISDN NAC. This setting takes effect at NAC boot time.

MIB Object:	uds1CfgIdleByte

Settings:	0 - 255 (254 default)


Tone Type

Use this parameter to set the DS1 Tone type (MF or DTMF).

Note: This parameter affects CHT1 only.

MIB Object:	usrds1CfgToneType

Settings:	notSupported (1)

mf (2)

dtmf (3)


Number of DTMF Tones

Use this parameter to set the DS1 number of DTMF tones.

Note: This parameter affects CHT1 only.

MIB Object:	usrds1CfgNumDtmfTones

Settings:


Receiver Gain

Use this parameter to set the amount of receiver gain that is applied to the received signal at the CSU.

MIB Object:	usrds1CfgRcvGain

Settings:	notSupported (1)

dB12 (2) – T1 Short Haul or E1 Short Haul

dB26 (3) – T1 Long Haul

dB36 (4) – T1 Long Haul

dB43 (5) – E1 Long Haul


Added current info for Reciever Gain to help (LTC 10/16/97)